R E G U L AT I O NS

FOR
ELECTR
IC.L\L INSTALLATIONS
of 5 December 1963
with later amendments

0 Prepared by

THE MINISTRY OF INDUSTRY AND HANDICRAFTSx)

and

THE NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES

AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

pursuant to

ACT RELATING TO SUPERVISION OF

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

of 24 May 1929 with later amendments, cfr.

Royal Decree of 4 July 1929 and delegation
from the Ministry of Industry and Handicrafts:<)
of 6 October 1971.

Published in
Norsk Lovtidend
No. 3/1964 of 23 January 1964
29/1965" 22 September 1965
10/1967 " Hi March 1967
12/1969" 21 May 1969
21/1972" 26 July 1972
10/1976" 27 April 1974

Should doubt arise about the interpretation of the regulations

in this translation, the original regulations in the Norwegian

I
language will be decisive.

x) As from 1.1.1978 The Royal Ministry of Petroleum and Energy

I
j
 SECTION I

GENERAL REGULATIONS

A. Supervision
B. Concession and notification
C. General requirements'
D. Exemptions and penalties
E. Entry into force

0
 CONTENTS

I. GENERAL REGULATIONS
§ 1. Scope
A. Supervision
B. Concession and notification
C. General requirements
D. Exemptions and penalties
E. Entry into force

0 II. TECHNICAL REGULATIONS

A. Definitions
a. Electrical installations
b. Electrical equipment
c. Design and type of enclosure
d. Properties of materials

B. Regulations for light-current installations

·a. General provisions
b. Current-supply equipment
c. Equipment and instruments
d. Indoor installations
e. Outdoor overhead lines
f. Cables (for underground, aerial or marine use)
e. Electric fences

c. Regulations for low-voltage installations

a. General provisions
b. achine installations
c. Transformer installations
d. Accumulator installations

0 e. Capacitor installations
f. Main input and distribution installation
g. Installation equipment and wiring
h. Equipment
i. Installations in various types of accomodation
k. Installations in the open air
1. Special installations

0
m. High-voltage installations connected to
low-voltage mains
I. General provisions
II. Gas-discharge tube lighting installations
III. Oil-fired equipment
IV. Medical X-ray installations
V. Non-medical X-ray installations
D. Regulations for medium-voltage installations
a. General provisions
b. Medium-voltage installations with voltages
up to 440 V and directly earthed neutral point
c. Medium-voltage installations with insulated
neutral point
E. Regulations for high-voltage installations
a. General provisions
b. Machine installations
c. Transformer installations
r
d. Rectifier installations
e. Capacitor installations
f. Apparatus and distribution installations indoors
g. Apparatus and distribution installations out-of-doors
h. Overhead lines ()
j. Safety regulations for high-voltage installations
(The regulations in this section are superseded
by NVE Communication no. 3/78)

F. Regulations for electrical tramway amd railroad

installations (omitted from this translation)

ADDENDA
Act of 19 June 1969 regarding construction
and operation of electrical installations

Act of 24 May 1929 relating to supervision

of electrical installations

Regulations relating t technical training

and education for electrical professions
and trades

Regulations for authorization of electrical

contractors and electricians working as an

C
electrical contractor (omitted from this
translation)

Standard for instructions for electrical

contractors (omitted from this translation)

Provisions regarding the relationship between

public.roads and electrical line installations

Instructions for the local inspection of

()
electrical installations

Accidents caused by electric current

 SECTION I

GENERAL REGULATIONS

Page

C § 1 Scope 6

a. SUPERVISION

§ 2 Supervision . 7
§ 3 The duties of the Electricity Inspectorate

0 §
§
4
5
and their access to the installations
Inspections
Defective construction
.
.
.
7
8
8
§ 6 Defective maintenance . 8
§ 7 Complaint . 9
§ 8 Local inspection : . 9
§ 9 Charge . 9

b. CONCESSION AND NOTIFICATION

§ 11 Concession for electrical installations ... 10

§ 12 Notification of electrical installations .. 10
§ 13 Notification of crossing and adjacent lines 11
1' 14 Exemption from duty to notify . 12
§ 15 Notification of cessation of operation . 12

c. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

§ 21 Competent construction, use and maintenance 13

§ 22 Construction, inspection of materials,
equipment etc.... ....... ... ........... ..... 14
§ 26 Measures to prevent radio interference .... 14
§ 27 Undesirable electrical interference
affecting other equipment 15
c~_ § 28
§ 29
Work which entails interference or d a n g e r .
Safety measures, costs and maintenance ....
16
16

d. EXEMPTIONS AND PENALTIES

§ 31 Dispensations and exemptions . 17

§ 32 Penalties . 17

0 e. ENTRY INTO FORCE

§ 41 Entry into force 18

 6

1. GENERl'.L PROVISIONS.

§ 1. Scope.

These regulations apply to those electrical installations

which are covered by the Act of ?4 M y 1Q29 relating to
Supervision of electrical installations, with the following
exemptions:

a) Electrical installations on board ships, dredgers,

floating cranPs and similar.

b) Electrical installations on hoard mobile drilling

platFonns used for drilling for petroleum in Norwegian
internal waters, in Norwegian territorial waters and
in that part of the continental shelf which is under

c)
NorwPgian sovereignty.

Electrical installations on permanent production

0
platforms, storage installations, liquefaction
installations, oipelines etc. for exploitation of
petroleum in areas mentioned in b).

tions in aircraft.

N o t e :

The Act of 24 May 1929 relating to the supervision of elec-

trical installations covers all e l e c r i c a l installations
except installations for radio-telegra?Y and radio-telephony.

The NVE has laid d o n separate regulations concerning

electrical installations:

a) On board ships, dredges, floating cranes etc.

b) On board mobile drilling platforns, regardless of

nationality, used as mentioned in item b) above.

Survey and supervision of electrical installations on

permanent production platforms etc. are carried out by
the Petroleum Directorate.

Survey of electrical installations in aircraft is carried

out by the D i e c t o r a t e of Aviation.
0
REGULATIONS
FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
ON BOARD
SHIPS, MOBILE DRILLING
PLATFORMS, DREDGERS, FLOATING
CRANES ETC.

are issued separately

0
 7

A. SUPERVISION

I§ 2. Supervision.
The construction, maintenance and operation of electrical
installations are subject to official supervision and
inspection.
Official inspection is undertaken by the Norwegian
Water Resources and Electricity Board (Norwegian abbre-
viation: NVE) with the Electricity Inspectorate as the
executive body.
This supervision does not cover light-current installations,
apart from those parts which cross or come into dangerous

0 proximity to heavy-current installations or parts located

in hazardous areas.

The NVE may, in special cases, give authorization for

special inspections.
Note:

The special inspections are carried out by certain

institutions charged with the inspection of elec-
trical installations falling within their particular
fields. At present, such authorization is given for
the Norwegian State Railways, the Telegraph Office
and the Coastal Directorate.

§ 3. The duties of the Electricity Inspectorate and tr.eir

access to the installations.

The Electricity Inspectorate is required to ensure that

the Regulations laid down for electrical installations
are observed and to inspect all installations which are
subject to notification in order to be satisfied that all
requirements are met. The approval of an installation

0 implies no financial responsibility on the part of the

Electricity Inspectorate, nor does it give the owner of
the installation any right which may be invoked during a
subsequent inspection or during the construction of other
installations.

The Electricity Inspectorate shall at any times have

C
unrestricted access to installations subject to its
inspection.

If so required by the Electricity Inspectorate, the .owner

of the installation or his representative shall be present
during the inspection and shall, where appropriate, point
out alterations made to the installation. The owner must,
in aJdition, furnish the Electricity Inspectorate with all
information which the inspectors may consider necessary
for carrying out adequate inspection and supervision, or
for calculating the charge mentioned i n § 9.
 8

Note:

The duty to notify covers details of accidents, fires,

breakdowns, etc., together with information regarding
electricians, engineers, etc., and data required for
statistical purposes.

§ 4. Inspections.

The Electricity Inspectorate shall inspect installations

to the extent and at intervals determined from time to
time by NVE.

§ 5. Defective construction.

Should the Electricity Inspectorate find that an electrical()

installation subject to inspection, or any individual part
of that installation, has not been constructed in a proper
manner or in accordance with the prevailing regulations,
it is empowered to forbid further work and to require that
the work already carried out be modified, repeated and set
to rights. The same applies where an installation has not
been constructed in accordance with the plan specified in
the authorization (if such was required), or with the
conditions contained in such autorization in respect
of the technical details of the installation.

§ 6. Defective maintenance.

Where an electrical installation subject to inspection

contains any part which is poorly or defectively main-
tained, or is in such a condition that in the opinion of
the Electricity Inspectorate it constitutes a danger to
life or property, the Inspectorate may require that such
installation shall at once cease to be operated and that
it shall be put into a proper state, or removed.

Wher-e an electrical installation falling under the fore- 0

going paragraph gives rise to inconvenient electrical
interference, the Electricity Inspectorate may require
that it be immediately put into such a condition as to
eliminate that interference as far as possible.

Should a request made under either of the two foregoing (

paragraphs not receive immediate attention, the Electricity_,,
Inspectorate may cause the necessary work to be carried
out at the Owner's expense. An official claim for the
reimbursement of expenses in this connection carries the
same rights of distraint in respect of the installation
as do taxes in respect of real estate and it can be
enforced in the same manner.
 9

§ 7. Complaint.

Any complaint or prohibition issued by the Electricity

Inspectorate must, in order to be valid, be made in
writing or by telegram.

A complaint may be raised before the Ministry of Industry

against decisions -made by the NVE or by the Electricity
Inspectorate in respect of the provisions contained in
these Regulations. Such a complaint can have a delaying
effect, but the authority which made the decision may
order that its decision be given immediate effect, where
this is found to be necessary.

§ 8. Local I n s p e c t i o n .
0 NVE may decide that the owners of certain electrical
supply networks themselves have the duty of carrying
out inspections of the electrical installations con-
nected thereto. This local inspection is subject to
the control of the Electricity Inspectorate. In other
respects the same pr.ovisions apply to the Local Inspec-
tions as are laid down i n § § 2 - 7 in the present Regu-
lations with regard to the Electricity Inspectorate.
However, an order to put an installation out of opera-
tion or to remove it (§ 6, first section) shall only
be given by the Electricity Inspectorate and an identity
card for the local inspector is to be issued by the
owner (The Board) of the installation concerned.

§ 9. Char q e ,

A charge for the inspection carried out by the Electricity

Inspectorate is payable to the Treasury in accordance with
a scale determined by the Crown. This scale also regula-
tes when and by whom such a charge shall be paid. No
charge is payable in connection with light-current instal-
lations.

0 If the charge is not paid by the due date, interest at 6%

per annum will be added. This charge carries the same
rights of distraint in respect of the installation as do
taxes in respect of real estate and it can be enforced in
the same manner.

C
The special expenses incurred by the Electricity Inspec-
torate (or by local inspectors) in connection with the
issuing of instructions specified i n § 6, section 2, for
the benefit of the Telegraph Office, shall be refunded by
the Telegraph Office in accordance with NVE provisions.
 10
B. CONCESSION AND NOTIFICATION

§ 11. Concession for electrical installations.

Concession from the NVE is required for the construction

and the operation of installations for the generation,
transmission and distribution of electrical power at
high-voltage.

For the construction or the operation of nationally owned

electrical installations, no such concession is required,
but permission from the NVE is required.
c
Application for concession or such permission must be
forwarded to the NVE. A copy of the application must also
be forwarded to the Electricity Inspectorate in the district
in which the major part of the installation will be
situated.
0
Permission from the Electricity Inspectorate is required
before the installation is put into operation. The
Electricity Insoectorate must be notified in good time of
the date on which it is desired to put the installation
into operation.

N o t e :

Attention is drawn to the Act of 19 June 1969 no. 65 -

VII, Royal Decree of 15 January 1971 and authorization
of 20 January 1971 from thø Ministry of Industry and
Handicrafts to the NVE.

For the nationally owned installations the same considera-

tions are required to be taken as for installations for
which concession is necessary. See the Royal Decree of
15 January 1971.

The NVE has laid down that the Act of 19 June 1969 no. 65 -
VII applies only to installations wi!h a voltage above
1000 volts a.c. or above 1500 volts d.c.

Concerning information, maps and other documents which

0
must be enclosed with application, attention is drawn to
the "Guidance aook" issued by the NVE.

Attention is also drawn to the Act of 23 October 1959

relatin9 to expropriation of real estate (the Expropria- n
tion Law). \_j
§ 12. Notification of electrical installations.

Electrical installations subject to supervision are, before

the installation is commenced, to be notified by the owner
and the electrical contractor to the Electricity Insoectorate
in the district in which the major part of the installation
 11

will be situated, unless the installation is subject to

inspection by the Local Inspection. In the latter case
the Local Inspection are to be notified.

Upon completion, installations are again to be notified

by the owner and the electrical contractor, and are not
to be put into operation until the Electricity Inspectorate
or the Local Inspection has given permission.

Extensions and alterations to low- and medium-voltage instal-

lations are, as a rule, to be notified together with annual
reports. Extensions and alterations to domestic installa-
tions etc. normally need be notified only when completed
but if requested may also need be notified in advance.

Forms of notification are available from the Electricitv

Inspectorate or the Local Inspection. For exemptions from
notification, s e e § 14.

N o t e :

Certain high-voltage installations connected to low- or

medium voltage systems, such as fluorescent lighting
installations, X-ray installations, oil-firing instal-
lations, voltage-test installations, distribution cables
for power supply for special purposes etc. are considered
as a part of the low- or medium-voltage system and are to
be noti;ied to the Local Inspection.

§ 13. Notification of crossing and adjacent lines.

Where an electric heavy-current or light-current line or

cable crosses a public road, street, railway, canal,
navigable waterway, harbour, water, public or private
electric line, cable, cable-way or track, or is laid so
close to such roads, etc. that damage to the line (cable)
or its supports or any other occurrence which may involve
danger or inconvenience to traffic, including air transport,
or interference with the operation of existing installations,

C work on this part of the installation may not be commenced

without the permission of the appropriate public authority
or unless the owner of the existing line, cable, cable-way
or track has had an opportunity to express his views regarding
the crossing or the adjacent siting of the line. A decision
from the appropriate public authority, together with the views
of the owners of other installations, shall be made available

C within four weeks of application. The safety measures to be

taken shall be determined by the Electricity Inspectorate.
Where public roads are concerned, attention is d a w n to the
provisions laid down in the Ministry of Larbour Circular dated
5 December 1935.

Where a high-voltage line is laid out-of-doors in such proximity

to an existing light-current line that inconvenient electrical
interference may affect the operation of the light-current·
installation, the owner of the high-voltage installation shall
submit, together with his application for permission, a descrip-
tion with sketch-map showing the line and its adjacent siting
 12

and shall, in addition, provide such details as are needed

to decide the extent to which the proposed siting can be
permitted. Such permission does not exclude the possible
application o f § 27.

Decisions under this paragraph may form the subject of appeals

to the Ministry o Industry and Handicrafts, through NVE.

In the case of canals, navigable waterways, harbours or water

subject to laws relating to harbours, the provisions of such
C)
laws in regard to appeals shall apply.

§ 14. Exemption from duty to notify.

I
The following installations are exempt from the duty to notify
when not located in hazardous areas:

Light current installations ( s e e § 101). Concerning

n
notification of crossings etc. s e e § 13.

Low voltage installations with an operating voltage

not above 42 Volts.

Electrically propelled vehicles and small boats.

I Ignition equipment for combustion engines and similar

equipment.

§ 15. Notification of cessation of operation.

Where an installation ceases to operate for any considerable

length of time or is dismantled, the owner shall immediately
report this to the Electricity Inspectorate. Operation may
not be recommenced until the Electricity Inspectorate has
given permission.

0
 13

C. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

§ 21. Competent construction, use and maintenance.

Every installation shall be constructed in a competent

fashion and so arranged that it does not have an
unnecessarily detrimental effect upon its surroundings.
C The construction, modification and repair of heavy-current
installations which are subject to notification shall be
carried out only by competent persons who satisfy the
officially prescribed requirements contained in orders
issued pursuant to law. Owners and users of electrical
installations have the duty of ensuring that those installa-
tions are properly maintained and inspected and are at all
0 times in a condition which satisfies these Regulations.

Care shall be exercised when installations and equipment are

in use to ensure that no danger is created to life or property.

N o t e :

The above paragraph was presented in draft form to the

State A;torney for his opinion with special reference
to the question of increasing the responsibility of
the owner or user.

The State Attorney's reply to NVE dated 2J February 1952

reads: "I consider it somewhat doubtful whether a regu-
lation of this kind will have sufficient justification
where inspection is concerned. As the draft regulation
is phrased, it would appear that an owner or user of
electrical installations can be punished under it if
proof is brought that he has neglected his duty in regard
to maintenance and inspection with the result that the
installation is not in the condition required by the

0 regulations, as also if use has been made of overloaded

fuses. This liability to punishment will however, ex-
pressed as it is in general terms, require the prosecu-
ting authority to bring proof that neglect in a single
instance can be interpreted as negligent conduct on the
part of the owner. Responsibility cannot be presumed
unless there has been actual personal blame, and it would

C in any case conflict with a fundamental principle of our

penal law if such a view of responsibility were introduced.
We must therefore anticipate that an owner or user will
still be acquitted in an individual case if an employee
of the firm has used an overloaded fuse. The decisive
point is whether the court accepts that the owner or
manager in charge took adequate steps to inspect the
installation, to institute regular supervision and to
ensure that the workers knew their instructions, as also
to explain any points in those instructions which were.
not clear. I consider, nevertheless, that this new draft
regulation will help in making the responsibility clear
and for my own part have no comments to make regarding
the phrasing of the regulation in question."
 14
§ 22. Construction, inspection of materials, equipment etc.

.1 Whoever manufactures, offers for sale or sells electric

equipment and materials, as assemblies or as single com-
ponents, has the duty to ensure that the construction
and the information given by marking, by installation
instructions and such like, complies with Regulations
for Electrical Installations and provisions given pur-
suant to these regulations.

N o t e :

The requirement of being in compliance with Regulations

f o r Electrical Installations etc. will normally be con-
C
sidered fulfilled by compliance with Norwegian testing
regulations or standards. Where such are not laid down,
or Regulations for Electrical Installations are not ade-
quate, other equivalent regulations or standards may be

0
used as a guide, possibly with modifications.

To make sure that equipment, materials etc. and also

installation instructions and similar meet the require-
ments, tr.e makers, importers and suppliers should carry
out testing or other examinations themselves or by using
other professional services.

.2 Appliances and equipment which is subject to inspection in

accordance with the Act of 24 May 1929 may not be offered
for sale, installed or used before the kind or type in
question has been inspected and approved by the Norwegian
Board for Testing and Approval of Electrical Equipment
(NEMKO).

N o t e :

A list of appliances and equipment which has been approved

will be found in the NEMKO Approvals List. For further
information, refer to the NEMKO specifications for types
of appliances and equipment subject to inspection.

§ 26. Measures to prevent radio interference

Electrical installations shall be laid out, ooerated and

maintained in such a manner that inconvenient-electrical
Q
interference affecting radio installations is as far as
possible avoided.

Where an electrical installation gives rise to interference,

the Electricity Inspectorate may order the owner or user of
that installation (the noise source) to take such measures
as the Telegraph Office considers necessary in order to
Q
eliminate the interference.

Steps shall, however, be taken to ensure that the owner or

user of the radio installation affected by interference,
regardless of when it was put into ooeration, has in regard
to his own installation taken those measures which the Tele-
graph Office considers necessary in order to obviate inter-
ference.
 15

The Electricity Inspectorate may order that electrical instal-

lations, parts of installations or equipment which interfere
with broadcast reception shall not be used or operated during
certain periods of the day or night if the interference cannot
be eliminated by other means. In this connection, attention
shall be paid to the question of whether the owner or user
suffers inconvenience or unreasonable loss.
Where an owner or user of an electrical installation which
(' is causing radio interference has put the installation, or
u a part of it, into use after 2 April 1935, he has the duty
of himself causing to be carried out and paying for such
measures as the Electricity Inspectorate may order.

In the case of interference being caused by an installation

or a part of an installation put into use before the above-
named date, the owner or user cannot be compelled to pay
G for the work, but he must cause to be carried out those
measures which the Electricity Inspectorate may order, pro-
vided that the costs are met by others. He cannot, however,
be caused to carry out measures which, in the opinion of
the Electricity Inspectorate, will significantly reduce the
usefulness of the installation to him. Expenses in respect
of maintenance and periodic replacement which the measures
involve shall be borne by the owner or user of the installa-
tion.
An appeal may be raised before one or more experts nominated
by the Ministry of Industry against an order issued by the
Electricity Inspectorate regarding measures to be taken in
the case of an installation causing interference, as also
against the Inspectorate's decision on the extent to which
the usefulness of an electrical installation has been reduced
by the measures ordered. Costs in respect of the decisions
reached shall be determined by the Ministry, which shall
also decide by whom they shall be payable.

§ 27. Undesirable electrical interference affecting other equipment

Electrical installations shall be laid out, operated and main-

tained in such a manner that undesirable electrical interfer-
ence affecting the operation of other electrical installations
is as far as possible avoided.

Where it is found that an electrical installation is causing

undesirable electrical interference which affects an existing
electrical installation, the owner of the more recently con-
structed installation must take such measures as will elimi-
nate the interference. If the interference is due, to a
greater or less extent, to defects or imperfections in the
existing installation, such defects or imperfections must
first be put to rights by the owner of that installation.

In the case of single-wire telephone installations sanctioned

before 1 January 1920, the fact that the system is of the
single-wire type is not to be regarded as an imperfection.
 16

The owners of new single-wire installations and extensions

to older such installations effected after that date must
themselves bear·any inconvenience resulting from this system.
In case of dispute. one or more experts nominated by the
Ministry of Industry shall decide whether an electrical
installation is causing interference affecting another elec-
trical installation or whether the interference is due to
defects in the latter installation.

It is, however, for the Telegraph Office to decide the extent f'
to which interference experienced in a light-current instal- \._
lation is due to defects in the installation itself. Costs
in respect of the decision reached shall be determined by the
Ministry, which shall also decide who shall pay them.

§ 28. Work which entaiZs interference or danger

Where work is carried out on an electrical installation which

may entail interference affecting other electrical installa-
n
tions or danger to all the installations concerned, owners of
the other installations shall be warned in good time of the
commencement of that work.

Where one of the installations carries high-voltage current,

the safety measures considered appropriate in each case shall
be approved by the Electricity Inspectorate (see also Opera-
tion Regulations for High-Voltage Installations).

§ 2:1. Safety measures, costs and maintenance

Unless otherwise determined beforehand, the owner of an instal-

lation (e.g. power-line installation, railway, road, telegraph
line, cable-way, etc.) which is constructed in dangerous proxi-
mity to an existing electrical installation will be required
to bear the cost of the necessary safety measures of both in-
stallations.

The maintenance and repair of safety fittings applied to an

installation shall be ensured by the owner of the installation
himself where no other agreement has been made between the
parties concerned.
n
\.__;

(J
 17

D. EXEMPTIONS AND PENALTIES.

I§ 31. Dispensations and exemptions.

I The NVE may permit dispensations and exemptions.

Applications in this sense shall be submitted in

duplicate through the Electricity Insoectorate.
C In particular circumstances NVE may order the taking of
measures not specified in these Regulations.

§ 32. Penalties.
Failure to obey these Regulations or an order or prohi-
bition made in pursuance of them shall be punished with
penalties in accordance with the general civil Penal
C o d e § 339 unless more severe punishment is appropriate
under other provisions of the law.

No t e :

Extract from Penal Code:

Paragraph 339:
A fine s h a l l be imposed on w h o m s o e v e r shall:
1. F a i l to provide information or explanation r e q u i r e d
by the law to a public authority, or
2. T r a n s g r e s s a n y R e g u l a t i o n issued by a public
a u t h o r i t y in accordance w i t h the law.

Paragraph 352:
A fine or i m p r i s o n m e n t of up to three months s h a l l be
i m p o s e d on w h o m s o e v e r s h a l l , b e i n g c o n c e r n e d in the
m a n u f a c t u r e , u s e , k e e p i n g or h a n d l i n g of explosives,
f i r e a r m s , m a c h i n e s , b o i l e r s , e l e c t r i c a l powerlines or

0
o t h e r t h i n g s , be g u i l t y of careless c o n d u c t likely to
c a u s e d a n g e r to the life or health of o t h e r s or
c o n t r i b u t i n g thereto.
The same p e n a l t y s h a l l be incurred by whomsoever s h a l l
c a u s e d a n g e r of an o u t b r e a k of fire by the careless
h a n d l i n g of f i r e or c o m b u s t i b l e materials or s h a l l
transgress R e g u l a t i o n s g o v e r n i n g precautions a g a i n s t

0 o u t b r e a k s of fire or e x p l o s i o n s or s i m i l a r Regulatir
m a d e under the law or in pursuance thereof.
 18
E. ENTRY INTO FORCE

§ 41. n t r y into force.

These Regulations enter into force 1 February 1964.

New installations shall be constructed, maintained and

operated in accordance with these Regulations, and the
same shall also be observed in connection with extensions,
L
modification and repair of older installations. The
Operating Regulations for high-voltage installations shall,
however, be observed in connection with both new and older
high-voltage installations.

In addition, NVE may order that certain provisions contained (\

in the Regulations which are of particular importance for )
public safety shall also be observed in connection with
older installations.

0
C
SECTION II

TECHNICAL REGULATIONS

A. Definitions
B. Regulations for light-current installations
C. Regulations for low-voltage installations
D. Regulations for medium-voltage installations
E. Regulations for high-voltage installations
F. Regulations for electrical tramway and railroad
installations (omitted from this translation)

0
 SECTION !IA
D E F I N I T I 0 N S

(a) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS Page

§ 101. Light-current installations 21

§ 102. Heavy-current installations 22
§ 103. Low-voltage installations 22
§ 104. High-voltage installations 22
§ 105. Medium-voltage installations 22
§ 106. Voltage limits 23
§ 108. Reduced voltage 23
§ 109. Contact voltage
0
23
§ ll0. Exposed parts 23
§ lll. Protective earthing 23
§ ll2. Guard and safety-wires 23
§ ll3. Wires, cables etc. 24
{b) ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
§ ll6. Definitions. Types of insulation, Classes
of apparatus, Tupes of equipment 25
§ ll7. Low temperature, high temperature 26
(c) DESIGN AND TYPE OF ENCLOSURE

§ 121. Approved design 27

§ 122. Open equipment 27
§ 123. Ordinary equipment 27
§ 124. Drip-proof equipment 27
§ 125. Splash-proof e u i p m e n t 27
§ 126. Enclosed equipment 28
§ 127. Hatertight equiJ;>lllent 28
§ 129. Increased safetv apoaratus 28
§ 130. Pressurised enclosure 28
§ 131. Flameproof enclosure 29
§ 13 2. Intrinsic safety 29
§ 13 3. Interlockin<J 29
§ 134. Contact-safe_design 30
§ 135. Strain relief 30

(dl PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS

§ 141. Insulating materials 31

§
§
§
142.
143.
144.
Moisture-proof materials
Anti-tracking materials
Heat-resistant materials
31
31
31
0
§ 145. Corrosion-resistant materials 31
§ 146. Weather- and acid-proof (resistant) materials 31
 21

SECTION!IA
(A) ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

§ 101. Light-current installations.

Light-current installations (Section IIB) are understood

C to be installations in which the electricity is used

exclusively for the conveyance of sound, images, drawings,
writings, figures, signals and the like, together with
installations which operate on so low a current or voltage
that the installations cannot entail danger to life or
property. In doubtful cases the decision lies with the
Electricity Inspectorate.

0 N o t e :

The expression "operate on" used in the latter part

of this paragraph is understood to apply to installa-
tions which produce, transform, transmit or use elec-
tricity of such voltage or amperage that it cannot
cause danger to persons or property.

This definition is of great importance in the correct

choice of equipment and apparatus in accordance with
the safety Regulations. When deciding which regula-
tions apply to an installation it is therefore not
solely the value of the voltage or amperage which is
decisive, but first and foremost, the degree of danger
entailed by the installation.

An installation must be treated as a heavy-current

installation, even though the voltage is very low, if
the power carried by that voltage is so great that the
current, for example, in the event of a short-circuit
in the installation, can result in a dangerous rise in
temperature or powerful arcing. As examples of the
kind of installation in question may be mentioned servo-
motor installations, hand-lamps and hand-tools connected
0 to low-voltage mains via transformers or convertors,
electroplating installations and lighting or small power
installations connected to wind-driven generators and
accumulators. The heavy-current Regulations also apply
to the commonly used small installations which obtain
their current from a small wind generator with a vol-
tage of 12-24 V. The same applies to small generators
0 driven by an internal-combustion engine. Installations
of all these types must satisfy the low-voltage Regula-
tions, but need not be notified if the voltage is less
than 42 V.

On the other hand, an installation whose normal voltage

is high, may be considered as a light-current installa-
tion if its power is so small that it does not c o n s i -
tute an effective danger to its surroundings. Installa-
tions of this kind include certain installations for
telephony, signalling and the like, even if they ( a s
is often the case) operate at voltages of 100 V and
over. For telecommunication installations using high
 22

voltages which may be dangerous to their surroundings,

attention is drawn to Telegraph Office Regulations.

As these examples indicate, the application of this

definition in practice may be attended with difficul-
ties.

As regards electrical installations in hazardous areas,

s e e § § 14 and 495 (NVE Communication 1/77).

§ 102. Heavy-current installations.

Heavy-current installations are understood to be all

electrical installations which cannot in terms o f § 101
be considered light-current installations.

N o t e :

Electrical installation components connected to low-

voltage a i n s vio transformers or convertore, and
electrical installations connected to wind generators,
count as heavy-current installations in so far as the
installation cannot be regarded as a light-current
installation in accordance with the definition in
§ 101. Hand-lamps and hand tools and the like, con-
nected to low-voltage installations via transformers
or convertors, therefore fall under the regulations
for heavy-current installations (see also Note to
§ 101).
§ 103. Low-voltage installations.
Low-voltage installations are understood to be heavy-
current installations using voltages up to 250 Volts A.C
or 500 Volts D.C. (see Section IIC), for tram and trail-
way construction up to 800 Volts D.C. (see Section IIFa).

§ 104. High-voltage installations.

0
High-voltage installations are heavy-current installa-
tions with a voltage higher than 1000 Volts A.C. or
higher than 1500 Volts D.C. (see Section IIE).

§ 105. Medium-voltage installations.

Medium-voltage installations are heavy-current installa-

0
tions with a voltage higher than 250 Volts but not exceed-
ing 1000 Volts A.C. or higher than 500 Volts, but not
exceeding 1500 Volts D.C. (see Section IID).
 23

§ 106. Voltage limits.

The voltage limits stated i n § § 103-105 apply with a

tolerance of 10%.

§ 108. Reduced voltage.

By reduced voltage is understood an operating voltage

not over 42 V which is stepped down by means of a
protective transformer or converter with separate
windings in which the secondary winding is not earthed.

§ 109. Contact voltage.

0 By contact voltage is understood the voltage to which a

person can be exposed while simultaneously in contact
with earth or an earthed object and an exposed part of
the installation which by reason of defect has made
connection with live parts.

§ 110. Exposed parts.

By exposed installation part (exposed part) is understood

a conductive constructional component which is accessible
to contact and normally not live, but which is so con-
structed or sited that in the event of a failure of
insulation it may attain a voltage to other conductive
objects which are connected to earth. (Contact voltage,
s e e § 109). Parts which are protected by extra insulation
are not, however, regarded as exposed parts.

§ 111. Protective earthing.

a. By protective earthing is understood a permanent

conductive connection between exposed installation
parts and earth or other conductive objects which
0 themselves hav a good earth connection ( s e e § 409).
N o t e :

The earthing shall be so good that the earthed instal-

lation part cannot attain an impermissible contact

u
voltage ( s e e § § 109 and 406).

b. By operational earthing is understood a good conductive

connection between the operational circuit of an instal-
lation and earth ( s e e § § 412 and 612).

·§ 1 1 2 . Guard- and safety-wires.

By guard-wire is understood a wire above and parallel to

the lowest set of lines of an overhead line crossing for
the purpose of contacting a falling line.
 24

By safety-wire is understood a wire below and parallel

to the uppermost set of lines to provide protection
against an upward-swinging line.

§ 113. Wires, cabZes etc. Definitions:

a. A conductor is a material having a low specific

resistance, or an object consisting of such material
and designed f.or transmission of electric current.
b. A wire is a solid conductor formed as a wire or as
C
part of a stranded conductor.

c. A lead or core is an insulated or uninsulated single

or stranded conductor, or combination of several
such conductors.

d. A cable is one or more insulated conductors or cores

surrounded by a common protective sheath.

e. A line is a stranded uninsulated conductor.

0
 25

(B) ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

§ 116. Definitions.

Types of insulation:
Working insulation (basic insulation) is insulation
which is necessary for the satisfactory operation of

G the installation and which constitutes the actual pro-

tection against electric shock.

Protective insulation (supplementary insulation) is

independent insulation which is applied in addition to
the working insulation to prevent electric shock in the
event of a fault in the working insulation. Insulating

n sheathing may be made as, and form part of, protective

insulation.

Double insulation is insulation which consists of both

working insulation and protective insulation.

Reinforced insulation is improved working insulation

having such mechanical and electrical properties that
it gives equally good protection against electric shock
as does double insulation. Insulating sheathing may be
made as, and form part of, reinforced insulation.

Extra insulation is either double insulation or rein-

forced insulation, or a combination of the two.

Classes of apparatus:
Class O apparatus is apparatus which is only made with
working insulation, and is not designed for earthing.

Class I apparatus is apparatus having working insulation

and so designed that it can be connected to earth.

Class II apparatus is apparatus having extra insulation

and so designed that it cannot be connected to earth.

0 Class III apparatus is apparatus

to reduced voltage.
designed for connection

Types of equipment:
Stationary equipment is equipment which is not made to
be moved from one position to another during normal use.
0 Fixed equipment is stationary equipment which is fixed
to a support and permanently connected to an electricity
supply.

Portable equipment is equipment which is either moved

during use or which can readily be moved from one place
to another during normal use, i.e. by connection to an
electricity supply using a flexible cord or cable.
 26

N o t e :

Examples:
Vaauum aleaners, flat-irons, soldering irons and
hand-drills are portable equipment.

Stoves, large eleatria offiae maahines, refrigera-

tors eta. are stationary equipment.

Apparatus whiah is approved as extra-insulated

apparatus (Class II) shall bear the mark
C
Metal parts of Class II equipment shall not be
earthed.

Reinforaed insulation is used only where double

insulation aannot be used for praatiaal reasons,
e.g. apparatus aontaats, switahes, aonneating
aontaats eta.

§ 117. Low temperature, high temperature.

Class L heating appliances are heating appliances which

attain a surface temperature up to 1so0c.

Class H heating appliances are heating appliances which

attain a surface temperature in excess of 1S0°c.

()
 7

27

C. DESIGN AND TYPE OF ENCLOSURE.

DEFINITIONS.

§ 121. Approved design.

An approved design is a design the use of which is

permitted by the. Electricity Inspectorate or the local
inspection authority. quipment and apparatus which

C is subject to compulsory inspection shall, in addition,

be approved by the Norwegian Board for Testing and
Approval of Electric Equipment (NEMKO).

§ 122. Open equipment.

Open equipment is equipment in which live parts are

0 either not enclosed or are covered by an enclosure
which does not give sufficient protection against
accidental contact.

§ 123. Ordinary equipment.

Ordinary equipment is equipment which is contained in

an enclosure which is designed to give protection
against accidental contact with live parts.

§ 124. Drip-proof equipment.

A drip-proof enclosure is one designed to give protec-

tion against rain or water dripping.

N o t e :

Protection against dripping means that the enclosure

must be able to withstand a prescribed "rain test"
Such as that described in IEC l44.

§ 125. Splash-proof equipment.

0 A splash-proof tnclosure is one designed to give pro-

tection both against dripping and against water splash-
ing from the side or from below.

N o t e :

0
Protection against dripping and splashing from the
side or from below means that the enclosure must
be able to withstand both a prescribed "rain-test"
and a prescribed test for splashing, as described
in IEC 144, but need not withstand a direct flow
of water.
 28

§ 126. Enclosed equipment.

An enclosed enclosure is one which, apart from being

designed as splash-proof, is also designed to provide
protection against penetration or ordinary dust.

N o t e :

Protection against the penetration of ordinary

dust means that the enclosure must be able to
C
withstand a prescribed sealing test against dust,
as described in IEC l44, but it does not require
complete proofing against very fine dust.

§ 127. Watertight equipment.

A watertight enclosure is one designed to give protec-

tion against the penetration of moisture and the more
0
severe effects of dust.

N o t e :

Protection against the penetration of moisture and

dust means that the enclosure must be able to with-
stand a prescribed test ( b y submersion in water nr
by some other appointed sealing test). A sealed
enclosure can, if necessary, have a outlet for con-
densation.

§ 129. Increased safety apparatus, type of protection "e".

A method of protection in which additional measures are

applied, so as to give increased security against the
possibility of excessive temperatures and the occurance
of arcs or sparks in and at apparatus which does not
produce arcs or sparks in normal service.

Increased safety apparatus is designated E x e .

N o t e :

The English designation is "Increased safety".

0
The German designation is "Erh6hte Sicherheit".
The French designation is "S•curit• augment,e".

§ 130.
0
Pressurized enclosure.

An enclosure for electrical apparatus in which the entry

of flammable gas or vapour is prevented by maintaining
the air, an inert gas or other suitable gas which is non-
flammable and which does not support combustion more
readily than air, within the enclosure at a pressure
above that of the external atmosphere.

A pressurized enclosure is designated E x p .

 29
N o t e :

The English designation is "Pressurized enclosure".

The German designation is "Uberdruckkaoselung".
The French designation is "Enveloppe J surpression
interne".

The term pressurized enclosure does not include appa-

ratus with an internal source of flammable gases or
vapours. Requirements/standards for such apparatus
0 are under consideration. (See also NVE Communication
1/77.)

§ 131. Flameproof enclosure.

An enclosure for electrical apparatus that will withstand

an internal explosion of the flammable gas or vapour
which may enter it, without suffering damage and without
communicating the internal flammation to the external
flammable gas or vapour for which it is designed, through
any joints or structural openings in the enclosure.

Flameproof enclosure is designated Ex d.

N o t e :
The English desiJnc:tion ,:s "Flameproof er.closure".
(The corresponding American expression is "Explosion-
proof apparatus".)
The German designation is "Druckfeste Kapselung".
The French designation is "Enveloppe antidfflagrante".

§ 132. Intrinsic safety.

A circuit in which any spark or thermal effect produced
normally (that is, by breaking or closing the circuit)
or accidentally (for example, by short-circuit or earth
fault) is incapable, under prescribed test conditions,
of causing ignition of a prescribed gas or vapour.
(See also NVE Communication 1/77.)

§ 133. Interlocking.

Interlocking is an electrical and/or mechanical arrange-

ment such that connection or disconnection can only be
made dependent on a preceding operation.

0 N o t e :
An interlocked socket-outlet is a socket-outlet with
a built-in switch which cannot make contact if the
plug is disengaged, and so that the plug cannot be
pulled out while the built-in switch is closed.
 30
Interiocking of high-voitage rooms, iarge washing
machines and centrifuges, starting apparatus etc.
is considered as biocked design.

§ 134. Contact-safe design.

A contact-safe design is a connection that prevents

the contact pressure being reduced by vibration change
in temperature or other stresses than can arise during
operation. 0
N o t e :

Contacts fitted with iock-nuts or other simiiar

n
devices are not considered contact-safe. Contact
screws fitted with a spiit pin, a nut iocking de-
vice, spirai spring washers or soidered and weided
connections are considered as contact-safe.

§ 135. Strain reiief.

By strain-relief is meant a device that prevents strain

or torsional effects upon a flexible cable or cord being
transmitted to the current carrying conductors of the
cable or cord.

n
 31
D. PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS. DEFINITIONS.

§ 141. Insulating materials.

An insulating material is a material that is not elec-

trically conductive at the humidity, temperature or
other operational stresses for which the material is
intended.

C § 142. Moisture-proof materials (moisture-resistant).

A moisture-proof material is an insulating material

that is not hygroscopic or porous and which retains
its shape, insulation resistance and safety against

n break-down or flash-over at the humidity, tempera-

ture or other operational stresses for which the
material is intended.

§ 143. Anti-tracking materials.

Anti-tracking material is an insulating material which

does not, when used under the conditions for which it
was designed, allow surface tracking between the live
parts which it is being used to insulate.

§ 144. Heat-resistant materials.

A heat-resistant material is a material which, at the

humidity, temperature or other operational stresses for
which it was designed, retains its shape and mechanical
properties. For electrical insulating materials this
includes the retention of insulation resistance to
prevent flashover or breakdown.

§ 145. Co1•rosion-resiotant a t e r i a l s .

A corrosion-resistant material is a material which re-

0 tains its structure and shape and does not change its
properties under the operational chemical stresses for
which it is intended, such as damp air, corrosive gases
or liquids.

§ 146. Weather- and acid-proof (resistant) materials

0 Weather-proof and acid-proof insulations are those

materials which: -

a. retain their insulating properties and security

against break-down under the operational, chemical
and climatic stresses for which they are intended,
for example salt-containing air, sun, heat, frost,
corrosive liquids or gases,
 32

b. are protected by a material or process (for example

impregnation) that is sufficiently resistant to the
operational; chemical and climatic stresses for which
it is intended.

0
 ·" ...
\•;i:t,&,-( '::1S•'..•t ••,
- f.c Ål·· •
',· -
:.... : ,..,
t.y

SECTION II B

.
.,.
·
a.
b.
c. Equipment and instruments

d. Indoor installation

e. Outdoor overhead lines

:
f. Cables (for underground, aerial or marine use)

g. Electric fences

•·
 SECTION I1B
REGULATIONS FOR

GENERAL PROVISIONS

§ 201. Scooe
----,
4 \___J
§ 202. Competent construction 4
§ 203. General requirements 4
§ 207. Earthing 4
I -r .-..! -
CURRENT-SUPPLY EQUIPMENT

§ 220.
§ 222.
Transformers
Convertors
8
8 G
§ 225. Accumulators 8

EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTS

§ 231. Electrotechnical re
§ 232. Mechanical requirem
§ 233. Requirement for spe
§ 234. Protective arrangem

INDOOR INSTALLATION

§ 251. Insulation of lines and cables 12

§ 252. Fixina 12
§ 253. Protection against mechanical damage 13
§ 254. Connections 14
§ 255. Marking 14
§ 260. Distance from other light-current wires 15
§ 261. Distallfe from low-voltage wires 15
§ 262. Distance from high-voltage lines 15
§ 266. Installation of low-voltage equipment 16
§ 286.
0
Installations under different types of
conditions 16
§ 288. Dry rooms 17
§ 289. Dirty rooms 17
§ 290. Damp rooms 17
§ 291. Wet rooms 17
§ 292. Corrosive areas 18
§ 294. Fire-risk rooms 18
§ 295. Explosion-risk rooms 18 ()
\ /

OUTDOOR OVERHEAD LINES

§ 311. Overhead line materials.

§ 312. Siting of lines
§ 313. Crossing of light-current
§ 316. Crossing of other lines
§ 318. Crossing of public roads
§ 319. Crossing of railways
 Page

§ 320. Crossing of aerial ropeways etc. 29

§ 322. Adjacent siting of light-current lines 29
§ 323. Adjacent si ting of other. li.nes 29
§ 325. Proximity £0 and crossi,ng of bu I Ld Lnq s .• 31
§ 326. Carrier-frequency communication on low-
voltage lines 31
§ 327. Carrier-frequency communication on high-
voltage lines 32
§ 330. Unused lines 32
§ 337. Protective devices 32

f. CABLES (FOR UNDERGROUND, AREIAL OR MARINE USE)

§ 371. Mechanical protecti,on 39

§ 372. Electrotechnical requirements 39
§ 379. Crossing and adjacent siting underground 40
§ 380. Crossing and adjacent siting under the sea 40

g. ELECTRIC FENCES

§ 391. General requirements 42

§ 392. Mains-operated equipment 42
§ 393. Battery-operated equipment 43

0
 ,.- ....,.. 1'..- Jf r • ..,... 't' .,. '"!" °"'!..:. ...,._ .,-:....;

• t \... ./j- ..
· - -,:._,.,....:...,....,.
- t.,,_ ...... . · --
4

SECTION I I B
REGUCATIONS FOR LIGHT-CURRENT INSTALLATIONS

...... · """f. P.
a. GENERAL PROVISIONS
.. . ' ..,
I" •

§ 201.

The regulations for light-current instaLlations cover 1 i h t : -

current installa,tions as defined in § 101. Light-current
L
installations which are connected to heavy-current instal-
lations through a transformer having separate windings are also
covered by the regulations for light-current installations.

Light-current installations connected to heavy-current in-

stallations by other means are covered by the regulations
Q
for heavy-current installations.

Radio installations are not covered by the technical regu-

lations for electrical installations, apart from those parts

.
which cross or come into dangerous proximity to heavy-current
installations.
.
r Notse :
The t r a n s f o r m e r may be an i n d e p e n d e n t d e v - i . ec q.r may f o r m
p a r t ; of a r e c t i f i e r or o t h e r o o n v e r t o r . Ln al.Z. o a s a t h e
secondary terminals or outrpu t-e of t h e tsr an e f'o rme n al'e z-e-
g a r d e d as t h e s t a r t of t h e l . i . g h t - c u r r e n t inst;al.1,a,t;ion.
Equipment f o r t h e r e e ep tri-on: of b r o a d c a s t and. tie l-eu i e-i.on
programmes is s u b j e c t to t h e . a p p r o v a l of t h e Norweg,ian
Baard f a r T e s t i n g and A p p r o v a l - of EZ.e.otrioal. E q u i p m e n t .

Amateurs i n t e n d i n g ta c o n s t r u c t and o p e r a t e t h e i r awn

t r a n - s m i t t i n g i n s t a l , . Z . a t i o n s must h a v e s p e c i a l , p e r m i s s i o n
( l-i o e n o e ) f r o m t h e Te Le q i-aph: O f f i c e , w h i c h a l s o c o n d u c t s .
t h e s u p e r v i s i o n and i n s p e c t i o n of t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n s .

§ 202. Competent o o n s t l ' u c t i o n

E v e y installation shall be constructed in a competent
fashion and so laid out as to have no derimental effect
on its surroundings.

§ 203. General. requirem.ents

Every installation shaLl be so constructed that as far as
possible it causes no interference to radio reception.

Equipment and connections shall be properly enclosed and

insulated. This does not apply to installations in dry
rooms which are operated by expert or trained persons.

Installations and e q u i p e n t shall be o: qood and durable

construction.
L
 ,
r•
..
l,. i
. ..
.,.,_ •
,.,
5
.... - , '
:....
§ 207. Earthing

Exposed parts of an installation (§ 110) shall be earthed

in accordance with the conditions laid down i n § 407.
Equipment.which is connected to a light-curent installation
with one pole or the neutral line earthed during operation
and which is contained in a conductive casing, shall be pro-
vided with an earth terminal. This earth terminal shall be

0 connected to the pole or line which is earthed during opera-

tion.
Earth electrodes and earth lines shall be dimensioned in
accordance with the cur.rents which may occur. When se1ecting
the dimensions and materials for earth lines account shall
be taken of possible mechanical or chemical stresses. Where
such a procedure is reasonably possible, the eartb lines for
high-voltage and light-current.installations shall be separ-
ated and taken to separate earth electrodes.

Note:

In the case of manuai and automatic telephone exchanges

constructed on the common-battery system, one pote of
the current-supply instailation, normally the positive
pole-! shall as a »u l.e be earthed. in the case of light-
cur r e n t: equipment using an earth return, the func.:tioning
of trhe equipment dep en de on satisfactory ear'thing. Earth
lines shall normally follow the shortest route to the
eartn electrode or waterpipe.

Lead serving,_ ,L--1----'

@
0
Fi(l. I

0
In a house supplied wit running water the earth line shall
be connected to a waverpipe, ereferably u p s r e a m of the
• I
at.or,-tap, using earthing c li.p e.
 6

Wheve the earth line must be taken outside the house for
oonnection to a w t e r p i p e , connection may be made under-
ground using solid clips having large; contact surfaces.
The Lightning·conductor Manual issued by the Norwegian
Fire Prevention Association recommends a layout as shown
in Fig. 1. The clip should be coated with tar or a simiZar
substance before being covered with earth.
Earth lines must not be connec,ted to local waterpipes
which are connected to automatic drinking appliances in
a cow-house or stall.
Q
Copper plates buried in the earth normally provide adequate
earthing. The Telegraph Office requires all telephone and
telegraph stations to be earthed. Use is normally made of
a c o p p e r - p l a e 1.0 x 0.6 m and 0.5 mm thick, shown in Fig.2,
to which is soldered a lead 6 m i n length aQnsisting
of a three-strand copper wire.

Fig. 2

In the case of telephone stations having a common earth

far the individual lines, the amount of crosstalk encount-
ered depends on the resistance. The greater the resistance,
the less the damping between adjacent signals and the great-
er the amount of crosstalk. r:'J
For earthing outdoor telephone apparatus, fire alarms,
cable boxes, supports for overhead cables, etc. use may
be made of earthing rods which, as specified by the Tele-
graph Office, are hotgalvanised steel rods 1.85 m i n
length to which a copper lead is attached.

A good earth can often be obtained with the aid of one or

more galvanised steel pipes 1.5 - 2" in diameter which
are driven into the earth to a depth of 2.5 m. A solid
clip such as that shown in Fig. 1 is used to connect the
earth line to the earth electrode.
 good eayth can be obtained brf" burying w i e , cabie or
e-oge2r o» qa.lroa lised steel.s._t;y.ip s.a tih.a.is-d-i: Li-es i-n a

_!;;,:.T /• ':f
..
..' - . ; ....: ,-.,...,
- , : , .

•:4,.
moist l.aye,r...-of eartn. A l.ow a r t h re.ai-stance. is usal.l
obtai-ned by laifinq a strip-type eart:-n el.ectroae unde the
foundaCion of a buil.ding.
' :1;-./.,
Where it;is not reasonaZ.y possibl.e to k e the earth
Z.ines for high-vol.tage and i g h t - c u r e n t separate, a
c,pmmon eanth el.ectrode may be used. This is the case,
for eampl.e, wit:-h install.ations in mountainous areas.

0
-·
,I
 .... ,,.
.
....
1
4 :. .. ' ,. • -
.,
..-":l J,.

§ 220. Transforme ra

Transformers used for operating light-current installations

shall have separate windings. The secondary and primary
terminals shall be so sited and marked that they cannot be
confused. Transformers for bell circuits in dwelling houses
and similar;,,premises shall hav covered connection terminals
and shall be capable of withstanding a short-circuit on the
secondary side without this resulting in over-heatinq of the
transformers likely to cause a fire.

Note: 0
; Jc•• X h . p r i m a r y side of all transformers shall be fused in
..... accordance with the directions given i n § § 446 - 448.
_i: ..

;;. ...
-..""ol" Transformers which are not caRable of w i t h s t a n d i n g
short-circuit shall also be fused on the secor.zdary side
unless the fuse on the primary side provides e-ffeotive
protection against a shorb-circui on the secondary side.

,'"
§ 222. Conver tars ......
-,,...,,_,...,w;•
.
,..l .,.-
Rectifiers and other converters may be used for operating
light-current installations direct or for charging accum-
mulator batteries. Their design shall satisfy the require-
ments for heavy-current equipment.
. , t.
No t e.:

This paragraph ,s also intended to apply to the use of

cored convertors and othe vibratory convertors.
-,,;·•>1'%:1"':.,. _,}-

0
§ 225. Accumulators "',.'!;. .........

Accumulators used for operating .light-cun;ent installations

may be charged when disconnected from the light-current
installations and also during operation, i.e. by means of
a buffer circuit.

In the case of batteries of accumulators having a total vol-

tage-above 42 V, the cell cases must not: be made from readily
combustible materials. • 0
Smaller batteries of accumulators may be installed in a cup-
board having an acid-resisting support (Acid-proo shelves.)
Larger batteries of accumulators shall be accommodated in a
special room.
 . ' :Ill
....
··.:
\. ...
"-:-
... ;
I•

! • ,:...- !:
-..---=------=-
'!' ';i.,.
Dighting in an accumulator room may be provided only by
means of lighting equipment and fittings approved foL
,. ---- rooms in which acid is stored. (Section LI C i ) .

An instruction sheet describing the procedure for handling

a battery shall be displayed in its immediate vicini.ty.

In the case of accumulators which develop unusually large

amounts of combustible or corrosive gas, the room or cup-
board shall be well ventilated and protected by means of
acid-resistant linings. The ventilation system shall not
exert a harmful influence on other rooms.

The accumulator case shall be insulated from the eartrr using

a double layer of insulation consisting of damp-proof

0
material (e.g. glass fibre). Smaller batteries giving a
voltage of up to 110 V.may, however, be mounted dirctly,upon
a wooden or lead s u p p e r .

The insulation resistance shall be sufficiently high to

ensure that the current measured between each pole and
earth does not exceed 1.5% of the maximum discharge current
for which the battery is designed. For purposes of measure-
ment the battery shall be disconnected from the other equip-
ment, but not from the se·lector switch.

Note:

In view of t-he possibiiity of them causing a.n explosion

during charging, circuit-breakers and plug connections
shall be situated outsiae the accumulator room.

Battery cases made from lead-lined wood or hard rubber

are not considered to be e a d i l y combustible, although
cases made from celluloid are.

The links joining the cells may consist of lead strip or

lead wire, alternatively cells may be joined by welding.
The connection points should be coated with vaseline,

0
dinitrol or a similar substance.

Bare wire or wire having an acid-proof insulation may

be used in a battery cupboa.rd or battery room and
should be fixed by means of insulated supports.

' .
 10

c. EQUIPMENTS AND INSTRUMENTS

§ 231. Eleøtrotechnicai requirements

Equipment and instruments shall have clearly marked and

adequately dimensioned connection terminals. Internal
wiring shall be carried out·using o r o p r l y insulated wire
of a suitable capacity for the expected current.

All equipment shall, wherever possible, be marked with

C
its voltage and current consumption. Every effort shall
be made to avoid manufacturing equipment which has the
same physical shape as high-current equipment. Where
this cannot be avoided, the equipment must be clearly
marked to show its range of application.
0
§ 232. Mechanical requirements

The assembly of the various oarts of an item ot equipment

shall be carried out by means of solid screw or cl?ITTP con-
nections, or by welding or soldering. o v e r s which require
to be removed and set aside during use should not be attach-
ed by means of self-tapping screws. In such cases machine-
thread screws should be used in steel plate and woodscrews
in wood.

Note:

seif-tapping screws will provide a firm and reliable con-

nection when they are screwed in only onøe and cut their
own thread in the process, but where they are screwed in
and out repeatedly the thread may be destroyed so that
they øease to hold with sufficient firmness.

§ 233. Requirement for special conditions

Where equipment is used in damp and wet rooms containing

acid liquids and corrosive fumes, its construction must be
such as to afford adequate protection against the arduous
o
conditions to which it is to be exposed. Where there is
a danger of fire, the equipment should be suitable for the
circumstances. Where there is a danger of explosion, the
equipment should be of the design specified i n § 495.

§ 234. Protection arrangements 0

Equipment which is connected to outdoor power-lines shall
be securely protected against damage resulting from atmos-
pheric discharges and heavy current, s e e § 337.
 ,q

Heavy-current and liqht-current equipment should not be

assembled into a common enclosure unless operational or
practical consideration require that the two systems be
combined in this manner. In such cases, measures shall
be taken to prevent current flow from one system to the
other, e.g. by providing generous space between the res-
pective current-carrying members of the frame. Connec-
tions to the supplies shall wherever possible be made at
different points in the equipment.

The low volta9e Regulations regarding connection terminals

and facilities for conQection after the equipment has been
attached to its supports (§ 405) apply to both provision
of heavy-current and light-current systems.

n .Jlote:
With
§ 33 7.
'r eqar-d to fus.es, attention is dPawn to t-he Note to

An example of equipment in which it is not possible to

aviod the combination of heavy-cul'l'ent. and light-cul'l'ent
devices may be seen n cil'cuit-bl'eakel's opePated fl'om a
light-curl'ent contl'ol cil'cuit.
rhe combination of two systems on p u e l y aestftetic gl'ound
should be avoided, for example low-voltage lamps and light-
CUl'l'ent signa?.ling 'd evioed, used. pePhaps fo.l' summoning
employees, indicating on,"engaged" condition, "paging",
etc.
Heavy-current equipment which is subject to the approval of
NEMKO may be combined with light-current installations when
the items in question are specially approved for this. In
which case the approval must also cover the light-current com-
ponent.

t d

• :,,:;r
• -;.-....>, ..
'{ ., .... "''

0
. \
• 4 t " ' . '\
... !";...»
 ...
..
'le
,
l:""'

d. INDOOR INSTALLATIONS
\
-- ..
...........
§ 251. Insulation of wires and aables.

Wires and cables are usually to be insulated.

Wires which are approved for heavy-current uses may also

be used there they are needed for a particular puEpose
(e.g. to avoid a voltage drop and provide the required
mechanical strength). Otherwise, wires and cables speci-
r•

• ;.i;.
•
ally designed for light-current use shall be employed.
.\:.. t These, when submerged in water, shall be capable of stand-
.J t: ing an alternating current of 500 V for five minutes be-

n
tween conductor and water after lying in water for at least
two hours. Cables having a metal casing shall stand the
same voltage for the same period between conductor and
metal casing.

..,
§ 252. Fixing.

In dry rooms ( s e e § 488) wires may be fixed directly to a

.., .-•'· ,- wall, ceiling or similar, provided that the fixing devices

i·
,:la damage neither the wire nor its insulation.

. · '

i"'
;
r\ Conduits mounted on walls or ceilings shall be attached by

"i,, • . means of either clips or saddles. Conduits which are re-

cessed in the wal1s are to be a type approved for use in
;., ..
_,,,
low-voltage installations. Wires or cables drawn into
.,,"-..
• ... : t :
.,:.
conduits shall be rubber-insulated, plastic-insulated or
. , ::Ji,
-
'!.o1P•·

similar. The number of wires run in the conduits shall

not be so great that they are damaged during insertion. ""
..,_io... "'l..,,.-1 ...

ti ,. "
Note:

', £ e a d - c o v e e d cable may be secured direce o walls and

i
ceilings, bu should not normally be insert.ed into

l .:..,. covered cable ways.

t
. ,f' ff.

·
\

. ... ),_
4-
'· •it New types of wires, cables, conduits and fixing devices
shall be approved in the same manner as for low-voltage 0
.. ... < .,
types.

Where c r a m s are used for securing wives, the practice

; : -
' of securing a number of wires under the same cramp should
.'
!.
h: •
be avoided. •
.
' "-"\<fl!
This paragraph requires t.ha ti no moJ::>e: wires shall be in-
ee e t.ed into any conduit than i.s oon ei.der ed p.roper, having
0
,,," regard to the mechanical stresses to which the wires are
' " ," -..J. ... i ...., subjected during insertion. The Table below shows the
numbeP of wi.J::>es ndrmally regarded as correct. Where con-
duit.s are l.a i-d without sharp bends the number of wires may-
be increased. In cevtain cases it is necessary to draw
 ..

...r 13
- 1

w i T s ·of different sd,zas into the sam coniut, ,and due

c o i d r a t i o n shQuid h e g v e . to-.he-Loading
.n factor of
the co[!dui.-t. ,Xwo typical,, examp'les lJ.ave been selected
"'in tihe fl'ao'l'f:i, name]y, a "paging" i.ns·t:a.Z'lation (marked x I
and a h . g h t-signa1 'ling instaZ.1>a.t:ion of tih.e type.-us:ød in
hospita1s (marked x ) .
t •.. Wire J,,
Diametecr over ¾" 5/8" 5/8" 3,14" 3/4" }..1/4"
r I!!< ins.u labi tm , mm
\___,,, U T - ' ! > 1 mm 2.55 s 8 z.r ' 11
,.J
xx.. 17 22
uæ-»
.. 2:z:1 mm
t.ia-ietied 2æ2.55 .... 1 2 .....
' 4
- .,
,,.....
7 8
IJ-P 0.7 mm 2.05 io 16 23 .,..,: 34 46
IT-P 2x0.7 mm
0.
\___,J twist-ed 2x2.05 4 6 9 "16 10
PVC smooth
0.. 67 .mm2 2.4 [! JS 21 8 32 42
PNE 0.75 mm2 2.7 s 9 6 )2 18 24
PN ani'i PNL
1. 5 mro2 3. 3 3 4 6 2 12 18
PN and PNL
2.5 mm2 4. 3 s 9 12
..::

§ 253. Protection against mehanical damage

Where wires and cables may be exposed to mechanical damage
and where they are brought through a wall or similar into
the open air, special protection shall be provided as the
circumstances demand. Lead-covered cable shall be secured
by means of cramps.

Note:
Cables may be either bare or insulated where they are
brought into q building. The junction between the open-
air length and the Zead-in wire should be soldered. A
readily released screwed connection between the lead-in
wire, as shown in Fig. 3, facilitates rapid disconnection
for line inspection and measurement. The lead-in tube
shall be f i t e d with a faZ.Z towards the ouCside and the
l-ead=i.n:-i.nsulator ehal l, where possible, be fitted at,a
l-oiae» 'level tihan. the tube, so that.the lead-in w,i.re s l o p e s
() downwards to the insulator. Where the insulator has to be
fit-ted hiqbe i: t;han the tube, the lead-in wire shall. form
a 'loop as shown by the broken line in Fig. 3.
 14

C
Fig. 3

Where the lead-in-point is protected by eaves or other pro-

jecting parts of the building the lead-in tube may be omit-
ted.

The lead-in tube may also be omitted where the lead-in con-
sists of plastic-insulated wire or cable. A properly con-
structed seal using putty or cement is then required.

§ 254. ConnetJtions

Joints and branches shall be executed in such a manner that

the insulation and conductor material at these points is of
the same quality as in the remainder of the conductor, so
that adequate mechanical strength is ensured. Joints and
branches in lead-sheathed cables shall be made in
fittings which can be sealed, e.g. boxes, lead piping or
sleeves.

n
Note:

Where cables have insulation consisting of paper or

other hygroscopic material, or where cables lie in ,
damp, corrosive atmospheres or are exposed to the danger
of fire or explosion, connection boxes and sleeves must
be made air-tight and water-tight, e.g. by filling
with a eu it ab le ..
compound. Branches on open terminal bar e
or the use of soldering tags should be avoided.

§ 255. Marking

In light-current installation in which normal low-voltage

equipment is used and in other installations where there
may be a danger of confusion between heavy-current and
light-current, wires and adjoining equipment shall be
clearly marked.
 15

Note:

;( Marking may be b painting wires, conduits or cables in

speciaZ colours. rt is normaily s u f f i c i e t if connection
boxes, chambers and cu"/?boards are marked with letters,
numbers or figures w i c h are painted upon them. For
further safety, installation comgonents may also be paint-
ed in special colours.

0 2 6 0 . Disbance from other light-current i e s

When crossing other light-current wires care shall be taken

to provide suffici.ent insulation and mechanical protection
at t:he crossing point.

When lines come near one another, possible induction and/or

0 capacitance effects between the wires shall be taken into
consideration.

§ 261. Distance from low-voltage wires

Light-current wires and low-voltage wires shall not be car-

ried in the same conduit nor in the same box, unless the
box has separate accommodation for the two systems.

When wires are laid in the open the distance between light-
current wires and low-voltage wires shall be at least 1 cm.
If circumstances do not make it possible to maintain this
distance, one set of wires may be protected by insulating
sleeving or by conduit which is earthed. Such protection is
nLt required where light-current wires or where one set of
wires has an earthed conduit, earthed metal sheath or braid-
ed metal sheath. With free-laid wires use must be made of a
protective insulating sleeve where low-voltage and light-
current wires cross, and such protective sleeve must enclose
one set of wires for at least 5 cm on each side of the cros-
sing.

Distance from high-voltage lines

- 262.
Where light-current wires cross or come near bare high-
voltage lines they shall be secured and protected by parti-
cularly reliable means.

The distance between light-current wires and wires and

cabLes carrying high voltage shall be at least 3 c m + 0.5 cm
0 for every 1000 V of operating voltage in the high-voltage
installation.

Where both installations are made using armoured cable or

wires laid in separate conduits which are earthed, no parti-
cular distance is required between them when inside a house.
For cables lying in the earth or under flooring the measures
specified i n § 379 must be adopted.
 ... ,li,r: .. , t , r " "
- 4 " ' " " -"" -, 1.-,_,
,t -( ._, J •!\. J -., l

'r
.. I • "
.....: å _ _ ....:. ......-...:.:.........
.:,_
' 16"'

§ 266. Installation of Low-voLtage equiement

Leads for light-current relay circuits for the control of

heavy-current equipment may be fitted in the same manner
as normal light-current leads. Where the leads are in an
exposed position on machines, etc., care must be taken to
provide good mechanical protection.

Where a lightcurrent lead is brought into heavy-current

equipment in a housing or similar, the lead must b pro-
tected by special insulation in the form of plastic tubing
etc. Control current leads connected to one and the same
c
set of fuses may so far as is practicable be laid inside the
same sheath, tray or conduit.
Control current leads for low voltage equipment must be
fused according to their cross-section. Tra_nsformers for
light-current control circuits may be fitted in the. fuse /\
cabinet or in the relay cabinet or similar and shall have \ J
fuses in the primary circuit. If the transf,ormer is not
short-circui,t proof, it must also have fuses in the secQnd-
dary cii:cuit.

§ 286. InstaZZations under different-tyees of conditions

Equipment shall be selected to suit the conditions

appertaining in the room or other accommodation in which
it will operate, such conditions being determined by the
state of that room etc., or the use to which it is put.

Rooms and other accommodation are divided into various clas-

sification groups, and where the state of the room etc. in
question, or part of such room, or the activity conducted
therein, causes it to fall under more than one classifica-
tion gr.oup, the installation shall be constructed in the
manner specified for the classification group having the
most stringent requirements.

Installations in the different types of room etc., shall

satisfy the requirements for the classification group con-
cerned. The groups are based on the following type of
conditions:

Dey conditions;
n
Dirty conditions;
Damp conditions;
Wet conditions;
Corrosive conditions;
Fire-risk conditions;
Explosion-risk conditions; 0
If the use to which rooms or other accommodation (such as
stores or certain types of workshops) are put is found to
constitute a risk of damage to their electrical installa-
tions, then conduits, lead-covered cables or conduit-wires
must be suitably protected.

/
 .
, ..,i

·
; ....
- r ..

Insulated leads, cables and conduit ·.-,iring must not be ·::d,

laid within 30 cm of f"uel-burninn stoves or flue-ipes.

ary rooms
In dry rooms use may be made of all types of approved equip-
ment and approval instruments.

"l'hi-s paragra?;'happlies to rooms in whiah the air is rela-

tively dry and alean, the temperature relatively uniform
and norfal, andl!in whiah no speaial airaumstanaes exist,
on at leas't-not to the extent whiah would aause the room
to fall unde anohey alassifiaation group.

Dirty rooms

Jn dirty and dusty rooms all equipment shall be of the en-

closed type. Leads and cables having a rubber or plastic
insulation or similar shall be used.

Note:
:!'his group inalude-s rooms iah.ich aontain d.i trt: or dust -in
suaJ quanity that Zaads, equipment, motors and other
installation aomgonents may beaome aove..red and may aon-
-eequent lq ove,rh_ea:t:';a,1,·t"hough no ep.eo-ial: dange'rj,of igni-
t-ion exi-sts.

Da.mp rooms
In damp rooms all equipment shall have a cover which is
dripproof. Only moisture-resistant insulation materials
shall..,,be used for protecting the connections and construc-
ting that equipment. Use shall be made of leads and cables
having rubber or plastic insulation or similar.

'Note:

æamp vooms are rooms in whia the æir i-s normaZy so damp
&hq-t aondensatian,oaauri,o:nwails, ee-il-i nq and objeats in
a rooT, altµougfi running moisture does not form a perma-
n1nt feature.

Wet rooms
"' ...)'_,:_
" "1P.t:..,.l
' - - ! ' "" · ..JJ/if:_
§ 291.

I.n wet rooms all equipment shall have a cover 1-•hich is

watertight and entry points for leads shall be capable of
being sealed. Lead-sheathed or equivalent cable, bare leads
or leads having weatherproof and corrosion-resistant insula-
tion shall be used.
 § 292. Cor r o e i-ve -rodms

In rooms in which the conditions are corr:osive all equipment..

shal have a cover ot tbe sealed and corr:osion-r:esist'ipg
type, ana entry points for leads shall be capable of being
sealed. Lead-sheathed or: equivalent cable, bare..leads o
leads having weatherproof and corosion-resistant insula-
tion shall be used. h
f
,. :e: i-"",f.l"....;...Jf.
Not;{!>:
.,,. ..i, \' "...
- X h i t F g r o u p inGZ..udei, r o a m s in; w h i c h t h e toa LLe a n d cdil-i-n(!'•. c/
a r e . ,imp.re.gnate..d ar c o v e r e ' d w i t h s,al,.t or q a r . r · a s j v e · L--iquids.,
ar in u 1 h i ( ! h oæu e.tii c ør -a,0gre..sive ma'Fer-i a l ; « a r a - 'f!I'BJH3"1:r i n . t
s u c h q u a n , t i - t y t h a t t ; h e y may aft.ere.,'!$ i.n etiæl: Za:t;ion com11011ern{s ,.
or W<'i,a/(£_n i.n eu/l-ab-i on: mat,n•-ia'/..s.. '";.,
r . ,.
- : "';--,4. '
""¥- 4"' 1 r
§ 294. F i . r < r - r i i s k , ro0]7ls
(
In roop.s in which there is a fire risk all equipment shall.
l .... 't.i,
be so cons.tr;ucted that. there can be no danger o.£ any object,
· ..
.,,.·;r dust or gas being ignited. Use shall be. made of cables or

r
s.r leads which have adequate mechanical. strength.
" \
r.

t
,..,\
.. N'o te :

For d e f i n i r t . i o n . af f i r e - r i s k rooms., aee-.§ 494.

, ·(
.
• - \{
; ., ;...'.:..: :,: -.
,

T h e . Requ La t i . o n e c . o n t a i n a d in § 2.95 atJpLy to r o o m s in ·1uhw'h

t h e r e is a f i r e r i s k . d u e to t h e d a n g e r of ex:p:l,osion.. - ·
S e e a L s o NVE C o m m u n i c a t i o n 1 / 7 1

§ 295. ExpLosian-ris rooms

In rooms in which there is a risk of explosion, light-curr:ent

r"J
.installations shall be constructed in the mannez specified in
§ 495'.

rY
\

I•
 19
e. OUTDOOR OVERHEAD LINES

§ 311. Overhead line materials

overhead lines may consist of bronze wire, galvanized s e e l
wire copper wire or copper-clad steel wire. The breaking
strain of the wire selected should be sufficiently great to
withstand loading by wind and snow.

C Note:

Wire used for light-current lines is classified according

to its diameter, not according to its cross-sectional
areas as in the case of heavy-current lines.

0
The normal dimensions for bronze wire are 1.25 mm, 1.5 mm,
2 mm and 3 mm. Where the bronze o n t a i n s silicon,. the
breaking strain is 90 kp, 125 kp, 220 kp and 515 kp respec-
tively.
The normal dimensions for galvanized steel wire are 2 mm,
3 mm and 1 mm. The breaking strain is 250 kp,550 kp and
625 kp. Hard-drawn galvanized steel wire of 2 mm and 3 mm
diameter is also used, the breaking strain being 400 kp and
1000 kp respectively.
The normal dimensions for copper wire are 2.75 mm, 3.3 mm,
4 mm, 4,5 mm and 5 mm. The breaking strain is 265 kp,
385 kp, 550 kp, 680 kp and 840 kp respectively. Cadmium-
copper wire of 1.5 mm and 2 mm diameter is also used, the
breaking strain being 121 kp and 220 kp respectively.

Copper-clad steel wire of 3.25 mm diameter Has a breaking

strain of 747 kp.

§ 312. Siting of linPs

Lines shall have a free height above ground of not less than
3.5 m. However, where there is normally no traffic below the

0
lines, their free height above ground may be not less than
2.5 m. When running on a common line of masts with high-
voltage lines, the free height above the ground shall be at
least 4 m, s e e § 712.

For crossings of adjacent sitinQ s e e § 313 - 325.

When an outdoor line ceases to be used, it shall either be

0 removed or else be maintained in accordance with these Regu-
lations.

Jl3. Crossing of light-current lines.

Where light-current lines cross out-of doors, the distance

between them shall be such that no current shall pass between
the respective systems as a result of temperature variations
or loading by snow.
 .
......,...::: " ' -
"'" ·.... ·
-- .. . I " ' .
' ---!!.!.- ;,_.a
"t -
...' - . .
' ....
...,...
20

§ 316. C r o s s i n g of other Lines

a. C r o s s i n g of Loia=Yo l-t-aqe L i n e s

Where low-voltage lines and light-current lines cross out-

of-doors the angle of cross shall, wherever possible, be
not less tqan 45°. The low-voltage line shall as a rule
be the uppermost. The distance between the poles of one
line and the centre-line of the other line shall be at
least 3 m.

The crossing shall satisfy one,of the following requirements:

C
1 One of the lines shall have weatherproof and corrosion-
resistant insulation over t.ho whole of the c ross.Lnq span.
The minimum distance b e t w c n the lines shall b e l m . The
insulated line shall ue renewed as frequently as the condi-
tion of the u l a t i o n shall require. The span of the
u f = t set of lines shall not exceed 50 m i n length.
0
2. The upgermost line shall be secured at each end of the span
to large insulators in such a manner that the wires cannot
slip. The insulators shall be fastened by means o collars
or through-bolts. Wood-screws may be used for mounting the
final tensioning insulator. The wires shall c o n s i t of sev-
eral strands and have a breaking strain of not less than
640 kp, corresponding to 16 mm2 of copper. The distance
between the lines shall be at least 2 m. Wooden poles shall
be made from pine impregnated in an approved manner, or from
equivalent material. The span width of the uppermost set of
lines shall not be greater than 50 m.

3. Two or more robust guard-wires of metal constructions shall

be hung between each of the lines. The distance between the
lines shall be at least 2 m. The span width of the lower
line shall not be greater than 50 m.

4. One of the lines shall be replaced by an overhead cable at-

tached to a span wire. The span wire and the metal sheath

n
of the cable, is any, shall be earthed. The distance be-
tween the lines shall be åt least 1 m.

5. One of the lines shall be replaced by underground cable.

The crossing poles shall wherever possible be 3 m away from
the crossing overhead line on either side. The underground
cable shall be laid at least 0.5 m below the surface.

6. The crossing shall be effected on a common post. One or f\

both lines shall then be in the form of aerial cables se- ,.'
cured to an insulated support line (cable of. t.he self.-
supporting type) and the low-vol.tage line shall occupy
the upper position. Between each of the lines shall be
placed a. 50 mm wide yellow warning ring. The distance
between the lines shall be at least 1 m. .:1-

I'
 I

Details of the crossing layouts discussed i n § 316 (a)

are i l i u etrated in Figs. 4 - 10.
A crossing in accordance with (1) above is shown in
Figs. 4 and 5. In Fig. 4 the loia=vo ltaqe Line is upper-
most, while in Fig. 5 the light-current line is upper-
,
-.·J::.
p

most. In both cases the distance 'b' between the lines

shali be at least 1 m and the distance 'a' from the cen"tre
line of the light-curren line to {he nearest low-voltages
pole shall, where.; circumstances permit, be above 3 m.
Where the light-current 1ine is the l o w e , this distance
shall be.,measured to the pole-stays (if any). h e span
width 'c' s h Q l l not exceed 50 m.
A crossing n accordance wil;z ( 2 ) above is shown in Fig. 6
The distance 'b' bet:ween the lines s a l be at least 2 m
and the distance 'a' from the light-current lin to the
nearest:._low-voltage pole shxil-l-, tahe.re oi ncumetances per-
f!li t-, b above 3 m. Tlz-e span wid&h 'a' eh.al.l. not exceed
50 m.

J. A crossing in acQordance with (3) is shown.in Yigs 7 and 8

Trz Fig. 7 'the li.qh-t=eu t-ren-t: lineris u ppeæmoe ts, while in
Fig. 8 the low-voltage 'l ime-is u12_permost. In botfzcases
the distance, 'b' between 'the l-i.ne.es ha l.L be at Leas t: .2 m
and the distance 'a' from the c e n e - l i n e of"the light-
current line t:o the nearest low-voltage l'pO'le eha l-l, where
circumstances pe.J'mit, be above 3 f l i . The span width 'c'
sha1l not exceed 50 m.
4. A. crossing in accordance un t-h: ( 4) above is shotan in Figs
9 arid 10. In Fig. 9 the l-igh-cUPrent lines are in the
for,m of a cabl:e., while in Fig. 10 tsh e low-vo lt:age lines
take t:his form. If the crossing cable is supported on
a span wire, this latter shall be earthed. Where "the
cab l:e has a metal sheath, this +oo ehalrl: be eac t he d. The
same-applies tro self-supporting cable having a steel wire
rmouring. In both the examp1es shown in Figs 9 and 10
the cabl-elies -b e.loiathe overhead l.ines. Phis ,J,Ji1 l prove
the most: satisfactory method in the majority of cases,
but the regulations do not: forbjd placing the cable i
t:he upper posiion. -Jn bot-h eæamplee shown t/he cable also
cont:iues after the crossing has been passed, but there is
notih-inq bo preve;nt a change to a different type of line
aft:er the.crossing poles. If paper-insulat:ed cable is
usea, the ends q f h e a b l e must be provided with air-
0 tight cable terminations.
Xhe dist:ance 1 a ' from the.cent:re-line of the light-current
line ?o the nearest: low-valtage pole snall, where circum-
s"tan·ces permit, be above 3 m. There is no requirement as
to span wvdth, bu this should be as short as possible at
the.cTossing-pe._nt fo-r reasons of operational safety.
 22

fl. vhetre paper-in1;ulated undePqPound cab Le i&.< used fol'tshe"

Cl'Olising, in accol'dance witih ( 5) above _the ends of t/he
cable must: be pPovided wi.th aiP-tig_h t cable teaxmi.nat i-ons,
Before a decision is. made to use oab l.ec f'or light-curPent
lines at Cl'ossing points, it should be borne in..mind that;.
an unfused cable in an exposed position maif be destroyed
by atmospheric dischal'es. The cable may be protected
by means of voltJ.age fuses at eithel'end, but tJ.his incl'eases
cost,and tihe ins.tallation of fuses introduces new sources
of tl'ouble. The TelegPaph Office pel'mit:-s the use of cable
fol'cl'ossing of its long-distance lines (tl'unk lines) only
in vel'y exceptional cases, because of the carPiel'fPe-
quency used on these lines. The perm i.ssion of the I'e.l-e>
gPaph Office to use cable in subscriber's line1;depends
on local conditions and tJ.he position of the cl'ossing in
the subscl'ibel' network.
()
6.-If V,e owner of the light-cUl'l'ent ol'heavy-cul'l'enb instal-
lation declar&s during negotiations egarding t:he crossing,
that it is intended to extend or Peconstl'uct the lay-out
of the line in the near futul'e, this shall be tJ.aken into
account·.
Attention is dl'awn t o § 203 and Section 1 C in connection
with Padio intePfePence and single-Line telephone nstal-
lations.

'·
()
'-

., >

··
()
r,g.. 4

- t
 26

n
Fig. 12
"'
S a f e t y qua.rd·

d not b e l o w 5 m

-- -k-
I
P u i croad

Fig. 13

0
 27
)

b. Crossing of High-Voltage Lines

When conside-r:nq open-air crossings pf hiqh.-volta<Je and
light-current lines { s e e § 716) a choice may be made between
the following procedures:

'i. Reinforced suspension of the high-voltage line._above the

" light-current line or overhead light-current cable.
,,--

l 2. Earthed protection net or earthed guard wires between the

two lines.

3. Underground light-current cable.

• 4. Uride nqrou nd hi.gh-vol tage cable.

r; Where methods 1 er 2 are used, the high-voltage line· shall

be placed uppermost.

The crossing angle shall be as close to 90° as possible6

Where methods 1 or 2 are used, angles of cross below 45
should be avoided.

Lead-in lines from receiver aerials mav onlv cros5 h i h -

voltage lines when such lead-in lines are enclosed in metal
tubes laid in the earth. Such tubes shall be laid at least
30 cm below the surface and be earthed.

Note:

A crossing.in accordance with ( 1 ) above is shown in Fig.12

For radio interference and single-wire telephone lines see
§§ 21 - 29 a n d § 203.

The magnitude of the capacitance effect depends on the angle

of cross and the vertical distance 'b' between the tele.phone
wires and the high-voltage lines. The re qu lation« therefore
provide that crossings shall be as close to a riaht-angle as
possible and have the greatest possible vertical distance
bet.iaeen the sys terns.

C Assuming a low earthing resistance, a considerable reduction

in the capacitance effect can be achieved by placing 1 to 4
earthed screening wires over the telephone lines at the
c ro ss i nq , Use may be made of J. J mm copper wire. The
screening wires should be placed at least 60 cm above the
uppermost telephone line. The number of screening wires

0
will be selected in accordance with the width af the set
of telephone wires.

'l'h e ou t-e rmo e t: screening wires should be fixed somewhat

further from the pole than the outermost telephone lines.

The screening wires should extend at least JO m o n either

side of the crossing at right-angles to the d i neat ion of
the high-voltage line (see a l s o § § 28 and 9 ) .

, .
 _..a-..e . • S r . , j _.,...,.;1
j f ,.,-
.. ... • '.i!• • ...$.

. . . . . ,.! . .;. ...::. - c : - · - " ' - ........

• - - : . _ :..
28
i
I
§ 318. O r o s s i n g of pubZic road

Light-current lines which cr.o ss a pubLt,c road shall be at

least 5 m above the road suz;face. Wooden poles installed
closer than 10 m to a public road, plac or busy area shall
be made from pine impregnated in an approved manner, or from
an equivalent material.

No txe.:

Th e. Z.ayou.t of a ar oe s i.n q is shown in P i g . 1 3 . X.he s p a n

w i d t h ' c ' s h o u Z d be c o p a r a t i v e Z . y s h o r t : , a n d t h a apgZ.e
of cross m u s t n o t be t o o a c u t e . The d i s t a n c e ' a ' shouZ.d
be s u f f i c i e n t Z y Zarge to e n s u r e t h Q t s n o w c i e a r d n c e is
n o t ; impede.d, a n d : gen.eralZ.y no.P l-ee e t h a n 2. 5- .m. Af;'/Jen-
t i o n is a l . s o d r a w n t o § § 40 a n d 41 of t h e Road Law a n d to
t h e 1 ' P r o v i s i o n s r e g a r d i n g t}Je R e l a t i o n s h i p b e t w e e n Pub l-i.e
Roads a n d E l e c ' t r i c L i n e I n s ta Ll a t r on i e " ( M i n i s t v y of Labour
a n a M u n i c i p a l . A f f a i r s , 5 December 19l5). U n d e r t h e s e pro-
v i s i o n s tih e Highway A u t ; h o r i t ; y may p e r m i t a d i s t a n c e l.e e»
t;han 2 . 5 m w h e r e t h i s is of c o n s i d e r a b Z e i m p o r t a n c e f o r
t h e l i.n e «u s i.em a n d d o e s .no t: i m p e d e trh.e m a i n t e r l a n c e a n d
a n d u s e of t h e r o a d .

§ 319. C r o s s i n g of rail.ways

Where light-current lines are required to cross railway lines

the layout of the crossing must be a9reed with the owner.

Note:

Where t h e N o r w e g i a n S t a t e . R a i l . w a y s a r e c o n c e . r n e d , p r o v i -
s i o n & e æi e t: t·o g o v e r n c r o s s i n g · s i n v o Z . v i n g NSB (= N o r w e g i a n
S t a t e R a i l w a y ) r a i l w a y l i n e s and l i g h t - c u r r e n t l i n e s .
T h e s e p r o v i s i o n s a p p Z y b o t h to t h e T e l e g r a p h O f f i c e ' s l i n e s
a n d to p r i v a t e l i g h t - c u r r e n t l i.ne» a n d may be o b t a i n e d on
a p p Z . i c a t i o n e i t h e r to t h e A r e a Manager in t h e r a i l - w a y d i s -
t - r i c t c o n c e r n e d or to t-h e C h i e f E n g i n e e r of t h e r e s p e c t i v e
railway i n s t a l l a t i o n .
Anyone i,.n-t>ending to e r e c t a r a d i o r e c e i v i n g a r e i a Z . ove.r
a p u b l i c s t r e e t e q u i p p e d w i t h t r a m or b u s w i r e s or o t h e r
h e a v y - c u r r e n t or l i g h t - c u r r e n t Z.ines m u s t o b t a i n p e r m i s -
s.ion f r o m . t h e Highway A u t h o r i t y , t h e r a i l . w a y or tre l.ephon e
0
m a n a g e r , t h e t r a m w a y or b u s companlf, t h e e l e c t r i c i t y u n d e r -

o
t.a.ing e t c .
If t h e a e r i a t d o e s n o t cross s u c h e l e c t r i c Z . i n e s , p e r m i s s i o n
is r e q u i r e d onZ.y f r o m t h e Highway A u t h o r i t y . Attenbion "is
d r a w n to § 2 0 3 . a n d S e c t i o n r C in r e g a r d to s i n g l e - l i n e tse-l.e -
phone..._ i n s t a Z . b a t i o n s a n d » a d i.o i n t e r f e r e n c e .

Regarding n o t i f i c a t i o n s e e § 13.

i
 § 320. Crossing of aerial ropeways, etc.

Where light-current lines are required to cross aerial rope-

•
ways, waterways, harbours, etc., safety measures appropriate
to local conditions must be taken.

§ 322. Adjacent siting of light-current lines

Where light-current lines are sited in close proximity to

one another in the open, attention shall be paid to induc- •'
tive effects on unbalanced lines and to the danger of the

J
leakage of current from one line to another.
Note:

A twisted te lephon ej rl i ne is normally protected from t,he : -

inductive e f f c t s qf other current systems, whereas a..
single-wire telephone connection is unbalanced and tftus
exposed to inductive effects. Special measures must •
tiher-efo ne be taken to protrec t: t,,,he latter. ",Z:: .

... . . . ' . . l ! I '

··--
Adjacent siting of oJher rl.i.ne e
, , ' >
Adjacent siting of, loo-voltage lines
Where light-current lines pass so close to low-voltage lines
that the breakage of an nsulator or a line may result
in the two lines coming into dangerous proximity to eac'h
other, the same safety requirements are imposed as apply to
crossings ( s e e § 316).

Where sets of lines follow parallel courses attention shall

be paid to any inductive effects.

Light-current lines and low-voltage lines shall as a rule '

not be attached to common poles unless the light-current ·=
,::.:..;. installatLon is one which is used only £or operating the

Ir.
,"'M>,.,_"11: low-voltage installation. Jn this case the light-current
lines shall occupy the lower position and attention shall
be paid to the requirements regarding Lnsulation specified
in§3l6(1).
"'
. The Telegragh Office's li_.ht-current l n e s may, however, be
attached to the same masts as low-voltage lines after agree-
ment between the Telegraph Office and the owner of the low-
voltage installation. Common sitings of this kind shall be
made in accordance with special provisions approved by NVE.

Cables and leads for common aerial installations constructed

in accordance with special provisions approved by NVE, may
be attached to the same masts as low-voltage lines.
 In special cases, light-current lines for other purposes
with written eerrnission of the Electricity Inspectorate,
attached to the same masts as low-voltage lines.
Where the falling of masts supporting one line may result
in any part of the line corning into contact with another
line, unirnpregnated wooden poles may be used only if they
are adequately stayed against falling or are properly sup-
ported by other means.
Light-current lines shall normally be mounted in such a
manner providing no danger exists of current passing be-
tween µroviding systems. If this is not 'possible they
shall be fitted with two or more voltage fuses.

Where masts carrying receiving aerials for television, FM or

other broadcasting are so close to low-voltage lines that
they may, if they fall, come into dangerous poxirnity to
the low-voltage lines, self-supporting,.cable with an insulated
span or supporting wire shall be'used for the low-voltage
lines, or alternatively another tyge of line approved fot •
the purpose, shall be used over the sg_an adjacent to the .,
aerial mast. RecP.ivin aerials fo television, FM, etc.
may not be placed directLy below low-voltage lines.

Adjacent s i t i n g af h:i,gh-volt;a9:e ln.n ee --

Where lines follow parallel courses attention shalL,be paid
to inductive effects. In critical cases the equipment con-
nected to the light-cur;rent line shall be apprQµr;iate1v ,fused.

Light-current lines and high-voltage lines shall as a rule

not be attached to common masts. Light-current lines may,
however, be sited along with high-voltage lines on common
masts where they are used exclusively for ooerating the high-
voltaae instllation.

l
0
- - -
s::·r I
fr .....
""'-,..
Ltyht cu H e n t

...>.. l;,ip; < a 4i

I Jn 11, n llTT7 rrr r r r r r r r r r r r » 0

..
'
... i,..

.. .(
":,,._1<
• • .•. .-«. f.... •s:.,, ""'
 .·...v:· ,
:--;;_;.{*.. t'.'f
, , t ; , .,

. -:-t
"t· .1\1.!I

......
.. ·.1
'. In this case, the high-voltage lines shall occupy the upper
position. The equipment connected to the light-current lines
shall be appropriately fused. The light-current lines shall
be of the tw;..sted type and have a breaking load of at least
380 kp.

If the stays supporting light-current masts cross or are situ-

ated in the immediata vicinity of high-voltage lines, insula-
tors shall be inserted in the stays close to the point at
which the stays are attached to the mast.

These insulators shall be capable of withstanding the futl

operating voltage of the highest voltage involved.

See a s o § 712 r e g a d i n o light-cw;.rent lines or cabJes and

h i g h - v o l t a e lines or cables on a common line 0£ masts.

i - -
. •'$?ff,,,qt l 4 { t e :
..
x- .,
.,«...:.-c.•
.,.-;
.... t -. • ; ; f
. ' f l V E - - h a , s a l ! p r a p e . d , un;:p!i.-l f u r l > h e r ; n a m e e , 1;1,e QEV,f Pul:/'lica.-
:'" . : • { . ' ( l i o n 179:,-1£164 " P r a v i s i o n s , r . e g , a r a i n g Oomman S i t i n - g " a.s n 1 e
·"".il'.! f · l l i t , op e r-a t . i o e p r o v i s 1 : q , n 1 = ;for t h e s'i,.fiing -of b he Xe..l..e-gra_p}z_
:- .../i' .. __..,:,..,. " " " ' ' ' P f f i e . e 's Z . i g h t - e r : r e A ; J J i n e s . qn i t h , . , sa.nre mast;f as i o w -
· , , , , '"" ::,;:,.:. -vo l t ao e Un.es,o0.nd aisq;_-,,ån a d d - i tn.o» i e eu.ed in 1 [ / 7 6 to t h e NBVF
#" •• · , . • : J J . « • P u b l.i-c a.ti on I 79-_1964 - ' { r å v i s i . q n s , .r e g a r c d i n g Cammon. ..:Sit-ing
• '· /• ·, _ . . , j y ; _ • O:f!.."tween C'ou!-VO l " t p g e E,1:n_efi, Cig'ht..-e.urTm-,.t L'i.n e e a n d Commo.n
• • -.: , , , . . . - - • A å i a l L h s i a l 1 a t i , . ( t n (PAA) op - t h e . rs_f.m.e r-ata p,f mae t:e ":

. -. § 325. Pro:r;_imivy to a n i l c r o e s i n q 9-J: q u i ! } J . i n f ! S

The sho:r:test d i.s cance between bara ;lines and any b u c 1 i n g or

part of a building shall be 1 m. Bare lines shall pass at
least'2 m above any roof, scaffold1ng, etc.

§ 326. a r r i å r - f r u e n y qommunieation o Zow-vol.taqe i n s

LocaJ. lines and distribution networks may be used f o r carr:ier-

f:r:equency communication for private g_urposes.

Electr:icity suppiy under:takings may also permit the use of

carrier-frequency for other purposes. This must form the
subject of agr:eement. in each Lnd i.v Ldu a.L case.

\ Equipment for the establishment of such carrier-frequency

,
communication must be appLoved by NEMKO.
:
'i

. . . .__ _.1!"l.
The use of such eqU'i.pment l\!ust;>not be detrimental to other:
carrier-frequency communication, general broadcasting, r:adio
i t # communications, services for air traffic and shipping, etc .
' : . " .,,._ • .The frequency select.ed shall be approved by the Telegraph
Office.
: ; . . ."'f
.,, .. .,.

.. ,
..
... -,,'
..
. Il - "

4 "

-
 Carrier-frequency communication on high-voltage
Carrier-frequency communication on high-voltage lines for
telephone communication, measurement puri:ioses, control opera-
tions and signalling is permitted, with the provision that
the equipment connected to the lines is used exclusively
for operation of the high-voltage system. The use of such
equipment must not be detrimental to other carrier-frequency
communications, general broadcasting, radio communications,
services for air traffic and shipping etc. The frequency
selected shall be approved by the Telegraph Office. 0
Where carrier-frequency communication is conducted over high-
voltage lines, special safety measures shall be taken with re-
gard to the passage of current between high-voltage and light-
c u r e n t lines. The carrier-frequency equipment shall be con-

0
nected via condensers. Choke coils shall be inserted into
the high-voltage lines. Both condensers and coils shall be
of the high-voltage type. The connection to the condensers
shall be through a fusebox.

The owner of the high-voltage installation may also permit

other carrier-frequency communications, but only after agree-
ment with the Telegraph Office 9nd with the approval of the
Electricity Inspectorate. The requisite safety measures
shall be taken.

Note:
Tne fusebox for opertional communications must be
sho1,m in Fig. 18, § 337.

Approval of other carrier-frequency communications may, for

example, cover broadcasting and telephone communication to
,i}f.
broadcasting stations and booster stations f,;ir radio l-ines.,i<f;l_,•"<t::
:Il, 'l"''
.. ;l --
330. Unused lines !?;_ t

t-.;-,

Where an outdoor line ceases to be used, it shall either be

0
taken down or else maintained in accordance with the Regula-
tions.

Protective devices
Where indoor or outdoor equipment or connection devices a e
connected to outdoor lines in such a manne that damage may
result by reason of heavy current or atmospheric discharges,
the light-current installation shall be provided WLth adequate
protection. Protective devices shall be fitted as close to
the line lead-in as possible. Where voltage fuses a e used
(for lightning conductors, s e e § 207), attentrion must be
paid to obtaining a paticularly good earth connection.
Voltage fuses generally take the form of point-type light-
ning conductors, ball-type Z.igptning conductors or v c u u m
liqhtinini;a,onductors. These are shown s ch ematica llu in
Fig. 15 A, 8 and C.
Current fuses take the form of fusible cutouts. These are
shown schematically in Fig. 15 D and E. T e last-named
has a wire winding which heats a soldered connection so
hat!'a moving component is released and marks the position
of the fuse.
,.-11e:

T
' · - .. . , f , . . . , _ ; - . (
¢- - .

V o t u g e t u s e lpo,n1-1ypel
...l._ 1 ooov

Vollage fuse lball-type)

700V

D.
l
--c::}-
Voltagtl:fuse (vacuum!
350V

Current luse ltusib6e wire)

2A

C u r r e u l f u s e I thermal}
0.5A/45 .:.CS

f. J[ 1, ... stormer-

f',g /.S
,. .. l',.!'-

-l'-. ·.,,,';.,,,(..,
,. ...'!' .. •...

A Iig,zt-curren instaliation may also be fused by tfte use of

a -trans.former havi.ng separate windings (Fig. ..JS FJ.

Xhe XeZ.egraph Office has its own fuse regulations for its
equipment. Xhese a.re sn.own in 'Fig. 16 and described below.
The symbols used in Fig. 16 are the same as are shown in
Y,ig. 15. Aerial lines are shown as s o l d lines, under-
ground cables as undulating lines and indoor cables as
broken Lines.

The 'De.Z.eg-c,aph; Office's qui de=Iii nee s!;zould also be followed,

as far as possible, for othey lgh-current installaions
whic e connec'f:d to outdoor lines.
 ,._ -f-" --.,....,.._,- __.,_,.,
"-

34

In subscribecr's excfrange:

i. Where the hoZ.e qf t;.he 'line between the exchange and

1:.he subscriber takes the forrn of cable, a Q. 5 A/4-5 secs
earrent fuse is o be used.

2. Where f:he line td the exchan!Je is an overhead line, a

700. V voltage fuse is 1:;o be' used wit:h a 0. s' A au.nr en t;
fuse. X:he current fuse. shall,be s i t.u at ed on tite et-at:«
ion e i de in r el.airi.on ta the v o l-baq e fuse.

3. Where the overhead 'line enters the exchange in the form .,,.,
of a- cable, a O. 5 A cusmen.t: fuse is to be used vn the
exchange and a 700 V voltagP fuse on the cable pole if

n
the overhead line is above 1 km l/onq , , •·

At the subscriber's end:

4. Where the who'le of the line between the exchange and

the subscriber takes the farm of cable, no fuse is
required.

5. Where the aonneo bi.on contains more than 1 km of over-

head Z..ine,.a. ro» V voltage,fus.e, is tio be used.

Cables -i.ncluded in sifbscriber's line:

6. Where a change from cable eo aerial line occurs, a

700 V uo l.tiaq e fuse is to be us ed , (For eub=ee.a: oab l-es,
see 12 below.)

Far subscriber telephones in general,.: .. ,

7. Where experience shows.that the foreeaing Re-gu lat ions
da nat give satisfactory results, fuses ta suit the
circumstances should be used.

In trunck line station:

8. Where the whaZ.e of the line consists of cable, it

should terminate in transformers. Na fuse is ta be (
used.

9. Where the line is taken ta the station as an overhead

'line a 350 V voltage fuse is ta be used ta i tzh. a O. 5 A
i, current fuse, the current fuse should be situated a•,
r the station side in relation to the vaitage fuse.

10. Where the overhead line is connected into the station

by means o f eabZ., a 0.5 A current fuse is to be
used in t h e station and a 3 50 V voltage fu se on tshe
cable eale.

OabLe included in tru,ik l.i.ne s: t

11. Where a change fram cable to overhead 'line occurs, a
oo l baoe; fuse is ta be used, ereferably a vaeuu111
fuse
of an especially reliahla tuee.
 35

12. Where a change from overhead line to sub-sea cable

occurs, a 350 V voltage--fuse only need be used with
qu t t ap er ch a or ba la t a=i n eu la t ed cables. With p a p e r
·, or pobyethylene-insulated cables both current and
voltage fuses must be fitted. For a core diameter
of 1.4 mm or larger the current fuse shall be of 8 A,
and for smaller diameters, 3 A. The voltage fuse
shall be of 350 V rating.

C Scbscr 1ber hne

Un,91ound
.-
Exchange

- - -c.:::>- - - -
Line

c..ble

Ove,ht!ad
-----=-;i--

*
hne

0 Undl.-rg,ound -----=- -- -
cable and
ove,he..d line

Long--t1,;1anc.t! Sta11on

-){_______
lone

Underground
cable

·- -------

Underground ·1r<=>·---
_JL=----
Cdl>le a1id
overhedd hne

0 Fig. 16

For long-distance telephone lines in general:

0 1 J. Where experience shows that the foregoing Regulations

d not give satisfactory results, f u e s to suit the
crcumstances should be used.
 .. 1
- -...
}

. I C - _ . . . . .: . . . . . . . . . . - - ...
36

Where a tel.ephone line is carried on the same masts as

a high-voltage line, telephone equipment shall be fused
in accordance wit}!§ 323. This may be done by using
the layout shown schematicaZ.y in F_ig. 17.. T.he Jna-in
ai.r ou-it=bre ake» B ,nusb be fi,tted w1,th ep eo i a l: long c a r -
rent fuses. The cofl U.discharge excess voltage from
the Z.ine to earth. T i s a transformer having separate
windings.
•
""\
l.•
\__

f
A _
.--. ...1 . ...._

4Af B
0
--
r--y---- u

- " ' 2Ao Q 2A ,.

t---@----<
L.,...._J
;7
T t l p h o n e equ1pmen1

Fig. 17

Where aar r i e r=f re quenov communication is carried over

high-voltage lines, special safety de-oi-ces in accordance
o
w i t h § 327 shall be fitted at the junction between the
high-voltage line and the light-current installation.
The carrier-frequency equipment shall be conneated via

o·
a condenser. Choke coils shall be inserted into the
high-voltage lines. The connection tothe"aondensers -
sh a ZZ be through· a .f'u e eb ox, which .may have a layout
as shown 'in Fig.. 18. The earth lead s ha l-L take the
shortest path to the station's earth el.ectrode.
 .
37

G
ShOf"t-circu,t device

2>-, C u r r e n t t u t e

J Voltage lutes

I
I I
L ..J

Eanh
""' Filtllf

Telt,phone equipment

F111 18

Radio aerials exposed to excess voltages resulting from

atmospheric discharge should be fused in exposed situa-
tions.

Fig. 19 shows a cutout .switch designed for use in a house

where an aerial is brought in. It is manually operated

C and connects the aerial to earth during thundery weather.

If no one is available to operate the device, a point-type
lightning conductor must bi fitted to divert the majority
of the discharge to earth.

Fig. 20 shows a lightning conductor for outdoor use intended

for insertion in front of the aerial lead-in.

C Fig. Zl represents a lightning conductor haoing the same

function, but suitable by virtue of its design for fitting
on a ceiling or in a loft as an aerial fuse.

\ .
"
.. )'
.;
. .,....
.
'\
 38

A point type lightning conductor may in all cases be re-

placed by a ball-type conductor or a vacuum conductor.

0
f',g. 19 Fig. 20 Fig. 21

C)

0
 f. CABLES (FOR UNDERGROUND, OVERHEAD OR SUB-MARINE USE)

§ ,971.

Underground cables shall be laid at least 0.5 m below the

surface and shall normally be protected by metal sheathing,
pipes or conduits o . have another appropriate protection.
I there is any danger of harmful gases collecting in such
conduits, steps must be tak·en to ensure adequate ventila-
tion.

Underground cables shall be laid in.such a manner that they

do not interfere witb other cable systems. Bearing in mind
possible future trench-laying, the cable path shall be marked
where this is feasible. The si½uation of the cable shall be
shown on accessible maps and plans.

Cables laid on the sea bed shall be px:ovided with mechanical

protection suitable to the conditions ana shall be constructed
with regard to the water pressure at the depth at which they
pre to be laid.
Overhead cables may be unsheathed. Supporting wires or
sheaths shall be'ciimensioned to have an adequate breaking
strain.

No-te:

Re ( a } a b o v e . A t t n t i o n is d r a w n to t h e g u i d e - l i n e s l a i d
dnwn by t h e N o r w e g i a n Communal E n g i n e e r i n g
As e o c-i-a t-i on ,
Re. ( c) above. Where emo ætrh: l ead=eh ea t-h.ed o a b l e s a r e to be
s a s p e n . d e d , 'tihe c a b l e - h a n g e r s , s u p e o v t i n g
w i r e s a n d b r a c e t s s h a l l be g e n e r o u s l y d i m e n -
••,.1

: s i o n e d f r o m t h e m e c h a n i c a l e o i n t of v i e w .

§ ,3 7 2 . E e c t r o e c h n i c a l requiTements
0 P a p e , cotton, silk, rubber, plastic and similar materials
may be used as cable insulation. In thB case of the three
.. :..:.. first-named, whicb are hygroscopic to a greater or lesser
Jo
.
·" .
;
design, joints, branches and terminations shall normally
be effected in sleeves capable of being sealed, or in boxes
. .......
-
'I 'I".. " ..... or cable..,caps which are dried out or filled with fi.).ling

0 ,,.. - 1 , .

':,-.
compound.

Note:
)(.: • ; s .
Paper-i:n.su l-a t e d c a b l-e s a?;"e n o t s u i t a b . l e f o r c o n n e c t i o n in
« .... : , , , , \ i :.";
, v_,i!!Ji,f:_.i-':f: o p e n b o x e s or c o n n e c t o n p d n l s .
r. > ... •
- . JC
" r;,;!'. f,. Dry p a p e r i n s u l a t i o n is h y g r o s c o p i c a n d m u s t be p r o t e c t e d
• -, "":! ";;: f r o m damt2, e i t/h e r by h e nme t-i o; s e a l i n g , w h i c h is u s e d w h e r e ,
. .:.. > ' s · fo examl?Z..e, t:Jze errti-ia:e c a b l e s y s t e m i s , u n d e r p r e s s u r e or
\. ..., , . . : : ' . " l ..vacuum, on by p l u g g i n g ish e c o n n e c t i o n p o i n t w i t h a s p e c i a l
•, - , . . . , . : . 1 . compound.
';:.ff;.·;:.
- , .,. .:i.-!...'.i:-M·..;
-7:I:-r. · ..i. ,
•. r

. ,,.,..,'!:..:«""• ,.,
 Cab Les having an impregnated ,.fOKton or s · " l.k» insu1.a tion,
as also those insulated with rubber or plastics, are n o
hygroscopic and may therefore be connected in open boxes
and connection panels.

Crossing and adjacent s i i n g underground

Where two or more light-current,,cables cross or occupy adja-

cent underqround sites, attention shall be paid to inductive
effects and to mechanical damage to the cables by reason of
frost or trenching operations. C
Where light-current cables and low-voltage cables occupy
adjacent underground sites, attention shall be paid to in-
ductive effects. Underground bight-current cables shall be
at least 0.5 m from low-voltage, medium-voltage and high-
voltage cables unless a mechanically robust protection is
fitted between the cables, e.g. bricks, concrete slabs or
other suitable protection, s e e § 509 a n d § 679. This
does not, however, apply to light-current cables serving
only for the operation of heavy-current installations.
The crossing of cables should be avoided. Where this is
not possible, a mechanically robust protection shall be
fitted between the cables at the crossing point, e.g. bricks,
concrete slabs or other suitable protection, s e e § 509 and
§ 679.
Where light-current cables and high-voltage cables follow a
parallel course for any considerable distance, checks must
be made to ensure that a dangerous voltage does not occur
in the light-current cables as a result of a short-circuit
in the high-voltage installation.

Note:

Tjze rule should be that the Light-current cable oQcueies

the uppermost position where conditions peri--this.

,IJ'his app l-i es in pa rtsi-cu'l an to l-iqht=eur cen t: eab Lee bebonq=

ing to the Telegraph Officø,and S a t e Railways.

§ 380. Grossing and adjacen sieing under the sea

0
.. Where light-current cables and heavy-current cables occupy

f
°'-'' adjacent sites dn the seaqed, attention shall be oaid to oro-
.. •
- viding a good spacing between the cables tor the eurpose •

0
';. of laying, repair and lifting. Crossing should be avoided
.x for the same reason.

Note:

From the point of uie.w of operational safety during normal

working, there is no reason why submarine cables should not
 41

lie close to one another or even cross one another. The

reason for advising that crossing should be avoided and
Pequiring a certain spacing between cables is, however,
the need to facilitate lifting a cable, e.g. for repair,
without damJging either the cable concerned or other
cables in the vicinity, and also to prevent the possibility
of confusing cables when they are lifted. Such a confusion,
particularly where heavy-current cables are involved, may
have fatal consequenes during repair work. The spacing
which should be provided between cables thus depends on
circumstances and on the ease with which a cable-boat or
barge can be manoeuvred in the area. Where the cable is
s h o l and the depth small, short spacing between neigh-
bouring cables will suffice; with longer cables and a
greater depth the spacing must be wider.
m¾nimum spacing are recomended.

length and up to 100 m devth at least 25 m spacing

length and up to 200 m depth at least 50 m spacing
length and over 2C'O m depth 100 - 200 m S?acing

f a new instai la bi on 'fis eia.ed close to an existing inst a l>

'lation, the.owneP of the 'lat'teE must be consulted so "t.h at:
a g r e m e n m a y he reached as to the layout in each individua"z
case. The Telegraph Office considers that this procedure is
normally unnecessary if crossing is avoided and the follow-
ing spacings bet-ween cables can be achieved:

Under 500 m length an'-å up to JOO m depth at least 100 m spacing

500-2000 m length and u& to 200 m depth at least 200 m spacing
above 2100 m length and over 200 m depth at least 500 m spacing

With r e g a d to the crossing of submarine cables, this should

t-ake place only with the agreeent-of all interested parties,
as i crea£es o t only technical, bu abso legal problems.
For instnce if a fault develape n the lower cable, it may
requiPe t h e a m o v a l oft-he upper cable in order to effect a
ir'epair. As a rule the position .!Jzen «i e trha t:whoever causes
a faul in another cable l,)}zile repaiing his own must at
once t-ake the necesary aciion to repair the damaged cable,
even if thi3t, i,nvolves de1aying the repair of his own cable.
The cost of i:Zhe repair must be borne by the p = s o n causing
the damage. See a l s o § 13.
 g. ELECTRIC

requirement"
Fencing equipment shall provide voltage pulses which are
not dangerous to humans or animals. The working instruc-
tions applicable to the equipment, together with installa-
tion regulations and safety rules approved by NVE shall be
observed. Mains-operated equipment shall be regarded as
high-voltage equipment up to and including t e terminals to
which the fence wire is connected.
C
Outdoor fence wire shall be mounted on special poles. Use
must not be made of poles intended for use with other lighe-
,· ,. ,,
.
current, low-voltage or high-voltage lines. Eence wires

0
belonging to different sets of fencing e q u i m e n t must not
be able to make contact with each other and shall not.;be
attached to the same poles or mountings. Fence wires must
not come into contact with grass or branches. Fence wires
"
l
are not to cross public road or railway.
i:
Fencing equipment may be placed indoors or ou-of-doors, but
,:
it may not be placed or conpected t n ac.commodati.on arp;a,a j n
which there is a danger of fire or which contains corrosive
:?'
' .
substances. It must never be so placed that either the -,..,. .
equipment itself or the fence wire connected to it can, due
to any foreseeable fault, come into live contact with other ...i.
"'.. ,. ·
electric lines or parts of any electrica installation.

The crossing of other electric lines shall as far as possible

be avoided. If crossing is unavoidable, the greatest poss,
1
angle of cross shall be as close to 90° as possible. Fence
wire whose horizontal distance from low-voltage overhead
lines is less than 2 m, and from high-voltage overhead
lines is less than 15 m, shall not be suspended highen than
1 m above ground level.

No te :

'Phe prohibition on i.n,staliinr{ fencing equie_mertt in certain 0

f y p e s of accommodaion is base.don the.fiee.-dange.r in ac-

l.
commodation areas containing combustible dust (e.g. i , . T

oarns) and the.possibility of damage in accommoaa.tion areas·:

containing corrosive vapour·s (e.g. cow-houses, et-a lle, "'
piggeries and ften-hoses).

§ >392. Mains-operated equipment

0
_ "l Where ma Lns+oper a ted fencing equipment is >installed o u t - o -
..- ? l : - doors it shall be mounted in a protective housing. Connec··
• j tion to the mains may be by means of ,fixed wiring and a 2-
. pole switch and/or plug contact. Equipment for mounting
- •. • - t out-of-doors shall not have a flexible lead of more than
'':.,- "" , - ·d 1. 5 m in length.
J:..; r,;.... a - - . _ ,t: , .. ..t ,.,;. i;, ·-;,:
- ,... - r . . . , j j - " " 1 . .._ -. 7.;r
-.r..,f"'.::;.,..Cl!II..• • .. "',, .,,, ..., ._ 'I..• ,.se•'l-.
'"" ?<i\l'."V 1J I( Æ
,:--.,:.-/ f""i ·.n,...... •:t..\
- 1,"¥" • ,i; -1r.--1. z.,..- v i.
l. J;. - .,..t ..; j: "'; ' t ./.... • " ";, - t.:: ,. • '"!....
• t.,.i, - ' • . '"' ·:;t, - ,
" ..-µ .I :. i ..,.,.' i"· " ' ! , ! - #· ...
 43

•,1
Not.e:

The choice of mounting position depends on Loca'L: condi-

tions and facilities for connection to the mains. The
mains connection shall be made by an autJzarized electrical
oon t rao.t-o r. Ngl,)equipment should be of the doub le=i neu t at ed
type.

Equipment having a met.al casing l,)ithout doubl insulation

mu&t have tl,)O earth terminals, one for the protective earth
C w
and one for the l,)orking earth (see IS. 207). One terminal is
used for connecting the earth line foT prot.ective earthing,
l,)hile the other is used for connecting the earthing elec-
trode. These earth terminals or earth lines must. not be
connected to each other.

n § 3 9 3 .• Battery-operated equipment.

The battery for battery-operated equipment should be rated

at not more than 24 V. Where the battery voltage is above
24 V, the equipment shall satisfy the same requirements as
apply to mains-operated equipment so far as this is demanded
by NEMKO. It shall be designed for outdoor installation
without the aid of additional protection.

Note:

Battery-operated equipment is normally portable and is

generally installed close to the fence poles. Where
conditions make it desirable, the equipment may also be
installed permanently.

.'
 SECTION II C

C REGULATIONS FOR LOW-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS

a. General provisions

0 b. Machine installations
c. Transformer installations
d. Accumulator installations
e. Capacitor installations
f. Main input and distribution installation
g. Installation equipment and wiring
h. Equipment
i. Installations in various types of accomodation
k. Installations in the open air
1. Special installations
m. High-voltage installations connected to
low-voltage mains

0
 SECTION IIC

REGULATIONS FOR LOW-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS

a. General provisions Page

§ 400. Obligatory inspection 6
§ 401. Marking 6
§ 402. Protection against contact 7
§ 403. Insulation resistance 7
§
§
§
404.
405.
406.
Carrier-frequency
Construction, location etc.
Protective earthing
8
9
10
C
§ 407. Extra-insulation 11
§ 408. Rules for earthing 11
§ 409. Construction of earth connections 13
§ 410. Laying and connection of earth conductor8 15
§
§
§
411.
412.
415.
Earthing electrodes
Earthing of power wiring
Temporary installations
15
19
19
0
b. Machine installations
§ 416. Design and installation 20

c. Transformer installations
§ 420. Design and installation 21

d. Accumulator installations
§ 425. Design and installation 22

e. Capacitor installations
§ 427. Design and installation 24

f. Main input and distribution installation

§ 431.
§ 433.
Input to buildings etc.
Arrangement and markin of fuse and
25
0
switch-boards 33
§ 434. Location of equipment, apparatus, fuse and
switch-boards 33
§ 435. Service passages and clearance 34
§ 436. Connections in board and panel instal-
lations 34
§ 437 Excess. voltaqe protection 1 c;

g. Installatio equipment and wiring

§ 441. Fuse design 36
§ 442. Cartridge fuses 36
§ 443. Marking of fuses 36
§ 444. Types of fuses 37
 Page
§ 445. Fuse loads 37
§ 446. Location of fuses and connection to 38
equipment
§ 447. Fusing of machines 39
§ 448. Fusing of wires and cables 40
§ 449. Fusing of motor circuits 45
§ 451. ConnectioI).s 47
§ 452. Bare connections 47
C §
§
§
453.
454.
455.
Insulated wires and cables
Freely-mounted insulated wires
Conduits
47
48
49
§ 456. "Rørtr!td" and cables 51
§ 457. Paper-insulated cables 52
§ 458. Flexible cords and cables 55

0 § 459.

§ 460.
Transition from fixed wiring to flexible
cord or cable
Crossing of other low-voltage wires and
57

conductive objects 57
§ 461. Distance from light-current wires 58
§ 462. Distance from high-voltage lines 58
§ 465. Switches 58
§ 466. Control-current and signalling installations 59
§ 467. Plug and socket-outlets 60
§ 468. Connection boxes 61

h. Equipment
§ 471. Staionary equipment 62
§ 472. Portable equipment 62
§ 473. Overheating of equiprrent terminals 62
§ 476. Heat-generating apparatus and heating
installations 53
§ 477. Welding equipment 75
§ 481. Electric fences 78
§ 482. Mains-operated fencing equipment 79
§ 483. Toys etc. for connection to the mains 79

0 i. Installations in various types of location

§ 486. Classification groups 80
§ 487. Control rooms 31
§ 488. Dry rooms 82
§ 489. Dirty rooms 83
§ 490. Damp rooms 84

0
§ 491. Wet rooms 96
§ 492. Corrosive areas 88
§ 493. Garages 88
§ 494. Fire-risk rooms 89
§ 495. Explosion-risk rooms - See NVE Coll1JTI. 1/77
§ 498. Agricultural installations 92
§ 499. Bomb shelters 97
k. Installations in the open air Page
§ 501. Apparatus, machines and installation
material 109
§ 503. Permanently laid leads and cables 109
§ sos. Flexible cables 109
§ 507. Loading of cables 110
§ 508. Underground cables 112
§ 509.

§ 511.
Crossing and adjacent siting of underground
cables
Overhead lines, insulators and poles
113
114
C
§ 512. Unused Lines 114
§ 513. Crossing of low-voltage and medium-voltage
lines 115
§ 514. Crossing of light-current lines 115

0
§ 515. Adjacent siting of light-current lines 116
§ 516. Crossing of high-voltage lines 116
§ 517. Adjacent siting of high-voltage lines 116
§ 518. Crossing and adjacent sitinq of lines in
relation to public roads 116
§ 519. Crossing of railways 117
§ 520. Crossing and adiacerit sitinq of lines in
relation to ""'rial cable-ways 117
§ 525. Crossing of very crowded areas etc. 117
§ 526. Crossing and adjacent siting of lines in
relation to buildings 11 7

l. Special installations
§ 527. Electrolytic and electroplatinq installa-:-
t.irms 118
§ 528. Portable generator sets 119

m. High-voltage installations connected to low-voltage

mains
I. General Provisions
§ 531. Regulations 121
§ 532. Notification 121
§ 533. Inspection

II. Gas discharge lighting installations

121
0
§ 536. Definition of gas-discharge lighting
installations 121
§ 537. Inspection of materials 122
§ 538. Earthing and earth conductors 122

Gas discharge lighting installations 0

of voltages over 2 5 0 V and up to 1 0 0 0 V.
§ 539. Field of use 122
§ 540. Transformers 122
§ 541. !·liring 123
§ 542. Protection from contact 123
§ 543. Switches and fuses 123
 Gas-discharge lighting installations of
voltages over 1000 V and up to 8000 V.
"age
§ 546. Field of use 123
§ 547. Transformers 124
§ 548. Wires 124
§ 549. Protection from contact 127
§ 550. Switches and fuses 127
§ 551. Outdoor gas-discharge lighting installations 128

III. Oil-firing installations

§ 552. Range of application 129

§ 553. Protective casing 129

0 §
§
554.
555.
§ 556.
Inspection of equipment
Conditions for connection
Voltage
129
12 9
129
§ 557. Switches and fuses 130
§ 558. Niring 131
§ 559. Earthing 131
§ 560. Portable oil-firing units 131

IV. Medical X-ray installations

§ 561. Definition 132

§ 562. Protection from contact 132
§ 563. Uninsulated wires 133
§ 564. Earthing 133
§ 565. Transformers 133
§ 566. Fuses and switches 133
§ 567. Breakdown fuses 13il
§ 568. !\Tires and cables 134

V. Non-medical X-ray installations

§ 569. Definition 134

§ 570. Protection from contact 135
§ 571. Uninsulated wires 136
§ 572. Earthing 136
§ 573. Transformers 137
§ 574. Fuses and switches 137
§ 575. Breakdown fuses 138

0
 6

SECTION I IC
REGULATIONS FOR LOW-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS
a. GENERAL PROVISIONS

q 400. Obligatory inspection.

Materials and equipment, etc. which is subject to

inspection pursuant to the Law o 24 May 1929 may not
C
be offered for sale, sold, i n a l l e d or used before the
model or type c o n c e r n e d been inspected and approved
by the Norwegian e c t r i c a l Equipment Inspectorate

n
(;:-:,rweqi;,:-. dDbreviation : NEMKO) .

Individual items of equipment or special-purpose equipment

which is not subject to approval by type or model shall be
inspected and approved by the Electricity Inspectorate or
Local Inspectorate, or shall be submitted for special
inspection by NEMKO where this is required by the
Electricity Inspectorate or Local Inspectorate.

Owners and users of electrical installations shall, where

any component of such installation is shown to be
defective or deficient, immediately take steps to put it
to rights. S e e § 21.

Note:

A list of materials and equipment which have been

approved will be found in the NEMKO Approvals Lists.
Attention is also drawn to the NEMKO specification
of types of materials and equipment subject to in-
spection.

§ 401. Marking

Electrical machines, equipment and installation materials

shall be durably, clearly and distinctly marked with the
type designation and manufacturer's name or mark, also
o
with the voltage, type of current, amperage and, where
appropriate, output, frequency, rev/min speed, type of
connection, enclosure designation etc. in so far as this
is necessary for its purpose.

Machines, equipment, materials, wires and cables shall be

designed for the type of current and nominal voltage appro-
(j
priate to the type of current and mains voltage supplied by
the installation concerned.

In the case of equipment which has been repaired, rewound or

modified, new markings must be applied in the output, vol-
tage, amperage, etc. is changed. The original plate must
not be removed. The new plate shall be stamped with the
year in which the changes were carried out.
 7

Note:

Equipment and certain types of apparatus such as

transformers, reactors, etc. of 220 V nominai voi-
tage shouLd not be used in instaiiations having a
higher nominai mains uo lt aqe (e.g. 230 V).

Machines and equipment which are frequency-depen·dent

shouLd not be connected to instaiiations using a
0 frequency different from their marked frequency.

Attention is aiso drawn to standards for eLectricai

machines and transformers issued by the Norwegian
ELectrotechnicai Committee (Norwegian abbreviation:
NEK).

0 § 402. Protection against contact.

Current-carrying components which are not adequately

insulated shall be protected against accidental contact
either by their design or location or by special guards.
This does not apply to installations in working areas
( s e e § 487), nor to welding equipment, annealing or
melting furnaces, the slip-rings and commutators of open-
type motors, etc.

§ 403. InsuLation resistance.

The insulation resistance for lines between two successive

fuses or after the last fuses in an installation shall be
at least 1000 ohms for each volt of working voltage (e.g.
with 220 V, 220 000 ohms) measured between both the indi-
vidual lines and between each line and earth. For purposes
of measurement, electrical machines, transformers, heating
equipment and other current-consuming equipment shall be
disconnected.

Electrical machines, transformers, equipment, etc. shall

0 in each case have an insulation resistance of at least
voltacte in V
megohms.
u t p u t in k V A + 1 000

In wet locations and those containing corrosive materials,

0
also in outdoor installations, only 50% of the insulation
resistance value quoted above is required. In the case of
installations using conduit wiring laid in concrete or
under plaster, mortar and similar materials, only 25% of
the insulation resistance prescribed in the first section
above, but not less than 50 000 ohms, is required during
the first year after the work is carried out.
 8

Heating equipment in the heated condition normal to its

operation, may have a lower insulation resistance than
is given by the above formula, but this shall not be
below the following values:

Equipment without earth connection: 50 000 ohms

Equipment with earth connection: up to 5 kW 50 000 ohms
5 - 10 kW 40 000 ohms
10 - 20
20 - 50
Over 50
kW
kW
kW
30
20
10
000
000
000
ohms
ohms
ohms
0
In the case of batteries of accumultors the insulation
resistance shall be such that the current measured between
each pole and earth does not exceed 0.5% of the maximum
discharge-current for which the battery is designed. For
purposes of measurement, the battery shall be disconnected
0
from the remainder of the installation, but not from the
selector switch.

Insulation resistance measurement shall be undertaken

using direct current and a voltage at least equivalent t
the operational voltage of the installation, but not below
250 V.

In the case of generator installations - and particularly

should the Electricity Inspectorate require it, of trans-
former installations; fixed devices shall be provided,
with which the insulation resistance of the installation
can be checked at any time.

The Electricity Inspectorate may require that suitable

portable insulation-measuring equipment shall be provided
for all installations.

The insulation resistance shall be measured after a

new installation has been set up and after extensions or
repairs have been effected.

0
Note:

With regard to motors and machines, attention is drawn

to the prevailing standards issued by the Norwegian
Electrotechnical Committee (NEK).

§ 404. Carrier-frequency.

Local mains networks and distribution networks may be

used for carrier-frequency communication for private
0
purposes.
The electricicy producing company may also permit the use
of carrier-frequency for other purposes. This must, how-
ever, form the subject of agreement in each case.
 9

Equipment for establishing such carrier-frequency communi-

cation must be approved by NEMKO.

The use of such equipment must not be detrimental to other

carrier-frequency communications, general broadcasting,
radio communications, services for air transport and
shipping etc ..

0 The frequency selected shall be that which has been approved

by the Telegraph Office.

§ 405. Construction, location, etc.

Equipment and materials shall be of approved construction
( s e e § 22, § 121 a n d § 400) and shall be used in accor-
dance with the conditions of approval. Machines, equip-
ment and installation material together with their appro-
priate protective enclosures shall be so constructed
that all stresses arising during operation due to arcing,
heat, damp, chemical, mechanical and electrical influences
can be withstood with adequate safety. Provision shall,
if necessary, be made for cooling, ventilation, drainage
of condensate, screening, operating instructions, etc.

Equipment and installation components having terminals for

the connection of flexible leads shall have provision for
the relief of tensional and torsional stresses.

Electrical installation components, live components and

their contact connections shall be so dimensioned,
constructed and located that when constant full load
current is applied to them it shall, under normal
conditions and in an appropriate situation, not result in
detrimental heating either of the installation components
themselves with the connection leads or of their
surroundings.
Installation componencs must in general be located where
0 they can be easily seen. Installation components of which
inspection and control are required during operation, must
be located in readily accessible and well lighted places
where inspection and control during operation can take
place without danger. They shall be placed in the posi-
tion for which they are designed and must be fitted and
used in such a way that unnecessary stresses are not im-
posed, neither on the installation components nor on the
surroundings. Marking and location must be arranged in
such a way that errors in the operation which may result
in damage are prevented as far as possible. Connectors
when used, shall be fitted in such a manner that the cur-
rent cannot flow or be interrupted unintentionally.

Equipment and installation components which require to be

earthed under certain conditions shall be provided with
an earth terminal or other contact device for earthing,
marked with the earth symbol.
 10

Fixed installation components shall be securely attached

to their supports. It must be possible to effect
connection and inspection after an installation
component has been attached to a wall or support, unless
the installation component is particularly approved for
any other way of connection. The connection space and
cover must be suitably designed and sufficiently spacious
to permit leads to be connected without havng to resort
to sharp bends and with adequate clearance between live
components and frame.

Connection terminals shall be r.urably marked if the

method of connection is not Jelf-evident. Earth
terminals shall be m a r c u with the earth symbol.

?er-i;.JuLated cable shall be used only with equipment

and material having an entry for such cable ( s e e § 457). n
Installations which are not in use shall either be removed
or maintained in accordance with the Regulations.

Note:

The following connection terminals may be used for

multi-strand cables in which the ends are not soldered:

a. Collar clips;
b. Clips having a collar-shaped disc;
c. Clip contacts;
d. Slide-on clips;
e. Split clips;
f. Box-type clips

§ 406. Protective earthing.

Earthing shall be so effected that the contact voltage

( s e e § 109) does not under ordinary circumstances
exceed 50 V.

Where this voltage level cannot be met, the installation

must, in addition to being earthed, also be provided
0
with equipment for quick and automatic disconnection of
the part of the installation in question, so that earth
faults cannot cause danger.

Note:

The requirement for limitation of the contact voltage

to 50 V does not apply to the conditions which may
arise where a double earth contact is used.

Normally, the equipment for quick and automatic discon-

nection may consist of an earth leakage circuit-breaker
having a sufficiently low tripping current.
 11

§ 407. Extra-insulation.

Equipment and materials constructed with approved extra-

insulation shall not be earthed or fitted with an earth
terminal or earth lead ( s e e § 116).
Note:

Equipment having approved extra-insulation is desig-

nated Class II and shall be marked with the symbol [cl

§ 408. Rules for earthing.

Exposed installation components must be earthed in
accordance with the rules given below. Earthing is not,
0 however, required in the case of installation components
which are insulated from their supports and protected
from accidental contact.

Class II (extra-insulated) equipment and machines are not

to be earthed.

Note:

The purpose is to restrict the earthing to those

places where it is really necessary. For instance,
in cellars, water-pipes and drain-pipes, if they
consist of conductive materials, should be connected
to one another and to the main earth lead.

.1 Exposed installation components must be earthed in damp,

wet, corrosive and explosion hazardous rooms and also in
bomb shelters and in the open air. In the case of cables,
the armour, conductive shield and conductive protective
sheath must be earthed even though the cable is provided
with an outer insulating sheath. Earthing is not required
if the voltage in the installation does not exceed 50 V.
In bathrooms, however, exposed components must always be
earthed irrespective of voltage.
0 Note:

Fire-risk rooms, dirty rooms, control rooms etc. may

also be damp or wet. If this is the case, earthing
must be effected as laid down above.

0 To prevent voltage differences due to faults (transfer

of currents) in orther places than bathrooms, the water-
pipe and bath waste-pipe made of conductive materials
should be connected to the earth lead.

.2 In dry rooms where the floor-cover is not insulated,

exposed parts of installation must be earthed. In the
case of voltages not exceeding 50 V, earthing may be
omitted.
 12

.3 In dry rooms where the floor-cover provides insulation,

exposed metallic installation components must be earthed
when their fixed positions are in the vicinity of pipes
or accessible building parts made of conductive materials
which are in conductive contact with earth, and there. is
a probability of simultaneous contact. Likewise, exposed
metallic components belonging to two pieces of equipment
etc. must be earthed when they have their fixed positions
in the vicinity of each other and there is a probability
of simultaneous contact. However, exposed metallic com-
ponents belonging to apparatus provided with a fixed con-
(;
nection may be interconnected without any connection to
earth, if earthing of the apparatus is not required.
Earthing may be omitted where the voltage does not exceed
50 V.

Note: C)
When assessing the probability of simultaneous contact,
account should be taken of possible conductive compo-
nents (e.g. parts of the building) which may produce
a conductive connection with å water-pipe or washbasin
etc.

Neither earthed nor non-earthed bare "rørtrad" may be

fitted within reach of a water-pipe ( s e e § 456). When
within reach of water-pipes, use should be made of
cables having a braided or similar metal sheath, or
of cables without conductive sheaths. Such metal sheaths
are not required to be earthed. See, however, item .1
above.

Earthing is not normally necessary in living rooms and

offices which have insulated floor covering, even when
simultaneous contact with other earthed components is
possible. Earthing is, however, necessary in kitchens,
dentists' surgeries, hairdressers' saloons, operation
theatres and rooms in which electric office machines,
sewing machines, etc. are used and are situated within
reach of one another.

. 4 In the case of buildings etc. in which conductive thermal

insulation (reflecting pasteboard) is used, an earth leak-
0
age circuit-breaker having a tripping voltage not above
30 mA must be connected at the beginning of the electrical
installation.

Where a single cable run is used to supply deep freezers

or special heating installations necessary to prevent frost
LJ
damage, and where the cables used have an outer insulating
sheath or are drawn into a concealed conduit, permission
will be given to by-pass any earth leakage circuit-breaker.
 13

§ 409. Construction of earth connections.

a. Earth connections shall be of copper and of a cross-

section suitable for the earth-leakage currents which
may be anticipated. Separately laid earth conductors
in the open or in the earth may, however, consist of
copper-sheathed·steel wire having an overall cross-
section of at le,st 20 mm2 and a copper cross-section
of at least 6 m m .
0 Earth conductors in capsuled bus bar systems which have
movable outlets, may consist of other metals than copper
when the corresponding equivalent cross-sections are the
same as for copper and all connections are such that
they provide satisfactory and lasting conduction. Where
an external earth conductor is to be connected, connec-

0 tion terminals etc. must be suitable for copper conduc-

tors.

a. Separately laid earth conductors having a cross-section

of 6 mm2 or less shall be insulated. The copper cross-
section shall be at least one-third of the equivalent
cross-section of the supply conductors. Separately laid
copper earth conductors2shall not, however, have a cross-
section less than 16 mm where they are exposed and are
not provided with special protecion from mechanical
stresses, and not less than 4 mm where they are pro-
tected. The copper cross-section need not normally be
greater than 50 mm2.

The size of earth conductors in the open shall take into

consideration any mechanical stresses.

Copper earth leads laid i the earth shall have a cross-

secrion of at least 25 m m .

c. Earth conductors in the same conduit as supply conductors,

shall be insulated in the same manner as the latter, and
their cross-section shall be equal to, or greater than,
one-third of the equivalent copper-s2ction of the supply

0 conductors, but not less than - 5 m m . They need not

normally be greater than 50 m m .

d. The earth conductor in a cable may be either a copper

braid or a wire insulated in the same manner as the
other conductors, or alternatively an uninsulated con-
ductor if it is in contact with the conductive protective

0
sheath of the cable. Insulated earth conductors and
copper braids shall have a cross-section as defined for
earth wires in conduits. Uninsulated earth conductors
in contact with the conductive sheath may be either single
or multistrand wire, the cross-section being at least:
 14

mm2 2
In 1.5 cable, 1 mm
In 2.5 mm2 cable, 1 mm2
In 4 mm2 cable, 1.5 mm2
In 6 mm2 cable, 1.5 mm2
In 10 mm2 cable, 2.5 mm2
In 16 mm2 cable, 4 mm2
In 25 mm2 cable, 6 mm2
In 35 mm2 cable, 6 mm2
In 50 mm2 cable, 10 mm2

e. The earth conductors in flexible cords and cables must

be of the same cross-sections as the current-carrying
0
conductors and be insulated in the same way as these.

f. Earth conductors and conductors serving the same

protective functions must be marked with the colours
yellow and green. Conductors having the two said
colours in combination, when used separately, or in
combination with two or more other colours in a cable
0
or conduit, must not be used for purposes ither than
earthing.
In the case of insulated earth conductors, the colour
combination yellow and green shall be so arranged that
in a randomly chosen 15 mm length of conductor, at
one colour must cover at least 30% and at most 70% of
the surface, while the remaining colour must cover the
rest of the surface.
Earth conductors which do not have the correct colour
combination through at their length must be marked
with a suitable insulating sleeve, self-adhesive ribbon
etc. which do have the correct colour combination at
all terminal positions.

Bus bars etc. when used for earthing may be marked by

means of painting. The marking must be in the form of
stripes having the two colours adjacent to each other.
Each of the colours shall be between 15 mm and 100 mm
wide.

The colour marking must be easily visible and permanent. 0

The marking must be easily visible in all boxes, cup-
boards, partitioned rooms, panels etc. and on all con-
ductors of which disconnection is possible.

0
Note:

The provisions in sub-clause f, paragraph 1, 2nd

sentence, imply that a conductor having green and
yellow insulation cannot be used for other purposes
even though an insulated sleeve of another colour is
put on, or the conductor is marked in any other way.
"Conductors serving the same protection functions"
are for ex amp le equipo tentia l connections and c omb.i ned
earth and neutral conductors (PEN conductors).
 15

§ 410. Laying and connection of earth conductors.

Earth conductors shall be as short as possible. They shall

be run in such a manner that they can be readily inspected.
They shall be protected against corrosion and against mech-
anical stresses (see a l s o § 409 (b)).

Earth conductors shall be so connected and fitted that the

earthed installation components do not themselves form a
series connection as earth conductors. Connection to the
0 earthed component shall be effected by means of specially
robust earthing clips. Metal components which are welded,
soldered, riveted or screwed together in a manner providing
a satisfactory conductive connection between such components
may have a common earth terminal clearly marked with the
earth symbol.

0 Where a number of earth conductors run to separate panel

supports, metal frames etc. they shall be connected to a
common earthing point or joined together to a common copper
earth conductor. Joins shall be welded, riveted or solder-
ed where approved screw or clip connections are not used.

Joins, branches and connections to earth electrodes shall

be effected with special care.

In domestic and similar installations, conductive water-

pipes must be connected to the main earth lead at the main
stop-cock using approved earthing clips. If the water-pipe
consists partly of insulating materials, then any acces-
sible conductive parts of the water-pipe system to the
house must be connected to the main earth lead if possible.
Exempt from this are pipe-components which are insulated
from earth for safety or operational reasons.

S e e § 411 concering the use of water mains as earth elec-

trodes.

Earthing of exposed parts of apparatus and equipment must,

as far as possible, be effected by means of an earth conductor

0
located inside the same sheath or conduit as the supply leads.

Switches and fuses are not permitted in earth conductors.

See Section IIC m for earthing of X-ray apparatus.

Note:

0 Water-pipe and waste-pipes of conductive materials should

be connected to the main earth Lead in the building to
prevent differences in potential.

§ 411. Easthing electrodes.

Earthing electrodes shall be made and dimensioned in such a

way that the passive resistance to earth is sufficiently
 16

low ( s e e § 406) even under the load of a constant earth-

leakage current of a. known value. The-connections to
such electrodes must be as short as possible. Earthing
electrodes shall be capable of heing disconnected for
measurement purposes, use being made o: readily accessible
contact clips er other contact-type connections.

Earthing electrodes shall normally be made =rom copper er

copper-clad steel. Plates, strip material and wire shall
have a thickness of at least 1 mm. 0
Provided the water mains are in continuous rretallic contact
and have a satis[actorv connection to earth, then this may
be used as earthing electrode.

Reinforcing steel ;;:ay al.so be used ;;s eart.h i nc e Lec trod e in f\

the concrete foundations of buildings or other structures, \)
provided these are sufficietly continubus. The connection
the main earthing point rr>•:st be connected in ;,,: .1-,ast 2 olaces
to t h e r e Lnf o r c L n q s r : . e e l , t h e s t e e l h a v i n g a d i ame t e r c-: at i

least 12 ITI.m. !.'"oundations which are of larc e r area thar; l(lO rn "
must, in a d d i t i o , have at l e s t ane c c n n e t i n G r e c ! :
exceeding 100 rn2, and be located at l e a t 10 discance fr,
each other.
'Ihe connection between steel and cor.oer nus t b e::ectcd :_n a
satisfactory manner and must be pr;ected against corrosion
and be accessible for inspection.

Pipes c<1rr:,,
ing fuels must not be used ns earthing electrodes.

Note:

P l a t e , sr:r-:;;, ;.Jirc-tit!:J-:Jmat er-i cl: 011 r o i s rriuv be ur ed ae e a r ; . : , , : i

el.ect rodee: S t ! ' ' P , ·"::re and red:: O.J"e c_··t.;,n .. r.:O:12 ef'_rce ...i v e v::.-::n" ; _ ; ; . V J .
In. t:w ca.';c c: ... st ce L co.-u;t ' ! , : . . f t i : 1 1 . : , l u: C:';;.:7c ? : r p c r : .:-.c.: :>· -'.,'-_"'n r i l ce ,
e l e . , anti ;;ar::cu:,J-::Z:1 r<();;.;; :.•,:·c:, a e !'a:.:J';,c:d c.g'i·:::s1;. Q . ! 1 1 1 : , s ! ' . c r : 2··-1
mc"ans cf .razhodi:c p r o - : . e t c n , i:; ·_:ilZ. o.J::"ti..'n ;JPC:,.'e advc.r.--;a.;::-'..3 -:o use
i11on earr.-':/ng t:Ze.::!troåes in.2:c.:ii c./' co;:1,;,r.

When t h e rei,,;-.-;rc1·Y?g s t e e l in ccncret:e _::-C''..U'.dati ..r s -:,a ust:.Jd c.r; ea.rc;-:i;r:;

e i ec t.rodes , ·e!.di.11g er las;!in:; !.,;ay be rc qarded :.::s su..;'ic-:·er;t connact....:on
betiseen t:-:e 1·e-:·r:.c-.=r:::na s zee l., The !12i>1---CJ1•c-::.n:1 c cee L h<.tSt- ::e connacr;ed
0
so as t.o f o n n on er m r Zocpz er a '':'e£h rer;wCrk.

Reinforcing of the building or structure should have a con-

ductive connection to the reinforcing steel in the foundation
as well. The connection between the lead to the main earth
point and the reinforcing steel, may be effected by bending
one or more pieces of steel out of the concrete or by making
0
a hole so that the steel is accessible. The connection may
also be obtained by means of a threaded steel bolt of a dia-
meter at least 15 mm, welded to the reinforced steel and
protruding through the concrete. Connection of the lead to
such a bolt may be carried out by means of cable lug and nut
secured by a spring-washer and protected against corrosion, or
by any other suitable means.

The provision prohibiting fuel pipes to be used as earth

electrodes does not prevent such pipes being connected to
the earthing system in order to prevent voltage differences.
 17

' - ' a s h i n g or we

Fuse b o x

0 Water pipes
Waste pipe

F i g . 1. ., e l e c t r o d e
Use of rlnfcrcing s t e l as earthinn

Con=rete or bric wall

i s e s in box or
se cupboard

0· a b l e in conuiLs
ncorporated •
wa Ll. o- 1.n b r i c k
ca;le in conUui h a v i nq .. Scc-c.:.n_crete •va Lt ,
c . concret; o:i
witht o pmin •
r owa r d s t h •••
e cove:.·
w a l

I ..;urfaces.

-
0
Earth c<1ble
:- '(

·{

Fig. g
 18
Fig. 2. E x a m p l e s - o · , 1 1 n g cc n n c c t i c ns to r e L n f o r c i nq s t e e l c sed
as earthing electrode.

B
D
0
A. Steel belts w e l d = r ene reinforcing steel B. a i n earth l c d

C. C:;.::.::.::,_ential connections D. Pc Ln f o r c f nc
fro
s t ee J b e n t e e r .
the n c r c t e 0
.. I

ea r t f
r s r'la!"

A. S t e e l b e l t s ...,.eldcd to t h e r e r a f o r c Lnq s t e e l a. a i r .c!"th l c d s

C. Equiootetial conrections

0
..-_-_-_-_---;::
I· ..
I - - ·.1
-·-- .;..:_;.___;.;;.;;..;._ .;._

- ' - . . ,__ : J_· •. .•.I

He-le ;;-:,..!,: . , . ::.?le cor.c r c e.c ..· 1 u , ;
t h e r e i nf c r c r nq s e cc t L u c ! o pe n
l.
------
Main earth lead Rciforc:-1 s i e ! b.,
and conccJlcd main earth \ e a fitted externally out f r t conrcP
:-Ja,ed ; n condu r r .
 19

§ 412. Earthing of power wiring.

The permnent connection to earth of the power wiring or

the neutral point of a low-voltage installation is not
permitted without special writting permission from NVE.
This permission is not, however, required for installa-
tions using a voltage below 50 V. Transformers and con-
verters for transformation down to reduced voltages are
not permitted to have their secondary windings connected
0 to earth. (For breakdown fuses, s e e § 623).

Note:

The provision prohibiting transformers and convertors

for transformation down to reduced voltages to have
earth connected secondary windings affects the design

0 of the transformers and convertors, and does not ex-

clude earthing of the secondary windings where this is
necessary for operational reasons. Earthing of the
secondary winding should as far as possible to a v o i d d ,
however, since dangerous voltages may enter the secon-
dary circuit resulting from an insulation fault in the
primary circuit.

§ 415. Temporary installations.

Tenporary installations are, in general, considered to be only such,

if they are not to be used for longer than about four
weeks or if they are to be used in connection with building
works while these are in progress.
Temporary installations shall, in general, be constructed
n d maintained in accordance with these Regulations. Minor
variations in layout can, however, be permitted, but the
provisions of the regulations in regard to safety against
fire, earthing and protection from accidental contact must
be satisfied.
Hand-lamps shall be in all respects constructed in accor-
dance with the Regulations.
0

0
 20

b. MACHINE INSTALLATIONS

§ 416. Design and installations.

Electrical machines shall be of robust design from the

mechanical, thermal and electrical point of view. They
shall have a suitably constructed housing, terminal box
and cooling arrangement appropriate to their operating
conditions and to the location in which they are to be
used. 0
Electrical machines shall be securely attached to their
supports and so fitted or protected that any sparks or

n
heat produced cannot result in fire.

For fusing of machines, s e e § 447.

Note:

Attention is drawn to the standards for electrical

machines issued by the Norwegian Electrotechnical
Committee (NEK).

Electrical machines should be maintained and cleaned

regularly. The production of sparks and overheating
must be prevented.

0
 21

c. TRANSFORMER INSTALLATIONS.

§ 420. Design and installation.

Transformers having one winding (the primary winding)

for connection to a high-voltage installation are
covered by the provisions governing high-voltage

0 transformers. These do not apply to smaller trans-

formers for installations which are connected on the
primary side to low-voltage mains, such as oil-burners,
fluorescent-tube equipment, etc.

When installing transformer, in particular oil filled

transformers, possible fire risks shall be taken into

0 account.
For fusing of machines, s e e § 447.

Note:
Attention is drawn to the standards for electric machines issued
by the Norwegian Electrotechnical Committee (NEK).
Electric machines should be maintained andcleaned regularly.
The production of sparks and overheating must be prevented.

0
 22

d. ACCUMULATOR INSTALLATIONS

§ 425. Design and installation.

Batteries of accumulators having a voltage higher than

0
42 V must not be made from readily combustible materials.

Smaller batteries of accumulators shall be installed in

a cupboard with an acid-proof s u p o r t . (Acid-protected
shelves.) Larger batteries s P l l be installed in a special
room.

e lightjn; ot accumulator rooms must be by means of light-

ing equipment and fittings approved for acid-containing
0
rooms ( s e e § 492).

Instructions for the handling of a battery should be exhi-

bited in its immediate vicinity.

The room or cupboard containing batteries which generate

particularly large quantities of combustible or corrosive
gases shall be well ventilated and protected by means of
acid-proof lining. The ventilation system must not cause
damage in other rooms.

The cells of large battery installations shall be insulated

from earth by means of a double layer of insulation con-
sisting of damp-proof material such as glass ·fibre. Smal-
ler batteries for voltages up to 110 V may, however, be
mounted direct on wooden or lead supports.

The insulation resistance.shall be such that the current

measured between each pole and earth does not exceed 0.5%
of the maximum discharge-current for which the battery is
designed. During measurement of the insulation, the
battery shall be disconnected from the remainder of the

0
installation, but not from the selector switch.

Note:

In view of the possible danger of exploaions during

charging, switches and plugs should be fitted outside
accwrrulator rooms.
Battery cases made from lead-lined wood and hard rubber are not
considered to be readily combustible. Hæever, battery cases
made from celluloid are so regarded.
0
The connection of the individual cells may be effected using lead
strip, 7.ecd wire or by means of welding. The connection points
should be smeared with vaseline, red lead or similar ant i=
corrosive material.
 23

Bare wire or wire having an acid-proof insulation may be used

in battery cupboards and rooms, and should be carried on
insulated supports.
The provisions of this Paragraph apply also to charging stations
and service stations in which batteries may generate combustible
or corrosive gases.

0
 24

e. CAPACITOR INSTALLATIONS

§ 427. Design and installation.

Electrical capacitors shall be of robust design from

the mechanical, thermal and electrical point of view
and have a suitably constructed casing, terminal box
and cooling arrangement appropriate to thelr operat-
ing conditions and to the location in which they are
to be fitted.
Capacitors shall be securely attached to their mount-
ings and fitted or protected in such a manner that any
sparks or over-heating cannot result in fire.
Care shall be taken to ensure that, when disconnected,
capacitors become fully discharged within a short period.
Q
A plate showing the critical factor in regard to residual
voltages shall be exhibited at the installation site and
at other points where residual, voltages may arise.

Note:
Capaaitors for balancing three-phase low-voltage mains are
normally delta-connected.
When siting capaaitors, care must be taken that harmful heating
from outside heat-sources is avoided. (Solar heat, air used
for cooling motors, etc.).
Banks of capacitors when used indoors should be sited in ventilated
positions where no fire risk exists and where the temperature
nomally does not exceed normal room temperature.
The requirement regarding rapid discharging of capacitors may be
met by:
1. Connecting the capacitor direct to the stator of a motor or
to the secondary terminals of a transfomer so that, when
the supply is removed, it is discharged through the windings
of the motor or transformer; 0
2. Providing the capaaitor with built-in or built-on discharge
resistances;
3. Using a speaial capaaitor-switch which, when the capacitor is
disconnected, automatically switches in a discharge resistance.
C
 25

f. MAIN INPUT AND DISTRIBUTION INSTALLATIONS

§ 431. Input for buildings etc.

1. Input wires and cables must be protected against over-

loading by means of suitable fuses or automatic circuit-
breakers in accordance w i t h § 448, table I o r § 457,
table 3. The protective device should be located at
the termination of the input wires or cable.

2. Input wires or cable, leading from the point of entry

to the overload protection must not endanger any part
of the building or other surroundings in the event of
short-circuits.

0 3. The above requirement of clause 2 may be considered ful-

filled provided one of the following conditions is satis-
fied:

3.1 Fuses of nominal current not exceeding twice the value

given for the specific cross-section of cable according
t o § 448, or automatic circuit-breakers adjusted to twice
the permitted load current for the specific wire or cable.
The protection devices are meant to act as a protection
against short-circuits, hence should be located at the
beginning of the wire or cable in question. The circuit-
breakers must be dimensioned to withstand any short-
circuit currents which may occur.

3.2 Wires or cables fitted in a short-circuit safe manner,

(see item 4).

3.3 Wires or cables fitted in a fire safe manner (see item 5).

4. Wires or cables may be assumed to be fitted in a short-

circuit safe manner if the following is complied with:

4.1 Multi-strand conductors of the weatherproof and corrosion-

resistant types, which are brought through walls inside
0 input tubes of porcelen or a similar quality material -
one tube being used for each conductor unless multi-
passage tubes are employed - or cables brought through
walls in hot-galvanized steel conduits.

The fuse box (cupboard) must be placed immediately adjacent

to the input tube. The input tube must slope outwards and

0 under exposed conditions must be sealed with a suitable

compound around the conductors, and any passages not used
shall be filled. Input tubes should be fixed to prevent
twisting.

Overhead supply lines and input conductors from these over-

head lines should not be capable of coming into contact
with parts of the building or with other objects likely
to damage the insulation.
 26

4.2 Underground cable fed directly up through the floor in a

hot-galvanized steel conduit continuing on or inside the
wall and terminating in a fuse cupboard or fuse box placed
1.7 m maximum above the floor.

4.3 Wiring in conduit, or cables installed for a length not

exceeding 2 m directly on the inside of the wall and com-
pletely protected by spacious longitudinally split con-
duits or similar metal profiles safely fixed to the wall.
The wall itself must be fire-classified at least A 30 or
have a flame resistant panelling (see Fig. 8).

5. Leads and cables may be assurnd to be fitted in a fire

safe manner if the foll,.,'.•:::.ng is complied with:

5.1 c b l e f i c a directly onto an outside wall, the wall itself

being fire-classified at least A 30 or having a flame re-
0
sistant panelling.

5.2 Wires or cables in conduits incorporated in walls of con-

crete, bricks or similar, having a cover of at least 5 cm
between any combustible materials and the inner surface of
the wall.

5.3 Cables in conduits incorporated in or placed beneath the

cellar floor having a cover of concrete of at least 5 cm.

5.4 Cables underneath buildings having a cover of at least 30 cm

of earth or similar.

5.5 Wires in conduits or cables, fitted onto non-combustible

parts of the building inside central rooms, instrument
rooms, transformer rooms etc. The distance to other wires
or cables or combustible parts of the building must be at
least 10 cm.

5.6 Cables in robust steel conduits fastened to the outside of

walls by means of distance pieces, the distance between
conduit and wall being not less than 2 cm.

6. At the main input, fuses or automatic circuit-breakers

functioning as short-circuit protection should be placed 0
in a separate box or cupboard. Several sets of short-
circuit protective devices may, however, be placed in a
common box or cupboard. The short-circuit protective
device may alternately be placed at the beginning of the
supply line.

7. If the input wires or cables are not provided with short-

circuit protective devices situated on the inside or direct-
0
ly on the outside of the building, fuses acting as over-
load protection must normally be placed in a separate box
or cupboard or in a separate compartment in the fuse cup-
board. The fuse may, however, be placed directly on the
main distribution panel in the building provided this is
 27

located in a separate locked room to which only expert or

trained staff have access ( s e e § 434 a n d § 487). In such
cases the room must be provided with a notice or plate
requiring the live components of these fuses to be specially
shielded when work is being carried out in the room.

8. A notice must be displayed adjacent to, or in, all fuse

C boards which clearly and durably indicates the rated

current of the fuses and the cross-sections of wires
and cables associated with each fuse.

9. Main input wires or cables must not have cross-sections

less than 10 mm2 of copper or 16 mm2 of aluminium.

0
Note:

In the case of fuse boards being placed on the inside

of outer walls made of single boards or other types
of uninsulated wall, the danger of moisture due to
condensation must be considered.

Automatic circuit breakers may be used as short-circuit

protection and/or protection against overload provided
the fuses placed in front of them do not have a higher
rated current than that approved for the automatic cir-
cuit breakers. As the value of the main input fuse
(normally the supply transformer fuse) is not likely to
be known, automatic circuit breakers should not be used
at the main input. When fuses are being chosen, the
short-circuit currents which may occur, must be con-
sidered.

The term "input" is understood to mean the place where

the supply lines or cables are first secured to or
touch the building which is to be supplied. "Supply
lines" or "cables" are those lines or cables leading
from the distribution network of the supply under-
taking to the input.

C

Network hclonqing to
the supply undertaking
Input
(On the outaide of building where
the cable or line for the first
time is secured to or touches the
building to be supplied.)
Fuses against overloading fitted
on the outside or inside the
building.

Input wires or cables.

Supply lines - or cables. (Having short-circuit protection
(Situated and protected as devices at the start or fitted in
for lines or cables outdoors.} a fire safe or short-circuit safe
manner.}

Figure 1. Principat diagram for input for buiZdings.

0
 29

Examples showing various types of input

Fuses

I \
(1nrut sbo revc rr c u i c
euae s
o v e r Lood
f a se e

Jr.pul 1·:c0den w.t 11

I - - . ' = 3 - - - - - - E 3 - - !

In;-:ire - - : _ J

or wires

I:
I/

Lnr.u t over t oe.i fuses

--1,.......lc:::3=>--·--------' :

'•--._.--1 l - - - - - - ,

Input wires Cable or wires to

F;g 2 distribution cupboard

wooden w:J l 1
/

(
/
ruse:-s
=.
xe e t a t ca __+c r rr t na r i on Iarut I
1:
J \?':"C.
\ l- .or e -c r c a r t
,UZJll'":.:, \
1/
\ f s c , 1 O· c:-!cJ..J t .,.15.;,$ - - ; : : = : : l - ·
/ \. /
--c::=:::1-+---------- ---{':'3-l -
j np.u

I
\o
C ; • t :"

It.d/
1 - _ c o n d c Lt s c
o a s r c nc c c 1 a c , , s ! !r.r:u c ab l e
Input cable or wires
h, I
' •
rr•> '
i
Fuses in
b o x or
r· ,:rI ;;/
c u o b o e rc I

I
• 1,I t:J/
- 1

' I , • /
Int•'Jt.
'l:.>"Fi/"'"
I '<.;:·· \ r.vc r t o e c
I
I __ r_u.:ffi....=---- ---------------t---ES--
I
ca. 2 m '-------.....----·----
Cable or wires to - - . . . : = - -
distributJon cupboard

Fig 3
 30

I
F u P S
Inpul

Wooclcn . . - 1 1 " ' - 1 - - - - - -

'---r--' ·- - - - - - . - - - - -
C
r n p u + c ab Lc

U_-
Input cable or wires

s p i , ; ; a '.? .,;:7 __ )
Protect;;,--;;---- V;• '/, I / / ] (;
(not c o n d ! l S ) r•V1 / / : !rrat

l..l...L_i \ l
---
I \ ' I \ !. :_ l / ":;:' sJ

E3
!npul -------r, L-v--1 · - - - - - - - - - - . . , - - - - - - -
- , r , . o . = . . ,•...,..,,,.;r:;. • I npul c o b ] l' ' - - - - - f = : ¼ -
Underground-cable Cable or wires to distribution
cupboard

Fig. 4

: ...p u t

I Shc.rt-c;rc:.:1t.
=·J'ieS

F3
I: f - - - - - F = r -
0
- ' - - - - - y - - , ::
. Input cable C a b l e or wires · - - - E 3 - -
or wires to distribution
cupboard
0
Fig.!;
 31

Lnpu t
I
I
5hc,rc-c,rc:i:
:-u·,,.,.
O•:n_;.:_,_:
.. -
E--
I
- - - - - · -:..· . . . : 7 ' - - - - - - - - - - E : : : r - · - - - , - - - -

:....__ y,, __ _/ ' - - - - - - . , , , - - - --·-' . .....::.:-

Input w i r e s Input cable

or c a b l e or wires

rus ·S

I n n : I

'-r:-·-r.=,._,,. l·--F=--

l. Input wires
or c a b l e
---J
C a b l e s ( w . l r e s ) to
d i s t r i b u t i o n cupboard

Fig. 6
 32

ruses

nrlp
/-+-ut
- E 3 - - - - - c vte r i o a d
St,r,rt.-ci re-ult.
l . 1 - r fL•J"5

/
r u s e s 1n b o x
01 cupboard ...=3- EJ

Input wires I n p u t c a b l e or w i r e s to
the d i s t r i b u t i o n cupboard

M1Jl t 1-p\.rpose
input tube
Input

l ' - " - - - - - 1 • - - - - . : : : - •

I _, '--- - , , . . - - - - _ _ _ _ , I

L
Input wires C a b l e or w i r e to the
d l s l r i b u t i o n cupboard

Fig. 7

Fuses.

·r '"Li
'"' Scrt-::,rcul-
- • · ·
, - - - - ,
·l---tct==-:J"'"---------:1t=::Jr-
o·.·• r.
i •• ,,.
r - - ,
,J j : -4

'rc rm i ne c t c n

1/all A 30 or flane Ir-oct c a h l • ·

I n p u t c a b l e or w i r e s to t e [2
resistant panel d i s t r i b u t i o n cupboard
Input

Cable
;'°USC'S in c o x
or cupbnar

-.i
T
Min. 2 m
.' Ii
.•,
. . Ii
•
Kl'.
I
Zl"'I. l " n g t h of

___t_ ?!
i:.atilr
.
cab I e

prot.ec:..l.on
0ai::1cu•
lr;•r,c1t....:•11-:.1l '.y
: ; l .t ::
r 11r-d,r.
• .,.,ts
I n p u t c a b l e or w i r e s to
d i s t r i b u t i o n cupboard
the

Fig. 8
 33

§ 433. Arrangement and marking of fuse and switch-boards.

Fuse and switch-boards and distribution boards must be

clearly arranged and shall be readily accessible. Frame-
work, boards and compartment shall be made from incombus-
tible materials with adequate mechanical strength, or from
other materials p p r o v e d for the purpose. The distance
between live components shall be at least 20 mm and that

0 between live components and their support or other conduc-

tive components, shall be at least 10 mm unless the board
concerned is approved for smaller clearances. A plate
shall be affixed adjacent to fuses and switches showing
in clear and durable lettering the room or part of the
installation to which they belong. This plate must also
show the nominal value of the fuses im amperes and the

0 cross-section of the conductors concerned.

Note:

The marking of fuses, switches, etc. may be effected

by means of instruction pLates having printed text or
Lettering in Indian ink protected with ciear varnish
or transparent materiai. Verbai instructions may be
repLaced by plates bearing numbers, together with a
drawing showing the prescribed data, such drawing
being framed and gLass-protected or otherwise rendered
permanent.

Where equipment is mounted in support structures, use

should be made of junction bare or line-up terminals
for the fitting of connection wiring.

§ 434. Location of equipment, apparatus, fuse and switch-boards.

Equipment and apparatus shall be readily accessible. Where

they are required to be operated under working conditions,
it must be possible to do this without danger.

Equipment and apparatus in which high temperatures can

0 normally occur, such that the surroundings may be endanger-
ed, shall be fitted in such a manner that there shall be
no risk of fire.

Fuse and switch-boards shall be so fitted that all wires

can be readily inspected at any time.

0 Fuse and switch-boards or panels which are not mounted in

a separate fire-proof room or fire-resistant room, shall
be mounted in a cupboard made from incombustible and
mechanically resistant material or from any other material
approved for the purpose and surrounded by a corresponding
lining. Windows in rooms where boards and/or panels are
installed shall be made of robust armoured glass or cor-
responding robust glass. No waterpipes, steampipes, gas-
pipes, etc. shall be present in the instrument room unless
particularly required there for some purpose within the
room.
 34

The room containing boards and _panels shall be kept clean

and be well maintained. It is forbidden to store in such
rooms any materials, tools, etc. not required there.
Staircases, passages and access through doors shall be
kept clear in order that free movement shall be possible.

Instruments shall be well illuminated.

Note:
0
For the design of fire-proof and fire-resistant rooms
reference should be made to the Building Regulations.

§ 435. Service passages and clearance.

Where panels, fuse and switch-board, etc. are installed,

service passages shall be provided having a free width of
0
at least 0.8 m and a free height of at least 2 m. This
applies also at the back of fuse and switch-boards when
the components fitted require to be inspected or operated
during working. Where bare, unprotected current-carrying
bus-bars or conductors pass over service passages they
must be at least 2.2 m above floor level. Where there
are bare, unprotected current-carrying components on
either side of a service passage, the spacing between
these must be at least 1.2 m.

Supports placed in a pit or recess shall be capable of

being covered over their whole width and height. lihen
the front is covered, the free open space before it
shall be at least 0.8 m.

Service passages shall be well illuminated and shall have

insulating flooring to a width of at least 0.8 m from a
board or support.

Note:

In the case of open support structures, use must be

made of junction bars or line-up terminals for joining
connection leads.
0
§ 436. Connections in board and panel installations.

Connections between components, etc. must be dimensioned

and laid out in such a manner that the conductor and
their contact faces cannot cause beating likely to result
in damage.
o
At the ends of connections, the individual wires shall be
soldered together, unless specially approved screw or clip
connections are used. Connections of cross-section greater
 35

than 6 mm2 shall be fitted with cable lugs unless special-

ly approved screw or clip connections are used. (See
§ 405). The connection point must not be exposed to
tension or torsion and should be laid out such that a
firm and permanent contact pressure is obtained. The
connection itself shall be secured so that it cannot
work loose.

Single conductor connections may consist o solid con-

ductors with cross-sections down to 1.0 m m .

0 Note:

When rubber-insulated conduit-wire ends and lead-

covered cable ends are stripped, the ends so stripped
should be specially protected using insulation sleeves,
etc. in instrument cabinets, fuseboxes, boards, con-

0 § 437.
tactors, starting equipment and other apparatus.

Excess-voltage protection.

A reliable excess-voltage protection system shall be pro-

vided for apparatus connected to extended overhead mains
or otherwise exposed to excess voltages.

In addition, the Electricity Inspectorate may require the

installation of suitable excess-voltage diverters for
other equipment which experience has shown to be parti-
cularly exposed to atmospheric discharges.

Excess-voltage protection must be fitted in such a manner

that it does not involve a danger to the surroundings.

0
 36

g. INSTALLATION P.QUIPMENT AND WIRING

§ 441. Fuse design.

Fuses shall be so designed that their melting does not

lead to short circuits or arcs which are likely to
endanger the surroundings. Melting must in no case

C
take place in such a manner that danger may arise due
to molten metal or fuse components being ejected.

Fuses designed and marked for the currents which

are indicated in Table 1 o f § 448 shall not melt, or
in any other way break the current, when continuously
loaded to the maximum permitted currents given in Table 1.

When carrying larger currents than those indicated in

the Table the fuses shall break before the wiring attains
0
too high a temperature.

The use of over-size fuses or fuses which have been

tampered with is forbidden. (For fusing of wires, see
§ 448, for fusing of motors, s e e § 447 and § 449). (See
also § 433).

Note:
The type of fuse selected must depend on the anticipated
short-circuit current.

Pull-out fuses having an open fuse wire (rewireable fuse)

must not be used in situations where their short-circuit
capability is inadequate.

The rupturing capacity of fuses is stated by the manufac-

t u r e r s . With high-efficiency cartridges this may, for
example at 220 V, lie between 20 and 120 kA depending on
the nominal current of the fuse; at higher voltages it
will be somewhat lower. The rupturing capacity of open
wire fuses is limited to about 5 kA.

§ 442. Cartridge fuses.

0
o-type cartridge fuses shall be so designed that there is
no possibility of excessively large cartridges being
inserted into the fuse holder.

§ 443. Marking of fuses.

0
Both the fixed part and the removable part of fuses shall
be clearly marked with the voltage and current. The
lower part of pull-out fuses shall, in addition, be
marked with the maximum permitted current of the fuse
 37

strip or high-efficiency cartridge, unless the design

of the fuse is such that the insertion of oversize strips
or cartridges is impossible.

§ 444. Types of fuses.

The following may be used as fuses:
0 High-speed f u s e , surge-limiting fuses and automatic
circuit-breakers with maximum-current a,tuation.

a) High-speed fuses and surge-limiting fuses may be used

for the protection of wires and cables, equipment and

0 motors, wherever no further excess current protection

is required on operational or safety grounds.
Selection of the type of fuse shall be governed by
considerations of selectivity. The main fuses in an
installation shall therefore be so dimensioned that
they break the circuit before any preceding fuses.
Where surge-limiting fuses are fitted after high-speed
fuses; the former shall be dimensioned at least two
ratinqs lower.

Note:

Neither surge-limiting fuses nor high-speed fuses can be a

substitute for motor-protection circuit-breakers as an excess
current protection for motors.

b. Automatic circuit breakers may be used for the same

purpose as high-speed or surge-limiting fuses. The
nearest back-up fuse must not, however, be of a higher
rated value than is approved for the type of automatic
circuit breakers concerned.

Note:

0 Wiring used in the lighting of public halls, etc. should

be protected by means of automatic circuit breakers.
The rated current of back-up high-speed fuses should be
at least two ratings higher than the rated value of the
automatic circuit breakers and that of surge-limiting

0
fuses at Least one rating higher than the rated value of
the automatic circuit breakers.

§ 445. Fuse loads.

Fuses and automatic circuit breakers shall not be perma-
nently loaded higher than the rated current of the fuses.

Note:
Fuses which are periodically exposed to length loading,
e.g. thermal Loading, should not, during these periods
be loaded with more than 80% of the rated current.
 38

§ 446. Location of fuses and connection to equipment.

Puses shall be installed on boards, racks or in cupboards

or boxes ( s e e § § 433 and 434). They shall be fitted as
close as possible to the branch point. Connections from
the branch point to the fuse may be of a smaller cross-
section than the supply line leading to the branch point,
but shall not be below the cross-section which corre-
spends to the maximum load of such connection leads.
c
Connections longer than 1 m shall not be of smaller cross-
section than one-third of that of the supply line. Where
a connection conductor is longer than 10 m, it shall be
of the same cross-section as the supply line or have
separate fuses of a nominal current corresponding to the
conductor cross-section in accordance w i t h § 448.
0
Wiring between equipment, fuse boards or fuse cupboards
shall be fused in accordance w i t h § 448.

Note:

The Loading is determined having regard to the probabLe

diversity factor, but shouLd not be Less than 0.5, If
the Loading cannot be determined by reason of a Lack of
data on which to base an assessment, the connection
must be of the same cross-section as the main conductor.
ALternativeLy, the connection conductor must be suitabLy
dimensioned for a current corresponding to the nominaL
current of the next fuse in the circuit, or for a cur-
rent corresponding to the sum of the nominaL currents
of the next fuse in the circuit in instances where the
connection conductor is itseLf branched.

i ---------,----------,
I

0
• - _onnection conducor
Branch potnt
Supply line,
rising mains
 39
§ 447. Fusing of machines.
Machines such as generators, motors for machinery,
lifts, pumps and fans shall be individually provided
with multi-pole circuit-breakers and fuses, or multi-
pole automatic circuit-breakers placed as close as
possible to the machine, or in another more appropriate
place, and rated at the appropriate current for the
machine concerned.

Supply wirina for crane installatiors e t . must be able

0 to be disconnected by means of multi-pole circuit-

breakers situated at places easily accessible for the
operators and marked with readily identifiable working
(e.g. "crane-switch").

Mobile cranes and lifts must be equipped with a device

to prevent srarring of the motors in the wrong direction

0 of rotation due to voltaqes with incorrect phase-sequence.

Even when automatic reversal switches are provided, main
current breaking devices operating at the extreme ends of
travel capable of breaking the full load current must be
fitted.
Equipment and motors do not require to have their own
fuses where they are adequately fused by the supply
line fuses.

Motors which operate in conditions under which they are

not constantly supervised shall be protected by means of
a circuit-breaker (or contactor) having thermal relays
on all phases and set to an actuating current corres-
ponding to the motor's full-load current, or they shall
have a corresponding overload protection, e.g. temperature-
sensing devices in the motor windings.

In the case of motors which may, if started unintentionally,

involve danger to operators or to the safety of the
installation, a no-voltage release shall be fitted. If
the no-voltage release may lead to particular incon-
venience for the operation, a plate can be exhibited
which clearly states that the motor may start without

0 warning. Slip-ring motors and commutator motors, however,

shall be provided with a circuit-breaker
(or contactor) affording overload protection and which is
equipped with a no-voltage release.

A common circuit-breaker equipped with no-voltage release

may be used for a number of motors where the machinery
controlled by it can be supervised from the site of the
circuit breaker.

NotP:

An unintentional start may oeaur where the voltage is resumed after

a stoppage or where the closing of a eo11111on airauit-breaker ean
result in the starting of a number of machines simultaneously.

The rovisions eoneerning transportable eranes and hoists

are ntended to apply to building eranes ete. whieh are
used on different eonstruetion sites ete. where the phase
sequence is not known.
 40

§ 448. Fusing of wires and cables.

a) Wires and cables between equipment, switch-boards and

fuseboxes shall be fused by means of fuses or automatic
circuit-breakers to provide protection against loads in
excess of the highest permissable currents in Table I
a n d § 457, Table 3. Wires and cables (as additional
rising mains) may, however, be branched without fuses
from a rising main to a fuse cupboard, rack or board
provided that the cross-section is at least one-third
of the cross-section of the rising main and the length
does not exceed 10 m. The cross-section of the branch
C
shall correspond at least to the maximum load of the
branch conductor as limited by the next following fuses
or group of fuses. The branch shall in addition have
fuses. For branches to fixed equipment see Table 2.

Note:
0
r - - - - - - - - - ,
'I I
I

Rising main

Max. 10 metres
L - - - - - - - - -
Additional risino main, unfused and at Branch continues
1/J with own fuses
least of cross--section of main riser

E ,cample of branch to fu• box

b) Parallel-connected wires and cables which are

permanently connected at either end shall be of
0
the same length and be fused with a common fuse as
in Table 1, o r § 457 Table 3, the maximum rating of
this fuse at most corresponding to the sum of the
permitted loading of such wires or cables.

Parallel-connected wires and cables which would

require a fuse of greater nominal current than the
0
maximum standardized nominal value for a single fuse
cartridge, may be fused individually. In this case,
a warning plate must be exhibited beside the fuses,
stating that the wires or cables are parallel-connected
and may be live even though the fuses for one or other
of the leads are removed.
 41

Where parallel-connection is used, the cross-section

of the smallest wire or cable shall not be less than
half that of the largest wire or cable. If the
parallel-connected wire or cables have conductors
consisting of different materials, the foregoing
requirement shall apply to the equivalent cross-
section of such wires or cables.

0 c) Insulated wires, conduit-wire or cables which are insulated

with rubber or plastics and have conductors with a specific
resistance at 20°c of not more than 0.017241 ohm per metre
length or square millimetre cross-section for copper, and
not more than 0.028264 ohm per metre length or square milli-
metre cross-section for aluminium may be permanently loaded
as shown in Column 3 or Column 4 of Table 1. Columns 5 and

0 6 show the maximum permitted nominal current for fuses for

the individual cross-sections.

Table 1

Loading and fusing of permanently installed rubber or

plastic-insulated wires and cables for voltages up to
1 kV when installed in buildings.

Cross-section Maximum permitted Fuse

1
current ,.
2 l C.

Coppir Alumiium Copper Aluminium Copper Aluminium

mm mm A A A

o.7tll 5 10
1.0 J 8 10
1.5 14 10
2.5 20 16
4 25 20
6 31 25

o, 10
16
25
35
16
25
43
65
90
120
43
65
35
63
80
100
35
63

50 50 150 115 125 100

70 200 160
95 95 240 185 200 160
120 280 225

0 150
185
240
150

240
325
380
450
255

330
250
315
350
225

315
300 525 400
400 400 640 500 500 400

l)Only permitted for control-current and signalling

installations, s e e § 453.
 42

The cross-sections shown for aluminium conductors are preferred

cross-sections. Intermediate cross-sections may also be
used, but should be avoided.
The values shown in the Table assume a maximum of three cur-
rent-carrying conductors run in one conduit or formed into
one cable. Where there are more than one conduit run or
cable side by side the loading values shall be reduced. The
permitted loading may in this case be determined with the
aid of the Table below.
Table lb
0
Reduction factor for permitted loading where a number of
sets of wires in conduits, or cables are laid in such a
manner that the conduits or cables are separated, over a
distance greater than 4 m, by a distance less than that of
the diameter of the conduits or cables. 0
Number of conduits or cables 2 3 4 5 6 7

Reduction factor 0.9 0.8 0.75 0.7 0.65 0.6

For loading of fuses for bare conductors, attention is drawn to

§§ 452 and 511.

For loading of paper-insulated, lead-covered cable, attention

is drawn t o § 457.

For loading of underground cables, s e e § 507.

Sets of conductors for ltqhtin and small appliances shall

normally be fused with fuses not greater than 16 A. The
set shall then not connect more than 20 outlets. Larger
lighting installations for industry, business premises, etc.
are permitted to use fuses of up to 25 A where the load makes
this necessary, see also (dl.

dl The fuse for a circuit shall be dimensioned in accordance with

the plant and appliance connected to that circuit and may not
be of a higher nominal current than shown in Table 2.

Note:
0
The restriction to 20 outlets applies to normal indoor installations.

o
For special installations (for illumination and series-connected
lights) the number of outlets is limited by the actual load. Bearing
in mind the current (switch-on surge) and type of load (inductive or
capacitative) the switches should be generously dimensioned.
The maximum permitted temperature for normal rubber insulation
(natural rubber) is 60°c. ?o0c is, however, permitted in connection
boxes. The maximum permitted temperature for plastics insulation is
7o0c.
 43

With lighting installations which are connected to three-phase

supplies the load of the installation should be limited to about
80% of the balanced full load capable of being delivered by the
particular three-phase system. If, for example, the conductor cross-
section is 4 mm2 with 20 A fuses, the full load with 220 V will
be 7.5 kw.· To avoid fuse failure in the event of unbalanced
loading, the installed load should be limited to·about 6 kW.

0 Lighting cirauits_ in large public halls and similar buildings

should be fused by means of automatic fuses.

0
 Table 2

The Table shows the allowed minimum dimensions of conductors, switches, and plug contacts
which may be connected according to the size of the fuses. Parts of installations and con-
nection equipment shall be dimensioned according to the largest load which may occur in that
part of the installation. In the Table, conductors of copper are assumed. In the case of
conductors of aluminium, the Table is valid for equivalent cross-sections, see Table 1.

Nominal value Nominal value Nominal value

Branch circuit Flexile of installa- of plug
of group fuses Fixed wirinq leads l
for fixed tion switches5l contacts
eoui,ment
Cross- Max. Cross- Max. Cross- Max.
section current section current sec1ion current
A mm2 A mm2 A mm A A A

10 1.5 14 1.5 14 0.7 54) 6 6 10

16 2.5 20 1.51) 14 1.04) 10 6 16
20 4.0 25 1. 51) 14 1.5 16 6 25
25 6.0 31 2. 52) 20 2.5 25 10 25
35 10.0 43 4.o3l 25 4.0 32 25 32 - 40
63 16.0 65 6.o3l 31 6.0 40 25 63
80 25.0 90 10.0 43 10.0 63 40 80
100 35.0 120 16.0 65 16.0 80 63 125

1) Max. length 2 m. For electrical water-heaters up to 10 m.

2) Max.length 10 m. For lighting installations max. length 2 m.
3) Max.lenth 10 m. Not for lighting.
4) 0.75 mm2 is permitted to be connected to a circuit fused u to 16A. For extension leads
for hand-lamps and cooking stoves, however, minimum 1.0 m m . For certain light weight
and movable appliances NEMKO may approve smaller cross-sections.
5) Switches connected on the supply side of plug contacts must be of at least the same rating
as the plug contacts. Higher ratings than those of the back-up fuses are, however, not
required.
6) Flexible leads for temporary connection of two distribution circuits, e.g. at building
sites, shall no be loaded higher than those laid down for fixed wiring.

C C 0 0
 45

§ 449. Fusing of motor circuits

The supply to a motor or group of motors may be regarded

as fused against overloading if each motor has a circuit-
breaker actuated either by thermal relays on all poles,
set to a current not higher than the motor's nominal
current, or by temperature-sensing devices in the motor
winding.

0 The circuit to each individual motor (branch circuit) shall

then be of a cross-section which, according to Table 1 of
§ 448, corresponds to the motor's rated current. The
main supply shall be of a cross-section which, according
to Table 1 o f § 448, corresponds to a current equal to the
sum of the rated currents of all the motors.

0 The main circuit and branch circuits shall in addition be

fused against short-circuit faults by means of melting
fuses or other short-circuit fault protection as indicat-
ed below:

al If each of the branch circuits have an electromagnetic

trip or fuse as protection against short-circuit, the
main circuit may be regarded as protected against short-
circuit fault, if the preceding melting fuses blow (or
the electromagnetic trip operates) under a nominal
current (or adjusting tripping current) of up to five
times the nominal current for the fuse laid down for
the cross-section of the conductor concerned in Table 1
o f § 448.

bl If one or more of the branch circuits is not fitted with

an electromagnetic trip or fuse, they are not regarded
as having their own protection against short-circuit
faults. However, those circuits which are not fitted
with their own protection may be regarded as being pro-
tected against short-circuit faults if the main circuit
which supplies them is fitted, on the supply side, with
a melting fuse or electromagnetic trip which is rated
at more than five times the nominal current of the

0
smallest branch circuit.

In connection with (a) and (bl above, motor protection

circuit-breakers shall not have larger fuses connected
on the supply side than are approved for the thermal
relays in the motor protection circuit-breakers concerned.

For intermittent operation, as in the case of cranes,

0 lifts,etc. wires and cables may be loaded to a higher
value than shown in Table 1 o f § 448 and may be fused
at a correspondingly higher rate. It is a prerequisite
that such wires and cables shall not heat to a greater
degree than under constant loading in accordance with
the Table.
 46
Note:

The Zoad under intermittent operation may be determined

by the ratio of the connection and disconnection periods.
The Zoading values in the TabZe i n § 448 may be increased
by an amount equaZ to haZf the disconnection period/con-
nection period in hours expressed as percentage, e.g.
hour on, 2 hours o f f = ( 0 5 ) x = 2i.

The drawings beZow show exampZes of the fusing of motor

suppZy Zeads. 0

0
Max.
«>OA

25mm'

Examø" of layout as per pwagreph 449 (a). All branch leads have an electro-
magnetic trip Of melting fu•

Etn 86A
25mm'

Max.
80A
Max.
BOA
0

1-·1-·1-·1-·
In• 28A ln•22A In• 18A In• 18A
0
Eump of layout a, per P•IJ9l"aøh 449 lbL Two branch leadi h w • no etectro-
megnettc trip or melting fu•
Note: I n • nominal rated current of motor
 47
§ 451. Connections

Wire and cable connections shall be made in such a manner

that they ensure adequate conductivity and mechanical
strength. Connections in tension shall have a breaking
strain of at least 90% of the breaking strain of the con-
ductor material.
Connections shall be either soldered or made with the aid
of approved clip connectors, coupling sleeves or similar

0
reliable fashion.
Insulated connections shall be insulated and protected
in such a manner that the insulation is of the same quality
as that on the main conductors.

§ 452. Bare aonneations

0 Bare connections shall be not less than 6 mm2 in cross-

section. Where they are not earthed, they shall normally
be at least 3 cm from one another and form any wall, ceil-
ing or conductive object, or from their own protective
covers. Bus-bars and bare leads which are sufficiently
rigid and are supported at intervals of less than 80 cm
may, however, have a closer air spacing or creepage
distance from conductive objects or supports, but t2is
must not be less than 2 cm. Bare leads up to 25 mm
cross section may be loaded more heavily and fused at a
correspondingly higher rate than in the tables o f § 448
when their temperature will not as a result cause danger
to the surroundings. For the use of bare leads in vari-
ous types of room, see Section IIC i.
For protection against contact, s e e § 402.

§ 453. Insulated wires and aables.

Insulated wires and cables of cross-section below 16 mm2

must have copper conductors. Aluminium or copper may be
used where the cross-section is greater. Insulate wires,

0
"rørtråd" and cables of cross-section below 1.5 mm shall
not be used for fixed installations, but wires and cables
of 0.75 mm2 are permitted for fixed control-circuits and
signalling installations etc. These shall be of the
stranded type.
Insulated wires, "rørtråd" and cables not subject to
(NEMKO) approval shall be capable of withstanding a 30-
0 minute test at 2000 V alternating current after submer-
sion in water up to 25°c for 24 hours.
Paper-insulated cable shal not normally be used, unless
the cross-section is 25 mm or greater, for installations
in buildings. Jute wrapping may be removed where there
is no danger of chemical attack on armouring or metal
sheathing. The escape of oil shall be prevented.
 48

In places where there may be a danger of damage, e.g.

store-rooms, workshops, etc., conduits, cables and
"rørtråd" shall be suitable protected. Insulated wires,
cables and "rørtråd" must not be fitted within 30 cm of
fuel-burning furnaces.

Note:

In special cases paper-insulated cables of 6 m m 2 may

C,
be used in buildings when this offers significant
advantages over other types of cable. The cable ends
shall be fitted with sleeves or shall terminate in
an equally reliable fitting. Such cables may be of the
single-wire type where the cross-section does not
exceed 25 mm2.
0
§ 454. Freely-mounted insulated wires

a. Freely-mounted insulated wires carried on insulators

shall normally not be used fpr indoor installations.
An installation of this type shall be maintained in
such a manner that the requirements in regard to
spacing and protection laid down in this paragraph
are fulfilled. When extensions, alterations and
improvements are carried out, wires of this type
shall be used only where their adoption offers tech-
nical or safety advantages over other types of con-
ductor.
Freely-mounted insulated i r e s shall be of the stranded
type and shall be attached to insulators, bobbins or
clips in such a manner that the spacing between the
leads and any wall, ceiling or other support or between
the leads and any conductive object or building com-
ponent (e.g. a metal pipe) is not less than 1 cm. In
damp or wet rooms or rooms containing corrosive sub-
stances, this spacing shall be at least 4 cm and the
wires shall be attached to drip-bobbins or insulators.
The spacing between individual wires shall not be less
0
than 5 cm. The spacing between supports shall not
normally exceed 80 cm. i r e s of cross-section greater
than 2.5 mm2, may, however, have a spacing of up to
120 cm between supports where conditions demand.
Joins and branches shall not be exposed to tensional
stress.

b. In exposed places, the wires shall be given special

protection against mechanical stresses, as also shall
0
wires fitted within 1.5 m of the floor. See also
§ 486.
 49

§ 455. Conduits.

a. Conduits shall not be used in sizes smaller than

16 mm (5/8" outside diameter).

Only approved type conduit and accessories shall be

used.

0
For concealed installation in buildings of brick, con-
crete, etc., steel conduits shall be hot-galvanized or
have an equivalent anti-rust protection. Conduits,
conduit joints and junctions with boxes, fuse compart-
ments, etc. shall be of such design that all connections
provide a reliable and oermanent contact for earth con-
tinuity. •

0 b. The installation of plastic conduits is governed by

the same provisions as that of steel conduits, with
the following exceptions.

1. They may not be threaded and must never be used in

combination with fittings or boxes having built-in
sharp springs which cut notches into the conduits
making them readily susceptible to breaking.

2. The fittings and boxes used shall be of insulating

material or be provided with appropriate insulation
both externally and internally.

3. Sockets, angles, nipples, etc. shall be of insulat-

ing material.

4. In the case of surface installations, plastic con-

duits may be passed through a floor or ceiling. If
they are likely to be exposed to considerable mech-
anical stresses, e.g. when recessed into walls, the
passage shall be specially protected by means of
robust wood covers or steel piping. Plastic con-
duits shall otherwise be fitted not less than 30 mm
above floor level.

0 5. Plastic conduits must be fitted at a suitable dist-

ance from hot-water or steam pipes, flue - pipes,
etc. or alternatively be provided with thermal in-
sulation.

6. Plastic conduits must not come into contact with

0 fillers such as asphalt or other chemicals which

may attack plastic materials.

7. The conduits must be fixed in such a manner that

they are not damaged.

c. In all conduit installations, outlets, joins and

branches in the wiring, and connections to a different
type of installation, shall be effected in spacious
connection boxes which must be easily accessible.
 50

Connection boxes may be omitted in special cases where

the conduit is connected to a fitting or apparatus direct-
ly by means of an approved conduit connector and the wir-
ing can be pulled in and connected to the terminals of
the fitting. For an outlet to a switch, plug or item of
equipment, the conduit box shall be mounted flush with
the finished wall, ceiling, or other part of the build-
ing. The internal diameter of the conduit should be
such that the wires can be drawn in and withdrawn without
difficulty. C
The conduit system must not contain sharp edges or burrs.
Conduits shall be fastened securely and run in such a
manner that damp cannot collect inside them. Conduits
run in or on outside walls and in the ceiling above the
topmost storey shall have thermal insulation on the wall
side or loft side. Conduits in wet rooms or rooms con-
taining corrosive substances shall be run directly to
0
the connection box of the apparatus or to a socket outlet
box. U-bends or "water traps" shall be avoided where a
conduit may be exposed to variations in temperature.

d. The wires used for drawing into conduits must be of the

insulated single-conductor type, approved for conduit use.

Braided lead-covered cable or cable having an insulating

sheath may be drawn into conduits, whether on the surface
or concealed, where this is more suitable, e.g. when
connecting to a different type of installation, or for
connecting equipment or apparatus not provided with con-
duit entry. It is a prerequisite that conduits of gener-
ous size are used and that the cable can be easily with-
drawn.

Braided or twisted wires are not permitted in conduit

installations. Wires belonging to different fused cir-
cuits must not be run in.the same conduit. In special
cases, e.g. in large business premises, wires from the
same distribution board may, with the permission of the
Electricity Inspectorate or local inspector, be run in
a common pipe or conduit or as multicore cables provided
they are individually marked to prevent confusion. The
0
same applies to wires for signalling, control and measur-
ing circuits of low-voltage and light-current installations,
provided the light-current wires satisfy the requirements
i n § 453 and are not directly connected to light-current

0
installations outside the building. Wires must not be
drawn into concealed conduits in plastered or bricked
parts of buildings until the structure is sufficiently
dry. In wooden houses the wiring may be drawn into con-
duit after panelling and boarding is complete.
 51

Earth leads which are passed through a box shall be

looped in the box to allow for the possible subse-
quent connection of other earth ieads.

In three phase alternating current installations, all

three phase leads must be drawn into the same conduit
if the conduit is of magnetic material. Only under
exceptional circumstances may single conductors of an
a.c. system be run in separate conduits, and then only
0 if this does not result in harmful heating due to in-
duction. In installations having a neutral conductor
this latter shall be run in the same conduit as the
phase conductors (see Section IID). For earthing see
§§ 405 - 412.

Note:

0 Wires run in the same aonduit should be parallel and,

as far as possible, should not aross one another.

Before drawing in of wires the aonduits should be dried

by passing a twisted rag or similar objeat through them.

Empty boxes and boxes through whiah wires are pulled but
no aonneation is made, are not regarded as aonneation
boxes even though the wires are laid in loops to provide
future aonneations. These are known as pullboxes. It is
not required to aut holes in aarpets, wail paper eta.
above suah boxes to make them readily aaaessible. It is,
however, assumed that suah boxes may be easily found by
suitable marking or from drawings kept in a readily aaaes-
sible plaae.

§ 456. "Rørtråd" and cab les.

"Rørtråd" and cables may be run directly on the surface

of walls and must be securely attached. Sharp bends
should not occur. Joints and branches and connections
to another type of installation shall be effected in

0
connection boxes and similar. When entering a connec-
tion box, etc., not more than one cable may be placed
in each cable-way or cut out.

Conductors belonging to different fused circuits shall

not normally be contained under a common sheath (multi-
core cable), see, however, § 466.

0 Where "rørtråd" and cables are brought into a fuse cup-

board or fusebox, they shall be passed through knock-out
openings or similar. Packing glands, approved clamps,
plastic tubes, etc. appropriate to the cable dimensions
shall be fitted in the openings depending on requirements
of the location. To avoid accidental contact between
unearthed metallic cable sheaths and earthed metallic
parts of a fusebox or cupboard, a braid or insulated
sheath shall be fitted over the cable for at least 1 m
from the cable entry point.
 52

"Rørtråd" having an unearthed or bare sheath must not be

brought into or fitted within reach of an earthed fuse
cupboard or earthed fusebox or other earthed components.
Bare unearthed "rørtråd" must never be fastened to walls
having continuous conductive surfaces, nor be used in
rooms having earthed metal conponents within reach.

When "rørtråd" or non-armoured cable is exposed to mechani-

cal stress it shall be specially protected See a l s o § 486. Q
Cables having textile braiding which are used in wet
rooms, rooms containing corrosive substances or in the
open air must always be painted with a suitable protec-
tive material (varnish, pure asphalt, tar, etc.).

Note:
0
Where earthing is :required in cable and 1 1 : r ! ; ! r t : r l i d ' ' inqtaZZa-
tions, the earth wire contained in the cable or "rø:»tr!!d"
should normally be used for this purpose. If an unused
insulated conductor in the cable is employed as the earth
I.lire, its free end shall be marked to indicate tha:tit functions
as an earth wire. •
The term 'sealed entry' is considered to include gland-type
entries and entries effected by means of approved clamps. The
term 'leakp:roof entry' covers entries using packaging glands.
When rubber-insulated '':rørt:r-1d" ,-,,,,,d cable ends are ets-ioped,
the bared ends should be specially protected by means of
insulating sleeves and within instruent cupboard.q, [uscboes.
boards, contacto:rs, sta:rting_eaicipment:and similar apparatus.

No extra insulation is, however, :required in switches, plugs mid

connection boxes used for jointsand branches in the i.nstaZZation.

It is an advantage, in an otherwise surface installation, to use

a single concealed conduit to take wires to lamp-points not fitted
LJith a box. Cable or "rørtråd" having insulating protective
sheathing or alternatively sheathed LJi:re may be used in such
o
conduits. This is not, however, :regarded as a concealed instal-
lation.

§ 457. Paper-insulated cables.

Paper-insulated cables used in buildings may be loaded
and fused in accordance with the following Table:
0
 53

Table 3

Loading and fusing of paper-insulated cables

for voltages of up to l kV in buildings.

On walls or cable-trays In pipes or conduits

0 Cross-section
Max. current Fuse Max. current Fuse

Cop- Alumi- Cop- Alumi- Cop- Alumi- Cop- Alumi- Cop- Alumi-
per nim per nium per nium per nium per nium
mm2 mm A A A A A A A A

0 10
4
6
38
53
66
35
so
63
35
41
56
25
35
so
16 16 87 66 80 63 75 56 63 so
25 25 llS 87 100 80 95 75 80 63
35 140 125 llS 100
so so 170 135 160 125 145 ll0 125 100
70 210 200 174 160
95 95 255 200 225 200 205 160 200 160
11.20 295 250 235 225
hso 150 340 265 315 250 270 205 250 200
b.85 390 350 305 250
1240 240 465 360 400 250 355 275 315 250
1300 535 500 400 350
1400 400 630 500 630 500 450 375 400 350

The cross-sections shown for aluminium conductors are preferred,

cross-sections. Intermediate cross-ser.tions may also be used,
but $hould be avoided.

The values shown in the Table assume, at most, three current-

carrying conductors and a neutral line.

0 The loading values are assumed to give the conductors a tempera-

ture rise of 45°c (i.e. a maximum conductor temperature of 10°c
with an ambient temperature of 2s0c).

Where the ambient temperature is below 2s0c, paper-insulated

cable may be loaded correspondingly higher. The loadinq

0 may in such cases be determined with the aid of a correction

factor selected in accordance with the Table below, but should
not be higher than is laid down for underground cables in
§ 507, Table 5, Col.2.
 54

Table 3b

Correction factor for loading of cables in buildings at

different ambient temperatures.

0c
Ambient temperature, 5 10 15 20 25 30
Correction factor . 1.2 1.15 1.1 1.05 1 0.95
0
Table 3c

Reduction factor for permitted loading where several cables run

0
in the same pipe or conduit or are so laid that conduit or
cables have, over a run exceeding 4 m, a spacing between them
equal to less than the diameter of such conduit or cable.

Number of cables 2 3 4 5 6 7 or more

Reduction factor 0.9 0.8 0.75 0.7 0.65 0.6

Paper-insulated cables having a cross-section of less than 25 mm2

shall not normally be used in installations in buildings. Joints
and branches shall be effected in boxes or sleeves specially
approved for paper-insulated cable or by the use of other
reliablP.cable terminations. Joints, branches and terminations
shall be so arranged that the cable ends are protected against
oil leakage and against the entry of damp. Paper-insulated
cable shall not be connected to machines, apparatus or equip-
ment provided with entries suitable only for the connection of
rubber- or plastics-insulated wires and cables. (Conduit entry
or screwed packing glands.) See a l s o § 456.
For loading of underground cables for voltages up to 1 kV the
limits indicated i n § 507 shall apply.

Note: 0
In buildings, a number of cables may be laid on cable-trays or in
conduits, or attached to supports with saddles. The distance between
the attachment points must not be large enough to allow the cable to
hang in loops. Paper-insulated cable must not be struck with hammers
or clubs, but should be straightened with tools 1J',1'.eh do not damage
the sheath or insulation. The minimum radius of bends should not be
less than tm times the outside diameter of the cable. 0
In particularly exposed positions, paper-insulated cable should be
protected from mechanical damage. Where a large number of cables
are mounted togP.ther in dry rooms, the cables should not have jute
braiding in view of the fire hazard due to cable faults. A single
cable should never have jute braiding in dry rooms which are not
protected against fire. In damp, wet, corrosive and other 2•ooms
 55

where the iron armouring may be subject_to rust, cables should

have jute braiding or an equivalent anti-corrosion protection.
In special cases paper-insulated cables of cross-section down
to 6 mm2 may be used in buildings where this procedure offers
significant advantages over other types of cable. It is then
a prerequisite that the cable ends be fitted with sleeves, or
terminate in an equally reliable fitting.

0 § 458. Flexible cords and cables.

a. Flexible cords and cables shall have stranded con-

ductors and shall be perfectly flexible and of a
design appropriate to the conditions of use. Flex-

0 ible cables must be fixed to the apparatus or plug

in such a manner that the connection itself is not
subjected to tension or torsion during normal use.

b. The cross-section of a flexible lead shall correspond

to the maximum current stamped on the apparatus and
shall not be less than is shown in Table 2, § 443.
The cross-section of a flexible cable for domestic
cooking stoves may, however, be a size less than the
size corresponding to the maximum current of the stove,
but shall not be less than 1 mm2

Flexible cables for connection to lamps and equipment

having a nominal current of not more than 6 A shall be
of not less than 0.75 mm2 cross-section. For hand-
lamps see (c) below.

For certain light-weight, portable apparatus of a small

power consumption, conductors of 0.5 mm2 crss-section
are permitted. Conductors less than 0.5 mm are also
permitted for such light apparatus, provided that the
apparatus is under constant supervision during use and
that the lead is either permanently attached to the
apparatus or is connected by means of special connectors.

0 Flexible cords and cables may be loaded in accordance

with the following Table:

0
 56

Cross-section Maximum permitted

current

0.75 6
1.0 10
1.5
2.5
4.0
16
25
32
C
6.0 40
10.0 63
16.0 80
25.0 100

0
35.0 125
50.0 150
70.0 190
95.0 230
120.0 265
150.0 305

Flexible cables having connectors permanently attached

(e.g. moulded connection plugs) shall be of at least
1 mm2 cross-section.

Flexible cables below 4 mm2 shall be specially protected

where they enter apparatus which may be moved during use
(such as handlamps), use being made of insulating rein-
forcement which extends for at least 2.5 cm from the point
of entry.

c. Rubber-sheathed cable must be used for handlamps which are

weatherproof and/or corrosion-resitant and not lighter
than type NMHO and at least 1.0 m m , but for handlamps of
the covered type, rubber-sheathed cable of the type NHM
and not less than 1.0 mm2 may be used. 0
Sheathed cable may be used for suspending lighting equip-
ment where the latter is approved for hanging in this
manner.

d. The earthing of apparatus connected by means of flexible

cables shall be effected by means of a separate earth
wire included in the flexible cable. This earth wire
0
shall be colour-coded in the approved manner using the
colours green and yellow. Conductors marked green and
yellow shall not be used for any purpose other than
earthing. ( S e e § 409).
 57

Flexible cables provided with an earth wire shall be used

with an earthing plug. Flexible cables not provided with
an earth wire shall have a plug without earth contact,
s e e § 472. Only one flexible cable shall be connected
to any one plug. It is forbidden to make joints in cables
unless an approved junction device is used.

Class II apparatus (i.e. apparatus having ape!..oved extra

insulation) shall be marked with the symbol I.E.land shall
0 not be earthed. Apparatus marked with this symbol may
have a flexible cable with earthing plug. The flexible
cable for this type of apparatus shall not, however, have
an earth lead.

e. Flexible cables shall only be connected in the supply in

the room in which the apparatus concerned is used.
0 § 459. Transition from fixed wiring to a flexible cord or cable
The transition from fixed wiring to a flexible cord or cable
for portable lighting equipment, apparatus and motors shall
be effected by means of a plug and socket. Where use of a
plug is not appropriate, apparatus or motors fitted with
flexible cables may be connected by means of a box having
specially approved terminals for the flexible cable. It is
then a prerequisite that the apparatus or motor fitted with
the flexible cable be permanently so connected and stationary.
(For stationary apparatus, s e e § 116.)

Note:
Domestic cooking stoves are reqarded as stationa:ryapparatus.
Consideration may be given to the connection of cooking stoves
via speciaZZy approved boxes provided with means of relieving
tension on the tenninaZs (strain relief devices) where this
is more suitable than a plug connection.

§ 460. Crossing of other Low-voltage i r e s and conductive objects.

0 Where freely-supported insulated wires (on insulators) or

"rørtråd" having a bare metal sheath, cross other low-voltage
wires or cables at another voltage, the crossing point shall
be protected with a layer of insulating material fastened
securely so that it cannot be displaced. An insulating layer
shall also be used where such low-voltage wires cross other
conductive objects. Such intermediate layers shall extend
0 at least 5 cm on either side of the crossing. If the low-
voltage wires or low-voltage cables is run in a securely
earthed conduit or has an earthed or braided Metal sheath,
no insulating intermediate layer is required.
 58

§ 461. Clearance from light-current wires

Low-voltage wires and light-current wires shall not be run

in the same conduit and never in the same box unless such
a box contains partitions between the light and heavy-current
wiring.
Low-voltage wires must not be laid within 1 cm of light-
current wires. Where circumstances do not permit this dis-
tance to be maintained, one set of wires must be protected
0
by means of insulating or earthed conduit. Such protection
is not required if the light-current wires are laid in accor-
dance with the Regulations governing low-voltage installations
or if one set of wires has an earthed conduit, earthed metal
sheath or braided metal sheath.

The above provisions are not applicable to light-current

wires for the types of Wattmeter which are fitted to kitchen
Q
walls to read power consumption. Such wires are permitted
to be run in the conduit with low-voltage wires. The light-
current wires shall then be of the type PN or similar approved
type and shall be marked so that they cannot be mistaken.
Where the light-current wires are run through boxes contain-
ing low-voltage wires, they must be provided with extra pro-
tection (e.g. by means of plastic sleeves).

In the case of freely-supported wires (on insulators) a pro-

tective insulation sleeve shall be used where low-voltage
wires cross light-current wires, such sleeve enclosing one
set of wires for at least 5 cm on either sie of the crossing.

§ 462. Clearance from high-voltage lines

Low-voltage wires must have a clearance from bare high-

voltage lines of at least 5 c m + 0.5 cm for each 1 kV of
operating voltage. The same applies to the distance from
insulating high-voltage wires where these are not protected
from external damage by means of armouring, conduit or equi-
valent protection which is earthed. ( S e e § 662.) The low-
voltage wires shall be fastened with special care where they
cross or run near bare high-voltage wires. Efforts shall be
made to avoid such crossing or adjacent siting.
o •

§ 465. Switches

Switches shall be provided for those machines and apparatus

which require to have means of disconnection under load, and
they shall also be fitted at those points in the wiring system
where it is necessary, for the purpose of maintenance or insu-
o
lation measurements, ( s e e 403) to isolate a particular sec-
tion without removing the fuses.
 59

Switches must not be fitted in earth conductors unless such

switches are accessible to trained personell only. Switches
are, however, permitted in neutral conductors which do not
at the same time function as earth conductors.

Switches are also permitted in combined earth and neutral

conductors provided that all phase conductors are interrupted
at the same time, or before and connected at the same time or
0 after the combined earth and neutral conductor.

Switches used as main switches for domestic installations

shall only be those that are specially approved as main
switches.

Switches used on stationary apparatus shall be of the multi-

0 pole type.

Multi-pole switches shall be marked to indicate their position

(On/Off, In/Out). Such marking is also required on control
equipment for remote-control switches (automatic switches,
contactors, etc.) S e e § 466. However, pulse-switches are
permitted for lighting installations without such marking.

Connection and disconnection shall take place simultaneously

on all poles (phases) when a multi-pole switch is operated.
Where a number of switches may be confused or their uninten-
tional operation may result in damage or accident, each
switch shall be clearly marked with a label indicating the
parts of the installation it operates.

Note:
Knife switches and twnbler switches should as a rule be so placed
that the handle moves upwards for switching on (connection).
Rotary switches should preferably be placed so that the triangular
knob is in the vertical position for the disconnected condition.
Where connection and disconnection are effected by means of different
push-buttons having a colour-coding, the disconnecting button shall
0 be red in accordance with IEC Publications Nos 54 and 73. Buttons
which may be used for purposes other than disconnection shall not be
coloured red.

§ 466. Control-current and signalling installations

a. Wires for low-voltage control circuits shall be run in

0 the same manner as normal low-voltage wires.

Low-voltage wires for machine-tools, cranes etc., and in

power stations, transformer stations etc. may be in a
common conduit or pipe or as multicore cable on the con-
dition that they satisfy the requirements i n § 453.
 60

In special cases, such as industrial plants, power stations,

transformer stations etc. the Electricity Inspectorate or
local inspector may permit heavy-current and light-current
wires for control, measuring and signalling circuits, opera-
ting at different types of currents and voltages, to be
run in a common conduit or pipe or as multicore cable pro-
vided that the light-current wires satisfy the require-
ments i n § 453.

The various conductors shall be marked so that they cannot

be confused with one another.
0
b. Transformers for light-current circuits may be fitted in
fuse cupboards or in relay cupboards, etc. and shall have
fuses in the primary circuit. If the transformer is not
short-circuit-proof it shall also have fuses in the secon-
dary circuit.
Q
On transformers for control circuit where the primary cir-
cuit fuses are not greater than 10 A, there is no need for
separate fuses in the control-circuits.

Where such fuses are greater than 10 A, the low-voltage

control-circuits must have its own fuses.

c. In the case of automatically controlled installations for

compressors, cooling, ventilating and pumping equipment,
etc., the control circuit shall be fitted with a switch
to provide instantaneous stopping of the apparatus. In
addition, the control circuits shall be provided with a
suitable interlocking switch.

Where by reason of the circumstances it is required that

means be provided for the rapid stopping of an installa-
tion following an accident, etc., this switch must be
fitted outside the machine room.

Note:
Re (b) above. Control-afrcuit wiring whiah =e aompletely inside
the aover or aasing of the appa.l'atus being aontrolled need not
o
have speaial fuses.
Re ( a ) above. When cool.inq equipment, eta. is damaged the eecapinq
gas may make it impossible to reaah the maahinery itself.

§ 467. Plug and soaket outlets. 0

Plug and socket outlets shall be of such design that plugs
cannot be inserted which have a rated current lower than
that of the socket outlet. However, plugs of 10 A rated
current special approved plugs of lower rated current for
small appa ra tr s , are permitted to be connected to two-pole
socket outlet of rated current up to 16 A.
 61

Earthed plugs shall be used only for apparatus fitted

with earthing terminals and flexible cords or cables
having a built-in earth conductor. Earthed plugs shall
not be used for the connection of equipment unless this
is earthed via the earthed plug. The connection of flex-
ible cords or cables not provided with an earth conductor
shall be effected by means of unearthed plugs and unearthed
sockets. This does not apply to class II apparatus. See
§ 458.

0 Plugs for insertion into lampholders are forbidden.

Adaptor plugs {adaptor sockets) which allow the use of
plugs intended for a lower nominal current than that of
the socket are forbid<len.
Two-way branch plugs shall be used only for connection to

0 fixed socket outlets. Branch plugs for more than two

branches are not permitted.
Floating socket outlets shall be connected to a fixed
socket outlet by means of a plug.

Note:

The prohibition of multi-l,)(Z!J

branch plugs is aimed at preventing
unsatisfactory contact conditions due to incorrect use and the
application of skew stresses to the sockes body. Where several
outlets are required, fixed double sockets should be used, or
alternatively, extension sockets with attached flexible cables
and plU{JH.
Floating socket outlets should have flexible cables of at least
1 rm,2 cross-section, see§ 458.

§ 468. Connection boxes.

Connection boxes shall be located in a readily accessible
position and shall be suitable for the conditions of the
room into which they are to be fitted. Connection boxes

0
shall be of a design appropriate to the types of wires
and cables used. Connection boxes shall not be over-
crowded. The number and size of conductors attached to
the same terminal shall not exceed the values laid down in
the approval specifications.

Note:

0 When approving connection terminals, NEMKO specifies the appro-

priate dimensions and number of conductors, together with rules
governing the types of terminals which do not require soldered
connections.
 62

h. EQUIPMENT

§ 471. Stationary equipment.

Stationary equipment which is attached to a support
shall normally be connected by means of fixed wiring
or cable of a type corresponding to the type of wire

0
or cable for which the connection box entry is approved.

The use of plug contacts for the connection of equipment

attached to a support may be permitted where special
circumstances make this desirable and the apparatus is
specially approved for such connection.

0
Fixed e q u i p e n t not connected by means of a plug contact
shall be operated y means-of multi-pole switches.

§ 472. Portable equipment.

Portable equipment ( s e e § 116) shall have:

a. A firmly attached flexible cord or cable provided with
reliable strain relief, or

b. A contact-system for connecting the equipment with the

aid of a flexible cable and plug.

Class I equipment shall have special earthing terminals

under the same cover as the supply connection terminals,
or shall be capable of being earthed via its connecting
plug. Where the flexible cable is fitted with an earth-
ing plug, it shall also have a connected earth wire.
l'lhere the flexible cable has no earth wire, it shall
never be fitted with an earthing plug.
Class O equipment shall be connected by means of a non-
earthing plug.

For class II equipment it is permitted to use an earthing

plug connected to a flexible cable having no earth wire
C
but not permitted to use such a plug connected to a
flexible cable having an earth wire.

§ 473. Overheating of equivment terminals.

Apparatus which becomes hot or generates heat may not

under normal working conditions at any point expose the
0
insulation of its supply lead to a higher temperature
than that for which the lead is approved. This applies
also to the insulation of the individual conductors in
so far as that insulation is necessary for purposes of
safety.
Note:
Standard rubber-insulated conductors used in the connection box
must not be exposed to a higher temperature than 7o0c. Heat-
resistant conductors may be exposed to the temperature speci-
fied for the type of insulant.
 63

§ 476. Heat-generating apparatus and heating installations.

o. General

Heat-generating apparatus and heating installations shall be

sited and fitted in such a manner that they cannot under the
most unfavourable operating conditions convey to adjacent
combustible objects or parts of buildings, a temperature

0
higher than 80 C during normal use, nor shall it be able
to da..age the surroundings.

Where electricity may directly or indirectly ignite or heat

combustible gases, liquids or solid materials to a danger-
ous temperature, the apparatus or heating installations
shall be so designed, sited and used as to be compatible
with local conditions.
0 Under particular conditions of use when on occasions it is
impossible to keep the temperature below so0c, as in sauna
bathrooms, the installation shall be carried out in accor-
dance with approved fitting instructions.

1. Heat generating apparatus.

Heat-generating apparatus shall be used for the purpose and

in the position for which it is designed and positioned so
that it may be easily maintained and cleaned. The apparatus
shall not be covered up and the collection of dust must be
prevented.

Heat-generating apparatus which is automatically controlled

or is normally connected without supervision, shall be pro-
vided with thermal cutout or other automatic means of dis-
connection where a fault in the control equipment may result
in fire or explosion.

1.1 Heaters (or radiators) for space-heating.

0 Heaters for space-heating are divided into two classes:

Class L with surface temperatures up to 1so0c.
Class H with surface temperatures above 1so0c.
Heaters shall bear a marking, inscription or mounting
instruction as is necessary to ensure satisfactory
siting and use. Stationary heaters shall be marked with
the letter H if the surface temperature is above 1so0c.

0 Heaters shall not be sited one above the other.

Class H heaters for attachment to walls shall not be
mounted lower than 1.7 m above the floor.

Class H heaters shall be marked to show the minimum per-

mitted free area in the direction of radiation. This area
shall not be smaller than 1 m i n the case of movable radia-
tion-type heaters.

Portable heaters shall not e placed on floors having a free

floor area of less than 4 m.
 64

The requirements for spacing and mounting apply only to the

extent that the temperature limit of so0c is not exceeded
during normal use or under the most unfavourable operating
conditions.

Heaters which may be exposed to falling dust, clothing or

similar shall be protected by, for example, an inclined
shield having a smooth surface made from an incombustible
material and situated at least 10 cm above it. The shield
shall extend at least 3 cm beyond the heater in all direc-
C
tions.

Fan-heaters shall be provided with a thermal cutout so sited

and adjusted as to switch off automatically should the hot
air transmitted cause combustible objects or parts of the
building to reach temperatures above so0c.
Q
If the air inlet or fan-motor cease to operate, the heating
elements shall similarly be automatically switched off.

1.2 Sauna bath heaters.

Sauna bath heaters shall be installed according to approved

fitting instructions.

1.3 Heaters for clothes drying etc.

Heaters for drying shall be fixed and so sited or provided

with protection that combustible objects cannot come into
dangerous proximity of them.

Flexible cords and cables must not be used in drying rooms

and drying cupboards.

1.4 Apparatus for water heating.

Water-heaters having a cover made from combustible materials

shall be fitted with automatic means of disconnection, such
as thermal cutouts, level switches etc. even though they are
Q
fitted with thermostats.

The thermostats shall be sited and adjusted so that the water

cannot boil.

Thermal cutouts, level switches etc. shall be sited and adjusteo

in such a manner that the heater cannot dry.

1.5 Electrode boilers.

Electrode boilers must satisfy the requirements given in either

.1 or .2 below.
.1 Insulated electrode boilers, having no water in the boiler
shall satisfy the requirements i n § 403.
 65

Under normal operation, the value of the insulation resis-

tance, measured between the neutral point (boiler shell)
and earth (outer casing) shall be at least 0.115 x U ohm
where U is the rated voltage of the boiler in volts. The
measurements shall be carried out using an alternating
current source.

Note:

0 The minimum permitted value of the insulating resistance

is required so as to prevent leakage currents to earth
exceeding 5A during unsymmetrical loading conditions or
due to faults in the supply network.

.2 E l e c t o d e boilers which are not adequately insulated shall

be connected by their own transformers.

0 If this is the case, there should be a separate lead direct-

ly connecting the neutral point of the boiler and that of
the transformer. This connection lead shall be insulated
and have a cross-section at least 50% that of the supply
leads.

The neutral point of the transformer shall be insulated

from earth and not have a breakdown fuse in its circuit.
The neutral point of the electrode boiler and the outer
casing shall be earthed.

A device should be provided which disconnects the electrode

boiler from the supply if the current exceeds SA in the
connection lead between the neutral point of the boiler
and that of the transformer.

.3 Electrode boilers are not permitted to be connected to a

dir.ect current source.

1. 6 Flat irons.

Flat irons should be provided with a stand or support of approv-

0 ed type, unless the type of iron concerned has a built-on sup-
port or is of such design as to be approved for placing on a
surface without the use of a separate stand or support.

2. Hot-air installations.

2.1 Electrical hot-air units.

0 .1 In this context an electrical hot-air unit consists of
heating elements assembled together with a fan (and pos-
sibly an air filter) for the purpose of producing hot air
for space-heating or drying. The hot air is normally led
out through a duct or a system of ducts.
 66

.2 Hot-air units shall be provided with thermostats and

thermal cutouts. These are to be placed in the upper
part of the hot-air side of the elements, and so con-
nected that they independent of each other disconnect
the heating elements (all phases) if excess tempera-
tures are reached .

.3 Thermal cutouts shall not be of a design providing

C
automatic reconnection.

.4 If the connections to the heating elements are positioned

such that they may be exposed to excess temperatures then
these connections must be of sufficiently heat resistant
types.

.5 Fan-motors must not be placed in ducts etc. leading from

.6
the heating elements.

Heating elements shall only operate when the fan-motor is

0
energised.

.7 If the heating capacity of the elements is such that the

surface temperature of the unit can exceed ao0c if the
current supply is lost, then the unit and possibly also
the hot-air ducts must be located so that combustible
objects or building parts cannot attain a temperature
higher than ao0c and in such a way that the surroundings
are not damaged .

.8 Hot-air units and their surroundings shall at all times

be kept clean.

.9 The air-intake for hot-air units must be so located or

protected that dust or combustible particles cannot, in
any significant amount, be drawn into the system.

. 10 Any air-filters must be placed at such distance from the

heating elements that.they cannot be ignited.

. 11 Air-filters must be easily accessible for replacement or

cleaning. Written instructions for the cleaning of the
filters shall be fitted in a prominent position. 0
. 12 A device which indicates blocking of the air-filters must
be fitted.

. 13 Heating units shall be placed so that the distance to com-

bustible building parts is at least 10 cm so that these
parts cannot during normal operation attain a temperature
higher than ao0c.
0
. 14 The heating unit shall be of such design and fitted in
such a manner that the heating elements can be easily
cleaned or replaced.
 67

.15 Hot-air units shall be marked with a label, statina:

"Brannfare. Må ikke tildekkes." ("Fire risk. Must not
be covered.") The label shall be mount.ed in a prominent
position and are required for both permanently fitted
units and portable units.

.16 Permanently fitted hot-air units shall be tested by the

electrical fitter after the installation is completed.
Special care must be taken to ensure that all safety
arrangements are working properly. A written notice,

0 stating that the installation is working properly, is to

be sent to the Local Inspectorate.

. 17 Hot-air units shall be delivered with detailed instruc-

tions as to fitting, operation and maintenance.

.18 The above requirements for the design og hot-air units

0 apply to all units which are not subject to approval by

NEMKO or NVE. The requirements concerning the installa-
tion apply to all types of hot-air units.

2.2 Separate heating elements fitted inside or connected to the air

duct system.

.1 The heating elements must operate only when the fanmotors

for the air-duct system are energised .

.2 A thermal cutout must be fitted inside the duct above the

heating elements. The thermal cutout shall not be of a
design providing automatic reconnection.

.3 If the connections to the elements are positioned such

that they may be exposed to excess temperatures then these
connections must be of sufficiently heat resistant types.

.4 Separate heating equipment which is connected to the hot-

air system shall be so designed that the hot air is not
led past combustible materials and shall be provided with
a label placed in a prominent position warning against
covering up of the air outlets.

0 .5 That part of the duct enclosing the heating elements shall

be heat insulated and securely fastened by means of heat
resistant materials. The distance from the duct to com-
bustible building parts shall be at least 10 cm to ensure
that during normal operation and under the most unfavour-
able conditions these cannot attain a temperature higher
than so0c.

0 .6 That part of the duct where the heating element is built-in

shall be easily accessible.

.7 A diagram must be affixed inside fuse cupboards or control

rooms which shows the rating of the heating elements and
their locations in the building.
 68

Additionally, the locations of the heatiny elements must

be given by symbols marked along the ceiling cornice or
similar.

.6 Installation of the apparatus shall be in accordance with

fitting instructions which must be approved by NVE.

3. Radiation-type heating installations.

.1 Radiation-type heating l e m e n t s may be built into ceil-

G
ings, walls or floors so that they are partly or entire-
ly covered by building parts, as long as the elements
are of approved types and fitting and internal connec-
tions are carried out by the manufacturer according to
fitting instructions approved by NVE. Fitting and in-
ternal connections may also be carried out by others
providing they are specially approved by NVE .
o
.2 Radiation-type heating installations are in general per-
mitted to be connected to sources of voltages up to
440 V.

.3 The connections shall be carried out in readily acces-

sible connection boxes located as near to the elements
as the local conditions permit.

.4 The radiation-type heating installations for earth sepa-

rate room shall in general be capable of being discon-
nected on all phases (multipole switch). Thermostats
shall not be used as the sole means of switching off
the installation.

In small rooms such as bathrooms, toilets, entrance

rooms etc., radiation-type heating installations may,
however, have a common switch for several rooms when
this arrangement is safe and practical.

.5 Radiation-type heating elements are not permitted to be

fitted in areas intended for cupboards or other fixed
installations which may inhibit the free transfer of
heat. Heating elements of the type which are baked
0
into plastic foil are, however, permitted to be fitted
in fixed benches and similar in churches and other
assembly buildings.

0
.6 Radiation-type heating elements shall be located such
that they do not prohibit the transfer of heat from
nearby electrical leads, lighting armatures etc .

.7 Durable diagrams shall be fixed inside distribution cup-

boards in which radiation-type heating installations are
connected, which clearly indicate the location of heat-
ing elements and their connection boxes.
 69

Additionally, the drawings shall have the name of the

manufacturer and the rated power and voltages of the
peating elements. The type of covering material shall
also be specified and an indication that changes to the
manufacturers specification are prohibited.

.8 The Electricity Inspectorate or Local Inspection may

require the heating elements to be inspected before

0 the covering material is installed.

4. Heating aable installations.

4.0 General:

.1 Only heating cables of approved type shall be used.

0 .2 Heating cable installations are in general permitted
to be connected to voltages up to 440 V.

.3 Heating cables installed in floors shall have cold con-

nection terminals.

.4 Heating cables are not permitted in plastic conduits.

.5 During the fitting of heating cables, care should be

excercised when stripping the cables for insertion into
connection boxes, and also when bending them and drawing
them into conduits etc.

.6 Cables and accessories shall be so installed that they

cannot under the most unfavourable operating conditions
transmit a temperature higher that 80°c to any nearby
combustible materials during normal use.

.7 The heating cable installation for each separate room

shall in general be capable of being disconnected on
all phases (multipole switch). Thermostats shall not
be used as the sole means of switching off the installa-
tion.
0 In small rooms such as bathrooms, toilets, entrance
rooms etc., heating cable installations may, however,
have a common switch for several rooms when this arrange-
ment is safe and practical.

.8 The Electricity Inspectorate or Local Inspection may

0 require the heating elements to be inspected before the

covering material is installed. (See, however, 4.3.1.4
and 4.:.3 below).
 70

4.1 Heating cable installations in incombustible floors

(e.g. incorporated in concrete).

.1 Power output shall under normal circumstances not exceed

100 W per m2 floor area in living rooms. In rooms in-
tended for short-period occupation by human beings e.g.
bathrooms, churches, etc. a maximum of 200 W p e r m floor
area is permitted. (See, however, 4.0.6 and 4.3.1).

.2 Heating cables shall be laid in earthed metal conduits

of not less than 16 mm diameter, approved for concealed
C
installation and having approved connection sleeves, or
they may be incorporated directly to the floor. Any
metal sheath of the heating cables shall be earthed.

.3 Conduits shall be laid with the smallest possible number

of bends and in no case with so small a radius of cur-
Q
vature that the cable cannot be withdrawn without being
damaged.

.4 Approved type connection boxes only shall be used and

these shall be readily accessible.

.5 Conduits, boxes etc. shall be so fitted and installed

that no water can collect in them.

.6 The spacing between general purpose heating cables and

their connecting wires shall be sufficient to ensure
that the insulation of the latter is not exposed to
harmful excess temperatures generated by the heating
cables.

.7 The minimum distance between the floor surface and any

moulded-in heating cables or conduits for heating cables
shall not normally be less than 5 cm. In dry rooms,
however, a distance of 3 cm is permitted. The distance
may be further reduced to 2 cm if netting or similar
reinforcing material is incorporated above the heating
cables or conduits to prevent the formation of cracks
in the floor material.

Where heating cables are incorporated in concrete on 0

top of a floor made from combustible materials (e.g.
wood), there shall be a layer of concrete at least 1 cm
thick or plates of incombustible materials (e.g. cement-
asbestos plates) of thickness at least 3 cm underneath
the heating cables.

.8 Heating cable installations in rooms used for the

accommodation of animals shall be equipped with earth
0
leakage circuit breakers with tripping currents not
higher than 30 mA.
 71

4.2 Heating cable installations in combustible floors.

.1 The heating cables shall be of a single conductor type.

.2 The heating cables shall have a maximum power ratin1

of 10 lv/m. The power output shall not exceed 80 W/m
floor area. •

0 .3 Metal sheaths or shields in the heating cables shall be

earthed. The heating cable installation shall be equip-
ped with an earth leakage circuit-breaker of maximum
30 mA tripping current.

For installations in dry rooms in dwelling houses, how-

ever, earth leakage circuit-breakers and earthing of
G metal sheaths and shields may be omitted providing that
the surface on which the heating cables are resting is
not in contact with any electrically conductive parts
of the construction which are in contact with the earth.

.4 Permitted floor constructions for heating cable installa-

tions.
. 4.1 Floor boards, parquet or chip boards resting upon wooden
beams or wooden battens with a possible floor covering
and/or carpet on top. The heating cables are to be laid
between the beams and parallel to them. As a supporting
layer for the heating cables, thin wire-netting (chicken-
wire) should be used beneath the whole extent of the
cable installation. The netting is to be bent down
suitably between the beams. See Fig. 1.

The cable is to be secured to the netting by wire or by

cutting some of the metal strands in the netting and
bending these over the cable.

The distance between the points of attachment shall not

exceed 35 cm. As a support for the heating cable, metal
strips with clips for attachment etc. may also be used,

0
the distance between the strips being maximum 35 cm.
This distance may be increased to 50 cm for mineral in-
sulated heating cable. The support for heating cables
may also be incombustible plates (e.g. cement-asbestos
plates) having a thickness of at least 3 mm. The cables
must be fastened by means of clips etc. spaced at a maxi-
mum distance of 1 m apart.

The distance between the heating cables and the lower

side of the floor must be at least 1 cm except at points
where the cables cross over the floor beams. The cros-
sing of the support beams shall be effected by cutting
points of the beams) or by nailing pieces of wood a small
distance apart on top of the beams between which the
cable is to be placed. The last method is designed so as
to weaken the support beam.
 72

.4.2 Wood-fibre sheets, wooden floor boards/parquet or hard

building sheets on top of a layer of s a d , suitable
covered by carpet, linoleum etc.

The layer of s n d beneath the cables must be at least

3 cm in thickness. On top of this layer of sand and
covering the whole extent of the installation wire,
netting must be placed for the cable to rest upon. On
top of the cable another layer of sand between 1 and 2
cm in thickness must be placed. See Fig. 2.
r
\___,,
Note:
Fig. 1 and 2 show exampies of fioor constructions
according to 4.2.4.1 and 4.2.4.2.

1
I Floor boards, parquet or chip boards,
0
with cover on top.
Min. l cm.
Heating cable fastened to wire netting
in the air space.
Supporting insulated wooden beams.

Wood-fibre plate or floor boards/parquet

and hard building plates.
Plastic foil.
Min. l cm, max. 2 ·cm dry sand.
Heating cable fastened to wire netting.
Min. 3 cm. layer of sand
Insulated supporting layer.

4.3 Heating cables in explosion hazardous areas.

4.3.0 General:
.1 Heating cables must be of a single conductor type having
a metal sheath and an outer sheathing of insulating mate-
rial.
If the surface temperature of the heating cables exceeds
ao0c however, it is permitted to use heating cables
which do not have an outer insulating sheath.
 73

.2 The metal sheaths of the heating cables and any metal

conduits must be earthed.

.3 The heating cable installation must have its own separ-

ate fuses.

.4 The heating cable installations must be equipped with

earth leakage current-breaker of maximum 30 mA tripping
current.

0 .5 The maximum surface temperature of connections, materials,

etc. should be as decided for explosion hazardous areas,
s e e § 495.

4.3.1 Heating cable installations in floors in explosion hazardous

rooms.

0 .1 The power output must be maximum 100 W per m2 floor

area.

.2 The heating cables must be incorporated in concrete on

an underlaying support of incombustible materials. Above
these there must be a layer of reinforced concrete at
least 7 cm in thickness to prevent the formation of
cracks. If the heating cables are situated in thick-
walled galvanized conduits the covering thickness may
be reduced to 5 cm.

The metal sheaths of the heating cables and any protec-

tion conduits must be earthed.

.3 The surface temperature of the floor must not exceed

40°c in normal use and under the most unfavourable
circumstances. Results from temoerature measurements
should be sent to the Electricity Inspectorate or the
Local Inspectorate.

.4 The heating cable installation is not to be covered

before inspection by the Electricity Inspectorate or
the Local Inspectorate has taken place.

4.4 Outdoor heating cable installations in driveways, open

areas, steps or similar places:

.1 Heating cable installations are to be earthed in the

usual manner. Groups of heating cables should not
normally be fused higher than 63A.

0 Heating cables may be laid on a rolled and level layer

of sand, powdered rock etc. and covered by at least
5 cm of asphalt (ABS or better) or slabs of rock or
concrete dimensioned according to the stresses which
may be imposed on them. The slab thickness should not
normally be less than 5 cm.
 74

Heating cables which are laid in mortar, asphalt etc.

may be covered with slabs of rock or concrete of a size
suitable for the stresses which may be imposed on them.
Th€ th.ickness of the cover should not normally be less
than 4 cm. It is assumed that any voids which may form
between the slabs are filled with asphalt, mortar etc.

o
Heating cables may also be incorporated into reinforced
concrete. Where the supporting layer is of sufficient
strength to prevent the formation of cracks, the cover-
ing layer shall be not less than 3 cm.

.2 Connection boxes should preferably be located above

ground and be readily accessible. The design and loca-
tion shall be such that they are protected against humi-
dity and mechanical stresses as well as possible. Con-

0
nection boxes which are laid in the ground must be ade-
quately protected against c o r r o s i n and must also be
filled with a suitable compound to prevent the ingress
of water.

4.5 Heating cable installations in places of normal traffic.

The provisions in 4.4 are applicable in addition to the

following:

.1 Heating cable installations shall be equipped with

earth leakage circuit-breaker or similar device with
a tripping current not above 30 rnA
.
.2 The heating cable installation shall be suitably marked
by durable and readily visible notices (e.g. on house
walls etc.) which clearly indicate the physical extent
of the installation.

.3 Heating cable installations must be notified to the

Electricity Inspectorate or the Local Inspection in
good time before work is planned to commence, and work
is not allowed to start until permission is given.
Furthermore, a note of completion is to be sent to the

Note:
inspection authority concerned in due course.
0
The Local Inspection will present the notification to the
public bodies such as Water and Sewerage Services, Tele-
graph Services, Gas Boards, Road Boards, etc. which may
be affected by the heating cable installation. The vari- f\
ous interests of these bodies must be co-ordinated by the \_
Local Inspection before permission to commence work is
given.
 75

Plaaes of normal traffic are roads, pavements, publia

areas, eta. In suah plaaes it must be assumed that
digging may be started by someone who is not aware of
heating aables being installed. Earth leakage airauit-
breakers in suah installations is thus a protection
against dangerous voltages oaauring on work tools, eta.
in the event of damage oaaurring to the installation.

0 4.6 Heating cable installations in streets, roads, airfields,

other areas of heavy traffic and highly frequented places
must not be commenced without special permission from NVE
in each case.

Note:

0 Application for permission aaaompanied with a description

of the installation is to be sent to NVE through the
Loaal Inspection and Eleatriaity Inspectorate in the
usual manner.

5. Other heat-generating appara1us and heating installations

Heat-generating apparatus and heating installations of other

types or for other purposes than those mentioned in this
article, should be designed, fitted and used according to
provisions, fitting instructions, etc. approved by NVE or
NEMKO.

In the fitting instruction, operating manual etc. it should

be stated that the apparatus or installation is approved by
NVE or NEMKO together with the date of the approval.

§ 447. Welding equipment

a. Design

0
Welding equipment shall be designed so that leakage into the
welding circuit of current from other circuits at higher
voltages is prevented. The welding circuit and its associ-
ated current-carrying components shall be adequately insu-
lated from the cover of the apparatus. Where the welding
circuit is earthed, the earth lead shall be connected to the
same terminal as the return lead from the workpiece. The
connection terminals in the welding circuit shall be desig-

01 ned and located in such a way that the terminals cannot be

touched under normal working conditions.

b. Protection

Welding equipment shall be earthed by means of earth con-

ductors incorporated in the supply cable. Portable welding
transformers shall be of Class I or Class II construction.
 76

Portable welding equipment shall have an insulated cable

entry and extra protection at the entry point (insulating
sleeve, etc.).

c. Voltage

Welding equipment must not be connected to heavy current

mains carrying a voltage higher than 600 V. Equipment of
the motor-generator type may, however, be connected to
higher voltage mains. 0
d. No-load welding voltage

I. The no-load welding voltage of welding equipment shall

be as low as possible, bearing in mind the welding and
technical requirements. For voltage carrying elektro-
des which are located so that they may be touched, the
following shall apply:
0
1. The no-load voltage for manual and semi-automatic
welding equipment for professional use, shall not
normally exceed the f o l l o i n g values:

a. Alternating current equipment 80 V (r.m.s. value)

b. Direct current equipment with

ripple above 10% 80 V (r.m.s. value)

c. Direct current equipment with

10% ripple or lower 100 V (r.m.s. value)

2. The no-load voltage for automatic welding machines

must not normally exceed the following values:

a. Alternating current equipment lØ0 V (r.m.s. value)

b. Direct current equipment 100 V (r.m.s. value)

3. On small portable single-phase welding equipment for

intermittent and occasional non-professional use the
no-load voltage must not exceed 70 V (r.m.s. value). 0
4. On equipment for professional use where, for technical
reasons, higher no-load voltages than those above can-
not be avoided, the equipment must be provided with an
automatic device which reduce the voltage to the per-

0
missible level within 0.2 seconds of the arc being
extinguished.

Note:

For the purpose of the present regulations, ripple is

understood to be the alternating current component of
the rectified no-load voltage.
 77

Ripple ( w ] may be calculated as

w = 100lkf2 - 1 %

The form-factor, kf, is the ratio of the r.m.s. value and

the mean value of the no-load voltage.
·x = !!!!.il
f Um

With sinusoidal supply voltage having no smoothing of the

no-load voltage by means of capacitors or similar, the
following values of percentage ripple are obtained for
the most common rectifier connections:

( 1) Single-phase, centre tap connections 48 %

0 ( 9 ) Single-phase, bridge connection

(10) Three-phase, bridge connection
( 3 ) Three-phase, double star connection
48
4. 5
4.5
%
%
%
( 2 ) Three-phase, star connection 18 %

(The connection numbers in parantheses are those given

in IEC Publication l46.)

In practice, the r.m.s. value of the voltage is measured

by using a voltmeter of the hot-wire, electrodynamic or
moving iron type, and the mean value by using a moving
coil type of voltmeter.

II. If the welder is working in constricted conditions, e.g.

a boiler, pipeline or inside similar position, direct
current shall normally be used which has a ripple not
higher than 10%. Direct current with a ripple higher
than 10% and also alternating current are, however, per-
mitted under the following conditions:

1. The voltage on the welding cable connection terminals

must at no time exceed 80 V (r.m.s.).

2. Under no-load conditions the no-load voltage must not

0 exceed SO V (r.m.s.). After the welding circuit has

been opened the resultant higher voltage must be re-
duced to SO V within 0.2 seconds.

3. If the conditions specified in (1) and (2) above are

met with the aid of an automatic protection device,
it must be possible to test whether the latter func-

0
tions correctly. The welding equipment must be fit-
ted with a monitoring device which indicates whether
the protection device is operating as intended.

4. If the protection device fails, special procedures

must be adopted to ensure that the voltage on the
welding cable terminals cannot exceed SO V. This
condition must be fulfilled within 1 second.
 78

5. The equipment required by (1) and (4) above must

operate satisfactorily under the stresses to which
it may be exposed during operation, even at an in-
clined angle of 30°.
6. Welding equipment under (1) and (5) above must be
marked '50 V' in a prominent position.

c
Equipment fitted with protection devices must in
addition be marked with an instruction to the effect
that it must not be used if the protection devices
fail.

III. If the entire installation contains no current-carrying

components which can be touched, a higher voltage than
specified under (1) above may be used even without a
protection device.

IV. If the welding circuit has no live connection with the

workpiece or with earth, and welding takes place with
0
the aid of an arc between two or more electrodes fitted
in the same holder, the voltage between electrodes may
be double the specified no-voltaqe value.

§ 481. Electric fences

Fencing equipment shall provide voltage pulses which are

not dangerous to humans or animals. The equipment shall
be accompanied by operating instructions and safety regu-
lations, together with installation instructions, which
have been approved by NVE. Mains-operated equipment shall
be regarded as heavy current equipment up to and including
the terminals to which the fence wires are connected.
Fence wires out-of-doors shall be attached to separate poles.
Poles used for light-current, low-voltage or high-voltage
may not be used. Fence wires from different fencing instal-
lations must not be able to come into contact with one another
and shall not be attached to the same poles or supports.
Fence wires must not come into contact with qrass or branches.
Fence wires shall not cross public roads or railways.

Fencing equipment may be installed indoors or out-of-doors,

0
but may not be placed or connected in fire-risk or corrosive
areas. It must never be so placed that the apparatus or its
connected fence wires can, in the event of any foreseeable
failure, make live contact with other electric wires or parts

0
of other electrical installations.

The crossing of other electric wires or cables shall as far

as possible be avoided and shall, where inevitable, be effec-
ted with the greatest possible spacinq between them. The
angle of cross shall be as close to a right-angle as possible.
Fence wires less than 2 m i n the horizontal direction from
overhead low-voltaqe wires and less than 15 m i n the hori-
zontal direction from overhead high-voltage wires shall not
be more than 1 m above the ground.
 79

Note:

The prohibition on installing fencing equipment in certain

types of areas is due to the fire risk in places contain-
ing combustible dust (e.g. barns) and possible damage in
places containing corrosive fumes, e.g. cow-houses, stalls,
piggeries and hen-houses.

0 § 482. Mains-operating fencing equipment

Where mains-operated fencing equipment is fitted out-of-doors

it shall be mounted in a suitable enclosure. Connection to
the mains may be effected by means of fixed wiring and a two-

0 pole switch and/or plug. Equipment for mounting out-of-doors

shall not have a flexible cable lonqer than 1.5 m.

Note:

The relection of the mounting position depends on local

conditions and facilities for connection to the mains.
Such connection shall be made by an authorized contractor.

New equipment is to be of the double-insulated type.

Equipment having a metal case without double insulation

must be provided with two earth terminals, one for the
protective earth and one for the supply earth. The former
serves for connection of the protective earth lead, while
the latter is connected to the earth electrode. These
earth terminals or earth leads must not be connected to
each other.

§ 483. Toys etc. for connection to the mains.

Apparatus and equipment which are intended to be used by

children during play shall be of class III construction,

0
designed for operating voltages not above 24 V and trans-
formed down by safety transformers or convertors having
separate windings and no earthing of the secondary wind-
ings. Safety transformers or convertors must be of class II
construction, having no-load voltages not above 33 V.

Apparatus and equipment must not, under the most unfavour-

able working conditions, create temperatures above 80°c on
0 any parts or components which may be touched, even when due
to careless treatment.
 80

i. INSTALLATIONS IN VARIOUS TYPES OF

LOCATION

§ 486. Classification groups.

Equipment shall be selected on the basis of the condi-

tions obtaining in the room or location in which it will
operate, such conditions being determined by the state of
that room, etc. or the use to which it is put.
0
Installations in the various types of location shall
satisfy the requirements for the classification group
concerned. The groups are based on the following types

0
of conditions:

Control room conditions

Dry conditions
Dirty conditions
Damp conditions
Wet conditions
Corrosive conditions
Garage conditions
Fire-risk conditions
Explosion-risk conditions

In rooms or parts.thereof which, by reason of their state

or of the activity conducted in them, fall under more
than one classification group the installation shall be
carried out as specified for that group having the most
stringent requirements. In case of doubt, the matter
shall be raised with the Electricity Inspectorate or Local
I n p e c t i o n before work commences. •

In rooms where alterations have been made or which are

used for purposes other than those anticipated, which
result in the installation no longer satisfyinq the
Regulations, the wiring must be re-laid to suit the new
conditions.

In certain large workshops etc. which are divided into a

0
number of sections, but without partitions have been erect-
ed, installations may be carried out in accordance with the
nature of the individual sections, where this is reason-
able. In such cases a plan must be approved by the Elec-

0
tricity Inspectorate or Local Inspection before work com-
mences.

In rooms or parts thereof where the use to which they are

put or other circumstances may involve a danger of damage
to the wiring, as in certain types of storeroom, workshop,
etc., conduits, lead-covered cable or "rørtråd" must be
suitably protected.

Insulated leads, cables and "rørtråd" must not be fitted

within 30 cm of fuel-buring equipment or fuel-pipes.
 81

Uninsulated conductors are permitted only when they are

run between rooms of the same type, and then only in
free openings which provide at least 5 cm clearance in
all directions.

Freely-supported insulation wires shall be taken through

walls, floors and ceilings in rigid conduits which are of
insulating material, using either one conduit per wire or
multiple conduits. In the case of a passage through a
0 floor the conduit shall be brought up at least 1.5 m above
the floor. For input conduits, s e e § 431. Wiring through
floors and ceilings shall, if possible, be avoided where
corrosive conditions prevail. Where essential, such wiring
must be effected using particularly good sealing of the
conduits.

0 Concealed conduits from dry rooms to wet rooms or to the

open air may be led directly into sealed fittings or seal-
ed connection boxes on the apparatus concerned when this
is sited in the immediate vicinity of the conduit outlet
into the room. Surface or concealed conduits may not other-
wise be run into wet or corrosive areas or into the open
air. Concealed conduits having connection boxes and
other fittings of the sealed type are, however, permitted
in wet and corrosive areas.

Wires or cables which are run through walls, floors or

ceilings shall be of such type and have such protection
as is specified for the room having the most stringent
requirements. Any change-over to another system of in-
stallation shall be made in the room in which the equip-
ment is least exposed to stresses.

Cable and "rørtråd" shall be run through floors, walls

and ceilings in robust pipes. This is not, however, re-
quired where they pass through solid wooden walls having
no panelling, nor is it required for armoured cable where
it passes through walls and none of the rooms are damp,
wet or contain corrosive substances. Where they pass
through into damp, wet or corrosive areas, or into the

0 open air, steel conduits shall be hot-galvanized. Conduits

shall be sealed at the end, situated in the driest room and,
where appropriate, sloped downwards towards the dampest
room.
For agricultural installations, s e e § 498.

0
Note:
WherP equipment and apparatus is subject to inspection by NEMKO,
the Approvals List indicates as far as possible the types (groups)
of room in which any type of equipment or covering, casing, etc.
may be used.

§ 487. Control rooms.

This group covers rooms or parts thereof which are

securely enclosed and are used mainly for electrical
 82

apparatus and machines, and which in normal circumstar.ces

are accessible only to trained or expert persons.

In control rooms it is permitted for electrical installa-

tion components to be used without the protection
specified i n § 402.

There must, however, be generous spacing between current-

carrying components and adequate room for the operating
G
staff. For minimum spacing, s e e § 435. The room shall
be well lit. The operating areas shall have an insulating
floor covering to a width of not less than 0.8 m. The
circuit diagram, together with necessary instruction
plates, shall be exhibited in appropriate places.

The door of the room shall bear a notice indicating that

unauthorized persons are not permitted to enter. This
Q
door shall be capable of being opened from the outside
only by means of a key to which authorized persons only
have access. The door shall be able to be opened easily
from the inside without the use of a key, or similar.

Control rooms shall be kept clean and shall be well main-

tained. The storage of unauthorized material, tools, etc.
in these rooms is not permitted. Stairways, passages and
access through doors shall be kept clear so that movement
is not restricted.

§ 488. Dry rooms.

This group covers rooms in which the air is relatively
dry and clean, the temperature relatively uniform and
normal, and in which no special conditions exist which
could cause the room to came within anouther group.

All types of approved material and apparatus may be used

in dry rooms.

a. Fuses shall be mounted on a board or support or in a

panel or box. 0
b. Uninsulated conductors and equipment, machines and
apparatus having unprotected and uninsulated current-
carrying components may be installed in dry rooms to
which unauthorized persons have no access and also,
in special cases where such current-carrying components
are fitted where they are out of reach or otherwise pro-
tected from accidental contact. In workshops, etc. in
C
which accessible bare connections are likely to be used,
warning signs shall be exhibited in suitable plates.
Where there may be a danger of the surroundings being
ignited, fireproof coverings shall be fitted.

c. Free-supported insulating wires installed on bobbins

may be used only within apparatus, panels and switch-
boards. The same applies to unsheathed lead-covered
cable.
 83

d. Unsheathed "rørtråd" may be used only in dry rooms

having an insulated floor and without earthed metal
components such as water pipes, radiators, etc. with-
in reach. Unsheathed "rørtråd" may not be fitted on
ceilings or walls having built-in electric heating
equipment or insulating hardboard with an attached
conductive covering.

e. "Rørtråd" or lead covered cable may be used if it has

0 braiding or an insulated protective sheath.

f. Surface or concealed conduit layouts may be used.

g. Plastic insulated cable may be used.

h. Paper-insulated cable below 25 mm2 shall not be used.

0 See, however, § 457.

i. Flexible cables of all approved types may be used.

Also switches, plug and socket-outlets, connection
boxes and similar apparatus.

Note:

Circuits for lighting of public halls and similar ought

to be fitted with automatic fuses.

§ 489. Dirty rooms.

This group covers rooms which contain dirt or dust in such

quantities that wiring,apparatus, motors or other components
may become covered and consequently overheat, although with-
out danger of a fire being started.

a. Fuses are to be installed in panels of the enclosed type.

b. Uninsulated wires may be used for smelting furnaces, etc.

in situations where insulted wires are not practicable
and for other purposes under the conditions specified

0 i n § 488, but not in those rooms included under (q) below.

c. Freely-supported insulated wires are not permitted.

d. Unsheathed "rørtråd" is not permitted.

e. "Rørtråd" and lead-covered cable having braiding or in-

0
sulating protection may be used.

f. Surface or concealed conduit layouts may be used.

g. Plastic-insulated cable with or without conductive pro-

tective sheathing may be used.
 84

h. Paper-insulated cable below 25 mrn2 shall not be used.

See, however, § 457.

i. Flexible cable type NMH or an equivalent approved type

may be used for flexible cords or cables.

j. Switches shall be of the enclosed type.

k. Socket outlets shall be of the enclosed type.

1. Connection boxes shall be of the enclosed type. 0

m. Motors shall be of the watertight type.

n. Lighting fittings shall be of the enclosed or watertight

type, but may be of the guarded type where they have
watertight cable-entries and a cover preventing the accu-
mulation of dust on hot components.
o
o. Heating equipment may be of the enclosed type, but shall
have a smooth surface and a low surface temperature.
(Class L.)

p. Other components shall be of the enclosed or wathertight

type.

q. Electrical installations in aircraft hangars, paper and

textile mills, footwear factories and rooms containing
internal-combustion engines using oils with a flash
point above 55°c (e.g. diesel engines), shall be carried
out as for installations in this classification group.

In aircraft hangars the heating equipment shall be of the

watertight type and of Class L. Switches, fuses and
socket outlets shall be fitted at a height of not less
than 1.5 m above floor level.

§ 490. Damp r o o m s .

This group covers rooms in which the air is normally so

damp that water vapour condenses on the walls and ceiling
Q
and on objects in the rooms, but is not sufficient to
create running drops as a permanent feature.

a. Fuses must be fitted in panels of the enclosed type.

b. Uninsulated wires shall be installed, only if to do so

offers significant advantages from the technical or safe-
ty viewpoints over insulated wires, and then installa-
0
tion should be under the conditions specified i n § 488.

c. Freely-supported insulated wires on bobbins shall be

of the weather and corrosion-resistant type.

d. Unsheathed "rør.tråd" is not permitted.

 85

e. "Rørtråd" and lead-covered cable shall have braiding

or insulating protective sheathing.

f. Surface conduit is not permitted in bathrooms, unventi-

lated-kitchens and lavatories.

Either surface or concealed conduit may be used in other

damp situations.

0 g. Plastic-insulated cable with or without conductive pro-

tective sheathing may be used.

h. Paper-insulated cable below 25 mm2 shall not be used.

See, however, § 457.

0 Fasteners for "rørtråd" and other cable shall be of such

design that they are not attached by damp (rust-protected).

i. Flexible cable type NMH or an equivalent approved type

suited to the purpose may be used for flexible cords and
cables.

j. Switches must be of the ordinary type.

k. Socket-outlets must be of the ordinary type.

1. Connection boxes must be of the ordinary type.

m. Motors must be of the drip-proof type.

n. Lighting fittings must be of the ordinary, splashproof

or enclosed type.

o. Other components shall be of the enclosed or watertight

type unless it is of a type approved for damp rooms.

p. In private bathrooms, saunas, etc., the fitting of fuses

is prohibited.

0 Lighting fittings shall be at least of the splash-proof

type. Other types may, however, be permitted provided
they are specially approved for the purpose. Lighting
fittings must be in a fixed position.

Equipment and machines shall, depending in their design

and location, be of the drip-proof, splash-proof, enclos-

0
ed or watertight construction and be in a fixed position.

Portable apparatus and machines of Class II construction,

together with movable washinq machines, clothes boilers,
centrifuges, rotary driers and similar apparatus and
machines of Class I construction used in laundries, must
be connected to earthed socket-outlets of the splash-
proof type. Socket-outlets shall be mounted at least
1.7 m above floor level and shall have a label reading:
 86

'Only for washing machines and double insulated appa-

ratus bearing the mark @"I '. It is permitted to use
socket-outlets which are specially desiqned for Class
II apparatus, also for socket-outlets for hairdressers'
machines which are to be connected to their own trans-
former where the transformer has separate windings and
is of restricted power (max. 25 W), such socket-outlets
being fitted at least 1.7 m above floor level.

Other types of socket-outlet are not permitted.

0
Flexible cable of wear-resistant type, e.g. NMHV or
cable specially approved for use with the·apparatus
concerned, shall be used for flexible cords and cables.

Switches for controlling lighting and permanently

installed apparatus and machines shall be of the multi-
0
pole type and may be fitted in bathrooms provided that
they are situated where they cannot be reached from
baths, washbasins or showers. Apparatus, lighting
fittings and machines which are specially approved for
use in bathrooms may, however, have built-in multi-pole
switches. Additional switches for controllinq
socket-outlets or permanently installed apparatus
having built-in switches are not required.

Note:
Installations in covered car-ports and similar, loading bays and
petrol stations, as also under outdoor canopies, may be rarried out
as in damp rooms, provided that the covering protects the equip-
ment adequately from rain, i.e. driving rain.
Re (p) above:
Switches controlling lighting and appai·atus in private bathrooms
should be sited outside the bathroom and shall be of the
multi-pole type. Switch.es should be sited at a sufficient
distance from one another in order to avoid confusion. Switches
controlling heating appliances should be sited about 1.7 m
above floor level and marked with a plate reading: 'Heater'
o
Any other switches should also be marked to indieate what they control.
Where little space is available it is important that care should
be exercised in the siting of heating apparatus.

§ 491. Wet rooms.

This group covers rooms in which the air is normally so
damp that water vapour condenses on walls or ceiling and
creates running drops.

a. Fuses must be fitted in panels of the watertight type.

b. Uninsulated wires shall be used only where other

types of wire cannot be used. If uninsulated wires
must be used, they shall either be run out of reach
 87

or protected from accidental contact. Warninq plates

shall be exhibited at suitable and prominent points.

c. Freely-supported insulated wires carried on bobbins

h a l l be used only where other types of wire cannot
be used. Insulated wire carried on bobbins or
insulators shall be of the weatherproof and corrosion-
resistant type.

0 d. Unsheathed "rørtråd" is not permitted.

e. "RØrtrAd" or lead-covered cable having braiding or

insulating protective sheathing may be used. Light-
weight cables are not, however, permitted.

f. Conduits shall not normally be fitted in wet rooms.

0
(This applies to both surface and concealed layouts.)
See, however, § 486.

g. Plastic-insulated cable with or without conductive

protective sheathing may be used. Light-weight cables
are not, however, permitted.

h. Paper-insulated cable less than 25 mm2 shall be used.

See, however, § 457.

Insulating supports or distance clamps (distance pieces)

shall be used when laying "rørtråd" or cable on brick-
work or concrete. Where only impregnated wooden saddles
are used, impregnated wooden battens must be used be-
neath the cable or conduit-wire as a support to prevent
it from lying directly on the brick-work or concrete.
Cables having an external plastic protective sheath may,
however, be attached directly to brickwork or concrete.

Cable-clips used in wet rooms shall be so designed as

not to be attacked by moisture (rust-protected).

i. Flexible cable of a wear-resistant type, such as type

0
NMHV or equivalent, shall be used for flexible cords
and cables.

j. Switches shall be multi-pole and of enclosed or water-

tight type depending on their design. Switches used
in control circuits may be single-pole. The same applies
to switches for the series-control and operation of
multi-pole switches.
0 k. Socket-outlets shall be of the splashproof type.

1. Connection boxes shall be of the watertight type.

m. Motors shall be of the splashproof type.

n. Lighting fittings shall be splashproof, enclosed or

watertiqht dependinq on their design.
 88

o. Other components shall be splashproof, enclosed or

watertight depending on their design.

p. Fuses and socket-outlets are not permitted in bath-

rooms and shower-rooms (for private bathroom s e e § 490).
Apparatus, lamps and motors shall be permanently
installed. Electrical components shall be fitted out
of reach from baths, showers, etc.

q. Lamps and permanently-installed apparatus in wet rooms

shall be capable of being disconnected by means of
0
easily accessible multi-pole switches. The use of
switches at the start of the circuit to socket-outlets
and to permanently-installed apparatus havino built-in
switches is not required.

For agricultural installations, s e e § 498. 0

Note:
In wet rooms in which components are exposed to heavier stresses
due to damp, water or steam than the ciassification of the room
indicates, e.g. due to swilling or &he generation of large
amounts of steam, the Electricity Inspectorate or Local In-
upection may require equipment and apparatus to be of the
sealed type (see§ 405).
Wiring· installed in wet rooms must be·well maintained.

§ 492. Corrosive areas.

This group covers roans in which the walls and ceilings are saturated
or coated with salt or acid liquids, or in which corrosive
substances exist in such quantity that they may attack
components or weaken insulation materials.

All components shall be of the corrosion-resistant type

and in addition shall satisfy the same requirements as
in § 491.
0
§ 493. Garages.
Electrical installations in garages shall be carried out.
specified for damp rooms, with the following additions:

Fuses, switches and socket-outlets shall be sited at

least 1.5 m above floor level. 0
Heating appliances shall be of the enclosed type and of
Class L a n d shall, in addition, be permanently installed.
Other appliances and installation equipment shall be per-
manently installed and fitted at least 0.2 m above floor
level. Motor-driven tools and similar portable apparatus
of the covered type may, however, be used with care. Other
 89

portable motors and apparatus may be used provided that

they are specially approved for use in garages (hand-
lamps, vehicle engine heaters, etc.).

In garages in which swilling with water is normally

undertaken, components which may be exposed to such
swilling shall b'e of the types prescribed for wet rooms,
s e e § 491.
0 Note:
With regard to inspeation pits CU!d similar in whiah petrol
vapour may aaaumulate, see§ 495.

For other provisions regarding ga.rages, see also the building

0 regulations, fire regulations CD1d fire-risk law.

§ 494. Fire-risk rooms.

This grouv covers rooms or parts thereof in which there
exists easily-ignitable materials in the form of flour,
dust, powder, fibre or wood-chips in any considerable
quantity without, however, creating any special risk of
explosion, and rooms in which wood is machined and raw
textiles etc. are stored or processed. Included in this
group of rooms are also rooms in which liquids having a
flash point between 22 and ss0c (B liquids) are handled,
used or stored at temperatures at least 10°c below the
flash points of the respective liquids and in such quanti-
ties or manner that ignition of them may result in a fire.

Rooms in which spray-painting in undertaken on a small

scale and rooms containing internal-combustion engines
using petrol etc., are considered to be fire-risk rooms
when the ventilation is such that explosive mixtures
cannot form.

For rooms which involve fire-risk by virtue of an

0 explosion risk, the regulations i n § 495 apply.

For fire-risk rooms in agricultural buildings the regu-

lations i n § 498 apply.

For the regulations in aircraft hangars, paper and textile

mills, rooms containing internal-combustion engines (with
0 diesel oil) and footwear factories, s e e § 489.

Installations in fire-risk rooms shall be so planned that

machines, apparatus, wiring and other equipment are not
located unnecessarily where easily-ignitable materials are
known from experience to accumulate. All apparatus shall
be cleaned regularly. Machines, apparatus and equipment
shall be of the watertight type and so dimensioned and
located that their surface temperature does not exceed
normal temperatures for the type concerned.
 90

a. Fuses must be fitted in a watertight-type panel sited

at least 1.5 m above floor level.

b. Bare wires are not permitted.

c. Freely-supported insulated wires are not permitted.

d. Unsheathed "rørtråd" is not permitted.

e. "Rørtråd" or lead-covered cable having braiding or

insulating protective sheathing is permitted, but must 0
not be of the light-weight type.

f. In fire-risk rooms which are dry, either surface or

concealed conduit may be used.

g. Plastic-insulated cable with or without conductive

protective sheathing may be used. Light-weight cable
is, however, not permitted.
0
h. Paper-insulated cable less than 25 mm2 shall not be
used and shall not have jute braiding. (See, however,
§ 457.)

i. Flexible cables shall be used only where special condi-

tions make them necessary. They shall in such cases be
as short as possible and shall consist of flexible
cable of a wear-resistant type, i.e. type NMHV or an
equivalent approved type appropriate for the purpose.

j. Switches shall be of the enclosed or watertight type

and shall be multi-pole. Switches in control circuits
may, however, be single-pole. The same applies to
switches for control and operation in series with a
multi-pole switch. Switches which are not fitted on
machines, apparatus etc., shall be sited at a height
of at least 1.5 m above floor level.

k. Socket-outlets must be of the enclosed type. They

shall be sited at a height.of at least 1.5 m above
floor level.

1. Connection boxes shall be of the watertight type.

0
m. Motors shall be of the watertight type and permanently
mounted. Internally-ventilated motors shall have
cooling-air ducts consisting of an incombustible mat-
erial. Both inlet and outlet ducts shall be so fitted
and sited that dust cannot penetrate into ducts or
motor.
0
Portable motors and apparatus may only be used provided
that they are under constant supervision and cannot be
mounted permanently for practical reasons. Such motors
 91

should be of the splash-proof type. Hand-tools of

the covered type may be used in exceptional cases,
when special care must be exercised.
n. Lightin9 =ittings nay be used if they are n th
covered type provided with watertight cable entries,
are fitted with deep shields and do not have through-
flow ventilation. In the case of installations in
rooms where lamps may be surrounded by easily ignited

0 materials, watertight type fittings must, however, be

used.

o. Heaters shall be of Class L a n d of the watertight type

with a smooth surface. Heaters shall be permanently
installed.
Heating lamps shall have ceramic holders and a deep
0 shield. Such
supports made
lamps shall be fitted in housings or on
from incombustible material.

Other heating apparatus such as glue-boilers, etc. may,

in exceptional cases, be used in fire-risk rooms when
suitable arrangements are made to combat the danger of
fire.

Note:
For the requirements for installations in d:rying rooms, painting
rooms and rooms aontaining internal-aombustion engines, see
the Building Regulations.
Rooms or parts of rooms in whiah magnesium or high-magnesium
alloys are ground are aonsidered to be fire-risk rooms.

§ 495. Explosion-risk rooms.

The re ulations in this section are su erseded b the

NVE Communication no. 1 77.

0
 92

§ 498. Agricultural installati0rts.

The term 'agricultural installations' is understood
to mean electrical installations in farm out-buildinqs
such as cattle-houses and barns (damp, dirty, wet,
corrosive and fire-risk rooms). The term also includes
all accommodation used for animals and for storing hay,
corn, straw, meal, rootcrops, potatoes, etc. together
with milking parlours, manure sheds, wood-stores, cart
and tractor sheas, tool-sheds, etc. 0
a. Fuses at the point of entry of the supply shall be
mounted in a box or panel of the watertight type.

0
Fuse panels in barns shall be of the watertight type.

Fuse panels in wet rooms shall of of the watertight

type.

Fuses are not permitted in corrosive areas.

Fuse panels in other rooms may be of the enclosed

type, but shall be protected from corrosion (e.g. by
hot-galvanized sheet-steel cubicles havinq watertight
entries).

b. For fixed equipment preference shall be given to the

use of cable without a conductive protective sheath.
If the cable has such a sheath this shall be corrosion-
proof or otherwise protected agains corrosion. Light-
weight cable is not permitted. In exposed places the
cable shall be specially protected in a manner suit-
able to the conditions. Cables shall be run through
walls in mechanically robust and corrosion-resistant
pipes which must be sealed. They should if possible
not be run through ceilings from cattle-houses, stalls,
etc.

Cables shall be fastened by means of clamps or saddles

made from robust material which will not be attacked
0
by damp or chemical action. (Saddles of corrosion-
proof type, e.g. made from non-rusting steel, or sad-
dles made from impregnated wood or insulating materi-
als.)

Saddles and clamps shall be fastened by means of cor-

rosion-resistant or non-rusting nails or screws. The
distance between fastenings shall not exceed 30 cm.
0
Cables shall not be laid directly on concrete or brick
walls, but on an impregnated wood support or by means
of distance clamps, unless they have an external
plastic protective sheath.
 93

c. Flexible cables shall be used only where conditions

make them necessary. They shall be as short as pos-
sible and be of wear-resisting flexible cable (NMHV)
or an equivalent type of approval cable.

d. Lighting fittings and equipment shall be of the water-

tight type .and shall, in accommodation used for ani-
mals, be fastened directly to the support. (Ceiling
or wall frame.)
0 e. Switches and connection boxes shall be of the water-
tight type. Socket-outlets must be of the enclosed
type and shall have an earth contact. Switches and
circuit-breakers shall be multi-pole. Where equip-
ment may be exposed to mechanical stress its sheath-
ing or cover shall possess adequate mechanical strength.
0 Cable entries shall be water-tight.

f. Motors together with their starters, enclosures, etc.

shall be of the water-tight type. Flexible cables
for portable motors shall be of the type NMHV with
an earth conductor or of an equivalent approved type.

g. Heating equipment shall be of Class L, of the water-

tight type and with a smooth surface. Heaters shall
be permanently installed and so located that easily-
ignited materials cannot come into contact with them.
Heating lamps shall be used only in approved fittings.

Brooders, warmers for pipe, chicken hatches, heating-

lamp fittings for animals and similar equipment must
be approved for the purpose and shall be places only
in positions in which they cannot come into contact
with easily-ignited materials, become covered with
dust or be damaged by animals. The use of non-
approved apparatus is forbidden (for penalties see
§ 32).

h. The local water mains must not be used as the only

earth connection (see a l s o § 406 - 411).
0 In rooms used for accommodation of domestic animals,
special precautions must be taken to ensure that the
contact voltage for the animals is as low as possible.

An insulating hose or pipe not less than 1 m i n

length shall, if possible, be inserted in any metallic

0 water pipes leading to automatic drinking troughs or

to water pipes outside the room used for animal acco-
modation. Such insulating hose or pipe must also be
inserted in any metallic water pipes leading to auto-
matic drinking troughs from electrical water heaters,
heating elements for pipes, etc. Exposed installa-
tion components, the secondary winding of electrical
 94

fencing equipment, radios, etc. must not be earthed

to waterpipes leading to automatic drinking troughs
having insulating hose or pipe so inserted.

In metallic vacuum and milk pipes of milking machines

an insulating hose or pipe of at least 1 m i n length
shall, as far as possible, be inserted.

It must be made certain that these insulating hoses

or pipes are not short-circuited by electrically
conducting parts of any building, internal installa-
tions, steel wires etc.
0
The insulating hoses must be kept free from any con-
ductive covering.

Automatic drinking troughs, water pipes, projecting

parts of buildings, installations etc. of electrically
Q
conducting materials and any exposed components of
electrical equipment situated within the reach of
animals shall have a good electrical connection be-
tween them and to any reinforcing steel in the floor.

In rooms used for accommodation of domestic animals,

heating cable installations and two-pole socket out-
lets of rated current 10/16 A must be provided with
earth leakage circuit breakers having tripping cur-
rents below 30 mA.

i. Electric fences. The provisions o f § § 491 - 482 apply.

Note:
Since experience has shown that agricultural installations are
exposed to heavy stresses of val'ious kinds (damp, corrosive
vapouretc.) andwhilst they are also, to a greater or lesser
degree, surrowuied by easily-ignited materials, equipment,
machines and apparatus must be sited in positions where they
are unlikely to be exposed to damage or be covered by easily-
ignited materials. For the same reason installations should
be made as simple and readily understood as possible. Their
planning, choice of equipment and method of fitting, must be
governed as far as possible by the aim of reducing the danger
0
of fire and accidents to the minimum. It is aiso an absolute
necessity that installations should be kept clean and properly
maintained in order to prolong their life and prevent fires.

0
Room-evaluation: Depending on the size of a room, the internal
installations and ventilation, it may quite often be correct to
require different types of enclosures etc. in different parts
of the room. In particularly well ventilated rooms for accom-
modation of aninals, e.g. modern air-conditioned hen houses
where the relative air-moisture in the room at all times can
be kept below 701, the instllation may be carried out as for
damp or fire-risk rooms, see§§ 440 and 494.
 95

In order not to have too many branch wires on a single property

or a larger nwnber of meters and fuses in the different build-
ings than is absolutely essential, the main supply entry should
be sited in the principal building, such as in a feeding ?tuff
store or in some other dry and central place. Main supply
entries should not be sited in outhouses. If, however, technical
0 considerations make it particularly desirable to fit the main
entry to a farm in an outhouse, the entry-fuses should be in-
stalled in a fireproof room having a lockable door, see below.

In new buildings or on large farm units, it may be useful to

construct a brick or concree fireproof distribution room in
a central position near the external wall. This room must be
0 fitted with a lockable fire-resistant door, preferably leading
to the open air. The distribution-room should house the fuses,
motor-protecting switches andother equipment and also, if
possible, motors and compressors for milking machines, etc.
All apparatus in the distribution-room should be mounted on
free-standing iron supports. If the room is dry and fireproof,
the apparatus may be of the covered or enclosed type. Fuses
should not be installed in outhouses.
Connections between buildings should be by underground cable or
by overhead cable suspended by steel wire where the ground is
rocky.
Re (b) above:
Wiring used in barns and other acaorrmodation occupied ny ani-
mals should be of type PFXP cable or an approved equivalent.
The use of plastic-insulated cable and lighting-fittings,
switches, eta. made from insulating materials will avoid earth
faults and the passage of leakage current from one room to
another. To reduce the risk of leakage current, care should
be taken in the selection of equipment. One of the conductors
in a cable should be used as the earth conductor rather than a
separate earthing conductor.
Overhead wires passing from warmanimal acaol7111odation into cold
fodder rooms should if possible be avoided, as also should
wires passing through feeding stuff rooms in such positions
that they will for some part of the year be covered with hay,
straw or other combustible material. If no other satisfactory

0
site for the leads is available, a cable should be fitted on
the outside of the external wall, e.g. irmiediately under the
eaves.
Permanent electrical installations should not be fitted in
manure cellars.
Re {h) above:
Waterpipes, earth Lrires and conductive building structures which
may carry a voltage following a break-down in insulation should
be connected to one another. Local water mains do not as a
 96

rule possess a sufficiently low resistance to 2arth to be used

for earthing. It may, therefore, be necessary to sink one or
more earthing electrodes, these being connected to one another.
The earth wires to exposed equipment, together with the water
inlet pipes of the various buildings and metal sheathing and
annou.ring of the underground cables, should be connected to
this earthing system. The connecting wire used for this pur-
pose should be an insulated multi-strand copper wire of at least
6 171112 cross-section. Exposed parts of an installation should,
however, for preference be earthed by means of an incorporated
earth iaire or a separate earth wire in the supply cable. All
c
earth connections should be executed with special care.

o
In order to prevent a breakdown of insulation or a poor earth
connection which may result in animals being exposed to a danger-
ous voltage due to contact, drinking troughs made from conductive
materials should be connected to other conductive parts of a
building with which animals can come into contact. Waterpipes
in a cattle-house may become live due to a leakage in electrical
apparatus, e.g. electric pwnps, water heaters, etc. I may there-
fore be an advantage if the water supply to such apparatus is
connected by means of an insulating or plastic tubing which, if
possible, should be fitted in a vertical position to avoid any
conductive materials settling on the insulating hose.
 97

§ 499. Bomb and Air Raid sheLters

1. Generai
This category of rooms are those which are built as per-
manent protective rooms which are specially designed for
the protection of human beings against damage due to act
of war.
0 The provisions in this article cover those shelters which
a public authority require to be built.

Note:
The provsons in this artiaie are m n u n u mrequirements for
0 electa-ical:instaUations in publ.ic ehel.tere, The owner may
oal.l:for the instaiiation to be aarried out to more stringent
requirements than the present reguiations, but he must himseLf
assure that these requirements are aorrrpLied with. In speaiai
aases, the Direatorate of Civii Defenae does require striater
requirements for its own proteative rooms and for instaiiations
serving military purposes the requirements are often even more
stringent.
Dispensations and permission to deviate from these regulations
aan only be given by NVF:, see§ 31.
The information given in the following relate only to aiviUan
bomb sheiters.. As far as military installations are aonaerned,
referenae must be made to the Ministry of Defenae Building Serviae.
There are three types of bomb shelters acoordinq to the degree of
proteation they are required to give against various types of
weapons:

Type A: Proteation against nualear weapons, aonventional weapons

and chemical:weapons.

Type B: Proteation against aonventionai weapons, nualear fanout

of chemical:weapons.
0 Type C: Proteation against radioaative faiiout from surfaae
detonation of nualear weapons.
Additional preaautions must be taken to prevent damage to eleatriaai
installations due to eleatromagnetia pulses (EMP) from nealear wea-
pons.
0 The Direatorate of Civil Defenae has published a survey of those
loaal aol7111Unities where bomb shelters are required to be built
together with a alassifiaation of the type of shelter required.
For some loaal aOl7111Unities there is no requirement for bomb shelters.
 98

2. Type A and B shelters

Electrical installations in bomb shelters of types A and
B shall comply with the other provisions in the Regula-
tions for Electrical Installations with the following
additions and deviations:

2.1 Electricity supply

2.1.1 Separately located bomb shelters and shelters built into

rock, must have their own separate supply cables.
C
2.1.2 Bomb shelters which are part of buildings used for other
purposes may be supplied in one of the following ways:

0
- Separate supply cable.

- Supply cable branching off from the supply cable to the

building directly inside the foundation wall. The branch-
ing off must be effected inside a closed robust panel
secured to the foundation wall in the same manner as
required for panels inside the bomb shelter itself, see
2.4.1 below.

- Supply cable with its own separate fuses coming from the
main distribution panel of the building. This is only
permitted if the supply cable to the building itself is
laid and protected all the way to the main distribution
room as is required for supply cables to bomb shelters
in 2.2.1 and 2.2.4.

- Supply cable branching off from one of the distribution

panels in the building without any specific requirements
for the laying of the cable. Cable entries are to be as
decided in 2.2.5. This method is only permitted, however,
if the bomb shelter has its own emergency power unit, or
the building is supplied from an overhead network or the
distribution transformer is sited in the same building as
the bomb shelter.

Note:
The Directorate of Civil Defence requires that supply cables to
0
bomb shelters shall be sufficiently dimensioned to cover the
following need for power:
- Main lighting
Ventilation, including possible air conditioning and cooling
units
0
Operation of pumps and other equipment in conjunction with the
sanitary installations and drainage
- Operation of any technical installations which are required for
the operation of bomb shelters as such.
 99

The size of the cable must also be suitable for any peace-time
activities in the bomb shelter.

2.2 Design, laying and protection of supply cables

2.2.1 Supply cables must have conductive shields or metal sheaths.
Shield, metal sheath and any armouring shall be earthed at
each place where the cable insulating is removed.

0 2.2.2 SJpply cables to bomb shelters are to be short circuit pro-

tected by back-up fuses rated at least 3 and not above 5
times the ratings decided for the cross-sections according
t o § 448 a n d § 457. The cross-section must at least cor-
respond to the load, the load being limited by means of
fuses in the bomb shelter. The cross-section must not, how-
ever, be less than 6 mm2.

0 2.2.3 As protection against over-voltages due to electromagnetic

pulses (EMP) surge arresters shall be fitted, having rated
currents of at least 5 KA and sited directly in front of
the first set of fuses in the building. If the direct
distance from this place to the bomb shelter is greater
than 100 m, surge arresters must be fitted in the shelter
as well. These arresters must be connected immediately in
front of the first set of fuses and must be placed in a
separate box or separate panel. Earth conductors leading
from the s r g e arresters must have cross-sections of at
least 6 m m .

2 . 2 . 4 Supply cables to bomb shelters must be laid in the ground,

in spacious conduits or in ducts moulded into the floor of
the lowest floor in the building, or be situated on the
inner surface of the outer wall in the cellar and protected
by means of securely fastened cable protection conduits,
steel profiles or similar. At the transition from con-
cealed to surface installation and at the input to panels
etc., the cables must be provided with expansion loops.

2.2.5 Where cables pass through the gas and pressure boundaries
of the shelter, cable ducts must be of a type which are

0 approved for the purpose by the Directorate of Civil Defence.

Note:
In case of possible use at a later stage, the Directorate of Civil
Defence requires spare cable ducts to be provided.

0 2.3 Fitting methods

2.3.1 Installations in bomb shelters shall be carried out using
cables having conductive shields or metal sheaths, fasten-
ed to support-wires, laid on cable bridges or in cable
ducts or directly fastened to the main structure of the
building.
 100

Conduit installations (surface or concealed) are not per-

mitted. Conduits which are used in conjunction with in-
stallations in other rooms may, however, be placed inside
the walls (and ceiling) of the shelter as long as they are
secured to the outer layer of the reinforcing steel struc-
ture.

2.3.2 Support-wires for cables, lighting fittings etc. must be

of galvanized steel, each strand having a diameter of not
less than 1.8 mm, and having a static breaking load of at
least 900 kp. Each wire must be provided with at least
C
one tightening device (stretcher).

The terminal anchorages of the support wires must be able

to withstand a static pulling force of at least 1000 kp.

0
and the fastening points of the support anchorages must
not be spaced further apart than 5 m and be able to with-
stand a static pulling force of at least 250 kp.

All anchoring points in concrete must be carried out using

expansion bolts.

All terminal anchorages in rock must be by means of bolts

of the split-and-wedge type, penetrating at least 0.6 m into
solid rock. All support anchorages must be by means of
bolts of the split-and-wedge type, penetrating at least 0.3 m
into solid rock.

Fasteners used for securing cables, lighting fittings etc.

to the support wires, must be able to withstand a static
load of at least 5 times the weight of these cables, light-
ing fittings etc.

All equipment used for fastening must be protected against

corrosion.

2.3.3 Cable bridges, trays or ducts must be secured at intervals

not exceeding 1.5 m. Ducts, bridges and fastening equip-
ment must be capable of withstanding a static load of at
least 5 times the weight of the ducts/bridges; cables and
equipment hereby included.
o
Cable bridges or ducts must be suspended from wires. The
methods and equipment used for fastening shall be as laid
down for support-wires, see 2.3.2.

2.3.4 Cables which are secured directly to a building surface

must have the fastening equipment protected against cor-
rosion and be able to withstand a static load of at least
5 times the weight of the cables.
0
 101

2.4 Apparatus, equipment, materials

2. 4 .1 Fuses, measuring apparatus, switches, contactors etc.

shall be fitted inside panels of the enclosed type. In
the case of installations in rock, however, the panels
must be of the watertight type and be provided with a
permanently conne_cted heating element of about 25 W, to
avoid condensation.

0 Switches may be sited outside panels provided they are of

the watertight type.

Panels must be placed in common rooms where they are acces-

sible or in other suitable rooms inside the gas boundary.
Panels must be mounted on shock absorbers approved by the

0 Directorate of Civil Defence. In addition, panels must be

secured to walls or ceilings by means of slack wires,
unless the panels are mounted on special shock absorbers
to prevent them from falling down or toppling over should
the main shock absorbing elements be destroyed. Expansion
bolts which are able to withstand a static load of at least
5 times the weight of the panels plus its contents must be
used for anchoring the shock absorbers and slack wires.

2. 4. 2 Connection boxes must be of the watertight type. Wires

must be connected by means of bolted or crimped terminals
or by leakage-current proof plastic insulated clips or
screwless terminals of the cone type, which themselves are
not fastened to the support (the box itself).

2.4.3 Socket outlets must be of the enclosed type.

2. 4. 4 Lighting fittings must at least be of drip-proof design.

The fittings must be light-weight and shock resistant, and
shall be provided with either plastic shades or glass shadei
with protective metal grids.

Lighting fittings must be secured to their supports by mean:

of expansion bolts which have a static pulling resistance ai

0
least 5 times the weight of the fitting. Lighting fittings
may also be suspended from wires or secured to cable bridgei
or cable ducts provided these are suitable for this and are
adequately secured, see 2.3.2 and 2.3.3.

2.4.5 Motors and associated apparatus etc. must be of the water-

tight type and secured by means of shock absorbers and
expansion bolts. The expansion bolts must have a static
0 pulling resistance at least 5 times the weight of the de-
vices secured to them. The shock absorbers must be of a
type approved by the Directorate of Civil Defence.

I, Rectifiers used for the charging of accumulators etc. may

be of a drip-proof design.
 102

2.4.6 In bomb shelters which have air-conditioning installations

designed to keep the relative humidity below 70% when the
shelters are fully occupied, panels, socket outlets, light-
ing fittings etc. may be of a design approved for damp
rooms.

2.5 Earthing and equipotential bonding connections

2.5.1 In bomb shelters earthing must be carried out as for wet

rooms. The steel structure used for the reinforcing of
C
walls, roofs etc. is to be used as the earth electrode.
The main earth lead for the shelter must be well connected
to the earthing system of the building.

Conduits, ducts and other extensive constructions of con-

ductive materials which pass through the reinforcing steel
0
structure are to be connected to this at the points of pene-
tration. If this is not possible they should have other
conductive connections to the earthing system and be con-
nected to earth every 25 m inside the shelter.

Separate earth wires must be laid and fixed as required

for cables in bomb shelters.

2.5.2 In rock installations which have no direct metallic connec-

tion between the various reinforcing steel structures, an
uninsulated ring-main of copper with a cross-section of at
least 25 mm2 must be installed. The ring-main must be laid
under the floor surface, in drainage ditches etc. internally
along the boundaries of the shelter and be connected to the
earthing system.

Conduits, ducts, support-wires and other extensive metallic

construction components must be connected at each end to
the nearest point of the ring-main and at least every 25 m
inside the shelter.

All metallic gate-posts must be connected to the nearest

point on the ring-main.

Wires used for connection to the ring-main must have at

least the same equivalent cross-section as the conduits,
0
support-wires etc. which are to be earthed, but are not
required to be of a larger cross-section than 6 mm2.

3. Type C bomb shelter

The electrical installations in Type C bomb shelters must 0

satisfy the provisions of the Regulations with the follow-
ing additions and deviations:

3.1 Supply

There are no particular requirements as to the supply to

Type C bomb shelters, such as in item 2.1.
 103

3.2 Design, laying and proteation of supply aables

3.2.l Supply cables are to have conductive shields or metal

sheaths. Shield, metal sheath and any armouring must
be earthed at each place where the cable insulation is
removed.

3.2.2 As protection against over-voltages due to electromagnetic

pulses (EMP) surge arresters must be fitted which have no-

0 minal currents of at least 5 kA and sited directly in front

of the first set of fuses in the building. If the direct
distance from this place to the bomb shelter is greater
than 100 m, surge arresters should be fitted in the bomb
shelter as well. These arresters must be connected immedi-
ately in front of the first set of fuses and must be placed
in a separate box or separate panel. Earth conductors lead-

0
ing from t9e surge arresters must have cross-sections of at
least 6 m m .

3.3 Fitting methods

3.3.l Installations in bomb shelters must be carried out using

cables which have conductive shields or metal sheaths fast-
ened to support-wires, laid on cable bridges or in cable
ducts or directly fastened to the main structure of the
building.

Conduit installations (surface or concealed) are not per-

mitted. Conduits which are used in conjunction with in-
stallations in other rooms may, however, be placed inside
the walls and ceiling of the shelter, but are not to have
any openings towards the bomb shelter.

All equipment used for fastening must be protected against

corrosion.

Support-wires for cables, lighting fittings etc. must be of

galvanized steel, each strand having a diameter not less
than 1.8 mm.

0 3.4 Apparatus, equipment, materials

3.4.l Fuses, measuring apparatus, switches, contactors etc. are

to be fitted inside panels of the enclosed type. In the
case of installations in rock, however, the panels must
be of the watertight type and be provided with a permanent-

0
ly connected heating element of about 25 W to avoid conden-
sation.

Switches may be sited outside panels provided they are of

the watertight type.

Panels should be placed in common rooms where they are

accessible or in other suitable rooms.
 104

3.4.2 Connection boxes must be of the watertight type. Wires

must be connected by raeans of bolted or crimped terminals
or by leakage-current proof plastic insulated clips or
screwless terminals of the cone type, which themselves are
not fastened to the support (the box itself).

3.4.3 Socket outlets must be of the enclosed type.

3.4.4 Lighting fittings must at least be of the drip-proof type.

3.4.5 Motors and associated apparatus etc. must be of the water- 0

tight type. Rectifiers used for charging of accumulators
etc. may be of the drip-proof type.

3.4.6 In bomb shelters which have air-conditioning installations

designed to keep the relative humidity below 70% when the
shelters are fully occupied,panels, socket outlets, light-
ing fittings,etc. are to be of a design approved for damp
Q
rooms.

3.5 Earthing and equipotential bonding connections

3.5.1 In bomb shelters earthing must be carried out as for wet

rooms. The steel structure used for the reinforcing of
walls, roof etc. is to be used as the earth electrode.
The main earth lead for the shelter must be well connected
to the earthing system of the building.

Conduits, ducts and other extensive constructions of con-

ductive materials which pass through the reinforcing steel
structure must be connected to this at the points of pene-
tration. If this is not possible, they must have other
conductive connections on the earthing system and be con-
nected to earth every 25 m inside the shelter.

3.5.2 In rock installations which have no direct metallic con-

nection between the various reinforcing steel parts, an
insulated ring-main of copper which has a cross-section
of at least 25 mm2 must be installed. The ring-main must
be laid under the floor surface, in drainage ditches etc.
internally along the boundaries of the shelter, and be
connected to the earthing system.
o
Conduits, ducts, support-wires and other large metallic
construction components must be connected at each end to
the nearest point on the ring-main and for at least every
25 m inside the shelter.

All metallic gate-posts must be connected to the nearest

point on the ring-main.
0
Connecting wires to the ring-main must have at least the
same equivalent cross-section as the conduits, support-
wires etc. which are to be earthed but are not required to
be of a larger cross-section than 6 mm2.
 105

4. Installations in bomb shelters for use in peaae-time

Electrical installations in bomb shelters which are only
intended to be used in peace-time, may be carried out in
the same way as for normal installations according to the
requirements for particular types of room, its use etc.
in peace-time, but with the following additional require-
ments:

4.1 Parts of installations which are not connected by means

of flexible cords, cables and plugs must be so designed
that they may be disconnected by means of multi-pole
switches or fuses placed in cupboards in the shelter.
Such switches and fuses must be marked so that it is evi-
dent that they control parts of the installations which
are only meant to be used in peace-time.

4.2 Fixed parts of the installation must be fastened and earthed

as required for equivalent equipment in bomb shelters. In
the case of installation parts which are connected by
means of flexible cords, cables and plugs, and which may
easily be removed in case of alerts, such fastenings and
earthing are not required.

4.3 Wiring ducts which penetrate gas or pressure boundaries in

bomb shelters of types A and B must be of a design approv-
ed by the Directorate of Civil Defence.

4.4 Peace-time installations which may in any way influence the

use of the shelter in the event of alerts must not be in-
stalled without permission given beforehand by the Civil
Defence.

Note:
For eaah 50 person in the bomb shelter the Direatorate of Civil
Defenae requires at least one soaket-outlet. The soakets are to
be plaaed at least 1.5 m above the floor and one of the soakets
must be loaated near the radio/TV aerial.

Ci! It is required that the main lighting installation in aommon rooms

should give an evenly distributed illumination of about BO lux,
and when seationed off by means of switahes, should give an evenly
distributed illumination of 5 - 15 lux during night time. Light-
switahes must be loaated at eaah entranae door. In bomb shelters
whiah are equipped for fitting of air-loak a lighting fitting must
be installed by the door beneath the ventilator.
Outside entranae doors to bomb shelters and in the main entranae
routes, lights are to be installed whiah are supplied from within
the shelters. These lights are to be suffiaient to enable people
to find their way to the shelters. Publia bomb shelters and shelt-
ers whiah are aorrmon to several buildings must also have suah
lights above the doors whiah lead from the buildings towards the
main entranaes of the shelters.
 106

Bomb shelters of a larger area than 200 m2 and in aeneral those

smaller rooms whiah are meant for the siak, disable or ahildren,
must be equipped with an emergenay generating unit, unless they
are shelters of type C. The power output from the unit must be
suffiaient to run all installations neaessary in a state of emer-
genay. If the unit is situated outside the gas boundary, then
switahes for starting and stopping andalso any alann funations
for the unit must be situated inside the gas boundary.
Bomb shelters whiah are not equipped with emergenay generating
units must be provided with emerqencq lighting, produaing an i l -
C
lwrrination of at least 3 lux evenly distributed in aomnon and
siak rooms. Emergenay lighting must have an operating voltage
of 24 V designed for supply from standard automobile aaaumulators.
Cupboard/frames used for aaaumulators and aharging reatifiers must
be situated inside a fixed air-loak or in the toilet room. In
addition a number of eleatric torches must be available. In the
case of shelters designed for less than 40 persons and shelters
0
of type C, ordinary pocket torahes may be permitted as the only
emergency lighting.
Bomb shelters must be wired for telephone corrmunication uith the
outside and in aertain oases have aerials for receiving radio
broadcasts.
Reference should be made to "Regulations etc. for Bomb Shelters"
published by the Directorate of Civil Defenae.
In the case of outside lighting designed to aid people in finding
the shelter, reference should be made to "Regulations Regarding
Rlack-outs" laid down in the Crown Pl'ince Resolution of 14 December
1956.

It is the Civil Defence which decides whether fixed installations

as described in 4.2 aan easily be removed in a state of alert.
Normally, pease-time installations, stored objeats etc. should
be removed within 24 hours in a state of alert.
Similarly the Civil Defece decides whether peace-time installations
as described in 4.4, can affect the use of the shelter in a state of
alert. C

0
 Note: 107

The d r h i n g s hcl0w arc c x o l c s of

a) installation in bomb-shelters Lypc A and B

b) certain det3ils from this i n s t a l l a i o n

0
lights tor
ori:--tat o
c e b ce d u c t - - - - " f i l

li
il
11
c ? r ! ' 1 !l r
I

a).
 108

l..,......---------
i_...... ,...'• • • p • • • • , · - : , • • • . •( - ; ; _ - - "d z;,;•-o!

\ Lighting JL\.tng -14 ..

Fitted on Lhc wall or

or in d c t s / b c i d g s

Note the slack on cables

at t h g t r a n s i t i e r , C'etween
wall and equlpncnt Shoe}; ab so r be r s
0
f S c b l oc c r nq )

Fuse cupboard
---------- 0
Cupboard for surge
e r res t e rs

P e s s u r e proof and
q a s tight p e n e t r a t i o n
Conduits in the floor

I
\
.d f).

V I)
i7
{l.
4 p, 0
V 4

I".,'i-,;.\\
b

p=' -,:__·_--+--,\ -
t - : c t . : 1l ·,-1 ..·t •r
f r c t t n-
0
r::--r..J.ns1on ::.:-1;.

25 mm
- - · - · · - - - - - - - - ·- - - - -

i:I
 109

k. INSTALLATIONS IN THE OPEN AIR

§ 501. Apparatus, machines and installation material.

Apparatus and material shall satisfy the same requirements

as those that are specified for use in damp, wet and
corrosive areas, depending on the purpose envisaged and

0
local conditions. See a l s o § 4 0 5 . Apparatus must not be
accessible for operation by unauthorized persons.

Switches shall be multi-pole. Lighting switches shall for

preference be sited indoors. Where lighting switches must
for operational reasons be sited out-of-doors they shall
be located at least 2 m above ground or floor level.

0 Socket-outlets sited less than 2 m above ground level

shall either be of the interlocked type ( s e e § 133) or
shall be provided with a self-closing cover which per-
mits the socket to be covered both when the plug is
inserted and when it has been withdrawn.

All apparatus and machines shall be earthed in accordance

w i t h § § 408 - 412.

§ 503. Permanently Laid wires and cables

Wires and cables shall be so fitted that they are not un-
necessarily exposed to mechanical damage, damp, frost,
sunlight or other climatic stress. Cables shall have a
mechanically robust protection up to at least 2 m above
ground level. Conduits shall not be used as protection.
Only cables and wires of a type approved for corrosive
areas shall be used ( s e e § 492). Wires laid on insulators
(bobbins) on walls and similar shall be insulated and have
waterproof and corrosion-resistant insulation. Wires shall
be of not less than 4 mm2 cross-section. In other respects,
wiring is covered by the requirements i n § 491.

C Cables shall have weatherproof and corrosion-resistant pro-

tection. Light-weiqht cables are not permitted.

I
The armour, conductive shield and conductive protection
sheath of cables must be earthed.

r-,05. Flexible cables

Flexible cahle of type NMHO or of an equivalent type approved

for the purpose may be used for flexible cables. Flexible
cables shall normally be connected by means of a plug or sock-
et. They shall be as short as possible and so sited that
they cannot be operated by unauthorized persons or damaged
by traffic. They shall be easily seen and shall not lie
directly on the ground unless under supervision.
 110

In special instances the Electricity Inspectorate or the

Local Inspection may authorize temporary connection to
overhead lines for loadings up to 63 A, using an approved
layout. Such connection is permitted only for connections
which are under constant supervision or are inaccessible
from ground level. Authority to make such connections
can normally be given only to experts, and to othe persons
in exceptional cases. Those who are not exoerts shall in

0
such cases be given written instructions for which they
shall sign a receipt and which shall contain directions as
to earthing and the proper mintenance of equipment, etc.
and shall impose on them t:,e obligation to show the final
connection layout t i,e Electricity Inspectorate or Local
Inspection.

Note:

FZexibZecabZes used out-of-doors shaZZ consist of oiZ-resisting

0
weatherproof cabZe.
Direct connection to overhead Lines by means of an approved
connection method may be authorized for equipment such as
wood-saws, compressors, concrete mixers, etc.

§ 507. Loading of cabZes.

Paper-insulated and plastic-insulated cables may be loaded
in accordance with the Norwegian standards for loading
of power cables in force at the particular time or in
accordance with the Table below. This table also shows
the permitted loading for overhead cables and cables in
conduit-pipes buried in the earth. The loading values
apply to cables having three or four conductors.
The cross-section values shown for cables with aluminium
conductors are preferred values. Intermediate values may
also be used, but should, if possible, be avoided.

The loading values in the Table are those assumed to limit A

the conductor temReratures to a maximum of 70°c in an a b i e n w
temperature of 15 C in earth and of 25°c in air. Where
the ambient temperature is lower, paper or plastic-
insulated cables may be loaded to a correspondingly higher
value. If the cable is entirely or partially exposed to a
higher ambient temperature, it shall be loaded to a corres-
pondingly lower value. The permitted loading can be
determined with the aid of a conversion factor in
accordance with the Table below. 0
For rubber-insulated cables the loading values in Table 5
shall be reduced using the following correction factors:

For cables laid directly in earth or in conduits: f 0.85

For cables run freely in air f 0.82
 lll

Table 5

Loading of paper-insulated and plastic-insulated cables for

voltages up to 1 kV in earth, in air or ventilated duct and
in conduit-pipe or non-ventilated ducts in the earth.

0 Cross-section
Loading

In earth+) In air In conduit

Copper Alumi- Copper Alumi- Copper Alumi- Copper Alumi-

niu1;2 nium nium nium
2

0
mm mm A A A A A A

1.5 26 17 21
2.5 35 24 28
4 47 38 38
6 59 53 46
10 80 66 62
16 16 105 80 87 66 83 62
25 25 135 105 ll5 87 105 83
35 160 140 130
50 50 195 150 170 135 160 120
70 240 210 195
95 95 285 220 255 200 230 180
120 325 295 260
150 150 365 280 340 265 300 230
185 410 390 340
240 240 480 370 465 360 395 305
300 535 535 440
400 400 630 490 630 500 495 415

+)Assumes earth with specific thermal resistance 100°c. cm/W.

0
Table Sb

Conversion factor for loading of cables in earth with various

ambient temperatures.

Ambient temperature, oC 5 10 15 20 25 30

0 Conversion factor 1.1 1.05 1.0 0.95 0.9 0.85

The loading values shown in Table 5 assume a single cable.

Where there are several cables side by side, the loading value
shall be reduced. The Table below provides a guide for the
determination of the maximum loadinq.
 112

Table Sc

Reduction factor for permitted loading where several cables

lie in the same trench for a distance greater than 4m.

Number of cables 2 3 4 5 6 7 or more

Reduction factor with

7 cm spacing
0.85 0.8 0.75 0.7 0.65 0.6
0
Reduction factor with 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.55 0.55 0.5
spacing below 7 cm 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.55 0.55 0.5

0
Note:
In the event of short-cirauit faults, paper-insulated and plastic-
insulated cables of 1 kV rating should not be exposed to greater
thermal stresses than are indicated in the foZZ()l,}ing Table:

Maximum Short-circuicecurrent
Conductor density :eor 1 second
Insulation material Temperature
Oc Copp2r Alu.r.iinium
A/mm A/rr.m2

Impregnateå paper 250 A p p o x . 145 Approx. 95

PVC 150 105 " 70
Cross-linked
Polyethylene {PEX} 250 " 140 " 90
PE 135 " 95 " 65
-· I
It is assumed that connect.ion terminals, etc., are dirnensio:icd to
withstand the currents and temperatures given in the Table.

§ 508. Underground cables.

0
Cables shall not be laid in the earth unless they are specially
approved for this application. Where unarmoured cables or
cables having no conductive shield or protective sheath must
be laid in the earth in exceptional cases they must be protec-
ted by means of robust conduit-pipes or concrete ducts. Ar-
o
moured cables and cables having a conductive shield or con-
ductive protective sheath may be laid in the earth without
extra protection. Armouring, conductive shield and conductive
protective sheath must be earthed, if possible at both ends of
the cable.

Underground cables shall normally be laid at a depth of at

least 0.5 m. Underground cables shall be laid in such a man-
ner that they offer the least oossible inconvenience to other
cable systems.
 113

Where underground cables are brought up into the open air

suitable protection shall be afforded by means of angle iron
supports or siMilar material.
Where there may be a danger of harmful gases accumulating in
cable ducts and associated chambers, steps shall be taken to
provide adequate ventilation.

0
Joining and branching shall take place in boxes or sleeves
approved for the type of cable concerned or shall be effected
using other reliable cable terminations. Joints, branches and
terminations shall be effected in such a manner that the cable
ends are protected from the escape of oil and the penetration
0f moisture. Paper-insulated cables shall not be connected to
machines, apparatus or equipment having cable entries which
are approved only for the connection of rubber- or plastic-
insulated wires and cables.

Note:
In order to avoid exaess heating due to sow radiation, black
aables and blaak proteative ironwork plaaed over aables should be
painted with a light paint or varnish.
It is reaorrrnended that a red plastia strip be laid over aables laid in
the earth in order to mark the aable trenah.

§ 509. Crossing and adjaaent siting of underground aables.

Low-voltage underground cables shall be laid at least 0.5 m

from light-current, medium-voltage or high-voltage cables
unless mechanically robust protection such as brickwork,
concrete slabs or other reasonable protection is laid
between the cables.

The crossing of cables should be avoided. Where crossing

cannot be avoided, there must be mechanically robust
protection between the cables at the crossing; such as brick-
work, concrete slabs or other reasonable protection.
0 Where open-air heavy-current lines cross underground cables
the latter shall be laid at a depth of at least 0.5 m for
low-voltage and light-current cables and at least 0.7 m for
high-voltage cables.

See also Section IIB, § 379 and Section IIE, § 679.

0 Nole:

Where thre is adjaaent siti'1{J

for any aonsiderable distanae of under-
ground lght-aurrent aables and low-voltage aables, induative effeats
must be aonsidered. Proteation by means of a separating layer is par-
tiauZ.U.ly neaessary.

As "other reaeonabl:e protetion" plaetic sheet may be used or>impr>eg-

nated wooden boards or equ·walent, made and tested accordinq to pro-
visions Laid down by NVE. Results of t e s t s must be[omcarded on
request.
 114

It is reaommended that a red plastia strip be laid over under-

ground aables in order to mark the aable trenah.

§ 511. Overhead lines, insulators and poles.

Open-air lines may be loaded above the limit specified in

§ 448 and fused at correspondingly hiaher values, provided
that the resulting temperature cannot present a danger to
operation or to the surroundings. 0
Current-carrying open-air line must be capable of discon-
nection.

h e free hei!,c of overhead lines above the qround shall be

at l c a t 4m. Where there is normallv no traffic unP.r the
lines, the free height of stub lines-may, however, be
reduced to 2.5 m above the ground provided that the wires
have weatherproof and corrosion-resistant insulation.
0
Over free spans the distance between the individual wires
must be based on the span length. The distance between
individual permanently installed uninsulated lines and
between such lines and other conductive objects (excepting
their own insulator bolts or screws) or parts of buildings
shall in no circumstances be less than 10 cm.

The wires of overhead lines shall have a breaking strength

of at least 400 kp (for normal copper used for lines this
means a cross-section of 10 mm2). For span lengths up to
50 m, however, wires with a minimum breaking load of 300 kp
are permitted. The provisions o f § 707 apply to the material,
tensioning, stressing, etc. of lines in so far as those pro-
visions are relevant.

Poles, masts and the stresses which may be imposed upon them
are covered by the provisions o f § 706 in so far as they are
relevant. Unimpregnated wooden poles may, however, be used
if the safety factor is increased to 7 and the stresses are
reduced to 50% of the value specified for impregnated poles.
In the case of masts, situated at angles alonq the line-run
and of terminal masts at the end of a line-run where the
span is below 80 m, calculations may be based not on 40% of
0
the breaking strength of the lines, but on their tension at
minus 2s0c plus an additional load of 200 + 50 a.grams per
metre with, however, a value of at least 20% of the breaking
strength of the lines.

§ 512. Unused lines. 0

When open-air lines happen to be unused, they shall either
be removed or maintained in accordance with the Regulations
and also be earthed in a proper manner.
 115

§ 513. Crossing of low-voltage and medium-voltage lines.

a. t1ere overhead lines which c l o n q to the same instal-

lation and carry the same voltage are crossed, the
lines may be a t a c h e d to the same (common) mast at
the crossing point.

b. Where the crossing involves low-voltage lines at

different voltages or from different installations,
the layout shall satisfy one of the requirements
applying to crossings between low-voltage lines and
light-current lines ( S e e § 514.) The same applies to
crossings between low-voltage lines and medium-voltage
lines.

0 § 514. Crossing of light-current lines.

Where low-voltage lines and light-current lines cross,

the angle of cross shall be as close to a right-angle as
possible and normally not less than 45°.

The low-voltage line shall generally be the uppermost.

The distance between the poles belonging to one line and
the centre line of the other line shall be at least 3 m.

The crossing shall satisfy one of the following requirements:

1. One of the lines shall be provided with weather-proof

and corrosion-resistant insulation over the entire
crossing-span. The minimum distance between the two
lines shall be at least 1 m. The insulation line shall
be renewed as frequently as the condition of the insula-
tion requirP.s. The span length of the upper line shall
not exceed 50 m.

2. The upper line shall be attached at either end of the

span to large insulators in such a manner that the wires
cannot slip. The insulators must be mounted by means of
collars or through-bolts. Wood-screws may be used for
mounting terminal insulators. The wires shall be of the
stranded type with a b2eaking strength of at least 640 kp,
corresponding to 16 mm of copper. The distance between
the lines shall be at least 2 m. Wooden poles shall con-
sist of pine impregnated in the approved manner, or an
equivalent material. The span width of the upper line
shall not exceed 50 m.
0 3. Two or more robust metal guard wires shall be suspended
between the lines where they cross. The distance between
the lines shall be at least 2 m. The span length of the
lower line shall not exceed 50 m.

4. One line shall be replaced by an overhead cable attached

to a support wire. The metal sheathing and support wire
must be earthed. The distance between the lines shall
be at least 1 m.
 116

5. One line shall be replaced by an underground cable.

The supporting-poles shall if possible be sited at
least 3 m from the centre line of the crossing over-
head line. The cable shall be laid at a depth of at
least 0.5 m.

6. The crossing shall be fixed to a common pole. In this

case one or both lines shall consist of aerial cables
secured to an insulated support wire (the self-support-
ing type) and the low-voltage lines shall be placed
uppermost. Between the two lines shall be placed a
50 mm wide, yellow warning ring. The distance between
o
the lines shall be at least 1 m.

Note:

0
See Note and sketch t o § 316. See also§ 323.

§ 515. Adjacent siting of light-current lines

The adjacent siting of light-current lines shall be carried

out in accordance with the provisions o f § 323.

§ 516. Crossing of high-voltage lines.

Crossing between low-voltage lines and high-voltage lines

shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of
§ 716.

§ 517. Adjacent siting of high-voltage lines

Where a low-voltage line come as close to a high-voltage

line that the failure of an insulator or a wire may result
in the two lines coming into dangerous proximity to each
other, the requirements for safety are the same as for a
crossing. ( S e e § 716.)
Where the canting over of poles supportinq one of the
lines may result in the distance between an adjacent line
decreasing to less than 1 m, unirrlpreqnated wooden poles
may be used only when they are adequately stayed or rein-
forced in an appropriate manner.
0
Low-voltage lines and cables which are used solely for the
operation of a high-voltage installation, may be carried on
the same masts as the high-voltage line according to the

0
provisions laid down i n § 712.

§ 518. Crossing and adjacent siting of lines in relation to

public roads

Low-voltage lines which cross public roads shall be at a

height of at least 5 m above the road surface. Wooden
poles placed within 10 m of a public road, square or crowd-
ed area shall consist of pine impregnated in an approved
manner, or of equivalent material.
 117

Note:
Attention is drawn to the Roads Aat of 21 June 1963 and to
"Provisions regarding the relations beween publia roads and
el.ectr-ic lines" issued by the Ministry of Labour.

§ 519. Crossing of railways.

C The crossing of railways by low voltage overhæad lines is

not permitted.

§ 520. Crossing and adjacent siting in relation to aerial aable-

ways.

0
Where a low-voltage line has to cross a cable-way, water-
way, harbour, etc., safety arrangements must in each case
be made in accordance with local conditions ( s e e § 13).

§ 525. Crossing of very crowded areas eta.

Low voltac;e overhead lines Must not run rtcros,; olayqrounds,

s9orts grounds, shooting ranges, soectator arefls or other
very crowded !)laces or areas.
The Electricity Inspectorate or the Local Inspection may,
however, permit insulated lines for lighting installations
etc. at playgrounds, sports grounds, spectator areas or
other very crowded places or areas to be run across such
places or areas. (Concerning the crossing of traffic-
lines etc. s e e § 13).

§ 526. Crossing and adjacent siting of lines in relation to

buildings.
h e shortest distance separating uninsulated lines from any
building or part of buildinq shall be at least 1.5 m

0 Self-supporting cables, cables attached to support-lines

and insulated wires which are running alongside buildings,
must be at least 1.5 m from the buildings.

The free height of lines (bare or insulated} and cables

above roofs of buildings, balconies, scaffoldings, etc.,
must be at least 2.5 m. Over roofs of smaller annexes

0 etc. which are not suitable for occuoation, however, this

distance for insulated branch lines and cables may be re-
duced to 1.5 m i n order to obtain a suitable input to the
house.
 118
1. SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS

§ 527. El.ectrol.ytic and el.ectropl.ating instal.l.ations.

a. Electrolytic and electroplating installations shall be
constructed in accordance with the normal regulations

C
governing heavy-current installations in so far as such
regulations are applicable to installations of this
type.

b. Where the normal regulations governing heavy-current

installations cannot be o e r v e d in their entirety,
the operating v o l t , snall be restricted to the fol-
lowing vaJ,,-:::;:

1. For installations in which work on live parts is not

carried out, an operating voltage of up to 1200 V is
0
permitted. The centre point (neutral point) of the
series shall in this case be permanently connected
to earth. The earth connection must be dimensioned
to accommodate the earth leakage currents which may
arise.

2. For installations in which it is necessary to work

on live oarts and in which a permanent earth connec-
tion is generally not provided, the operating vol-
tage must not exceed 600 V. With such installations
adequate arrangements shall be made to ensure that
the operators cannot be exposed to dangerous voltages.
Where conditions are such and arrangements of this
nature can be made, an operating voltage above 600 V
may be used; but only after permission has been ob-
tained from the Electricity Inspectorate.

Note:
An adequate arrangement to ensure that the operators cannot be
exposed to dangerous vol.tages may, for exampl.e, consist of pl.at-
forms made from an insulating material.or mounted on insul.ators.
Parts of buil.dings such as wal.l.s and col.umns must al.so be covered
0
with insulating material.a in the vicinity of the l.ive el.ements.
When cranes, etc. are used in connection with an cl.ect.rol.ytic
or el.ectropl.ating instal.l.ation, steps must be taken to prevent
operators from being exposed to danger due to contact. Where
rubber footwear, gl.oves, insul.ating shiel.ds, etc. are empl.oyed
as protection, these must be regul.<7:rl.y and adequatel.y inspected. 0
c. Live parts Must be protected from accidental contact
in so far as they do not require to be accessible for
operational reasons.

d. Earth leads to apparatus and frames shall be of adequate

cross-section.
 119

Note:
For earth connections 50 mm2 is normally considered sufficient,
but larger cross-sections must be selected where there is a danger
than an earth lead may be damaged by chemical or electrochemical
attack.
e. In the case of installations without a permanent earth

0 connection, equipment shall be provided for the measure-

ment and continuous monitoring of the state of the in-
stallation's insulation.

Note:
Earth voltmeters will generally be sufficient for installations

0 in which the instruments are under constant observation; in

other cases an automatic earth leakage warning device must be
fitted.
f. Pushbuttons for emergency disconnection shall be fitted
in appropriate positions on the installation, e.g. at
the exits and near the operators positions.

g. Only personnel who are specially instructed on the dangers

concerninq live parts may be allowed access to this type
of electrical installations.

Written operating instructions shall be exhibited upon

every electrolytic or electroplating installation.

§ 528. Portable generator sets.

Portable generator sets are items of electrical equipment
consisting of a source of current and consuming apparatus
together with associated components, such as wires, fuses,
switches, regulators, etc., which are capable of being
transported from one point of use to another.

In each set it is required that:

0 a. The equipment shall be of the watertight type;

b. The generator shall be fitted with an automatic regu-

lator which shall prevent dangerous variations in
current and voltage;

0 c. Permanently fitted wires or cables shall be adequately

protected from mechanical damage. In view of the
vibrations and possible severe cold, lead and plastics
must not be used in these installations;

d. Flexible cabljna shnll be wear-resistant, oil-resistant

and weatherproof;
 120

e. All permanently fitted components not e n c a s d in

insulating material shall be connected to the
generator frame y means of copper connectors
of at least 4 mm cross-section;

f. All moving components shall be connected to the

generator frame by means of conductors unner .
the same protective sheath as the current-carrying
conductors and of the same cross-section;

g. The connectors mentioned in (e) and (f) above shall

be taken to the neutral point of the system if the
C
working voltage is above 250 V. The generator frame
shall in such cases be connected to the neutral point;

h. A plate containing safety instructions in the Norwegian

language shall be affixed. Such instructions shall in-
clude provisions regarding annual inspection by an
engineer;

i. The installation of a portable generator set shall be

notified to the Electricity Inspectorate before being
used for the first time.

C
 121

m. HIGH-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS CONNECTED TO LOW-VOLTAGE

MAINS

I. General provisions

§ 531. Regulations.

0 The regulations governing low-voltage installations and

high-voltage installations apply in so far as they do not
differ from the provisions contained in the following
paragraphs. The fitting of the installations may be
undertaken by Group L engineers.

0 § 532. notification.
Notification shall be made to the Electricity Inspectorate
or Local Inspection where such is appointed. The instal-
lation work may not be commenced without the permission
of the Electricity Inspectorate or the Local Inspection.
The installation itself may not be set in operation until
permission for this has been qiven.

§ 533. Inspection.
Inspection shall be carried out to the extent determined on
each occasion by the NVF. ( s e e § 4).

II. Gas-discharge tube lighting installations

§ 536. Definition of gas-discharge lighting installations.

A gas-discharge lighting installation is understood to be
an installation in which the light is produced by a
discharge in a glass tube with or without luminous coating,
together with the necessary current-limiter and striking

0 equipment.

For gas-discharge lighting installations of voltages above

250 V, a distinction is drawn between:

a. Installations for operating voltages up to 1000 V.

b. Installations for operating voltages above 1000 V and

0 up to 8000 V.

Note:

The tel'm_operatng volta.g_e mean the voltage which is normally

pesent tn the tnstallatton durtng nol'mal operation even though
htgher voltages may occur for shorter periods of time such as
during ignition. '
 122

§ 537. Inspection of materiaZs.

Materials and apparatus subject to insocction shall be

approved by NEMKO.

§ 538. Earthing and earth conductors.

In the case of gas-discharge installations for over 250 V,
metal components used in fitting,, castings for trans-
C
formers, cases, protective c o v r s etc., shall be earthed.
Earthing shall be effected ;_,, accordance with the rules
laid down for l o w - v o l t e installations ( s e e § § 409-412).

m t : isheathing
· 1 : . or cables shall be earthed if the
cables are not given other satisfactorv orotection aaainst
any mechanical damage which may oe expected.
0
GAS-DISCHARGE LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS OF
VOLTAGES ABOVE 250 V AND UP TO 1000 V.

§ 539. FieZd of use.

Gas-discharge tubes for lighting which use a voltage over
250 V but not over 1000 V shall be used only out-of-doors
and in trade or business premises, offices or similar.

Gas-discharge tubes for lighting shall be permanently

fitted and mounted out of reach at a height of at least
2.5 m above floor level. Gas-discharge tubes for window
lighting may be fitted at a lesser height, but the
fittings must then be so mounted that they are not
immediately accessible to touch.

Note:

Gas-discharge tube instaHations for Lighting which use a

voZtage of over 250 V shaZZ not be used in residentiaZ premises.
0
§ 540. Transformers.
Transformers for outdoor installations and transformers
not fitted inside the fittings shall have separate windings.
The secondary winding in transformers for such liqhtinq
installations shall not be earthed. Auto-transformers may
0
be used in approved complete qas-discharqe lightin0 fittings
for indoor installations, provided that they are fitted with
a device which interrupts the current on the primary side
when the tube (or one of the tubes) is removed from its
holders. Such device must not have any connection to the
secondary circuit.
 123
§ 541. Wiring.
Wires or cables between transformer and gas-discharge
tube shall be approved for the highest voltage encountered.
wires or cables which are not enclosed in protective
covers shall either be armoured, protected by means of a
shield or laid in a conduit. Conduits made from conductive
materials shall be earthed.
0 § 542. Proteation from aontaat.

No special protection is necessary to prevent contact with

the luminous glass tubes. The electrodes together with
their connections and other live components shall be

0 situated and designed so that they are reasonably pro-

tected against accidental contact even when the tubes are
removed. The casing covering the transformer, etc., shall
be capable of being opened only by means of a tool and
shall have a clearly legible warning plate in the Norwegian
language.

The mains connection terminals shall be fitted in such a

manner that connection and disconnection can be effected
with no danger of simultaneous contact with live components
in the secondary circuit, or there shall be an interlocked
multi-pole switch which disconnects the transformer on the
primary side when the cover is opened.

§ 543. Switahes and fuses.

Gas-discharge installations shall be capable of being

connected and disconnected by means of a multi-pole switch
on the primary side. Switches on the secondary side are
not permitted.

Gas-discharge lighting installations must be provided with

separate fuses or automatic switches of rated current not
above 16 A. Switches and fuses shall be marked in red
(to indicate that they are part of a qas-discharqe light-
ing installation) in a clear and durable manner. The "on"
and "off" positions of switches shall be marked in a clear
and conspicuous manner.

9 § 546.
GAS-DISCHARGE LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS OF VOLTAGES

Field of use.
ABOVE 1000 V AND UP TO 8000 V.

I Gas-discharge tubes for voltages of over 1000 V may be

used only out-of-doors and in trade and business premises,
etc. They shall be permanently installed and fitted out
of reach at a height of at least 2.5 m above floor or
qround level.
 124

§ 547. Transforme:rs.

Transformers for gas-discharge tubes operating above

1000 V shall have separate windings. The secondary
voltage must not exceed 8000 V.

For voltages of not more than 4 000 V the secondary

winding may have:

1. no earthing,
2. earthing of one pole,
0
3. earthing of the centre tap.

For voltages of 0 L 4 000 V the secondary winding must

d e s i q P Ln such a way that the centre tap is earthed.

Where a point on the secondary winding of the transformer

0
is earthed during operation, this point shall be connected
to the earthed metal components of the transformer.

Transformers shall be of the short-circuit proof type if

the fuses or automatic switches connected in the primary
circuit do not disconnect under constant short-circuit on
the secondary side.

§ 548. Wires.

All wires and cables between the transformer and the gas-
discharge tubes shall be approved for the highest voltage
encountered. The wires and cables shall either:

1. be enclosed in a metal cover,

2. be armoured,
3. be provided with a shield,
4. be run in earthed conduits.

Where necessary, for practical reasons, the extra protec-

tion of the cable may be omitted, but in this case the
cable must be provided with a conductive orotective sheath
0
which shall be earthed.

Inside enclosures, illuminated panels etc., bare conductors

are permitted only if they are fitted onto approved insula-
tors.
Bare current-carryinq components and conductors shall be
0
separated by an air-space of at least 20 mm, and by the
same creeoage distance, both from the frame and from
current-carrying components of opposite polarity.
 125
Note:
T b e drawings below are exam ples of the connection of audischara:e panels.

_Qc ,I
_,
--

0
A. Transformer without earthed
secondary wire.
B. Transformer with earthed
secondary wire

lleon panel with the transformer placed outside the panel. Earthing of the
letters and between the letters shall be carried out by separate earth wires
(min. 4 mm2) or by an earth conductor in the high-voltage cable.

0
Neon panel with the transformer placed outside'the panel. Frame and tube
supports are constructed as a continuous conductive construction.
Earthing is carried out by a separate earth wire (min. 4 mrn2) to the frame.
The earth wire and the earthed side of the high-voltage cable are connected
by separate cables lugs to the same earth screw of transformer B.
 126

0
,...--
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

m Fiø.3

Neon panels with the transformers placed inside the tube support boxes.

Earthing of transformers and support boxes may be carried out either by

an earth conductor in the low-voltage cable or by a separate earth con-
ductor (min. 4 mm2). C

0
 127

§ 549. Protection from contact.

No special protection is necessary to prevent contact

with the luminous glass tubes. The electrodes together
with their connections and other live components shall
be situated and designed so that they are reasonably
protected against accidental contact even when the tubes
are removed. The casing covering the transformer and the
high-voltage components shall be capable of being opened
0 only by means of a tool. Clearly legible warning plates in
the Norwe'}ian lanquaqe shall be mounted in suitable places.

In lighting installations the gas-discharge tube holders

shall have an additional cover which can be removed only
by means of a tool. The covers shall be provided with
plates warning about high voltages.
.0 Gas-discharge lighting installations which contain sections
at voltages above 250 V, as well as sections (gas-discharge
tubes and incandescent lamps) at voltages below 250 V, may
be connected by the same supply cable to the mains or by
separate supply cables having a common switch. Built-in
sections at different voltages shall be adequately separated,
e.g. by parting walls.

§ 550. Switches and fuses.

A multi-pole switch on the primary side shall be able to

connect and disconnect the gas-discharge installation. It
is not permitted to use a switch on the secondary side.
Gas-discharge lighting installations must be provided with
separate fuses or automatic switches of rated current not
above 16 A. Both switches and fuses shall be marked in
red (to indicate that they are part of a gas-discharge
lighting installation). The "on" and "off" positions of
such switches shall be clearly and conspicuously marked.
In outdoor gas-discharge liqhtinq installations a trans-
former which is not of the short-circuit-oroof type, e.g.

0 for parallel connection of gas-discharqe tubes, shall be

provided on the primary side with fuses, or a switch hav-
ing an automatic excess-current trip, so desiqned that a
short-circuit on the secondary side results in a discon-
nection.

In the case of outdoor gas-discharge lighting installations,

0 a switch shall be fitted on the front of the building by

means of which the primary side can be disconnected from
the mains. This switch shall be painted red, shall be of
easy access for the Fire Brigade and shall be fitted at a
height of about 3 m above the ground level.

All the installations fitted on the same building shall be

capable of being disconnected by means of a common fire-
switch.
 123

Note:
In new buildings it may be useful to run a common n s n gmain
for all gas-discharge lighting installations together with a
convnon contactor on, for example, the main panel. The fire-mans
switch can then consist of one or more manually operated switches
connected into the control-aurrent cirauit of the contactor.
Where the individual illuminated panels of gas-discharge lighting
installations are connected to the meters of different installa-
tions it may be useful to fit a separate contactor for each gas-
o
discharge lighting installation with a convnon control-cirauit
for the contactors. The fire-mans switches are then connected in
series into the control circuit.

0
§ 551. Outdoor gas-discharge lighting installations.
On new installations the Electricity Inspectorate or the
Local Inspection shall be informed of the date of commence-
ment of work and the panels may not be covered before the
Inspectorate or inspector has inspected the individual
components, wiring, earthing, etc., in their installed
condition.

Tube support boxes, reliefs and protective cases for trans-

formers shall be of robust construction.

Plates made from steel, copper or other metal fitted upon

angle-steel frames may be used to fix the letters etc.
Tube support boxes, letters, reliefs etc. may be made from
a plastic material which has to be approved by the NVE
when the transformers are to be placed outside in separate
metal boxes. The tube support boxes shall be covered on
all sides including the side facing the wall. Zinc or
wooden boxes are not permitted. wood may, however, be
used as a facade in front of metal boxes. Outdoor free-
standing steel structures shall be hot-dip galvanised or
otherwise protected against rust both on the inside and
outside.

Tube support boxes and letters shall generally be provided

with operational and inspection apertures at all connection
0
points for transformers and tube electrodes. The apertures
shall be provided with covers and these and other covers
shall be adequately fastened by means of machine screws
which do not rust.

Operational and inspection apertures may be omitted if the

connection to the electrodes is so flexible that the tubes
Q
may be pulled out and refitted without the lead or the elec-
trodes being damaged. The tubes must be secured in such a
way that the position of the electrodes inside the support
box or letters is fixed,and such that the connections are
not subject to tension. In the case of box-type supports
where the gas-discharge tubes are mounted on a pivoted front,
all high-voltage components, i.e. transformers, insulators
and high-voltage cables, shall be fitted on the pivoted
section. Multi-pole interlock switches shall interrupt the
primary side when the lid is opened.
 129

Tube support boxes, letters etc. must be so constructed

that they can only be opened by means of a tool. In the
case of panel reliefs, letters etc. , the relief and its
bottom plate shall from two separate components in order
to permit the leads to be attached by means of clips, in
a suitable manner.

Outdoor frames for gas-discharge lighting shall, if

necessary, be protected against falling ice and snow.
0 III. OIL-FIRED EQUIPMENT

§ 552. Range of application.

The regulations cover oil-fired equipment ir.which

0 ignition is obtained by means of electric spark-

discharge across electrodes.

§ 553. Protective casing.

Transformers, inductors, capacitors, etc. shall be incor-

porated within the protective casing which shall be of the
enclosed type. The protective casing shall not be capable
of being opened without the use of a tool. The protective
casing shall be fitted with a clearly visible warning plate.
in the Norwegian language.

§ 554. Inspection of equipment.

Equipment and apparatus subject to inspection shall be

aoproved by NEMKO.

§ 555. Conditions for connection.

Oil-fired equipment having electric ignition is not per-

0 mitted to be connected to the supply by means of a device

or controller qiving automatic disconnection and connec-
tion of the current.

§ 556. Voltage.

0 The secondary voltage of i n i t i o n transfo=ers shall not

exceed 16 000 V.

The following provisions apply to the secondary winding:

a. Secondary voltages not over 8 000 V. The secondary

winding may be:
 130

1. Unearthed;
2. Earthed on one pole;
3. Earthed at the centre point.
b. Secondary voltages over 8 000 V but not over 16 000 V.
The secondary winding may be:

1. Unearthed;
2. Earthed at the centre point.

The transformer shall be so constructed that no detrimental

C
heating of the windings can t k e place with the secondary
terminals permanently short··circuited while the rated pri-
mary voltage is a p p l i e .

T r a n s f o r L S shall be so fitted that the connections to the

elctrodes are as short as possible.
Q
§ 557. Switches and fuses.

A separate circuit must be provided for each item of oil-

fitted equipment together with a multi-pole main switch.
Each individual oil-burner circuit must have separate
fuses and a multi-pole switch, or an automatic multi-pole
switch provided with an excess-current trip device. The
fuses and other excess current trip devices must be ad-
justed to at least 6 A or to the operating current. No
switches, fuses or excess-current trip devices may be
fitted which can put the ignition out of operation inde-
pendently of the remainder of the installation.

Outside each entrance to rooms containing oil-fired equip-

ment, readily accessible multi-pole switches (fire-mans
switches) must be fitted in the supply to the installation.
Oil-fired equipment which is installed in rooms not parti-
cularly designed for the purpose, e.g. in large factories
etc., must instead have a fire-mans switch fitted at a
readily accessible place near the installation or outside
the main entrance to the area. In the case of oil-fired
0
equipment which js approved by the State Fire Inspection
for use in residence rooms and similar, without any special
fire requirements for the residence, fire-mans switches are
not required.

Where multi-pole contactors are used, the operating switch

may be of a single-pole type.

Switches and fuses must be clearly and permanently marked

0
as forming part of an oil-fired equipment (e.g. by means
of yellow paint). The position of a switch must be clearly
marked "Off - On".

The electric circuits for the switches, fans, thermostats,

etc. in the installation shall be so designed that a break
in any circuit will cause the equipment to stop functioning.
 131

Electric thermostats and other controllinq devices shall

be sited where they are readily accessible for inspection
and testing without the need to disconnect them from the
circuit.

Oil-burners must only be operable when they are sited

inside the fire-chamber.

0 Note:
After a starting attempt hasfailed andalso after a flame-
failure, re-ignition should be possible immediately, unless
it is necessary for the fire-chamber to be purged, in order
to avoid detonation or explosion. Reference must be made to
provisions laid downby the State Fire Inspection.

0 § 558. Wiring.
Special rubber- or plastic-insulated wires, armoured lead-
covered cable or an equivalent type of cable approved for
the purpose shall be used on the secondary side of igni-
tion transformers. The determining factor with regard to
the type of insulation being the secondary voltage of the
transformer and not the voltage to earth. Rubber- or
plastic-insulated wires shall be enclosed in a metal sheath
or similar, or be run in threaded steel pipes. The fit-
tings, metal sheath or pipe, shall be earthed.

The electrical connections between the individual compo-

nents fitted on the boiler and to the relay equipment, etc.
shall be protected from mechanical stress. Connections
shall be adequately flexible.

When wires or cables are run along the boiler, use shall
be made of distance clips unless the wires or cables are
of sufficiently heat-resistant types. Where flexibility
is required at connection points robust armoured hose or
an equivalent protection may be inserted between conduit
and connection boxes.

0 § 559. Earthing.
All oil-fired equipment shall be earthed in accordance
with the rules covering low-voltage installations. All
installation components belonging to an oil-firing in-
stallation shall be fitted with earth terminals.
0 § 560. Portable oil-firel units.
Portable oil-fired unites (e.g. for drying out new build-
ings) shall be connected to an earthed socket-outlet of
at least 16 A. The flexible cable shall be fitted with
 132

a yellow-painted plug. This cable shall consist of

wear-resistant and oil-resistant flexible cable of type
NMHVO or an equivalent approved cable of at least 1.5 m2
cross-section.

In other respects the Requlations covering fixed oil-

fired equipment apply.

§ 561. Definition.
IV. MEDICAL X-RAY INSTALLATIONS
C
Medical X-ray installations consist of X-ray equipment
using direct current or alternating current at mains
frequency, or another low frequency which is used for
the examination or treatment of human beings or animals.
0
Medical X-ray installations are classified as follows:

A. X-ray installations in which all components carrying

high-voltage are enclosed either in electrically
conductive casings or in cåsings made from insulating
materials such that contact with the casing presents
no danger even with the highest voltage encountered.

B. X-ray installations in which only those high-voltaqe

wires and components carrying high-voltaqe, which are
situated in the treatment or working room are protected
under (A) above.

§ 562. Proteation from aontaat.

High-voltage transformers and converters shall either be

incorporated in protective cases or be fitted in a
separate room. A protective cover may consist of a
metal grid or network which prevents accidental contact
with components carrying high-voltage. Windows, covers
or doors in protective covers or in rooms containing trans-
formers or converters must be capable of being opened
only with a tool, or their opening must cause disconnection
0
of the installation from the supply.

In Class B X - r a y installations having one or more capaci-

tors in the high-voltage circuit, there shall be a short-
circuiting device by means of which all the capacitors
can be discharged and earthed. 0
The floor of treatment or working rooms must be entirely
covered by an insulating material (wood, linoleum, etc.).
 133

§ 563. Uninsulated wires.

Uninsulated wires which are not earthed shall be spaced

from one another and from any wall, ceiling, other con-
ductive object or their own protective covers by a dis-
tance of at least (5 + 0.30) cm where U represents the
highest voltage t:o earth, in kV, which may be present.

0 § 564. Earthing.

Metal components carrying no voltaqe (metallic parts of

transformers, cable fittings, protective sheaths, etc.),
but which may, if the insulation fails, become live shall
be connected to a common earth bar. Metal components
which are riveted or welded together, or securely screwed
0 together, may be connected to the earth bar at a single
point. Connection screws shall be provided for the earth
conductor and these shall be marked in the same way as the
earth terminal.

The main earth lead shall, in the case of permanently

fitted installations having a power input of over 5 kW
and portable installations connected to socket outlets
of a size greater than 25 A, consist of stranded copper
cable of not less than 162mm2 cross-section. Branch leads
shall be of at least 6 mm cross-section. In the case of
portable X-ray apparatus connected to socket outlets rated
up to 25 A all electrically conductive protective covers
must be connected to the normal earthing system of the
installation by means of the supply cable. In flexible
mains wires the earth conductor shall be of the same
cross-section as the supply conductors, ( s e e § 409).

If the main earth connection is connected to the water-

pipes of a building this must be done uostream of the main
stop-cock in the cellar.

§ 565. Transformers.

0 The following provisions apply to the secondary windings

of transformers:

The secondary winding may be:

1. Unearthed;
2. Earthed on one pole;
0 3. Earthed at the neutral point.

§ 566. Fuses and Switches.

Fuses which may not be larger than is required for

operation, shall be inserted in the mains suoply to.
X-ray installations.
 134
Portable X-ray apparatus shall be connected to the mains
by means of a flexible cable of the medium-strength (NMH)
type, fitted with an earthed plug rated at least 10 A.
Wiring systems used exclusively for portable X-ray appa-
ratus may comprise an unrestricted number of socket out-
lets, even where these are rated at over 25 A.

Permanently fitted X-ray installations shall be connected

to the mains by means of a multi-pole main switch. The
switch shall have its "on" and "off" positions clearly
marked. The main switch, or c0ntrol switch in the case
of remotely-controlled equi!':,,ent, shall be fitted in the
same room as the X-ra• :..
achi ne controls.

!f the - r a y apparatus is connected to the mains through

a transformer or converter there must also be a switch in
the connections from the X-ray apparatus to this. If the
Q
transformer or converter is fitted immediately adjacent
to the X-ray machine, e.g. in the same room, it is suffi-
cient to have the main switch between the transformer or
converter and the supply.

Control switches fitted on the apparatus panel must be so

designed and fitted that they cannot switch on due to their
own weight or to vibrations. All control handles shall be
·q from insulating materials.

§ 567. Breakdown Fu ees,

Breakdown fuses are not required.

§ 568. Wires and cables.

High voltage wiring shall consist of special rubber cable,
lead-covered cable or an equivalent approved type of cable.
The insulation used on·wires and cables shall be calculated
to withstand a voltage equal to 1.25 times the highest vol-
tage to earth. Special rubber cable shall be enclosed in
metal sheathing or similar or be laid in threaded steel
conduits. Fittings, metal sheathing or conduits shall be
0
earthed.

V. NON-MEDICAL X-RAY INSTALLATIONS

§ 5E9. Definition.
Non-medical X-ray installations are those X-ray installa-
tions using direct current or alternating current at mains
0
frequency or another low frequency which are used in the
technical application of X-rays, e.g. for the testing or
treatment of workpieces, commercial articles, etc. or
machines for the production of X-ray or cathode-ray tubes,
rectifier valves a· other X-ray installations.
 135

X-ray installations in the laboratories of scientific

institutes and temporary installations in laboratories
in which only persons having an electrical training are
employed do not fall under these Regulations. The same
applies to installations in technical laboratories in
which experiments are carried out into the design of
X-ray installations and components for such installa-
tions or to X-ray installations undergoing tests in a

G factory (see Class Dl.

Non-medical X-ray installations are classified into the

following groups:

A. X-ray installations in which all components which

carry high voltages are entirely enclosed either in

0 electrically conductive covers or in covers made

from an insulating material such that contact with
the covers present no danger even when the highest
voltage available is annlied. Portable X-ray
installations must always be of this type.

B. X-ray installations in which all high-voltage leads

and components carrying high-voltage and which are
situated in the working or test room are protected
as under (A).

C. a) X-ray installations in which those components

carrying high-voltage which are situated in the
working or test room are protected as under (A) only
to a height of at least 2.5 m above floor level.

b. X-ray installations in which those components

carrying high-voltage which are not protected as
under (A) are made inaccessible during working by
means of electrically-conductive protective
fitments.

D. X-ray installations in which those high-voltage leads

and components carrying high-voltage which are

0
situated in the working or test room are freely
accessible. X-ray installations of this type may be
used only for the testing of X-ray or cathode ray
tubes, rectifier valves or other X-ray aparatus.

§ 570. Protection from contact.

0 Permanently fixed, unprotected high-voltage cables in

the working or test room shall be fitted at height of
at least 2.5 m above floor level.

Electrically-conductive protective covers may consist

of metal grids or metal netting which prevents acciden-
tal contact with components carrying high-voltage.
 i"36

Windows, covers or doors in such protective covers or

in rooms containing transformers and converters must
be capable of being opened only with a tool, or their
opening must result in the disconnection of the supply
to the installation. •

X-ray installations of Classes B, C a n d D containing

one or more capacitors in the high-voltage circuit shall
be fitted with a short-circuit device by means of which
all the capacitors can be discharged and earthed. C
In the case of installations of Classes C a n d D a n optical
or acoustic indicator device u s t be fitted in the working
or test room to give w?.:-,u.ng when the installation is live.

Protective covers consisting of insulating materials and

an air-layer between them and components carrying high-
voltage, must together withstand a voltage equal to 1.25
0
times the highest voltage to earth encountered.

In installations in which the neutral point of the secon-

dary winding of the high voltage transformer is earthed,
the insulation of the high-voltaqe wire consists of pli-
able insulating material without earthed metal sheath, it
shall withstand a voltage equal to 1.5 times the highest
voltage to earth. If no point on the secondary winding
of the transformer is earthed, the insulation shall with-
stand a voltage equal to 1.25 times the voltage between
the poles of the X-ray tube.

§ 571. Uninsulated wires.

Uninsulated wires which are not earthed shall be separated

from one another and from walls, ceilings, other conductive
objects or their own protective fittigs by a distance of at
least (5 + 0. 3U) cm whe re U represents the highest voltage
to earth in kV.

572. Earthing.
0
Metal components which carry no voltage (metallic compo-
nents of transformers, cable fittings, orotective covers,
etc.) but which may become live following a breakdown in
the insulation shall be connected to a common earth bar.
Metal components which are riveted or welded together, or
securely screwed together, may be connected to the earth
0
bar at a single point. Connection screws shall be pro-
vided for the earth conductors and these shall be marked
in the same way as the earthing terminal.

The main earth connection in permanently fitted installa-

tions having a power input of over 5 kW, and in portable
installations connected to sockets of a size qreater than
 137

25 A, shall consist of stranded insulated copper cable of

at least 16 mm2 cross-section. In the case of portable
X-ray apparatus connected to a socket of up to 25 A all
electrically conductive protective covers must be earthed
by means of the supply cable. In flexible mains leads the
earth conductor shall be of the same cross-section as the
supply conductors ( s e e § 409).

If the main earth connection is connected to the waterpipes

0 of a building this must be done upstream of the stop-cock

in the cellar.

§ 573. Transformers.

The following provisions apply to the secondary windings

of transformers:

0 The secondary winding may be:

1. Unearthed;
2. Earthed on one pole;
3. Earthed at the neutral point.

In X-ray installation of Class D no point on the secondary

winding of the transformer may be earthed.

§ 574. Fuses and switahes.

Fuses, which may not be larger than is necessary for opera-

tion, must be inserted in the mains supply to X-ray instal-
lations.

Portable X-ray apparatus shall be connected to the mains by

means of a flexible cable of the medium-strength (NMH) type,
fitted with an earthed plug socket rated at least 10 A.
Wiring systems which are used exclusively for portable X-ray
apparatus may comprise an unrestricted number of sockets,
even where these are rated at over 25 A.

0 Permanently-fitted X-ray installations shall be connected

to the mains by means of multi-pole switches. The "on" and
"off" positions of switches shall be clearly marked. Switch·
es shall be retained in the "off" position either by a lock
or by their own weight. The main switch, or control switch
in the case of remotely controlled installations, shall be
fitted in the same room as the X-ray machine controls.
0 An X-ray apparatus which is connected to the mains through
a transformer or convertor must also have a switch in its
connection to such transformers or convertors. If the
transformer or convertor is fitted immediately adjacent to
the X-ray machine, e.g. in the, same room, it is sufficient
if the main switch is connected between the transformer, or
convertor, and the supply.
 138

Control switches fitted on the apparatus panel must be

so constructed and fitted that they cannot switch on by
their own weight or by vibrations. All control handles
shall be made from insulating materials.

§ 575. Breakdown f u s e s .

Breakdown fuses are not required.

0
 SECTION II D

REGULATIONS FOR MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS

0 a. GENERAL PROVISIONS
Page

§ 580 Field of application . 2

§ 581 General provisions . 7

b. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS WITH

PHASC VOLTAGES ABOVE·250 V UP TO 440 V AND WITH
DIRECTLY EARTHED NEUTRAL POINT

9 8 2 Earthing of neutral point, PE and

PEN conductors . 9
§ 583 Cross-section and design of neutral
conductors and combined earth and
neutral conductors (N and PEN con-
ductors) . 10
§ 584 Earthing of exposed installation
components . 12
§ 585 Cross-section and design of earth con-
ductors (PE conductors) . 12
§ 586 Pi·otectioh . 13
§ 587 S o c k - o u t l e t s and plugs . 13
§ 588 ·outdoor wiring . 15

c. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS WITH INSULATED

NEUTRAL POINT

§ 590 Insulation monitoring and checking . 16

§ 591 Switches . 16
§ 592 Marking and separation . 16
§ 593 Socket-outlets . 17
§ 594 outdoor distribution . 17

0
 SECTION II D
0
REGULATIONS FOR MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS

a. General provision
0
b. Medium-voltage installations with voltages
up to 440 V and directly earthed neutral
point
c. Medium-voltage installations with insulated
neutral point

0
 2

a. GENERAL PROVISIONS

§ 580. Field of application

.1 Medium-voltage regulations are governed by the regulations

for low-voltage installations with the additional provisions
as laid down in section IID.

.2 Medium-voltage installations with voltages up to 440 V and

directly earthed neutral point, may be used for all purposes
provided it is not specifically required that a lower vol-
tage or another system is to be used for the same purpose.
See Part b.

.3 Medium-voltage installations with voltages up to 440 V and

insulated, unloaded neutral points may be used for special
purposes and in industrial plants where earthing of the
neutral point may lead to difficulties during operation.
See Part c.

.4 Medium-voltage installations with voltages above 440 V must

have insulated, unloaded neutral points and may be used in
industrial plants, distribution networks and for special
purposes. See Part c.

Note:

Medium-voltage installations with voltages up to 440 V and

directly earthed neutral point may be applied in two ways:

4-conductor system with J outer (phase) conductors and a com-

bined earth and neutral conductor (PEN conductor). See fig. 1.

-conductor system with J outer (phase) conductors, neutral

conductor (N conductor) and earth conductor (PE conductor).
See fig. 2.

After the final sub-circuit fuses and any earth leakage cir-
cuit-breakers/relays etc., and also in certain installations
to be specified by NVE, only the 5-conductor system may be

0 used. See fig. J.

Attention should be paid to the fact that the number of con-

ductors leading to a certain point does not always indicate
the system (4 or 5-conductors) which is being supplied. This
is because conductors for which therP is no demand, are not
provided. For example, in a 5-conductor system only J outer

0 conductors and a neutral conductor (N-conductor), or one

outer conductor and a neutral conductor (N-conductor) are
provided. For other purposes J outer conductors and the
earth conductor (PE -conductor) may be provided, or 1 outer
conductor, a neutral conductor (N-conductor) and an earth
conductor (PE-conductor).
 3

It is evident from these examples that it is not easy to

see whether a system is for 4 or 5 aonduators. Good marking
and aare is therefore neaessary to avoid mistakes. A diagram
showing the various supply aonneations is normally neaessary.

Medium-voltage installations with voltages above 440 V and

up to 1000 V with insulated neutral points are normally
supplied by 3 outer aonduators and a aontinuous earth aon-
duator. See fig. 4.
0
Fig.J.Mc-dium voltaqe installation with ciiret!y e-nrlhcd

0
neutral point (4-cor.ducLor s y s ecru .

®
I
I
'
' - - --- - -t -- - - - - - - -
t--
I I
-, - - - - r - - r PW
'' I
-L '
_L
- .. --:- -
_L_
-::-
@

© I I I
I
l,
I : L,

0
I I
I L,

- - - -!..- - -p[N

(1) Distribution transformer

0
(2) Main distribution network with system earthing
(3) Earthing of PEN conductor
(4) Branch distribution
 4

F 1 9 . 2 . 1 c d t ' . l r . ' !voltc"lge t ns ee Lt e t f on w Lt h d Lr-ec t Ly e a r t h e d

neutral point . ( 5 - c o n d L - c l o r z ys t em l

I L,
-· - - - - · - .- ---l-+-----t·
r-- -- ------- -- -•-- - - P £

(1) Distribution transformer

(2) Main distribution network with system earthing
(3) Earthing of PE conductor
(4) Branch distribution

0
 5

Fig. 3. Distribution in an installation with

directly earthed neutral point

The fig. shows a 4-conductor distribution system to a branch feeder

0
and a transition to a 5-conductor system at that point. Note that
in certain installations it is required that a 5-conductor system
be used all the way from the transformer. It is required that a
switch be fitted in each sub-circuit so that all heavy duty fuses
may be changed in a state of no-voltage. S e e § 586.3.

L1 L, L, PUi
0
I
,-1
I
_j_

..,.,
., -0 ,:-
"' ,,
0
........
•ti -0
ti 'C --c
...... ,.,....
"'O t',:, t i .c -0
"'"
.c u L. u
u,-<
" ' uC: ,.
:,

.."
a. u
.,.... .c
C:
a.x c ....
I .....
C, t:

.....
---.c o.c c, ..
.c
-c-., CT_, "-"
""...
0
C
-;
'-< C: ...

.,, "
....CJ .c
C" "C,
"' ..,
.c
"' C,
a.:,
I C,
"C:
C,
o.-o
.c r.
C" "
 6

Fig. 4. Medium voltage supply with insulated neutral point.

0 ®
s----..L-+------------1----=--=--=-:

,---- - r - -
0
- - -Pe
Q) 1
'
I
-±-
_L

0 @
G) Distribution transformer

Insulation monitoring

® Possible continuous PE conductor

© Branch distribution

0 © Earthing at the consumers installation

 7

§ 581. General provisions

.1 Inspection

.1.1 Medium-voltage installations are subject to notification,

inspection etc. by the Electricity Inspectorate and the
Local Inspection.

.2 Operation and maintenance 0

. 2.1 In medium-voltage installations with insulated neutral point,
work on line parts is not permitted. Control points which
are disconnected while work on an installation is in progress
must have notices placed indicating that the installation··
disconnected, that work on the installation is in progres
and that reconnection must not be carried out. These noti s
are not to be removed until reconnection is authorized to
take place.

. 2. 2 In the case of electric hand tools, hand lamps etc. being

used in particilarly exposed areas such as inside tanks, on
steel constructions etc., transformers should be used which
have separate windings and with secondary voltage not above
250 V.

Note:

In order to obtain an adequate degree of safety, only one

piece of apparatus (possibly just a few) are to be connected
to the secondary side of each isolating transformer. The
wires should be as short as possible and be well protected
against mechanical damage. To discover and to avoid damage
to the insulation of wires, apparatus etc., they should be
inspected regularly at short intervals. The isolating trans-
former should be placed out of reach of the person whooper-
ates the connected apparatus and preferably be placed outside
the tank, steel construction etc. If the transformer must be
placed in such areas, it should be of class II constructir-, _

Lower voltages than 250 V (e.g. below 42 V) permit a h i g h u

degree of safety and are preferred providing equipment for
such voltages are obtainable.

.3 Supply

. 3 .1 Transformers used for medium-voltage installations must ho

separate windings.

Note:

According t o § 401 transformers must have markings relevant

to their use. Transformers for medium voltage installations
should also have indication of zero-sequence reactances and
resistances.
 8

Y/Y connected transformers have relatively high values of

the zero-sequence rectances and should therefore be avoided
in installations having directly earthed neutral points since
the requirements i n § 586 may be difficult to fulfil.

.4 Marking

. 4 .1 At the main input, in fuse panels etc., and generally where

there may be a possibility of interchanging, medium-voltage
installations must be marked in a clear and lasting manner
so that is is evident that the supply voltage is not low-
voltage. The marking should be by means of engraved labels

J...
or other marking similarly permanent.

In the case of installations of different voltages being in

2 the same room, board, panels etc., the installations should
be kept as far apart as possible.

.5 Colour marking

. 5 .1 Earth conductors (PE conductors) and combined earth and neu-

tral conductors (PEN conductors) must be marked with the co-
lours yellow and green. Conductors having these colours in
combination or separately, or with a combination of two or
more other colours must not be used for other purposes.

On any insulated conductor, the colour combination yellow and

green must be so arranged that on a randomly chosen 15 mm
length of conductor, the one colour covers at least 30% and
not more than 70% of the surface, while the remaining colour
covers the rest of the surface.

Conductors which do not have the correct colour combination

must be correctly marked by means of suitable insulating
sleeves, self-adhensive ribbons etc. at all termination
points.

Bus bars etc. may be marked by means of painting. The marking

should be as stripes of the two colours adjacent to each other
and of a width of between 15 and 100 mm.

The colour marking must be clear and durable.

The marking should be easily visible in all boxes, panels,

rooms, boards, etc., and on all conductors of which discon-
nection is possible.

C
Note:

Neutral conductors (N conductors) should be colour marked

light blue.
 9

b. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS WITH PHASE

VOLTAGES ABOVE 250 V UP TO 440 V AND
WITH DIRECTLY EARTHED NEUTRAL POINT

§ 582. Earthing of neutral point, PE and PEN conductors

.1 The neutral point of the transformer of generator must be

permanently and directly connected to earth so that the
voltage between any conductor and earth cannot exceed 250 Vo
during nor,nl operation.

.2 In the case of distribution networks, the PE and/or PEN con-

ductors must be earthed at suitable points, particularly at
the extremities of the network and each installation con-
nected to it. The earthing at installations is to be carried
out at the input or at the main distribution board and pos-
sibly also at sub-distribution points. 0
.3 In medium-voltage installations which are connected to the
high-voltage installation by means of transformers and follow·
ing must be complied with:

. 3 .1 At the transformer, the resulting passive resistance to earth

of the combined earth and neutral conductor (PEN conductor),
or of the neutral point, must be maximum 10 ohm. In the
case of transformers which have no real distribution network
connected to them (transformers for single machines etc.), a
higher value of passive resistance to earth is permitted pro-
vided the provisions i n § 605 are complied with.

. 3. 2 Separation of the earthing of the transformer neutral point

and the protection earth for the high-voltage installation is
required where this is practically feasible. On installations
where this is not possible a common earth for the neutral point
and the high-voltage installations may be used.

Note:

In the case of separate earthing, earth electrodes and any

metal conduits, cables, etc. from the neutral point must be
placed at least 20 m away from the earth electrodes and
cables for the high-voltage installation. The supply wire
o
to an electrode laid in the earth, is regarded as being part
of the electrode unless it consists of an insulated cable.

Insulated earth wires placed on transformer masts or in build-

ings etc. must have insulation equal to the live conducts and
are not to be placed on or near transformer masts operatingo
at high voltage.
 10

§ 583. Cross-section and design of neutral conductors and combined

earth and neutral conductors (N and PEN conductors).

.1 Cross-section and design of combined earth and neutral con-

ductors (PEN conductors) shall be as laid down for neutral
conductors (N conductors) and must be of copper or aluminium.
In distribution panels etc., however, PEN bus bars must be of
copper. Provided the cross-sections are sufficient (see 2.1),
cable sheaths may be used as PEN conductors.

. 2.1 Neutral conductors (N conductors) must have minimum cross-

sections as indicated in the table below.

Consideration must be given, however, to ensure that the load

on N conductors does not exceed the values given i n § 448 and
§ 457 and that the temperature rise in the event of short cir-
0 cuit are not higher than permitted.

Smallest permitted cross-section for N and Pen

conductors

Outer con- N and PEN Outer con-I N and Pen Cable sheath
duc;ors conductors ductors conductors as PEN con-
mm Cu mm2cu mm2Al mm2Al ductor mm2cu

1.5 1.5 16 16 16
2.5 2.5 25 16 16
4.0 4.0 35 16 16
6. ei 6.0 50 25 16
10 10 70 35 21
16 16 95 50 29
25 16 120 70 37
35 16 150 70 47
50 25 185 95 50
70 35
95 50

In case of the outer conductors of larger cross-sections,

0 the minimum cross-sections of N and PEN conductors must

be as given for the largest cross-sections in the table.

. 2. 2 N conductors must have the same insulation as the outer con-

ductors.

0 2 . 3 In the case of flexible cords and cables, the N conductors

must be surrounded by the same protective sheath as the outer
conductors.

.2.4 In cable and conduit installations, the N conductors must be

surrounded by the same protective sheath or be in the same
conduits as all the outer conductors.
 11

.3 Inside fuse .panels etc. N conductors and bus bars must be

insulated from their supports so that measurements of insu-
lation may be carried out. PEN-conductors and bus bars,
however, are not required to be so insulated.

.4 Inside fuse panels etc. having more than 3 outgoing circuits

for various types of apparatus (lamps, heaters, motors, etc.)
the N conductors for these circuits must be so connected that
by disconnecting only one contact terminal from the supply0
all N conductors are disconnected to enable insulation mea
surements to be made.

.5 N conductors to outgoing circuits for various types of appa-

ratus must, inside panels etc., be connected to a N bus bar
(terminal.

.6.1 Disconnection of PEN conductors must not take place beforeo

their associated outer conductors are disconnected.

. 6. 2 Switches are not to be inserted in PEN conductors except in

special cases, s e e § 465. If such is the case, connection
may only take place at the same time or before the connection
of the associated outer conductors, and disconnection at the
same time or after the same outer conductors.

. 6. 3 In the case of control circuits, switches in the N conductors

are normally ·permitted only if connection and disconnection
take place at the same time as in the outer conductors.

.7 Fuses are not to be fitted in PEN conductors.

.•:o t.e :

The requirements in .6.3 are to prevent unintentionaZ cZosing

of contactors etc. in the event of earth fauZts in the controZ
circuits. ReZay coiZs etc. must aZways be connected in the
N conductor, whiZe aii singZe-poZe controZ-circuit switches
are to be connected in the outer conductors.

In the case of singZe-phase apparatus, connected between one

outer conductor and the N conductor by means of a fZexibleo
cord or cable and a 10/16 A plug, it is not possible to
comply with the provision for using single-poZe control
switches. Single-pole control-circuit switches may still
be permitted, however, provided unintentionaZ connection in
the event of earth faults do not cause any danger.

Technical translators note: This is because Norwegian plug/

are not polarised thus permitting the line wiring of an ap"-..
pliance to be connected to the neutraZ of the suppZy.
 12

§ 584 Earthing of exposed installation components

.1 Exposed installation components must be earthed according

to the requirements for low-voltaqe installations, s e e § 408.

.2 Earthing of exposed installation components is to be carried

out by means of earth conductors from these components to PE
or PEN terminals or bus bars inside fuse panels or distribu-
tion panels.

Note:

PE and PEN terminals or bus bars must always be connected to

the neutral point of the supply by means of PE or PEN con-
ductors.

Separate earthing to the transformer neutral point_is not

permitted.

.3 Earthing of exposed metal, of equipment on the supply side

of the final sub-circuit fuses, may be carried out by means
of PE-connections from the exposed metal to any PE or PEN
terminal upstream of these fuses. These PE-connections must
always be run towards the transformer (generator) and must
be connected to the PE or PEN terminal inside fuse panel or
similar.

.4 Installations in houses etc. must have earth leakage circuit-

breakers which have tripping currents not above 30 mA placed
at the beginning of the installations.

Circuits used solely for deep freezers or special heating

installations necessary to prevent frost damage are, however,
permitted to by-pass these circuit-breakers.

Note:

Connections by-passing an earth leakage circuit-breaker must

be limited to places where this is absolutely necessary. By
using over-voltage arresters, most of the unintentional dis-
connections due to these circuit-breakers may be prevented.

§ 585. Cross-section and design of earth conductors (PE conductors)

.1 Earth conductors must be of sufficient cross-section to pre-

vent them attaining a higher temperature than permitted.

.2 PE conductors must be at least of a cross-section as laid

down for PEN conductors i n § 583, 2.1. However, the cable
type PR is permitted to be used for final sub-circuits in
houses, offices, canteens, etc.

The requirement in .1 must, however, always be complied with.

 13

Regarding the cross-sections. methods of fitting and connec-

tion etc. of PE conductors, the provision i n § 409 a n d § 410
apply where these are relevant.

§ 586. Protection

.1 The installation characteristics must be such that, in the

event of a shortcircuit between an outer conductor and thoe
N conductor, the PEN conductor, the PE conductor or any
earthed installation component, the current must be no mo
than 3.5 times the rated current of the nearest upstream
fuses. In the case of wires and cables in the open air, the
same short-circuit current must be no more than 2 times the
rated current of the nearest upstream fuses.

.2 Installations which do not fulfil the requirements i n § s o ,

must be provided with a device for rapid automatic disconn
tion should a short-circuit occur between an outer conductor
and the N conductor, PEN conductor, PE conductor or earthed
installation component.

.3 In the cases of D-fuses of rated currents above 63 A and of

heavy duty fuses, it is required that a switc be installed
before each set of fuses so that the fuses may be changed in
a no-voltage condition.

The switch should be of such a rating that the combination

switch/fuses cannot cause damage or create a dangerous situa-
tion while they are being operated.

Note:

The requirement in the 2nd paragraph above, does not imply

that the switch must be rated for the largest short-circuit
current which may occur.

o
§ 587. Socket-outlet and plugs

.1 Socket-outlets and plugs must be designed and used in accor-

dance with the conditions for which they are approved.

.2 Socket-outlets and plugs for which no conditions are laid

down ruling their acceptance, the following requirements
regarding their use must be observed:

. 2 .1

. 2. 2
Socket-outlets for two-pin plugs must be connected between
one outer conductor and the N conductor. o
Socket-outlets for three-pin plugs (2 pins and a side contact)
must be connected to one outer conductor, the N conductor and
the PE conductor.

.2.3 Socket-outlets for four-pin plugs must be connected to three

outer conductors and the PE conductor.
 14

. 2. 4 Socket-contacts for five-pin 9lugs must be connected to

three outer conductors, the N conductor and the PE conductor.
. 2.5 Socket-outlets for plugs having more than five pins are only
permitted for special purposes.

.3 Socket-outlets for vottages above 250 V must have separate

marking, s e e § 581.4.1.

.4 In the case of installations where several voltages or systems

are in use, care must be taken to ensure that socket-outlets
and plugs for the various voltages or systems, cannot be
interchanged. Marking as a sole means of distinction will
not normally be regarded as sufficient.

Note:

Regarding the connection of socket-outlets, see fig. 5.

The provisions in this r t i c l e are meant to prevent apparatus,

equipment etc. being connected to a voltage source or system
other than that for which they are designed.

CEE standardized round-pin sockets and associated plugs hav-

ing standardized clock position of the earth contact, must
be used in order to comply with the requirements for this
system. The system is based on the principle that there can
be no way of interchanging plugs and socket-outlets for vari-
ous voltages, frequencies, number of phases, etc., so that
for instance a plug for low-voltage equipment cannot be in-
serted into a socket-outlet connected to a medium-voltage
supply.

0
 15

Fig. 5. Permitted connections for normal o c k e t outlets in

installations with directly earthed neutral point.

The diagram shows the transition from a 4-conductor to a

5-conductor system. It is required that in the case of
D-fuses of rated currents above 63 A and for all heavy
duty fuses a switch be fitted in each sub-circuit, so
that the fuses may be changed in a state of no-voltage.

SL:F?l;·
t1 t2 L,PEN
Iu I
0

I I
I
! I
I jI
u • I

l,
l
N r,
H
N PE L1l2liNPE
E•. r h c c n d u c eo r ••F a c t C'l",,..•:hwtt"lr E a , , h c o n . t a c cc r S:,,:--h .J;,,J •1e•1t J. I
(.''.".Cb,l: ! L,c-> !('d 1nclta.J,, I c o n d u c c c r s !.n,:l,v:<'d
S.1.9 L e + p h a s e
0
§ 588. Outdoor wiring.

For outdoor wiring the provisions i n § 511 are in force.Q

However, the circuits are not to be fused so high that
the requirements i n § 586 cannot be fulfilled.
 16

c. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS WITH INSULATED

NEUTRAL POINT

§ 590. Insulation monitoring and aheaking

.1 These medium-voltage installations must be provided with a

device giving audible and visible signals in case of earth
faults in the installations.

0 However, in the case of outdoor distribution networks, it is

sufficient that the condition of the insulation be checked
four times a year. The results of the measurements are to
be noted in a log book. Fixed devices for checking the con-
dition of the insulation are not required.

In the case of earth faults in the installation these must

be corrected without delay.

§ 591. Switahes

.1 Suitable rated switches are to be provided for apparatus,

machines, transformers, etc. which may require to be dis-
connected on-load. Switches are also to be suitably loca-
ted to sectionalise the netwoek in order to obtain measure-
ments of the insulation, and to enable work to be done
on the installation, s e e § 581.2.1, where such division
cannot be obtained by removing fuses.

.2 In the case of D-fuses of nominal currents above 63 A and

heavy duty fuses, it is required that a switch be installed
before each set of fuses so that the fuses may be changed
in a no-voltage condition.

The switch must be of such a rating that the combination

switch/fuses cannot cause damage or create a dangerous
situation while they are being operated.

Note:

The requirement in the 2nd paragraph above does not imply

that the switah must be rated for the largest short-airauit
aurrent whiah may oaaur.

'.> 5 9 2 . Marking and separation

.1 Medium voltage apparatus, motors and distribution installa-

tions should be kept as far away as possible from low-voltage
installations and be clearly marked, so that interchanging of
equipment cannot take place. The marking may be in the form
of labels on each apparatus or by means of special colours
which unambiuously indicate the voltage system of the par-
ticular installation. Warning labels for high-voltage in-
stallations are not permitted for this purpose.
 17

.2 Installations for lighting, heating, control currents etc .

must be designed as either low-voltage installations, or
medium-voltage installations up to 440 V with directly
earthed neutral point.

§ 593. Soaket-outlets

.1 Socket-outlets are not to be operated while the load is oD

If the sockets are not of an interlocked type, a warning
plate or instruction must make it known that the plugs ar
not to be pulled out or inserted while the load is connected.

§ 594. Outdoor distribution

.1 Separate installation switches or fuses are not required A

providing the supply fuses have a rated-value suitable fcW
the connected load. These fuses are to disconnect the in-
stallation in case of a short-circuit.

The wires from the secondary side of the distribution trans-

former must have fuses in them.

Low-voltage installations which are connected to a medium-

voltage supply by means of transformers must have breakdown
fuses according to the requirements o f § 623.

.2 Overhead line poles are to be impreqnated according to approv-

ed methods. Outdoor lines (uninsulated or insulated) must
have a height of at least 5 m above the ground and have a
breaking load of at least 640 kp. The height above the
ground may be reduced to 4 m if self-supporting cables are
used.

.3 Outdoor overhead lines must have a direct sideways distance

of at least 4 m to the ground and at least 2 m to trees and
bushes.

.4 Where overhead lines cros s public roads, the vertical dis-

tance between the. lowest point and the road surface Musto
at l a s t 6 m. The wires must be fastened to the poles a
either side of the road in such a manner that they canno
slip. The width of the crossing span is not to exceed 50 m.
The same applies for lines which cross over public road in
a longitudinal direction.

.5 Uninsulated overhead lines are to have a horizont.al d i s t a l

of at least 5 m from the nearest part of buildings. The
same requirements applies for other objects such as chimn s,
towers, flag poles etc. The distance may be reduced to 3.5 m
if wires having weatherproof and corrosion resistant insula-
tion are used. The distance may further be reduced to 2 m
by using self-supporting cables.
 18

Uninsulated overhead lines are permitted to cross less im-

portant buildings ( s e e § 726) when the direct distance from
the nearest wire to the buildings is at least 5 m. This
distance may be reduced to 3.5 m if wires having weather-
proof and corrosion resistant insulation are used. The
distance may further be reduced to 2.5 m by using self-
supporting cables. These distances also apply to lines
crossing scaffoldings and other temporary structures etc.

.6 In the case of lines which have the same owner/user and at

the same voltage, these may cross each other and be fastened
to common masts at the crossing.

In the case of the crossing of medium-voltage lines of dif-

ferent voltages and which do not have the same owner/user,
the crossing must at least satisfy one of the requirements
governing the crossing between low-voltage lines and light-
current lines ( s e e § 514). The same applies for the cros-
sing of lines for medium-voltage and low-voltage and of
lines for medium-voltage and light-current. The length of
the crossing span must·not exceed 50 m.

.7 When the same masts are used for medium-voltage lines of

different voltages or f0r medium-voltage lines and low-
voltage lines, the following provisions are to be fulfilled:

. 7 .1 The lines must have the same owner/user.

. 7. 2 The masts must be dimensioned according to the additional

stresses due to there being more than one set of wires.

. 7. 3 All the wires must have weatherproof and corrosion resistant

insulation.

. 7.4 The highest voltage line must occupy the uppermost position.

. 7. 5 The length of the span must not exceed 50 m .

. 7. 6 The distance between the wires of each line on the poles

must be at least 1 m, and be so adjusted that the wires
cannot come into contact with each other in the span.

. 7. 7 On each mast a plate must be placed directly below each

line giving its operational voltage.

.8 Medium-voltage lines using insulated wires may be run on

the same masts as self-supporting light-current cables under
the following conditions:

.8.1 The medium voltage wires and the cables must have the same
owner/user or the light-current cable must belong to the
Telegraph Service. If the latter is the case, a satisfac-
tory agreement should be drawn up governing the use of the
common masts. The agreement should, on demand, be presented
to the Electricity Inspectorate.
 19

. 8. 2 The medium-voltage wires must occupy the uppermost position.

. 8. 3 The span-length is not to exceed SO m.

.8.4 The distance between the two lines must be so adjusted that
it cannot be less than 1 m under the most unfavourable con-
ditions.

. 8.5 On each pole, at approximately 0.3 m above the fastening ,

point of the light-current cable, must be placed a 50 mm
wide yellow warning ring. The warning ring must be affixe
by the organisation responsible for the medium-voltage line
and before the light-current cable is installed.

. 8. 6 Transformer poles must not be used as common poles, neither

shall other poles on which bare medium-voltage componentso
are present.

.9 All poles must be marked with the highest operational vol-

tage at a suitable height above the ground.

0
 SECTION II E
0
REGULATIONS FOR HIGH-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS

0 a. General provisions
b. Machine installations
c. Transformer installations
d. Rectifier installations
e. Capacitor installations
f. Apparatus and distribution installations indoors
g. Apparatus and distribution installations out-of-doors
h. Overhead lines
j. Safety regulations for high-voltage installations

D
 1

SECTION I IE
REGULATIONS FOR HIGH-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS

a. GENERAL PROVISIONS Page

§ 600. Comoetent construction 3
§ 601. Marking 3

0 §
§
§
602.
603.
605.
Protection from contact
Condition of insulation
Protective earthinq
4
4
5
§ 607. Earthina of parts of an installation 6
§ 60R. Desian and cross-section of earth conductor 7
§ 609. Installation and connection of earth conductor 7
§ 610. Earth electrodes 9

0
§ 611. Inspection of earthina. 9
§ 612. Earthinq of power conductors 10
§ 613. Wire and cable connections 10
§ 614. Rooms housing hiqh-,olaoe installations 10
§ 615. Temporary i s t l l t i c n s 11

b. MACHINE INSTALLATIONS

§ 616. Design and construction 12

§ 617. Erection cf m c h i n e c 12
§ 618. Insulated machines 12
c. TRANSFOru,!ER INSTALLATIONS

§ 620. Desian and construction 13

§ 621. Protection against fire 13
§ 622. Ventilation 14
§ 623. Breakdown fuses 14

d. RECTIFIER INSTALLATIONS (not included in this translation)

e. CAPACITOR INSTALLATIONS (not included in this translatrion)

f. APPARATUS AND DISTRIBUTION INSTALLATIONS INDOORS

D § 631.
§ 633.
§ 634.
C.iblc entries
Arranaement of apparatus
Apparatus
16
17
17
§ 635. Operators' oanaways 18
§ 636. Protection 18
§ 637. Wire connections 20
§ 638. E)("cess voltage protection 20

0 § 645.
§ 647.
§ 648.
Fuses
Fusina of apparatus, machines and transformers
Fusina of wires and cables
20
20
21
§ 649. Desiqn and loadina of insulated wires and cables 22
§ 652. Uninsulated conductors 24
§ 653. Insulated wires and cables 25
§ 656. Wiring in wet and corrosive areas 25
§ 657. Installations in rooms containinq easily-iqnited
materials 25
 2

Page
§ 658. Flexible cables 26
§ 662. Protect1on at crossings and adjacent sitings 26
§ 663. Penetrations .
§ 665. Circuit breakers and switchgear 26

g. APPARATUS AND DISTRIBUTION INSTALLATIONS OUT-OF-DOORS

§ 671. Spacing of fixed wires 28

§ fi74. Apparatus and equipment in the open air 29
§ 675.
§ 677.
§ 678.
Protection, clearance distances and shielding
Loadinq of cables
Protection and markinq of underqround cables
29
30
31
0
§ 679. Crossing and adjacPnt sitina of underqround
cables 32
§ 680. Crossina and adjacent sitina of submarine
cables 33

h. OVERHEAD I-INES 0
§ 706. Overhead line poles 35
§ 707. Material cross-section, soan length and
stressing of lines 38
§ 708. Current load and fusing of lines 39
§ 709. Arranaements for ooeration and connection 40
§ 710. Heioht of lines above around 41
§ 711. Clearinq of woods 41
§ 712. Several circuits on common noles 42
§ 713. Carrier-freuuency communication 43
§ 714. Insulators with arcessories 44
§ 715. Crossing of hiqh-voltaaes lines 46
§ 716. Crossing of other lines 48
§ 717. Crcssino of very crowded areas etc. 50
§ 718. Crossinq of oublic roads 51
6 71g. Crossinq of railways 52
§ 720. Crossing of aerial ronewavs, track cables 53
6 721. General provisions reaardina crossings 54
§ 722. Adjacent sitinq to roads, very crowded areas etc. 57
§ 723. Lines adjacent to railways 58
§ 724. Lines adjacent to other lines 58
§ 725. Lines adjacent to aerial rooeways, track
§ 726.
§ 728.
cables
Lines adjacent to, and crossing of, buildings etc.
Long soans
58
59
62
0
§ 730. Unused lines 62

0
j. SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR HIGH-VOLTAGE I N S A L L A T l O S
(The regulations in this section are superseded by the
NVE Communication no. 1/78)
 3

SECTION I I E
REGULATIONS FOR HIGH-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS

a. GENERAL PROVISIONS

§ 600. Competent construction.

0 Every installation shall be competently constructed

and so laid out that it is not unnecessarily detrimental
to its surroundings. The owners of electrical installa-
tions are required to ensure that such installations are
properly maintained and inspected. The construction and
repair of heavy current instalations which are subject

0 to notification may be carried out only by trained

personnel who satisfy tl.e requirements laid down in
provisions issued pursuant to law.

NVE may, in cases in which it is considered necessary on

grounds of safety, impose special requirements in respect
of apparatus and equipment.

Installations which are not in use shall either be removed

or maintained in accordance with the Regulations.
Concerning lines in the open, see, however, § 730.

§ 601. Marking.

Electrical machines, transformers and apparatus shall be

durably and clearly marked in an easily visible place to
show the type designation and maker's name or mark and
also the voltage, type of current, current ratinq and,
where appropriate, output, frequency, speed in rev/min,
type of connection, type of case, enclosure, Ptc. to the
extent that this is necessary for their operation.

rollowing any re-winding or modification the apparatus

0 shdll be marked afresh if the output, voltage, current

rating, etc. are altered. A new label shall be affixed
marked with the year of modification. The original label
must not be removed.

In the case of fuses both the fixed part and the fuse pro-
per shall be clearly marked with the voltage and current

0
ratings.

Current-carrying lines and conductors shall be marked in

an appropriate manner using a style which shall be uniform
throughout the wiring system. In apparatus which is divid-
ed into various sections, compartments, etc., the switches
and control-gear shall be clearly and appropriately marked
to prevent incorrect operation.
 4

Note:
Distribution transfonners which are located such that the original
label is not readily legible shall be provided with an additional
readily legible label.
•
§ 602. Protection from contact.

0
Current-carrying components shall be securely protected
from accidental contact.

Conspicuous warning plates of an approved type shall be

fitted on m s t s of the tyoe which can be easily climbed,
such as lattice masts and similar, also on standard im-
pregnated poles in built-up areas, etc. or elsewhere where
there is a danger of lines beinq confused with other lines.
Plates should also be fitted at the entrance to, and in
suitable positions inside, machine rooms, rooms housing
apparatus and also distribution kiosks, even though these
0
are kept locked and are accessible only to trained opera-
tors.

Current-carrying equipment which is operated or inspected

during operation must be installed in a locked room or
enclosed area or on a mast and must be so arranged that
they can be operated or inspected easily and without danger.

This provision does not, however, apply to electrolytic

installations and similar where protective arrangements
appropriate to the circumstances are made.

§ 603. Conditions of insulation.

Electrical installations shall have adeauate insulation at
all points.

The insulation resistance for main overhead lines shall be

at least 500 ohms per volt, but not less than 250 000 ohms,
both between the individual conductors and between each

0
conductor and earth. For purposes of measurements, elec-
trical machines, transformers and other current-consuming
apparatus shall be disconnected.

Those parts of electrical machines, transformers and other

current-consuming apparatus which are connected to the high-
voltage mains shall have an insulation resistance of at
least

voltage, V
output, k V A + 1000
megohm
0
 5

In wet and/or corrosive areas and out-of-doors, as also

for transformers and other apparatus enclosed in oil,
only 50% of the above insulation resistance is required.

Measurement of insulation resistance shall be carried out

using direct current at a voltage of at least 500 V. On
high-voltage electrode boilers havinq a hiqh-resistance
neutral point, however, the insulation resistance shall

0 be measured using alternating current at a voltage of at

least 500 V.

All installations shall have:

Permanently fitted devices with which the insulation

resistance can at any time be checked;

0 Equipment to provide rapid automatic disconnection in the

event of a t w o - p h s e earth fault.

Note:

The prov"s"on regarding the value of the insulation reaistanae

does not apply to nigh-voltage eleatrode boilers having a high-
resistanae neutral point. The resistanae of the neutral point
to earth must at all times be suffiaiently high for the boiler
not to raise the earth leakage aurrent of the mains above the
value permitted by the eleatriaity supply undertaking.

§ 605. Proteative earthing.

Earthing shall be carried out in such a manner that the
voltage to earth is as low as possible and does not
exceed 125 V in the event of s i n g l e h a s e earth fault
In less populated areas a value of 250 V is permitted.

Where these voltage limits cannot be observed the installa-

tion must be provided with equipment to provide rapid and
automatic disconnection of the equipment concerned. This

0
automatic disconnection shall take place with sufficient
rapidity to ensure that the earth fault current does not
c r e t e unnecessary danger.

Note:

This paragraph refers to metal parts of maahines, aonduative

parts of buildings, frames, masts, insulator mountings, eta.
0 whiah may beaome live if the insulation fails.

The earth fault aurrent aan be reduced in large mains systems by

fitting a ahoke aoil (Petersen aoil). This reduaes the aontact
voltage at the earth fault. The aoil should be adjusted to a
current somewhat higher than the normal earth fault aurrent of
the mains in order that the resonanae point shall not be passed
if a line or aable is disaonneated.
 6

With large overhead mains systems, or cable mains systems, it may

be necessary to-feed the mains in sections from a nwnber of trans-
formers in order to reduce the available earth fault current. Ex-
tended cable mains systems and overhead mains systems should if
possible be supplied each from its own transformer, since it is
desirable to keep the large earth leakage currnts in the cable
mains azuay from the overhead mains.

§ 607. Earthing of parts of an installation.

Metal parts shall be earthed if they are mounted in the
0
vicinity of live components or can come into contact with
them. Thus, metal structural oarts of machines, trans-
formers, switchgear and other åpoaratus shall be earthed
providing they are not mounted on insulating supports or
protected from contact.

Low-voltage windings of instrument transformers, operating

0
devices of switchgear and regulating appliances, parts of
cable fittings, metal conduits in conduit installations,
apparatus stands, etc. shall similarly be earthed.

In the case of lines in the open the followinq parts shall

be earthed: steel masts, reinforcing steel members in
concrete masts, fittinqs for transformer units, switchqear
supports and the like, and fittinqs fixinq insulators to
buildings. Stays and operatinq handles for switches shall
be either earthed or insulated. In the case of wooden
oole lines without an earth lead, stays shall a l a y s be
insulated. Stay insulators and insulators for ooeratina
handles of switches shall be placed out of reach and shall
be capable of withstandinq the full wo r k Lnc voltaqe. !,,There
structural parts of wooden Poles are earthed, all metal parts,
includinq insulator fasteninqs, shall be earthed. If
sufficient earth connections cannot be obtained on the
spot, a continuous earth line shall be fitted to the ooles
and connected to earth electrodes at a sufficient number of
suitable points.

Note: 0
It is often difficult to provide sufficient earth connections in the
case of outdoor overhead lines. In such circumstances, stays must
be insulted. In view of the danger of contact for electricians,
an earth line must in all cases be provided for apparatus and sup-
ports, which are fitted on wooden poles, particularly of transformer
poles. A continuous earth line will in most cases prove to be a
necessity, both in view of insulation inspection and aloo to ensure
0
safe disconnection, particularly with a two-phase earth fault.
In the case of operating handles and the like for outdoor switches,
extra care must be taken to ensure safety of operation. With earted
operating handles an insulated operating platform should be con-
structed where conditions are particularly difficult. In the cane of
wooden pole lines without a continuous earth line, the earthing of
operating handles may be omitted and the handles insulated from the
switches by means of insulators in the operating rods.
 7

From the operating handle an equipotential connection can be made

to a coil of wire in the earth under the operating position.

§ 608. Design and cross-section of earth conductors.

Earth conductors shall be so dimensioned that the anticipat-
ed earth fault currents cannot result in harmful heating of
them or their surroundings.

0 Earth conductors shall consist of copper of not less than

25 mm2 cross-section or of copper-clad steel wire of not
less than 20 mm2 overall cross-section and with at least
6 mm2 cross-section of copper.

Continuous earth outdoor conductors may, however, be of not

0 less than 16 mm2 cross-section. Such earth conductors may

also consist of hotdip qalvanized steel, steel-aluminium
or similar. The breakinq load of continuous earth con-
ductors in the open air shall be suited to the mechanical
stresses ( s e e § § 707 and 715 - 725).

Earth wires carried along a line of poles supporting high-

voltage lines and connected to an earth electrode buried
at some distance from the object to be earthed, as also
earth wires carried along a line of poles supporting low-
voltage lines and connected to an earth electrode through
a breakdown fuse, may be installed in accordance with the
same rules as apply to a continuous earth conductor, except
that the earth wire must be of a cross-section at least
equivalent to 25 mm2 of copp1r or consist of copper-clad
steel wire of at l a s t 20 mm overall cross-section and
with at least 6 mm cross-section of copper.

Earth connections for low-voltage windings of instrument

transformers shall consist of copper and be of at least
4 mm2 cross-section.

Lead-in protection shall be desiqned as a continuous earth

lead.

0 Note:

The provsons contained in the second and fifth paragraph of

this clause are intended to cover separate earth wires, not
metal sheathing and shielding in cables.

0 § 609. Installation and connection of earth conductor.

a. Earth connections shall be arranged in such a manner that
the individual earthed components do not themselves
create a series connection providing an earth conductor
for other components. Frames, mounting brackets, etc.
 8

which are welded, riveted or screwed together in a manner

giving a satisfactory conductive connection may, however,
have a common earth terminal. Components attached to such
frames, mounting brackets, etc. in a manner giving a satis-
factory conductive connection between the metal components
do not require to be separatly earthed.

Low-voltage windings on instrument transformers may be con-

nected directly to the earthed case of the transformer or
the support oq which it is mounted.

Screwed connections shall be locked, e.q. by means of ser-

0
rated spring washers, etc.

b. Where it is reasonably possible and satisfactory results

can be achiewed, earth connections for high-voltage instal-
lations and for light-current installations shall be separa-
te and taken to different earth electrodes. 0
c. Earth connections shall be as short as possible. They shall
be fixed in an easily visible position and in such a manner
that they can be easily examined. They shall be protected
from corrosion and mechanical damage.

d. Joints in and connections to earth electrodes shall be

effected with special care.

e. Where other objects, such as conduits, which themselves have

a good earth connection, are situated within easy reach of
earthed parts or their earth connections, such objects shall
be separately connected to earth points. Waterpipes and
the metal sheathing or cover of cables shall not be used
as the only direct earth connection, but only as parallel
connections with one or more earth connections.

Pipes carrying fuel may not be used as earth connections.

f. Suitable connection points (bars, bolts, etc.) for portable

earthing apparatus shall be provided at easily accessible
points in the installation. Such connection points shall
be copper and be connected to the earthing system by means
of copper wires. 0
Note:
Joints shall be riveted and soldered, welded or pressed, unless
seaure screw or clamp connections are used.
Low-voltage windings for instrument transformers may be earthed
to an earth terminal under the cover through the terminal box.
0
Earth connections in indoor installations are normally fixed on
distance brackets. Where the earth connection is brought down to
the earth electrode it should be protected by means of a tube or
angle-iron or similar.
 9

The earth conductor of heavy aurrent apparatus should be so

fitted that induction effects do not resuit in heating of the
earth connections in the event of an earth fauit.
Where it is not reasonably possible to keep the earth connections
for high-voltage and light-aurrent separate, a common earth elec-
trode may be used, such as, for example, in rocky ground.

0 § 610. Earth electrodes.

Earth electrodes shall be made from copper or copper-clad
steel and shall be so dimensioned that the transition
resistance to earth is sufficiently low ( s e e § 605) even
when subjected to the continuous level of earth fault

0
currents. Connections to such electrodes shall be as
short as possible and shall consist of copper with a cross-
section of at least 25 mm2 or copper-clad steel wire of at
least 20 mm2 overall cross-section and at least 6 mm2
cross-section of copper. Plates and strip shall be at
least 1 mm thick.

Earth electrodes shall be capable of being disconnected

for the taking of measurements by means of terminals or
other connections, which must be fitted at a suitable
height.

Note:
Plate, strip wire, rods, etc. may be used as earth electrodes.
Strip, wire and rods are often more effective than plate. Where
surge-arresters are fitted, it is partiaularly important for the
transition resistance to be low and for the surge impedance to
be considered.

§ 611. Inspection of earthing.

Earthing shall be inspected by the person in charge of

0
the installation both after the necessary connections,
etc. have been made and subsequently at intervals of not
more than five years. Large-scale installations which
are operated continuously, such as power stations, large
transformer stations, etc., must be inspected at intervals
of not more than two years. During this inspection the
transition resistance shall be measured using alternating
current and all leads and connections to the earth elec-

0 trodes shall be checked. A report shall be prepared

concerning the inspection and shall indicate the method
of measurement and specify any repairs and modifications
effected.
 10

§ 612. Earthing of power conductors.

The permanent connection to earth of any phase or neutral

conductors of an installation may be made only after spe-
cial authorization from NVE obtained through the Electri-
city Inspectorate.

Earth connections through an earthing reactance coil or

similar apparatus are, however, permitted when the earth
connection is made in such a manner that it does not
involve danger or inconvenience to other installations. 0
§ 613. Wire and cable connections.

Wire and cable connections shall be made in such a manner

that they can, with adequate safety, withstand all stresses
which may arise during operation. Connections exposed to
Q
tension must have a breakinq strain at least 90% of that
of the lead itself.

Connections shall be made using junction sleeves or by

some other equally reliable means. If a connection is
soldered, use shall be made of a solder which does not
damage the conductors. •
Connections shall be insulated where they are made in
insulated wires and shall be so protected that they are
equivalent to that of the remainder of the wiring.

§ 614. Rooms housing high-voltage installations.

Rooms housing generators,transformers,distribution and

instrument installations shall be constructed of brick-
work, or concrete in fire protection class at least A 120,
see a l s o § 621.

Free-standing kiosks situated at a distance of at least

5 m from other buildings may be constructed of steel or
of other material approved for the purpose by NVE. 0
Rooms containing oil-filled apparatus which form part of
buildings used for other purposes, or are situated in the
vicinity of combustible surroundings shall whereever pos-
sible be provided with a door leading directly into the
open air. Where a door leading directly into the building
is necessary, a type A 60 fire-door shall be used. If the
room has no oil drain sump, the threshold shall be high
0
enough to prevent oil from running out.
 11

Note:

Rooms must be so constructed that arcs cannot cause fires or

other damage. A fire-door or wired glass, etc. is not, however,
required in those parts of a building where no real fire danger
exists.
For example, a generator will normally be surrounded by its own
concrete and/or steel-plate enclosure, in which case steel doors
0 and wired glass are not required in the generator room.
A list of materials classified in fire protective classes will
be found in "Statlige byggebestemmelser Del 5".
Attention is also drawn to the building law andbuilding regula-
tions in force.

0 § 615. Temporary installations.

Only installations for use in large-scale building opera-
tions lasting not longer than four vears are generally
corrs Lde red t.o be t_e.mpQi:i;!r_y.
Temporary installations shall as a rule be constructed
and maintained in accordance with these Regulations.
Unimpregnated poles may, however, be used for overhead
lines. Transformers with their associated equipment may
be installed in buildings made of combustible materials
where such buildings are not used for other purposes. I
is a pre-requisite that the highest voltage shall not
exceed 24 kV and that the distance separating such build-
ings from other buildings or combustibles store shall be
at least 15 m.
The Electricity Inspectorate shall decide after inspection
on site whether an installation may be permitted to
continue in use for longer than four years.

Attention is drawn to the provisions i n § 730 regarding

unused lines.

0
 12
b. MACHINE INSTALLATIONS

§ 616. Design and construction.

Electrical machines shall be of a satisfactory construc-
tion in mechanical, thermal and electrical respects and
shall have an appropriate and efficiently desianed
cover, connection system and cooling system, suitable
for the working conditions and nature of the location in
which they are installed.

Note:
0
Attention is drawn to the Standards governing electrical
machines issued by the Norwegian Electrotechnical Committee
(NEK).

§ 617. Erection of machines.

0
Electrical machines shall be surely attached to their
supports and installed or protected in such a manner
that any sparks or heat developed cannot cause a fire.

Note:
Attention is drawn to the Standards governing electrical machines
issued by the Norwegian Electrotechnical Committee (NEK).

§ 618. Insulated machines.

Low-voltage windings on machines installed in such a manner

that they are insulated from earth, together with all wires
and apparatus connected to such windings, are covered by
the regulations applicable to high-voltage installations
in so far as the leads are not fitted with breakdown fuses
or earthed during operation.

Machines fitted in such a manner that they are not insu-

lated and which are connected to insulated machines by way
of insulating couplings must be earthed. Steps must be
taken to prevent simultaneous contact between insulated
0
machines and uninsulated machines or between uninsulated
and earthed parts.

0
 13

c. TRANSFORMER INSTALLATIONS

§ 620. Design and aonstruation.

1. Transformers shall be of satisfactory construction
in mechanical, thermal and electrical respects and
shall have an appropriate and efficiently designed

0 cover, connection system and cooling system, suitable

for the working conditions and nature of the location
in which they are installed.

2. In the case of transformers which are filled with oil

it shall be possible to check the oil-level easily.
Such transformers shall have readily accessible drain
taps. The tanks shall be protected against rust both
0 inside and outside.

3. Rectifier transformers shall have separated primary and

secondary windings. Wires carrying the different types
of current shall e kept separate from one another.

Note:
Attention is drawnto the Standards governing transformers issued
by the Norwegian Eleatroteahniaal Committee (NEK).

§ 621. Proteation against fire.

When oil-filled transformers are installed particular
attention shall be paid to the possibility of fire-risks.
In installations which have oil transformers with a total
output of over 1000 kVA precautions shall be taken at oil-
drain sumps, etc. in order that escaping oil may be retained
In installations with oil-filled transformers which have
a total output of up to 1000 kVA, but situated in the
0 vicinity of combstible surroundings or in a building
serving other purposes, there shall either be an oil drain
sump etc. in the transformer room or a threshold high enough
to orevent thP oil running out.

Rooms housing oil-filled transformers in buildings serving

other purposes shall be constructed as a fire cell. Floors,
0 walls and ceiling shall be constructed of brickwork or con-
crete in fire protection class depending on the calculated
severity of fire, though not less than A 120. The calcula-
tion of fire severity shall be based on the content of oil
in the transformer. This content can be reduced by 50%
when the room is provided with oil drain sump.

Oil-filled transformer rooms forming part of buildings for

domestic or industrial purposes shall preferably be provided
 14

with a door leading directly into the open air (for example
steel or slatted door, etc.). Where a door from a trans-
former room into the building is necessary, a type A 60
fire-door shall be used. The ventilation duct from such a
room shall be of A 60 class. The duct leading into other
rooms or into the ventilation system of the building shall
furthermore be provided with A 60 selfclosing fire-shutters.

Note:
Oil drain swnps should be designed using a stone filter.
0
A list of materials alassified into fire proteative alassess will
be found in "Statlige byggebesterrrnelser Del 5". Attention is also
drawn to the building l= and building regulations in forae.

0
§ 622. Ventilation.
Transformer rooms shall be adequately ventilated.

Ventilation apertures and grills (slats) shall be so

sited and designed that i is not possible to insert any
object through such apertures or grills in the direction
of live components.

§ 623. Breakdown fuses.

In the case of low-voltage installations which are
connected via a transformer to high-voltage installations,
the neutral point or one nhase of the low-voltage winding
shall be fitted with a breakdown fuse where that winoing
is not earthed during operation ( s e e § 412). No break-
down fuse is, however, required with smelting trans-
formers and similar equipment where it may result in
operational difficulties.

0
Breakdown fuses shall be so designed that they puncture
and create a permanent earth connection when a voltage of
between 500 and 6 0 0 V occurs in the low-voltage winding.
They must withstand puncture and current leakage without
involving danger to their surroundings. N0 fuses or switch-
es :!lay._., fitted in the wire connecting the windjnq to earth,
but a manually onerated short-circuit r!cvicc s"all be fitted
in o:cciP:r that the fuse can be re.,,oved wi..thout danger.

Breakdown fuses shall in general have separate earth elec-

trodes and an insulated earth lead which is separate from
0
the protective earthing arrangements for high-voltage and
low-voltage components.
 15

Note:

In installations having underground cables of some length, such as

installations in power stations, large factory installations, etc.,
it will in many cases prove impracticable and even somewhat danger-
ous to separate the breakdown fuse earth connection from the pro-
tective earth lead for high-voltage and low-voltage apparatus, so
that corrmon earthing arrangements must be adopted in such cases.

0 Corrunon earthing may also be used with installations involving over-

head lines, such earth wires being connected, for instance, to a
continuous earth wire where the earth fault current with a single-
phase fault is small andthe transition resistance to earth suffici-
ently low. For the design of earth connections and electrodes, see
§§ 608 and 610.

0 In all other cases, earthing shall be by means of separate earth

electrodes situated at least 20 m from other earth electrodes and
from metal pipes, underground cables, etc. An underground connec-
tion running to such earth electrodes is considered to be part of
the-electrode unless it consists of cable intended for at least 1 kV
operating current and is of a type approved for underground use.
Insulated earth wires fixed to a transformer pole or in a building
must have insulation equivalent to that of the low-voltage conduc-
tors and shall not be fixed to high-voltage poles other than the
transformer pole.
It may be advisible to connect a lightning arrester having a surge
breakdown voltage of 800 - 1000 V in parallel with breakdc,,_,mfuses
in order to protect the latter from short-duration atmospheric over-
voltages.

0 d. RECTIFIER INSTALLATIONS
(not included in this translation)

0 e. CAPACITOR INSTALLATIONS
(not included in this translation)
 16

f, APPARATUS AND DISTRIBUTION INSTALLATIONS INDOORS

§ 631. Cabie entries.

Where cables and wires are brought into buildings from

overhead lines, the current-carrying parts shall be situ-
ated at least 5 m above ground level for operating vol-

0
tages of up to 24 kV. For higher voltages the height
shall be in accordance with the Table below. The distance
from the qround to the underside of lightninq arresters
shall be at least 4.5 m.

Where an overhead line which is being led into a building

is carried over the roof of the latter or over a similar
part, the current-carrying parts shall be at least 3m
above the roof for operating voltages of up to 24 kV and
at a height shown in the Table below for higher voltages. 0
Max.operating •
voltage (effec-
tive value) up
to : kV 24 36 52 72.5 123 145 170 24 5 300 420
Height above
ground, m A 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.4 5.7 5.8 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.8
11-leight above
roof, m E 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.4 3.7 3.8 4.0 4. 5 5.0 5.8

Where an enciosure is used the distances shown in

§ 675 may be adopted.

Note:
The undenide of a lightning arrester i1 conaidered to be

0
the lowest unearthed pari of the arrester.

Fil, l
 17

§ 633. Arrangement of apparatus.

Apparatus shall be arranged in an obvious and understand-
able manner and shall be divided into sections, cells or
similar units so that the individual parts can be
disconnected as necessary for inspection and maintenance.

High-voltage and low-voltage apparatus shall be kept

0 separate from each other.

A plate shall be displayed beside fuses, switches, etc.

showing clearly and in indelible lettering the parts of
the installation to which they belong.

Apparatus shall be well illuminated.

0 Note:
Lot.rvoltage apparatus which controls the operation of a high-
voltage installation (control of measuring equipment) shall be
mounted at a safe distance and protected from high-voltage
components.

§ 634. Apparatus.
Apparatus and associated protective covers or cases
shall be designed so that all stresses which arise
during operation due to arcs, heat, damp and chemical
or mechanical influences can be withstood with adequate
safety. Covers and cases shall be sufficiently spactous
both in regard to the connection of conductors and to
distance from live parts.

Regarding protection from accidental contact, s e e § 602.

Live parts shall be adequately insulated both from earth

and from one another by means of damp-proof, heat-resist-
ing and non-tracking materials (§§ 141 - 144).

0 Current carrying parts of apparatus shall be so dimensioned

and constructed that constant loading with the maximum rat-
ed current does not result in dangerous heating either of
the apparatus or of its surroundings.

Apparatus shall be readily accessible and controls shall be

0
able to be operated without danger.

Apparatus which may assume temperatures high enough to pre-

sent a danger to the surroundings shall be so sited that
they cannot set fire to any adjacent object.
 18

Panels and framework used for mounting apparatus shall be

made from noncombustible materials having good mechanical
strength or form other materials approved for the purpose.
Such panels and framework must be arranged in an obvious
and understandable manner and so fitted that all connec-
tions can be examined at any time.

Rooms housing high voltage apparatus shall not contain water,

steam, gas or other pipes not required therein. Objects not
required in such rooms shall similarly not be stored in them.
o
§ 635. Operators' gangways.
Operators' gangways between the various items of equipment

0
shall be so wide that the distance between live parts and
the opposite wall is not less than 1.5 m. Where there are
live parts on either side of a gangway and horizontal dis-
tance between these shall be at least 2 m. Where there are
live parts above a gangway the height of these shall be at
least 2.5 m + 0.01 m per kV of operating voltage. The
distance from the floor to the lowest part of insulators
positioned above operators' gangways shall be at least
2.3 m irrespective of the operating voltages. These pro-
visions do not apply to insulced cables or to connectors
which are protected from accidental contact by menas of
permanently fitted protective grills, etc. which may not
be opened during operation. The width of a gangway may not,
however, be less than 1 m nor its free height less than 2 m.
Gangways must be well lit and wherever possible accessible
from two directions.

Note:
The requirements that operators' gangways ehal.l:wherever poeeibl.e
be accessible from two directions means there shaZZ be an approved
emergency exit to the open air for operators. In smaZZ transformer
stations or kiosks no emergenay exit is genereZZy required providing
the apparatus is sited as far as possible from the exit door.
§ 636. Proteation.
Grills, plates or similar protective fitments shall wherever
0
possible be fitted in front of any live parts of any appara-
tus. Barriers made of non-conductive materials shall be
fitted behind any sheet metal doors as additional safe metal
doors ad additional safeguards.

When a grill, etc., is fitted in front of live components,

its heights above floor leven to the bottom of the grill
0
shall be not more than 0.2 m a n d a t least 1.8 m to the top.
 19

Live parts at a height above floor level less than speci-

fied i n § 635 shall be placed inside a protective grill,
etc. for a distance corresponding to at least the height
of one insulator.

Where the distance to live parts is generous, barriers

may be used for enclosing distribution transformers in
their compartments and also in generator pits.

0 Note:
The dr=ing below shows the necessary distances.

0 -
HEIGHT OF ONE INSULATOR

E - OPERATING VOLTAGE IN kV I
dimensions in cm r

-- -100-

Fig. 2

GRILL

ESS- "i'

0
 20

§ 637. Wire connections.

Wires used as connections between apparatus, etc. shall
be so dimensioned and fitted that neither they nor their
surfaces give rise to detrimental heating.

At the end of a wire connector individual strands shall

be soldered together unless satisfactory screwed or ter-
minal connections are used. Stranded connectors of cross-
sections above 6 mm2 shall be fitted with cable lugs un-
less satisfactory screwed or terminal connections are used.
The point of connection must not be exposed to tension or
o
torque. Bolted connections shall be locked to prevent
their working loose and shall be made in such a manner
that a permanent overall contact pressure is obtained.

§ 638. Excess voltage protection.

A reliable form of excess voltage protection shall be
0
fitted to apparatus which is exposed to excess voltages.
Such excess voltage protection must be so arranged that
it does not involve a fire risk for the surroundings.

Note:
Apparatus which is connected to an extensive overhead system
will frequently be exposed to atmospheric interference.

§ 645. Fuses.
Fuses shall provide a reliable means of interrupting the
highest short-circuit current encountered at the point
where they are installed and shall be so fitted that their
interruption cannot present a danger to their surroundings.

Fuses for transformers shall be so dimensioned that they

interrupt when a short-circuit occurs on the low-voltage
terminals of the transformer.

Heavy-duty fuses must not be continuously loaded above

their rated current.

Note:
0
The continuous overloading of heavy-duty fuses may result in
them wsing their oharaater-iet.ioe and rrent-:nterrupting
capacity.

§ 647. Fusing of apparatus, machines and transformers.

0
Apparatus, machines and transformers, etc., which may
suffer damage or cause danger to their surroundings as
a result of excess current or short-circuit shall be
protected by means of fuses or automatic switches fitted
at an appropriate point.
 21

Instrument transformers, regulators, relays, lightning

arresters, etc. are excepted from this provision.

Note:
When the ratings of fuses or relay protectors are being decided,
attention must be paid to the current surge liable to occur

0 § 648.
during switch-on in addition to the overload capacity.

Fusing of wirec and cables.

Wires and cables from switchboards, etc. with the excep-
tion of neutral conductors and phase conductors which are
always earthed, shall be protected by means of automatic

0 circuit breakers or fuses which will disconnect short-

circuit currents as rapidly as possible.

Where automatic switches are used they shall also protect

cables and wires from over-loading according to the figur-
es given i n § § 649.and 677 unless an overload protector is
fitted at or near the load end of the conductor.

Where heavy-duty fuses are used (which must not be continu-

ously loaded above their rated current), protection against
overloading shall be provided, either by an automatic
switch on the supply side of the fuse, or by control de-
vices which regular monitor the current load, unless an
overload protector is fitted at or near the load.

In apparatus forming part of a distribution system, etc.

(transformer and connection kiosks, etc.) cables or wires
of smaller cross-section may be branched from cables and
wires fused as above without the fitting of further pro-
tection, provided the cross-section of the branch is at
least one-third that of the fused cable or wire.

Wires and cables in parallel and which are permanently

connected at both ends and are of the same length may be

0 protected by a common fuse, rated for the sum of the per-

mitted loading of such wires or cables.

Note:
Tripping devices for short-circuit currents must always be
fitted at the supply end of the wire or cable concerned and

0 must be so adjusted that they will trip without fail under

the lowest available short-circuit current.

The control device for the current load may be a simple

ammeter, preferably fitted with a maximum indicator.

In the case of continuous cables it is sufficient to use an

automatic switch or a fuse at the supply end.
 22

Where cables are connected in parallel the individual cables

should if pos,rible be of the same cross-section, and attention
must be paid to the reduction factor.

§ 649. Design and loading of insulated wires and cables

Insulated wires and cables of cross-section below 25 mm2
shall be of copper. For greater cross-sections, aluminium
may also be used. The specific resistance at 20°c of the
material used shall be at most 0.017241 ohm for copper
and 0.028264 ohm for aluminium.
0
Where they are permanently ins;alled, wires and cables

o
shall be of not less than 6 mm cross-section.

Insulated wires and cables shall normally be of the strand-

ed type, although rubber-inulated lead-covered cable with
solid conductors up to 6 mm may be used, as may paper-
insulated lead-covered cable and lastic-insulated cable
with solid conductors up to 25 mm cross-section.
The insulation of wires and cables shall satisfy the test
requirements called up in the relevant Norwegian Standards.
Insulated wires and cables for voltages up to 24 kV may be
loaded, in accordance with the table below or in a c c o -
dance with existing Norwegian Standards for the loading of
power cables.
For the loading of paper insulated and plastic-insulated
underground cables, s e e § 677.
When selecting the cable cross-section attention shall be
paid to the thermal stresses occurinq during short-circuit.
Loading of insulated wires and cables in buildings with
room temperature up to 25°c shall act exceed the figures
in the following table:

M a x operalang voltage 12 kV 24 kV
0
Conductor material Cu AJ Cu Al

Conductor cross•secuJ;n_ps A A A A

10 60 46

0
mm'
16 80 60
25 105 81 97 74
35 130 100 120 92
50 160 125 150 115
70 200 155 185 140
95 245 185 220 170
120 280 215 255 195
150 320 250 290 225

I
185 370 285 325 250
240 430 335 380 295
 23

The values in the Table apply to three-conductor insulated

cables run singly on a cable bridge or wall. Cables run in
conduit, or laid on the bottom of ducts or near other cables
shall be loaded correspondinqly lower. These load values
may be determined with the aid of conversion factors using
the rules stated i n § § 457, 509 and 677.

The conversion factor for loading of cables in buildings at

0 different ambient temperatures are as follows:

Ambient temperature, 0c
5 10 15 20 25 30
Conversion factor 1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1 0.95
The reduction factors for permitted loading where a number of
cables are spaced by a distance equal to 7cm over a distance

0 greater than 4 m a r e :

Number of cables 2 3 4 5 6 7 or more

Reduction factor 0.95 0.9 0.84 0.8 0.75 0.7
Wires and cables laid in ventilated or cooled ducts may be
loaded to a higher value than is given in the Table where
they r e provided with ,devices for measuring the conductor
temperature and with indicating equipment to provide a warning
when the permitted temperature has been reached.

Special assessment of cable loads for larqe-scale c a l e instal-

lations may be made in consultation with the Electricity Inspec-
torate.
Note:
If a nwnber of cables in conduit or ducts lie within? cm of one
another the load should be reduced further than is indicated in
the Table. The foll(Jl,)ing reduction factors are recormrended as a
guide.
Number of cables 2 3 4 5 6 7 or more
Reduction factor 0.8 0.7 0.65 0.6 0.55 0.5

0 Under nhort-circuit conditinns, thermal stresses in accordance

with the following Table may be anticipated:

Thermal stress on cables due to short-circuit

in cables having copper or aluminium conductors

D Max. operating
voltage, kV
Insulating
material
Max.conducto0
temperature, C
Short-circuit
crrent
A/mm for 1 sec
Cu Al

12 Impregn.paper 200 Approx.140 90

12 Plastics (PVC 125 Approx.100 65
24 Impregn.paper 150 Approx.120 80

Attention is drawn to the Standards regarding paper-insulated

and plastic-insulated cables issued by the Norwegian Electro-
technical Committee (NEK).
 24

§ 652. Uninsuiated conductors

Uninsulated conductors may be used only in a locked room to
which only trained operators have access, or in situations
where such conductors are fitted in a completely inaccessible
position or are protected by a cover. Uninsulated conductors
which are not earthed shall be sited with a clearance of at
least 5 c m + 0.5 cm for each kV of operatinq voltaqe from one
another and from other conductive objects and from walls, cei-
lings or own protective covers if it cannot be proved by vol-
0
tage tests according to Norwegian or other similar standards
that the insulation endurance is satisfactory with less clear-
ance.

Conductors which are fixed at intervals above 1 m shall be not

less than 25 mm2 cross-section.

Uninsulated conductors of over 25 mm2 cross-section may be

loaded above the limits specified i n § 649, provided that
0
their resultant temperature cannot present a danger to their
use or to their surroundings.

Uninsulated bus bars and their attachments shall have sufficient

mechanical strength to withstand the-dynamic stresses occuring
under short-circuit fault conditions.

Metal covers shall be earthed as specified i n § 607.

Conductors with insulation which does not satisfy the require-

ments i n § 649 shall be installed in the same manner as is
specified for uninsulated conductors.

Note:
The foiiowing vaiues may be used as a guide when aeiecting the distance
bet;ween conductors andtheir ciearance frem other conductive objects,
p a r t s of buiidings andtheir own protective covera (earth). (Large
span widths with larqe dynamic s-tresses may require greater dearances.

0
Maximum Distance Distance be tween
operatmg indoors, mm .....
sel.Jiof busb
voltage. kV indoors, m m

36 75 150
72 100 250

0
12 125 300
24 180 350
- - -
36 260 400
52 360 600
72.5 470 900

123 800 1400

rrs:
170
245

-
 -------------------------...-·-·
....

25

The values in this Table do not apply to the conductors at i he po1'.nt

of connection to apparatus. (See§ 634.)
When calculating the size of bus bars andthe methods of mounting,
care must be taken to ensure that the natural frequency of oscilla-
tion of such bars does not coincide with the mains frequency or twice
the mains frequency.
For voltll(1e terta attenl.1'.on is drawn to "sor.ike norn,r.r for brytere,

0 metallkapslet høyspenningskoblings- og kontrollutstyr" (IEC publ. 298),

issued by the Norwegian Electrotechnical Corrrnittee (NEK). Tests accord-
ing to similar standards can be permitted by the Electricity Inspectorate

§ 653. Insulated wires and cables.

Insulated wires and cables which s a t i s f y § 649 and are protec-
0 ted from external detrimental influence by means of armoured
sheathing do not require to be placed at any specified dis-
tance from other cables or from parts of buildings. This
applies also to insulated cables having a metal protective
screen where such cables are laid on cable bridges and similar
and are adequately protected from mechanical damage.

Insulated w i r s and cables which are not protected as described

above shall be installed in accordance w i t h § 652 unless they
belong to the same circuit.

In rooms or parts of rooms where there may be a danger of the

wire or cables being damaqed, as in store-rooms, factory pre-
mises, workshops, etc., they shall be provided with substan-
tial protection aqainst mechanical stresses.

Jute braiding shall be removed where there is no risk of chemi-

cal attack on the armoured cladding. The escape of oil from
paper insulated cables shall be prevented.

Note:
A substantial protective interlayer must be laid between high-voltage
cables and cables carrying low-voltage or light-current in transformer
0 rooms, e t c .

§ 656. Wiring in wet and corrosive areas.

In wet and corrosive areas ( s e e § 492) wiring shall beinstal-
led in the manner prescribed for outdoor wires. If the nature

0
of the room or other circumstances render this impossible, use
shall be made of lead-covered cable whose external metal parts
shall be earthed as specified i n § 607, or of an equivalent
approved type of cable.

§ 657. Installations in rooms containing easily-ignited materials.

In rooms where easily-ignited or explosive materials exist in

considerable quantities, the use of high voltage is not per-
mitted unless the installation components in question are
particularly approved for such locations.
 26

§ 658. FLexibLe aabLes.

Flexible current-carrying cables for portable high voltage
apparatus and machines can be permitted only after special
approval by the Electricity Inspectorate.

§ 662. Proteation at arossings and adjaaent sitings.

Where medium-voltage, low-voltage or liqht-current cables
cross or are sited adjacent to high-voltage cables they must
0
be mounted and protected in a particularly secure fashion.
For minimum clearances, s e e § § 652 - 653.

Where low-voltage and high-voltage cables are run parallel

0
in the immediate vicinity of one abother, the high-voltage
cables shall be marked in an appropriate manner, see also
§ 462.
Lighting fittings in high-voltage installations shall be so
mounted that lamps can be removed without danger to the
operator.

Note:
CoLoured paint or pLates may be used for the marking of high-
voitage aabLes.
§ 663. Penetrations.

Where cables are run through walls, ceilings or floors they

shall, unless they are taken through a free opening with the
minimum spacing distances specified i n § 652, be protected
over the length of the lead-through by suitable insulating
tubes or grommets.

§ Cirauit breakers and switahgear.

o
665.

a. Circuit breakers shall be installed in the supply to all

apparatus, machines and transformers which must be capable
of being disconnected under load, and at such points in
the wiring installation as are necessary for its sub-
division for the purpose of maintenance or insulation
measurement ( s e e § 603) and this sub-division must not
be capable of being achieved by the removal of fuses.

Where enclosed switchgear is used a visible disconnection

point or isolator shall also be provided in the supply.
In an enclosed installation such visible disconnection
o
points may be replaced by suitable indicator equipment.

No isolating switch is, however, required between genera-

tors and their associated circuit-breaker.

b. Circuit-breakers intended to be operated under load shall

be capable of making and breaking under the highest likely
operating current.
-----------------··--..··-------------------------------,

27

Circuit breakers shall without fail be capable of making

the circuit, and automatic circuit breakers of both making
and breaking under the highest short-circuit current en-
countered at the point where they are fitted, unless they
are protected upstream by heavy-duty fuses having a suf-
ficient rupturing capacity. Such circuit-breakers shall
in general be so· designed that all the poles required to
make or break shall do so simultaneously.

0 Enclosed switch-gear shall be provided with a clear indi-

cation of its position ("on" or "off"). In the case of
remotely-controlled or mechanically-operated switch-gears
such indication of position shall be provided both on the
switch-gear and on the control device.

Switch-gear operation shall be so arranged that persons

0 operating it are not exposed to danger due to the expul-
sion of oil, arcing, etc. In the case of automatic switch-
gears or circuit breakers the switching operation shall be
trip-free.

c. Circuit-breakers shall be so designed that their moving

contacts are held firmly in the closed or open position
and shall be capable of withstanding short-circuit fault
currents.

Note:
Smaller transfonner sub-station installations do not require switches
if melting fuses are used which can be removed (disconnected). Com-
m:m switch-gear for a number of transformers may be used where this
does not result in inconvenience in working.
Circuit-breakers are not required between generator andtransfonner
where these items are regarded as a single unit.
Isolating switches should, if at all possible, be visible from the
point at which the enclosed switch is fitted. Where they are not
so visible, there should be either a voltage indicator or provision
for indicating the position ("0>1" or "off") of the circuit-breaker.
0 Where connection anddisconnection are effected by means of push-
buttons colour-coded for indication purposes, the disconnection
button shall be red in accordance with IEC Publications No. 54 and
No. 73. A button which may be used for a purpose other than dis-
connection shall not be coloured red.

0
 2e

g. APPARATUS AND DISTRIBUTION INSTALLATIONS

OUT-OF-DOORS

§ 671. Spacing of fixed wires.

The clearance of fixed wires from one another and from

other clearance (exceptinq their own insulator mountings)

0
or from parts of buildings, must in no circumstances be
less than 10 c m + 0.5 cm for each kV of operating vol-
tage. For wires which have insulation as specified in
§ 649 and are in addition protected from external attack
(armoured cables, etc.) no clearance is specified either
between conductors (cables) or between them and other
subjects.

Where wires or cables are permanently fixed to walls, etc.

their cross-section is governed by the provisions i n § 652. 0
For earthing s e e § § 605 - 609.
Note:

The following values may be used as·a guide in selecting the clear-
ance between conductors and between conductors and other conductive
objects, parts of buildings and the protective covers fitted to the
conductors themselves. Large span widths or heavy dynamic stresses
may involve greater clearances.

Maximum operatin Clearance out of Clearance !>ctween

voltage. kV doors, Mill sets of bus-bars
o u t of d o o r s , mm
36
7 2
12 180
21 260 500
36 360 700
52 470 I 000
72 5 580 I 300

0
123 I 000 2 200
115 I 200 2 500
170 I 450 3 000
245 2 200 4 000

Uninsulated bus-bars and their mountings must have sufficient mechani-

cal strength to withstand the dynamic stresses occuring during short-
circuit. Care must also be taken to ensure that the natural fi'equency
0
of oscillation of such bars does not coincide with the mains frequency
or twice the mains frequency.
 29

§ 674. Apparatus and equipment in the open air.

Anparatus and equipment installed in the ooen-air shall

be of such a type as not to be damaged by the stresses
encountered. Apparatus, machines and transformers shall
be fitted with switches as prescribed i n § 665 and shall
be protected as prescribed i n § 647.

0 Note:
The strec3ec encountered ir. intended tn include climatic
and corrosion stresses.

§ 675. Protection, clearance distance and shielding.

0 Where apparatus is installed without an enclosure or fence,

the distance from ground level to unorotected live parts
shall be at least 5 m for operating voltages up to 24 kV,
and in accordance with the Table below for higher voltages.
The distance from the ground to the lowest parts of insu-
lators for apparatus and other installation components
shall be at least 4.5 m. If this distance is less,the in-
stallation must be enclosed in a robust wire-mesh fence at
least 2.5 m i n height. The shortest distance from such a
fence to live components shall not be less than 2.5 m for
voltages up to 24 kV, and in accordance with the Table below
for higher voltages.

Where apparatus is enclosed in a fence, sufficient space

shall be provided for operation, inspection and transport
to be effected without obstruction or danger. The distance
from ground level to live parts above transport and service
ways shall be at least 4.5 m. The distance from ground
level to live parts shall be at least 3 m for operating
voltages up to 24 kV, and in accordance with the Table below
for higher voltages. The distance from ground level to the
underside of insulators for apparatus and other installation
components shall be at least 2.5 m. Where it is impossible

0 to avoid using lesser distance, the installation component

concerned shall be rendered inaccessible in a reliable manner.
For other distances see Table below.

--

0
Maximum opE'raling
voltage (errecuve li 36 52 72.5 123 145 170 245· 300 420
votrage ), kV

Height above ground

wu.hout fence, m A
50 5.1 5.2 5.4 5.7 6.8 6.0 6.6 7.0 7.8

Ht.'1gh.t aLove ground

30 31 3.2 34 3.7 3.8 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.8
with fence, m E

Distance from
2.5 26 2.7 2.9 3.2 3.3 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.3
fence, m B
 30

Note:

A robust wire-mesh fenae aan be aonstruated in aaaordanae with

Civil Defenae speaifiaations, using hot-gaZvan?'.zed wire netting
about 2 m i n height as the Lower part of the fenae with 3 - 4
strands of barbed wire on the top to give an overaZZ height of 2.5 m.
The ,;nderside of insuZnto:-s for æmaratus and other in,qtaZZation

0
conponentie means the loueet:ur.earthP.d part of such insulators.

0
I
I

Fig. 3 For Distance-Band B a n d E, see Table

following § 726.

§ 677. Loading of aabZes.

I
Paper-insulated or plastic-insulated underground cables
may be loaded according to existing Norwegian Standards
for the loading of power cables or according to the table
be Lov- ,

M a x . open,tinw:voltaae 12 kV 24 kV

Conductor material Cu Al Cu Al

Cross Amps A A A A
section
mm2 10 70 55
16 94 73

0
25 120 95 115 87
35 150 115 135 105
50 185 140 170 130
70 225 175 205 160
95 270 206 245 190
120 305 235 280 220
150 235 270 315 245
390 300 350 275

0
185
240 445 350 405 315
300 506 400
400 580

The load values shown in the Table assume an earth circuit

havina r.1 'loecific thermal re5:-ai-c--,-of 100°c cM/V, while it
is assumed that the conductors attain an excess temoerature
of so0c for operating voltages of up to 12 kV and of 4o0c
 31

for operating voltages of up to 24 kV (i.e. a maximum

conductor temperature of 65 and ss0c respectively with
an ambient temperature of 15°c). Where the ambient
temperature is lower than 1s0c underground cables may
be loaded to a correspondingly higher value. Where the
entire cable or any part of it is exposed to a higher
ambient temperature the cable shall be loaded to a corres-

0
pondingly lower value. The permitted load may be determined
with the aid of the Loading Table together with a conversion
factor from the Table below.

Ambient temperature, °C 5 JO 15 20 25 30

Conversion factor I 1 1.05 1.0 0.95 0.9 0.85

0 The load values shown in the Loading Table assume a single

cable having three conductors.
Where there are several such cables side by side the load
values shall be reduced. The oermitted load may then be
determined with the aid of the· Table below.

R e d u c t i o n factor for perrnitted load w h e r e several cables occupy the aame trench
for a distance greater than 4 m

Nu mhcr of cables 2 3 5 6 7 or more

R e u u c u o u Iact or
0.85 0.8 0.75 0.7 0.65 0.6
w i t h 7 cm !-.µ.tein.i

H1·cluct1un fal'Lor
w i t h In;., ! h a n 0.8 0.7 0.65 0.6 0.55 0.5
7 cm spacmg
- - - -
The maximum load values obtained apply to underground
cables. Cables lying in conduit or unventilated ducts
for distances greater than 4 m shall be loaded to a
maximum of 80% of the current shown in the Table.

0 Note:
Example. 50 m1..2cu 10 kV
Ambient temperature 25°c
5 cables in unventilated duct.
Total load: 185 • 0.9 • 0.7 • 0.8 93 A.

0 Attention is drawn to the Standards relating to paper-insulated

and plastic-insulated cables issued by the Norwegian Co"11nitteR
(NPK).

§ 678. Proection and marking of underground cables.

Underground cables shall be provided with a form of
protection appropriate to the circumstances. Cables
having an insulating protective sheath shall either be
 32

armoured or have a metal protective sheath. Such a sheath

shall have a conductivity and be of a cross-section in
accordance with the requirements o f § 608, section one.
Cables having a protective sheath shall be armoured unless
the sheath provides sufficient protection without armouring.

Underground cables shall be laid at a depth of at least 70 cm

and be reasonably protected aqainst damage caused by digging.

In special cases the Electricity Inspectorate may permit

depths of less than 70 cm for cables laid in trenches in
0
rocky ground in less heavily populated areas. The trench
shall in such cases be covered with larqe slabs or similar
which cannot be easily removed.

Where underground cables are brouqht above ground they shall

be protected by angle-iron or similar. 0
Underground cables must be marked so as to be clearly dis-
tinguishable from low-voltage cables. Such marking may be
effected by means of rings of a strong and durable material
attached to the outside of the cable at intervals of about
1 m such that they will not readily move or become loose.
Cables which are laid in the same trench or otherwise close
to one another must each be numbered in order to prevent
confusion.

The location of the cables shall be indicated on maps etc.

Note:
To avoid excessive heating due to solar radiation, black cables
or protective iron placed over cables should be painted with a
light-coloured paint or varnish.
Attention is drawn to the Standards governing paper-insulated
and plastic-insulated cables issued by NEK.

I
As reasonable protection to underground cables against damage
due to, e.g. digging; brickwork, concrete slabs, plastic sheets
or impregnated wooden boards may be used. Plastic sheets and
impregnated wooden boards are required to be constructed and
0
tested according to provisions published by NVE. A test report
must be supplied to NVE on request.

§ 679. Crossing and adjacent siting of underground cables.

Where two or more underground high-voltage cables cross or
0
occupy adjacent positions, the distance between them shall
be not less than 0.5 m. The same applies to the adjacent
siting or crossing of high-voltage cables and medium-
voltage, low-voltage or light-current cables. It does not,
however, apply to low-voltage cables and light-current
cables which control the operation of a hiqh-voltage instal-
lation.
 33

Where the cable installation consists of two or more

single-core cables, the cables may be laid closer together
than specified above.

The distance may also be reduced if a mechanically robust

protection consisting of brickwork, concrete slabs or
similar is laid between and over the cables.

0 Where a crossing cannot be avoided, the cables shall be

protected at the point of crossing by means of a solid
protective inter-layer of brickwork, concrete slabs or
similar.

Where cables are laid parallel for any considerable distance,

care must be taken to prevent a short-circuit from inducing

0
dangerous voltages in other cables. •

Note:
To reduce additional losses in lead sheathing and al"l710unng it
may prove advantageous to lay single-core cables closer together,
even though a short-c.ircuit in one cable could give rise to
damage to ad,iacent cables.
The rule should be that light-current cables occupy the uppermost
position where conditions are suitable for this. This applies in
p,irt?°cuZar to light-current cables used by the Telegraph Office
and State Railways.
As "a similar reasonable protection" plastic sheets or impregnated
wooden boards constructed and tested according to provisions
worked out by NVE may be used. A test report must be supplied
on request.
It is recommended that a red plastic strip be laid over underground
cables in order to mark the trench.

§ 680. Crossing and adjacent siting of submarine cables.

0 Where high-volrage submarine cables occupy adjacent posi-

tions a sufficient distance shall be orovided between them
to facilitate lavinq, repair and raisinq. The same
aoplies to the adjacent siting of high-voltage cables with
medium-voltage, low-voltage or light-current cables.
Crossings shall normally be avoided.

0 Note:

So far as reliable functioning under norn,al operating conditions

is concerned, submanne cables may very well be laid close to one
another and for that matter cross one another. The reason, how-
ever, for advising against crossings and requinng a certain
spacing between the cables is that it should be possible to raise
a cable, e.g. for repair, without damaging it or other cables in
the vicinity and that cables must not be confused during raising.
A confusion between cables, particularly when heavy-current cables
 34

are involved, may have fatal consequences during r,:,pair work.

The spacing to ba provided between cables thus depends on
circumstances and on the room available for mano,:,uvring a cable-
boat or barge. If the cable is short and the depth small,
comparatively little spacing will be needed between ad,iacent
cables, but where longer cables and greaer epths are involved
the spacing must be· greater.
As a guide, the following spacing should be adopted:

Below 500 m length and up to 100 m depth: at least 25 m spacing

0
500-2000 m length and up to 200 m depth: at least 50 m spacing
Above 2000 m length and up to 200 m depth: 100-200 m spacing
If a new installation is placed in close proximity to an existing
installation, in each individual case the matter must be put
befre the owner of that existing installation so that there may
be agreement upon its layout.
0
The Telegraph Office maintains that such consultation is nol"fTIQlly
to be regarded as unnecessa1•y, provided that no crossing takes
place and the following spacings between the cables can be provided:
m
Below 500 m length and up to 100 depth: at least 100 m spacing
500-2000 m length and up to 200 m depth: at least 200 m spacing
Above 2000 m length and up to 500 m depth: at least 500 m spacing

Where the crossing of submc.rine cables is concerned, this must take

place only after agreement between the interested parties. This is
a field in which not only technical, but also legal problems are
encountered. It may, for example, be supposed that a fault develops
in the lower cable, requiring the removal of the upper cable before
repairs can be made. The rule is that anyone h o , while repairing
his own cable, causes a fault in another cable must irrrnediately take
steps to have the damaged cable repaired, even though this may delay
the repair of his own cable. The repair costs must also be borne
by the person causing the damage. See also§ lJ.

0
 35

h. OVERHEAD LINES

706. Overhead line poles.

Overhead line poles may be made from impregnated wood, steel,

aluminium, reinforced concrete or equivalent materials.

0 Wood poles which are to be impregnated shall be of pine and

shall also be well seasoned.

Impregnation must be carried out in an approved manner such

that the outer layer outside the heartwood is completely
saturated with the preserving agent. The poles shall bear
a clear and durable mark to identify the manufacturer and

0 year in which they werw impregnated.

Steel for poles and fittings shall be protected against rust.

Poles are divided into three types:

1. Supporting poles, which are used where other types of

poles are not specified.

2. Anchoring poles, which are used as reference ooints in

a line and at crossings in accordance with §§.716 and
719.

3. Terminal poles, which are used at terminal points.

The following safety factors must be used in the calculations

for poles, traverses and insulator pins:

3.5 for impregnated pine

2.5 for steel
3.0 for reinforced concrete.

For insulators and accessories s e e § 714.

0 The dimensions of poles and accessories shall be calculated

for each of the following types of load conditions:

1. Vertical loads resulting from the weight of the poles

and lines with accessories, plus 40% of the additional
load referred to i n § 707 (2).

0
2. Horizontal load resulting from the wind pressure on the
poles, lines and accessories acting at right angles to
the line, and also (where appropriate) angular or end ten-
sion in the lines at minus 25°c without additional load.
In the case of masts situated at an angle to the line this
wind pressure is considered to act in the same direction
as the resultant line tension. The weight of the pole
and the lines with accessories is regarded as a vertical
load.
 36

3. For poles situated at an angle in the line or for ter-

minal poles where special load conditions are present,
calculations shall be based on a tension in the current
carrying wires of 40% of their breaking load, and a ten-
sion in the earth wire at minus 25°c, plus an additional
assumed load as prescribed i n § 707 (1), but not less
than 25% of the earth wire's breaking load and the wind
load on the pole in the worst direction. For the verti-
cal loads the calculation shall be based on the weight
of the pole and wires with accessories, together with an
additional assumed load on all the wires of 40% of the
0
additional load prescribed i n § 707 (2).

4. In the case of anchoring poles and terminal poles, where

special load conditions are present, calculation shall in
addition be based on the one-sided breakage of up to two-
thirds of the current-carrying wires and a tension in the
remaining wires of 40% of their breaking load and the
0
wind pressure on the mast in the worst direction. If the
number of current-carrying wires exceeds 6, breakage of
only one-third of the excess lines shall be taken into
account. The calculation shall assume a tension in the
earth line as specified in (3) above. For the vertical
load, calculation shall be based on the weight of the
poles and unbroken lines with accessories, together with
an assumed additional load on all the unbroken lines of
40% of the additional load prescribed i n § 707 (2).

Where the conductors are made of steel rope or steel wire

of up to 20 mm2 cross-section and have a tensile strength
above 60 kp/mm2, it is permissible for the line poles to
be dimensioned as though the tensile strength of the line
was 60 kp/mm2, provided that the line is tensioned and the
span width restricted in the manner required for a line of
that type.

Calculation shall be based on a wind pressure of at least

125 kp per m2 for a fl't surface, 62.5 kp/m2 for wires and
insulators and 50 kp/m for round poles. In situations
where experience shows that higher wind pressures are en-
countered, these must be used in calculation. For lattice
poles the wind presure shall be calculated on the basis of
0
1.5 times the lateral surface-of one side. For A-shaped
poles the wind pressure on the mast when v i e e d from the
fromt is canculated on the basis of 1.5 times that on one
upright.

Traverses, 5 mm insulators and other accessories also pre-

sent a surface to the wind, and this must be included in
the calculation.
0
For the wind pressure transmitted from wires to mast, calcu-
lation may be based in the wind pressure on all the wires
when fre from ice and snow, using half the span width on
either side of the pole.

Line poles may be installed at a spacing of up to 300 m.

Where longer spans are desired, an application for this,
 37

together with duplicate copies of drawings and calculations,

must be forwarded to NVE through the Electricity Inspecto-
rate.

Where materials of normal good quality are used, the

following stresses are.permitted:
Permitted 1trea.
Material Safety q/cm1

0
factor
Bending: Tenaion Preaure

Impregnated wood 3.5 160 200 86

Steet 25 I 500 1.600 I 500
Reinforced concrete (Steet 3.0 I 200 - -
(Concrete 3.0 60 - -

0
For nails the permitted dlear strNI ia . I 200 kp/cm1
For bolt.I and screws the permitted ahear l t r e M ia 1 0 0 0 kp/cm1
T h e permitted pressure on Lhe wall• of nail-holee ia 2 800·kp/cm1
The permitted pres.sure on the wall&of bolt-holn ia 2 200 kp/cm1
Foundation bolts may be subjected t.o • compreaion/tenaion alrea of 1 200 kp/cm1

The condition upon which these stresses may be applied

is that the yeld point of the material shall not be lower
than 50% of the tensile strength.
A shear stress of 15 kp/cm2 is permitted for wooden noles.
The pressure at right-aPgles to the fibres must not exceed
25 kp/cm2 for wood.
In the case of reinforced concrete poles the concrete used
shall have a compression strength of at least 180 kp/cm2
after 28 days. If a concrete having a higher comression
strength is used, as indicated by preliminary testing of
the material, or the reinforcing steel is of better quality
than originally calculated, higher stresses may be accepted,
such stresses being adapted to the strength properties of
the material, but the calculated safety factor should not
be less than 3. Higher stresses than 90 kp/cm2 are not,
however, permitted for concrete, while 1 800 kp/cm2 is the
permitted maximum for reinforcing steel.
0 Poles shall be provided with foundations such that
their stability meets the requirements of the afore-
mentioned load conditions. Account shall be taken of
possible damage caused by the soil. The depth to which
the foundations are dug shall be sufficient to ensure that
they are not affected by frost and shall not normally be

0 less than 1.5 m.

A-shaped poles shall be fitted with a cross-beam at the

lower end or shall be anchored in the earth by other
equally efficient method.

Where wooden poles are erected on rocky ground their stays,

etc. shall be attached to them by means of hot-galvanized
screws or bolts. Rock-bolts required to withstand tension
shall be of the solit-and-wedge type. Foot-bolts which are
not subjected to tension may be attached by means of hot-
galvanized cramps or collars.
 38

Stays, etc. which form a part of the mechanical strength

of the structure shall be made from steel rope not less
than 25 mm2 in cross-section. The safety factor with
regard to breakage shall be at least 3.

Clamps and fastening devices shall be made from hot-

galvanized steel and shall be dimensioned and constructed
to provide a safety factor of at least 3.

In the case of masts fitted with rungs or ladders which

are accessible to unauthorized persons the lowest rung
shall be situated not less than 2.5 m above ground level.
0
Poles in high-voltage lines shall be orovided with durable
numbered warning plates bearing cleariy Jegible and
consecutive numbers.

(Regarding warning plates s e e § 602) 0

Note:

A wind pressure of 125 kp/m2 aorresponds to a wind veloaity of

about 30 m/sea. Where greater wind foraes are enaountered,
aalaulation must take into aaaount wind pressures aorres-
pondingly greater than 125 kp/m2 for a flat surface.
In the low land in the Østland (eastern part of Noruay)the t>ind
veloaity may reaah 32 m/sea., while in Vestland (western) distriats
it may reaah 50 m/sea., as also in the high mountains. In northern
Noruay the veloaity may attain 60 m/sea.
Wooden-masted lines up to 24 kV and lines of small aross-seation
may be designed in aaaordanae with the 'Standards for Wooden-mast
Lines up to 20 kV' issued by the Noruegian Eleatr'iaity Works Assoaia-
tion, attention being paid to the restr'iations governing the appliaa-
tion of those Standards.
Attention is drawn to the 'Noruegian Standards for the Meahaniaal
Dimensioning and Design of Overhead Eleatr'ia Lines, 1965', whiah
are approved for NVE for use until jl,rther notiae alongside the

0
provisions of these Regulations.

§ 707. Material, aross-seation, span length and stressing of lines.

The conductor material used for lines may be copper, alumi-
nium, hot-galvanized steel, steel-aluminium, bronze or

0
another equivalent material.
The span length must not exceed the following limits:

For lines having a breaking load of 640 kp llO m

For lines having a breaking load of 1 000 kp 150 m
For lines having a breaking load of 1 400 ko 200 m
For lines having a breaking load of 2 000 kp 250 m
For lines having a breaking load of 2 400 kr, 300 m

Intermediate values m y bø determined by interpolation.

 39

Hot-galvanized steel wire conductors below 16 mrn2 may not

be used.

The above limits also apply to continuous earth wires, see

§ 608.
Lines must be installed in such a manner that the stress
does not exceed:

0 1. 50% of their tensile strength at minus 25°c plus an

assumed additional load acting vertically of at least
200 + 50 d grammes per metre.

2. 90% of their tensile strength at o0c olus an assumed

additional load acting vertically of at least 900 +
225 d grammes per metre.

0 d = the diameter of the line in mm. In the case of insu-

lated wires calculation is based on external diameter.

Where experience shows that greater additional loads than

indicated above are encountered, these must be used in cal-
culation.

The distance between conductors in free span must be so

selected that they cannot strike one another during the
oscillations which may occur under the action of wind or
when accumulated snow falls from them.

Conductors must be attached to insulators in such a manner

that there is no danger of electrolytic action where dif-
ferent types of metal are used. Hot-galvanized steel clamps
may, however, be used provided that the conductors are not
exposed to chemical action.

Conductors must in general not be tensioned more heavily

than required to avoid dangerous vibrations. Where danger-
ous vibrations occur, dampers must be installed.

Line-joints in free span shall have a breaking load equal to

0
at least 90% that of the conductor.

Regarding crossing and adjacent siting, s e e § § 715 - 726.

§ 708. Current Load and fusing of Lines.

Outdoor lines may be loaded above the limit soecified in

0 § 652 and fused to a correspondingly higher value provided

that the temperature cannot present a danger to operation
or to the surroundings.
 40

§ 709. A r r a n g e m e n t s f o r o p e r a t i o n and c o n n e c t i o n .
Outdoor live lines shall be capable of being disconnected
by means of multi-pole switches fitted at those points in
the network where it is necessary to sub-divide for the
purpose of maintenance and similar work or for insulation
measurements.

Outdoor apparatus, machines and transformers shall be fitted

with switches as prescribed i n § 665 and shall be protected
as prescribed i n § 647. In the case of fuses fitted on masts
0
for the protection of transformers, cables, overhead lines,
etc., fuses which are not serviced from ground level shall
be c a p a l e of being disconnected by means of multi-pole
switches so that they can be serviced in the non-live condi-

0
tion.

Operating devices for outdoor switch-gears shall, where they

are accessible to unauthorized persons, be capable of being
locked in both the "on" and "off" positions.

Switching and isolating arrangements fitted on poles shall

be constructed in such a way that operation can preferably
be made from ground level. In cases where this is not prac-
ticable a spacious and easily-accessible operatina platform
shall be provided which has a råiling and protective barrier.
The horizontal distance between such barriers to parts carry-
ing a high voltage shall be at least 0.5 m up to a height of
2 m above the platform. The distance from the platform to
parts carrying high voltage above the platform shall be at
least 2.5 m.

Reinforced suspension shall be used on poles which carry

transformers, apparatus, fuses etc., and also on adjacent
poles. Joints in extensions are permitted according to
§ 721. These requirements do not apply to poles on which
only live switches (line dividers) are mounted.

In the case of masts fitted with rungs or ladders which are

accessible to unauthorized persons the lowest rung shall be
at least 2.5 m above ground level.
0
Note:
Where operating handl.ee , e t c . for switch-gears are concerned, e x t r a
care must be exercised w i t h regard to the s a f e t y of the operator:
Where such handles are earthed, an insul..ated operating platform
ehould be bui.l.t: if conditions ari. particul..arl..y d i f f i c u l t . With
LJOoden-pol..e l.inee having no continuous earth l ine the operatinq
handle ehould not be earthed, but ehould be ineulated from the
0
switch by means of insul..ators in the control..-rods. An equipoten-
trial: connection should be run from the operating handle to a coi.l:
of cable buried in the ground below the operating position.
For designs of operating pl..atforms, see appropriate regulations
issued by Directorate of Labour Inspection.
 41
§ 710. Height of lines above ground.
Lines which are not fully protected shall, at a temperature
o f + 40°c, be situated at a vertical distance of at least
6 m from the ground for operating voltages up to 72.5 kV,
however, s e e § 631. The lateral distance from a conductor to
the nearest point on the ground may, however, be not less
than 5 m for voltages of up to 72.5 kV. When swung out-
wards at 45°, a conductor must not come within 3 m of the
ground for voltages of up to 72.5 kV.

Where experience indicates that large amounts of snow or

0
heavy icing will be encountered, care shall be taken to
ensure that conductors cannot come within 4 m of the surface
of the snow or, where appropriate, of the ground, for
voltages of up to 72.5 kV.

With voltages above 72.5 kV the distances shall not be less

than shown in the Table below.

0
Maximum operating voltagt-
72.5 123 145 170 245 300 420
(effective value), kV

e i g h t above ground,
6.0 6.5 6.7 7.0 7.7 8.3 9.6

I
m metres

Distance from eround,

(C)

5.0 5.5 5.7 6.0 6.7 7.3 8.5

in metres (D)

Dist.ance from ground

w h e n swune o u t at 4 5 ° , (R) 3.0 3.5 3.7 4.0 4.7 5.3 6.5
m metres

Height above snow, in metres 4.0 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.9 6.2 5.8

A continuous earth wire shall in unfavourable circumstances

be situated at a free height above the ground of at least
4 m. Where depths of snow greater than l m a r e anticipated,
the height of the earth line above the ground shall be
increased correspondingly.

0 Note:

Account must be taken of the sag which may be encountered when

one span is loaded with snow or ice whilst the adjacent spans
remain clear. The size of the snow or ice burden must be
determined on the basis of local conditions.

0 § 711. Clearing of woods.

Lines shall be situated at a safe distance from trees and

bushes.
 42

0
For distances C, 0 and A, .. Table in Para. 710

0
Note:
Regarding minimwn distances, see table i n § 710.
§ 712. Several circuits on common poles.
Several sets of lines (circuits) may be carried on a common
line of poles provided that they belong to the same supply
company and one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
1. The maximum voltage is not above 72.5 kV and the minimum
voltage not below 4 kV.
2. The maximum voltage is not above 170 kV and the minimum
voltage not below 40 kV.
3. Each line (circuit) carries the same voltage.

The distance between each line (circuiti shall be so selected

that they cannot come within a dangerous distance of one another.

Light-current, low-voltage or medium-voltage lines and cables

used solely for operating a high-voltage installation are per-
mitted to be run on a common set of poles with high voltage
lines. The high-voltage lines shall occupy the upper-most
position and the distance between the lines shall be at least
0
2 m. The distance from the continuous earth conductor shall
be at least 1 m. In the case of a span length greater than
50 m, the distance apart must be increased so that each line,
including the continuous earth line, cannot attain in the most
unfavourable circumstances, a dangerous proximity to each other.a
All lines (circuits) shall be provided with excess voltages pro-
tection. The voltage protection shall, if possible, have its
own earth electrode.

Regarding the tensioning, stresses etc. of the light-current,

low-voltage or medium-voltage lines and cables, the provisions
o f § 707 are in force to the extent these may be applicable.
 43

The poles shall be dimensioned in accordance with the pro-

vision i n § 706 taking into account the additional stresses
due to the additional number of wires. The free height above
the ground for the light-current lines and cables shall be at
least 4 m. The method of attachment to the pole shall not
cause deterioration of the insulation of the conductors, or
of the protection _against corrosion on the support wire.

0 Apparatus which is connected to light-current wires or cables

shall be fused in a satisfactory way, s e e § 337. Any support
wire used shall be earthed at both ends.
I Note:
Reqardinq "in the most unfavourable airaumstances", see the note
of § 715.
§ 713. Carrier-frequency communication.
The use on high voltage lines of carrier-frequency communica-
tion for telephony, measurement, control and signalling is
permitted on condition that the equipment connected is used
exclusively for the gperation of the high-voltage installa-
tion. The use of such equipment must not impede other
carrier-frequency communications, such as broadcasting, radio
communications, security services for air traffic, sea traffic,
etc. The choice of frequency shall be approved by the Tele-
graph Office.

Where carrier-frequency communication is carried on high-

voltage lines special safety precautions shall be taken at
the junction between the high-voltage and the light-current
installations. The carrier-frequency equipment should be
connected via capacitors. Choke coils shall be incorporated
in the high-voltage lines. Both capacitors and coils shall
be of the high-voltage type. The connection from the capa-
citors should be through a fuse and filter unit (see Fig. 6).
The owner of the high-voltage installation may also permit
carrier-frequency communication for other purposes, following

0
agreement with the Telegraph Office and with the approval of
the Electricity Inspectorate.

Note:
Where the carrier-frequency communication on a high-voltage line
ends at a transformer at the end of the line, the transformer win,
in the majority of cases, act as a choke coil, so that special choke
0 coils need not be incorporated.
The fuse and filter circuit may be as shown in the shetch below.
Carrier-frequency communication used for other purposes may, for
instance, refer to broadcasting and telephone corrmunication to
broadcasting stations or booster stations for radio lines.

\
 44

H,gtt.-volt.,,ge Choke coil

J..Capacito,

7
: Lightning conductor

i Dosch- coil

I
I Short-circuit device
I Current fuse
0
2A
I

: Voltage futet
I
_J
0

I
,11---1
I !I Equipmont
I JIIMllr' I
I I
_J
Fig. 6

§ 714. Insulators with accessories. 0

Overhead lines shall be insulated in accordance with
approved standards. In addition, insulators shall satisfy
the IEC Standards.

1. Post Insulators.
Post insulators shall have a mechanical breaking load 0
equal to at least three times the load which they may
be required to support under the load conditions speci-
fied i n § 706.

Insulators on anchoring poles and terminal poles shall,

however, have a breaking load equal to only 1.2 times
that of the line.
 45

2. Suspension Insulators.
Suspension insulators shall have an electro-mechanical
breaking load equal to at least four times the load
which they may be required to support under the load
conditions specified i n § 706.

Insulators on anchoring poles and terminal poles shall,

however, have an electro-mechanical breaking load equal
to only 1.6 times that of the line.
0 Where insulators having a number of parallel chains are
used the individual chains must be loaded equally.

3. Pin Insulators.
The mechanical loading of pin insulators is governed by

0
the same provisions as apply to hanging insulators.

4. Accessories for Post Insulators.

Insulator pins shall be capable of withstanding all loads
encountered with a safety factor of 2.5, s e e § 706. Steel
pins shall be hot-galvanized. Lashing wire and holders
must be constructed from materials possessing adequate
mechanical strength, which do not corrode nor cause elec-
trolytic activity in combination with the conductor. Hot-
galvanized lashing wire and steel holders may be used
provided that the conductors are not exposed to chemical
stress, as for example in a factory district.

The attachment of conductors to insulators on supporting

poles shall be sufficiently secure to be capable of with-
standing the anticipated loads. The attachment of con-
ductors to insulators on anchoring and terminal poles
shall be capable of withstanding at least 90% of the
breaking load of the conductor.

On poles situated at angles to the line, conductors must

be fixed in such a manner that the lashing is not subject-
ed to tension.

0 5. Accessories for Suspension Insulators.

The method used for suspending insulators on their supports
must be such that they can support all loads encountered
with a safety factor of 3, s e e § 706.

The method used for suspending insulators on anchoring

D
and terminal poles shall be such that a load corresponding
to at least 90% of the breaking load of the conductor can
be withstood without any noticeable deformation. Conduc-
tor clamps just be capable of holding the conductor in
position with a force equal to at least 90% of its break-
ing load.

Steel components shall be hot-galvanized.

 46

Insulators and conductor clamps shall be of such design

that radio interference is avoided as far as possible.

Note:
The electro-mechanical breaking load for an insulator having n
chains can be equated t o n times the electro-mechanical breaking
load of an individual chain. After the breakage of one chain
the load shall be distributed e1uaZly among the remaining chains.
Lashing must be carried out with care, since carelessness in this
operation may lead to radio interference. The use of top clamps
0
in place of lashing reduces radio noise and as a rule provides a
greater operational reliability.
Approved standards for the time being are"Norwegian Standards for
the Insulation of Overhead Lines, 1962."
0
§ 715. Crossing of high-voltage lines.
Where high-voltage lines cross one another, the lines
carrying the highest voltage shall as a rule occupy the
uppermost position. One of the following safety procedures
shall be adopted:

1. Reinforced suspension of the uppermost set of lines in

accordance w i t h § 721, together with a shortened span.
The uppermost set of lines shall, at the point of crossing,
consist of multi care cable having a breaking load of
at least 950 kp for each line.

The length of the crossing span must not exceed the

following limits:

For lines having a breaking load of 950 kp 50 m

For lines having a breaking load of 1 400 kp 70 m
For lines having a breaking load of 2 000 kp 100 m
For lines having a breaking load of 2 800 kp 140 m
For lines having a breaking load of 3 800 kp 180 m
For
For
For
lines
lines
lines
having
having
having
a
a
a
breaking
breaking
breaking
load
load
load
of
of
of
4
6
6
800
000
400
kp
kp
kp
230
280
300
m
m
m
0
Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation.
These limits also apply to continuous earth wires, see
§ 608.
The vertical distance between the two lines or between
the uppermost conductors and the earth wire shall, even 0
in the most unfavourable circumstances, be not less than
2 m for voltages of up to 72.5 kV. For higher voltages
this distance shall not be less than is shown in the
Table belo;"'.

Regarding masts for the crossing span, s e e § 706.

Crossing masts need not be designed as anchoring masts
 47

where the conductors used in the crossing span have the

same breaking load as in the remaining spans. Where
anchoring poles are not used, the adjacent spans may
not be more than twice as long as the crossing span
for conductors having a breaking load of up to 2 000 kp.
Where conductors having a breaking strain of less than
950 kp are u e d for branch lines, the anchoring poles
may be designed for the smaller cross-section of con-

0 ductor when the span width of the crossing is reduced to

35 m for a conductor with a breaking strain of 640 kp,
and pro rata.

Crossing of a common pole is permitted. If such a cros-

sing is undertaken, reinforced suspension must be used
for the uppermost line both on the crossing pole and on

0 adjacent poles. The spans between the common pole and

the adjacent poles are governed by the provisions stated
above with regard to the crossing span.

Where circumstances necessitate the use of a crossing

span longer than 300 m a n application must be forwarded
to NVE through the Electricity Inspectorate, together
with two copies of drawings and calculations.

2. Earthed protective nets or earthed guard wires in accor-

dance w i t h § 721 with connection to a continuous earthed
conductor where such is used.

3. Underground cable for one line.

Minimum distance between c r o s s in rr 1 """'

Maximum operaung voltage I 72.5 123 145 170 246 300 420
{effectrve value) up Lo kV I
Detance,
--
1n metres
I 2.0 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.8

0 Note:
The provision in the above Paragraph regaI'ding the mtnunwn dis-
tance between the two lines in the crossing span even in the
most unfavourable circumstances requires that this distance be
checked under the follmøing mechanical load conditions:

0 a) 40°c unthout:additional load.

b) OOC uJith the uppermost conductors subjected to additional
mechanical load in accordance uJith § 707 (2) while the lower
conductors remain uJithout load.
c) o0c and 50% of the additional mechanical load specified in
§ 707 (2) in the crossing span while the uppermost span and
lower conductors are uJithout load.
d) Minus 25°c uJithout additional mechanical load.

Attention is also drawn to the standards for overhead Lines

issued by NEK.
 48

To aonstPUat a arossing in aaaordanae o>ith (3) above by inserting

a s h o r t length of aable into an essentially infinitely long line
may result in aaaidents during operation inasmuah as the cabl.e
LJiU be heavily s t r e s s e d by atmosphel'ia over-voltages. A cabl-e
inserted in this manner should where appropriate be proteated by
means of lightning aonduators or surge divertors fitted at either
end.

§ 716. Crossing of other lines. 0

Where high-voltage lines cross medium-voltage, low-voltage
and light-current lines, the high-voltage lines shall
always occupy the uppermost position.

The method of crossing and the safety precautions must be

in accordance with the relevant sub-clause 1 to 4 below: 0
1. Crossing a free span.

Suspension of lines.

The high-voltage lines shall be orovided with reinforced

suspension, s e e § 721.

Breaking load and length.

The high-voltage lines and continuous earth wires shall

in the crossinq span consist of stranded wire having a
breaking load of at least 950 kp.

The length of a crossing span must not exceed the

following limits:

For lines having a breaking load of 950 kp 50 m

For lines having a breakinq load of 1 400 kn 70 m
For lines having a breaking load of 2 000 kp 100 m
For lines having a breaking load of 2 800 kp 140 m
For lines having a breaking load of 3 800 kp 180 m
For
For
For
lines
lines
lines
having
having
having
a
a
a
breaking
breaking
breaking
load
load
load
of
of
of
4
6
6
800
000
400
kP
kp
kp
230
280
300
m
m
m
0
Intermediate values can be obtained by interpolation. These
limits also apply to continuous earth wires, see § 608.

0
Where circumstances require the use of a crossing span
longer than 300 m a n application together with two copies
of drawings and calculations, shall be forwarded through
the Electricity Inspectorate to the NVE.

Where experience shows that lines may be subject to greater

mechanical loads than are shown i n § 707, these loads must
be taken into c c o u n t when selecting span widths or breaking
loads.
 49

Crossing poies. Tensioning.

Anchoring poles shall be used on each side of a crossing
span, s e e § 706. The anchoring pole may be replaced by a
fireproof transformer house or similar.

Where there are technical advantages in using greater dis-

tances between the anchoring poles in a crossing than are
specified in the limits above, it is permissible to insert

0 up to 4 supporting poles between the anchoring poles. The

spans thus obtained must in each case not be longer than
specified in the above limits. Where appropriate, rein-
forced suspension shall be used on such inserted supporting
poles, and poles at angles to the line must be avoided as
far as possible.

0
Where lines having a breaking load of less than 950 kp are
used for branch lines, the anchoring poles may be designed
for the smaller breaking load when the span length at the
crossing is reduced to 35 m, for a line with a breaking
load of 640 kp, and pro rata.

For high-voltage lines which cross medium-voltage, low-

voltage or local light-current lines, each of the crossing
poles may, where the crossing span length does not exceed
35 m, be calculated for a tension in the line of 20% of
the value prescribed for anchoring masts i n § 706.

The tensioning of the high-voltage condctors must be under-

taken in such a manner that the tension to which they are
subjected in the crossing span during the process does not
exceed the tension in the lines in the adjacent spans.

Verticai distance. Safety wires.

The vertical distance between to lines, or to a continuous
earth wire shall be as specified i n § 715.

Galvanized steel or copper safety wires of cross-section not

less than 16 mm2 shall be fitted between the systems and
parallel to the high-voltage lines. This does not, however,

0 apply where the vertical distance down from the high-voltage

lines to the light-current line (or the lowest i n e ) , in the
most unfavourable circumstances, is at least 4 m. At no
time shall the tension in the conductors of the lowest line.

Distance from the crossing poie to Light-current Lines.

Angie of cross.

0 Where high-voltage lines cross light-current lines, the hori-

zontal distance from the nearest crossing pole or its stays
to the centre-line of the light-current line shall be at
least 3 m. If this distance cannot be maintained because of
the stays, they shall be insulated. The insulators shall in
such cases be fitted as close to the pole as possible.
The angle of cross shall not be less than 45° unless this is
unavoidable.
 so

2. Earthed protective nets. Earthed guard wires.

Earthed protective nets or earthed guard wires shall be con-
structed according t o § 721 and shail be connected to the
continuous earth wire where such is used.

o
3. Crossing of high-voZtage Zines and Zow-voZtage Zines on a
common poZe.
Each line shall belong to the same supply company. Under-
neath the high-voltage lines a robust quard of hoops of
galvanized steel or other approved protective arrangements
shall be fitted. The guard hoops shall be of a suitable
shape and be strong enough to prevent contact with the low-
voltage line should a high-voltage insulator or wire break.

The crossing pole need not be constructed as an anchoring

pole. When the common pole is also an inserted support
pole constructed according to 1. above, guard hoops may be
omitted.
0
The crossing shall whereever possible be at right-angles.

4. Underground cabZe for one Zine.

Cables for low-voltage, medium-voltage or light-current
shall be laid underground for a sufficient distance so that
a high-voltage conductor cannot attain a dangerous proximity
to them should a high-voltage insulator or wire break. The
horizontal distance between the outer high-voltage conductors
and cables when above the ground shall be at least 6 m.

Regarding types of cables, depths under ground etc., see

§ 371 a n d § 508.

§ 717. Crossing of very crowded areas, etc.

Where high-voltage lines cross parking areas or other very

crowded sites or playgrounds for children under school age,
the crossing shall be effected using the same safety pre-
cautions as apply to the crossing of public roads, s e e § 718.

Crossing of other playgrounds, camping grounds, shooting ranges

sport facilities, racecourses, etc. and of spectator accommoda-
0
tion for these, also of church yards, petrol stations and stor-
age areas for explosive or combustible materials, is not p e -
mitted. The Electricity Inspectorate may in special cases,
following an application from the owner of the line, permit
the crossing of other storage areas on the following conditionso

The same precautions shall be taken in the crossing span as

apply to the crossing of public roads, s e e § 718. The direct
distance between the conductors and the highest point of the
storage area shall under the most unfavourable circumstances
be not less than the value shown in the Table below:
 Sl

- - - - - -
1 Mdx1mum upt-raun.: \;Oltage 72 5 123 145 170 245 300 420
(t·H,•clwt• \ . t l u t . ' ) u p Lo, kV

Drstancc from h 1 l w s l
5 5.5 5.7 6 6.7 7.3 8.5 I
t of l < a 1 • arr-a, in metres

0 Where mechanical equipment is used in the storage operations,

this must not come-closer to the lines during use than is
shown in the Table.

§ 718. Crossing of pubLic roads.

0 Where high-voltage lines cross public roads, one of the

following safety measures shall be adopted:

1. Reinforced suspension in accordance w i t h § 721. The lines

in the crossing span including continuous earth wires shall
be of the stranded type with load of at least 640 kp for
each line.

The length of the crossing span must not exceed the

following limits:

For lines having a breaking load of 640 kp : so m

For lines having a breaking load of 950 ko : 80 m
For lines having a breaking load of l 400 kp : 110 m
For lines having a breaking load of 2 000 kp : 160 m
For lines having a breaking load of 2 800 kp : 220 m
For lines having a breaking load of 3 800 kp : 280 m
For lines hav-ing a breaking load of 4 100 kp : 300 m

Intermediate values may be determined by interpolation. This

Table also applies to continuous earth wires, see § 608.

Where circumstances require the use of a crossing span longer

than 300 m, an application, together with two copies of draw-

0 ings and calculations, should be forwarded through the Electri-

city Inspectorate to NVE.

The height of the line above the road surface shall under the
most unfavourable circumstances be at least 7 m for voltages
up to 72.5 kV. For higher voltages this distance shall be at
least the value shown in the Table below.

0 Regarding poles for the crossing span s e e § 706. The crossing

poles are not required to be constructed as anchoring poles
where the conductors used in the crossing span have the same
breaking load as those in the remaining spans.

Continuous earth wires shall under the most unfavourable cir-

cumstances be at a free height of at least 6 m above the road
surface.
 52

2. Earthed guard wires in accordance w i t h § 721 connected to

a continuous earth wire where such is used. The lowest
point of the guard wires shall be at least 6 m above the
road surface.

Height of lines above road surface under the

most unfavourable circumstances

1 a x i m u m operating voltMge
(erreeuve value}, up to kV
72.5 123 145 170 245 300 420
0
H1&hl above road 11urr1ce, 10.5
7.0 7.5 7.7 8.0 8.7 9.3
in metres

Note:

The requirement regarding mim:mum height under the moet:unfavourable

circumstances makes it necessary to check that the line can maintain
0
this height at:

a) 40°c without additional mechanical load;

b) o0c with additional load in accordance with§ 707 (2);
c) o0c with 50S of the additional load in accordance with§ 707(2)
in the crossing span while the other spans are without load.

§ 719. Crossing of railways.

Where high-voltage lines cross a railway line the crossing

shall be effected using the same safety precautions as are
specified i n § 716. The simplified method of crossing using
a 35 m span and reduced strength in the crossing masts is,
however, not permitted.

The height of the crossing line above the tracks shall under the
most unfavourable circumstances ( s e e § 718) be at least 10.5 m
with voltages of up to 72.5 kV. For higher voltages the height
shall be at least that specified in the Table below:

M u 1 m u m operaung voltaee
{effecttve value) up l o , kV
72.6 123 145 170 245 300 420 0
Minimum height above 11.4 11.7 12.3
10.5 10.8 10 9 11.0
railway track, in metres

Note:

The provision..q regarding the layout of the crossing and the mini.mum
0
height applies both to to electrified and non-electrified tracks. If
other electric lines run al.onqeide the track, the height of the crosning
lines must be determined in relation to these. (See§§ 716 and 716).
 53

§ 720. Crossing of aerial ropeways, track cables.

Where high-voltaae lines cross aerial ropeways or track

cables, they must not, even under the most unfavourable
conditions come closer than 4 m where the voltage is below
72.5 kV; for higher voltages the distance must be in accor-
dance with the Table below. Where an aerial ropeway is
crossed, safety precautions in accordance w i t h § 716 of

D
these Regulations must be taken as far as they are appli-
cable. Where a track cable is crossed, safety precautions
in accordance w i t h § 718 must similarly be taken. As a
general principle, one or more robust steel cables or a
robust closed steel trestle shall be fitted between the
systems to prevent the ropeway cable or track cable from
coming within dangerous proximity of the high-voltage lines
during tensioning or due to breakage or oscillation.

0 Such steel cables or trestles may be omitted where the

distance from the high-voltage line to straight line be-
tween the anchor points of the ropeway cable or track
cable, under the most unfavourable circumstances, is at
least 2 m greater than the distance between the same straight
line and the tensioned and unloaded ropeway cable or track
cable.

Where the high-voltage lines cross unde roee ch ropeway cables

or track-cables, the high-voltage line must either be laid
underground or a suitable protective structure must be erected
according to special provisions laid down by the Electricity
Inspectorate.

Ropeway cables or track cables must be earthed. The earthed

connection shall have a cross-section not less than 25 mm2.

Mu:1murn operating v u l l a 123 145 170 245 300 420

72.5
(r.m.1. value) up to: kV

Distance in metres 4.0 4.3 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 7.0

0 Note:
The tel'l7! 'aerial ropeway' is also hel.dto include ski-lifts and
s i m i l a r transport installations.

The tel'171
'track cable' is also held to include cable with attached
0 pulling line which occasionally is used for transport of e.g. milk
and other goods.
 54

II
Hi&h•volt&1e line

0
Steel cable or trestle. may be omilled if a> b + 2

Fi1. 6

§ 721. General provisions regarding crossings.

The reinforced suspension of outdoor lines shall be effected

by means of insulators and clamps having a breaking load as
laid down i n § 714.

On anchor conductors poles and terminal poles the conductors

shall be attached to insulators in such a manner that slip-
ping or breakage cannot occur even under a unilateral ten-
sion equal to 90% of the breaking load of the conductor.

Joints in the crossing span shall be avoided, but where the

cross-section of the conductor has a breaking load of at least
2.8 tons it is permissible to use joints capable of with-
standing not less than 90% of the breaking load of the con-
0
ductor. In the case of continuous earth wires ( s e e § 608)
corresponding provisions apply to earth wires placed above
or underneath the high-voltage lines at the point where high-
voltage lines cross other lines or railways (§ 715, § 716 or
§ 719). At other crossings, joints in continuous earth wires
placed underneath the high-voltage lines are permitted in the
crossing span if the joints are capable of withstanding at
0
least 90% of the breaking load of the conductor. Joints must
be so designed and effected that the best possible current
carrying is obtained without overheating.

Insulators used for reinforced suspension must be mechanically

robust and resistant to impact resulting, for example, from
 55

shooting, blasting, stone-throwing, etc., to prevent the

line falling due to breakage of the insulation equipment.

Where post insulators are used each wire shall be attached

to two insulators fitted side by side with a free space
between them equal to at least three-quarters of the insu-
lator diameter. The attachment to the additional insulator
shall be relieved of tension during installation and shall
be made using material of the same type and cross-section
0 as is used for the wires in the crossing span. Clamps for
fastening the extra insulator (reinforcement clamps) shall
be able to withstand at least 90% of the breaking load of
the conductor.

Where suspension insulators are used the insulator chains

shall either have at least one additional section compared

0 with the normal line insulation or double chains shall be

used. Where two or more parallel chains are used the addi-
tional section may be omitted. Each chain shall, however,
have at least two seot.Loris.

In the case of poles with earthed insulator brackets, the

wire and its clamps shall be protected against burning off
and the insulators shall be protected against damage by
arcing, e.g. by cone baffles, rings etc., where the operat-
ing voltage is above 36 kV.

The following provisions apply to the construction of quard-

wires:

Guard wires shall be adequately dimensioned from both the

mechanical and electrical standpoint and shall consist of
galvanized steel cable having a breaking load of at least
5 tons. They shall be so arranged that a falling conductor
will always be caught by the wires. The distance between
the conductors and the quard-wires shall be as specified for
the crossing of high-voltage lines, s e e § 715. Guard-wires
shall be earthed as given i n § § 605 - 611. They shall be
attached to separate poles calculated and designed as line
poles. Where wooden poles are used they shall be of pine

0 impregnated in an a p r o v e d manner.

The distance between quard wires and line masts shall be

greater than the length of such line poles unless these are
constructed as anchoring poles. This does not, however,
apply where a road is crossed.

0
Regarding insulators and accessories, s e e § 714.

Note:
A t t e n t i o n is dmwn to the "Noruieq ian Standards for the I n s u l a t i o n
of Overhead Lines, 196211•

The object of r e i n f o r c e d suspension is to ensure that the Zine w i l l

not f a U , e . g . due to a r c i n g p a r t i c u l a r l y foUowing l i g h t n i n g .
 56

With post insulators, reinforcement can be obtained as shm.m

in the sketch bel=.
Reinforcement of single-chain suspension is obtained foll=ing
the principle that an adequate levP.l of insulation for the
operating voltage used must be maintained after one eect-ion has
failed. Where the insulators outside the crossing span are
constructed on this principle no further additional section is
required for the insulators in the crossing.
Whera S1,J1,nging chains are used, particular attention must be paid
0
to the danger of earth leakage and overheating of the conductor
due to an unevenly distributed icø burden or to urind, Tensioning
insulator chains should in general be used during installation, as
well as for the supporting poles.
Care must be taken at crossings in regard to adequate clearance
from trees as a precaution against earth leakage.
0
It is recorrmended that double suspension chains be used at important
crossings. In this case it is not necessary for each chain to have
an additional section although each must have at least two sections.

The use of rod insulators in the.crossing span is not permitted.

In the case of compression joints special attention must be paid
to syrrrnetrical fitting and to ota,-ni:"!g t"e best possible pro-
tection against corrosion. Every effort should be made to avoid
cavities in a joint in view of the danger presented by rain,
condensation, expansion by frost and corrosion.

For am... 10nng and terminal mests

9(f,r. of lHectking load ut line

0
Fig 7
 57

§ 722. Adjacent siting to roads, very crowded areas, etc.

Where high-voltage lines come so close to public roads, park-

ing sites or other very crowded areas, etc. that the breakage
of an insulator or conductor may present danger of a line
coming dangerously close to the road, etc., the same safety
precautions shall be taken as apply to the crossing of a public
road, s e e § 718.

0 In the case of lines being sited to camping sites, the horizon-

tal distance between the nearest conductor and the camping
site shall be at least 2.5 m for operating voltages up to
72.5 kV and for higher voltages the distance shall be in ac-
cordance with the Table below. The camping site must be pro-
tected in a satisfactory manner in the direction of the line.
Regarding the distances to fixed buildings, e.g. cottages,

0 toilets, sheds etc., the provisions i n § 726 apply.

In the case of lines being sited to playgrounds for school

children, shooting ranges, sports facilities, etc., and of
spectator accommodation for these, as also of petrol stations,
storage areas for explosive or particularly combustible mate-
rials, and other storage areas, the horizontal distance be-
tween the nearest conductor and the playground etc., shall be
at least 6 m for operating voltages up to 72.5 kV and for
higher voltages in accordance with the Table below.

Maximum operating voltage

2.5 123 145 170 245 300 420
(r.m.s. value) up t o , kV

Horizontal distance from

2.5 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.6 4.0 4.5
camping sites: metres

Horizontal distance from

6.0 6.5 6.7 7.0 7.7 8.3 9.5
playgrounds etc.: metres

The Electricity Inspectorate may in special cases, following

0
application from the owner of the line, permit a smaller hori-
zontal distance between the nearest conductor and other stor-
age areas than is stated i n § 717 for the crossing of such
areas.

Note:
Camping sites may be protected in the direction of high-voltage lines
0 by means of e.g. a 1 m high fence, hedge or similar or a chain which
marks the boundary etc.

If the line is provided with the safety measures as for crossing of

public roads, notices may be put up which indicate the area under
the high-voltage lines which may be used as a parking place.
 58

The Ministry of Defence hasits own prov.s.ons regarding the siting

of high--voitage iines adjacent to cmrnunition stores.
Pians for neu, instaiiations or pians concerning aiterations in exist-
ing high vol.taqe transmission Lines which wiU come cloee to or wiU
c r o s s over miUtaryinstaUations, are in each case to be discussed
with the miUtaryauthorities concerned.

§ 723. Lines adjacent to raiiways.

Where high-voltage lines come so close to a railway line that
the breakage of an insulator or conductor may cause the con-
0
ductor to come dangeroulsy close to the railway line, the
same safety precautions shall be taken as apply to crossings,
s e e § 719.

§ 724. Lines adjacent to other iines.

0
Where high-voltage lines come so close to other electric lines
that the breakage of an insulator or line can cause the two
sets of lines to come dangerously close to each other, the
same safety precautions shall be taken as apply to crossings
( s e e § § 716 and 323).

In view of possible electrical interference with the operation

of existing light-current lines, high-voltage lines must be
sited at a distance from these appropriate to the circumstances.

The parallel siting of high voltage lines for any considerable

distance over light-current or low-voltage lines shall wher-
ever possible be avoided. If such parallel siting cannot be
avoided, effective means shall be taken to prevent inductive
effects arising from the high-voltage line.

Note:
Where teiephone iines are sited paraiiei to high--voitage iines over
any considerabw distance it may, in criticai cases, be required
that the same safety precautions be taken as are specified in § n 2 .

§ 725. Lines adjacent to aeriai ropeways, track cabies. 0

High-voltage lines must not be sited within 20 m of aerial
ropeways or track cables unless such precautions are taken
as will protect the ropeway or track cable from the leakage
of electric current ( s e e § 9 of Law dated 14 June 1912 re-
garding the installation of areial ropeways and tracks).

Note:
0
The tenn "aer-ial:ropeioaq" incfodes ski-Ufts and simiiar transport
instaUations.
 59

§ 72G. Lines adjacent to, and crossing of, buildings, etc.

Where high-voltage lines are sited adjacent to buildings

the distance between the nearest conductor and the closest
part of the building shall be at least 6 m i n the horizontal
direction. When this conductor is swung out to an angle of
45° towards the building, it must not come within 3 m of the
latter, measured horizontally. These distances apply for

0
voltages of up to 72.5 kV. For higher voltages, the distance
shall be at least the value specified in the Table below.

The same provisions also apply to other objects in the vicinity

of a line, such as chimneys, steeples, towers, flagstaffs, etc.
In the case of line masts the distance may be less, provided
that this will not endanger life or cause accidents affecting

0
the line or its operation, s e e § 724.

In the case of lines at a greater height, having larger span,

widths and a more pronounced sag, the horizontal distance
between the nearest conductor and any building, etc. shall be
at least 10 m without swing and regardless of the operating
voltage. It is permissible in this case for the conductor
to swing over the building, etc., provided that, under the
most unfavourable load conditions and swing, it does not come
within 6 m of it. The conductors in the span adjacent to the
building, etc. shall have reinforced suspension.

In the case of particularly high lines (spans crossing a fjord

or deep valley) the horizontal distance between a conductor
and any building, etc. will be laid down by the Electricity
Inspectorate. The same applies in the case of particularly
high buildings.

It is permissable for lines to be run over less important build·

ings when the direct distance between conductors and building
is, under the most unfavourable circumstances, not less than
5 m for operating voltages of up to 72.5 kV. For higher vol-
tages the distance shall not be less than the value specified
in the Table below.

0 The continuous earth wire shall, under the most unfavourable

circumstances, have a direct clearance distance of at least
4 m to a building.

0
M a x i m u m operating voltage
j {effectrve value) up l o , kV 72.5 123 145 170 245 300 420

Hon1.ontal distance from

m o r t - i m p o r t a n t buildings, 6 6.5 6.7 7 7.7 8.3 9.5
in mt'lrt.'2t ((")

With il 5° swing. m m e t r e s ( I { ) 3 3.5 3.7 4 4.7 6.3 6.5

- - - - - -
D1lanrt.• rrom lt.'1..,
- - - -
i m p o r t a n t burtdmgs, 5 5.5 5.7 6 6.7 7.3 8.6
111 n w l r t - i .
I
- - · · - ·-·
 60

Note:
Regarding the "moat unfavourable ciraumstancea", see § 718. The
provision regarding siting adjacent to more important buildings
is intended, a) to protect buildings from falling lines and to
avoid inconvenient siting of lines and bJ to protect the lines
in case of fire in the building.
Among "the more important buildings" are included duellinq-houeee,
factories, public buildings, commercial buildings, schools, shops,
cow-sheds, etc. 0
Free-standing buildings, such as small sheds, small barns, small
henhousea, greenhouses, etc. are regarded as less important build-
ings, also garages for one or two cars situated at a distance of
at least 4 m from other buildings.
If in respect of high voltage lines, the safety precautions as re-
quired i n § 718 for the crossing of public roads are taken, the
0
following are also regarded as "less important buildings": Semi-
detached garages constructed from non-combustible materials not
higher than 3 m and situated at least 4 m from other buildings.
Also open garages for one or two cars with roof of non-combustible
materials and situated closer than.4 m from other buildings.
In the "Statlige byggebesterrmelser Del 5", fireclassified building
materials and building constructions are listed. In addition atten-
tion is dræ,m to the building law in force andto the building regu-
lations.

T rn
u

rn 0
FordistancetC Mld R, - T a b a

0
Fig. 8
 0 0 0 0
Table showing minimum distances for high-voltage hnes in the open

Maximum operating voltage (effective value}. kV

Reference Distances, in metres
letter on
§ sketches 24 kV 36 kV 52 kV 72.5 kV 123 kV 145 kV 170 kV 245 k\' 300 kV 420 k\"
- -
631. Hei&ht above ground for
lead-in to buildings . . . . . . . . A 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.4 5.7 5.8 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.8
631. Height above roof for
lead-in to buildinø . . . . E 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.4 3.7 3.8 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.8
675. H e i g h t a b o v e g r o u n d f o r
a p p a r a t u s without
enclosure • • • • • • • • • • • • A 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.4 5.7 5.8 6.0 6.5 7.0 ; 8
67 5. Height above ground for
apparatus with
enclo.ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.4 3.7 3.8 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.8
675. Distance from enclosure . . . . B 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.9 3.2 3.3 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.3
711. H•icht abovo around . . . . . . C 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.5 6.7 7.0 7.7 8.3 9.5
711. Distance from around ..... D 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.5 5.7 6.0 6.7 7.3 8.5
711. D u u n c o from around
with 45° swine . . . . . . . . . . . R 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.7 4.0 4.7 5.3 6.5
711. Hei1ht above snow . . . . . . . . 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.9 5.2 5.8
715. Distance where lines crou .. 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.8
718. Height above public road . . . 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.5 7.7 8.0 8.7 9.3 10.5
719. Hei1ht above railway . . . . . . 10.5 10.5 10.6 10.5 10.8 10.9 11.0 11.4 11.7 12.3
720. Distance from aerial
rope-way or track . . . . . . . . . 3.0 3.1 3.3 3.5 4.0 4.2 4.5 5.3 5.8 7.0
726. Dwtance from more
important buildinp . . . . . . . C 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.5 6.7 7.0 7.7 8.3 9.5
7 26. Distanct from more
important buildinp
with 45° awinc . . . . . . . . . . . R 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.5 3.7 4.0 4.7 5.3 6.6
726. Diaunco from ,,..
important buildinp . . . • . . . 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.5 5.7 6.0 6.7 7.3 8.5
 62

§ 728. Long spans.

The provisions o f § 707 relate to the calculation of long

spans (up to 300 m), b t in the case of crossina soans in
accordance w i t h § § 715, 716 and 719 calculation shall be
based on an additional load of not less than 5 kp per metre,
see § 707 (2).

For crossings over waterways where experience shows that no

considerable ice burdens are encountered, the conductors may
tensioned in such a m n n e r that the reouireMents regarding
free height above the highest water-level are satisfied at
+40°C with the line unloaded, and at minus 2s0c with a
vertically actin additional load of 200 + SO d qrammes per
metre. Where by reason of ice burden or other cause the con-

0
ductors nevertheless come below the required free height, the
owner of the line must take steps to rectify the situation
as soon as ?Ossible.

With long spans in which the conductors must have a greater

breaking load than those in the rest of the line, anchoring
masts shall be used at the point of·transition from the smal-
ler to the larger cross-section and vice versa.

§ 730. Unused lines.

Where lines in the ooen cease to be used thev shall either

be taken down or maintained in accordance with these
Requlations to the extent determined in consultation with
the Electricity Inspectorate. The lines shall in addition
have a good conductive connection to earth.

Such lines shall be i n n e c t e d at least once a year.

Note:

In case of change in the use of lines, permission from NVE is

required, see§ 11.

0
j. SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR HIGH-VOLTATE INSTALLATIONS

The re ulations in this section are su erseded b

NVE Communication no. 3 78.
the 0
 A D D E N D A
AND
C O M M U N I C A T I O N S
FROM THE
NVE, DIRECTORATE OF·ELECTRICITY
 ADDENDA

n Act of 19 June 1969 regarding construction

Page

and operation of electrical installations . 2

Act of 24 May 1929 relating to supervision

C
of electrical installations . 4

Regulations relating to technical training

and education fo electrical professions
and trades . 9

Regulations for authorization of electrical

contractoLs and electricians working as an
electrical contractor (omitted from this
translation)

Standard for instructions for electrical

cotractors (omitted from this translation)

Provisions regarding the relationship between

public roads and electrical line installations 26

Instructions for the local inspection of

electrical installations 35

Accidents caused by electric current 37

n
 2

ACT OF 19 JUNE 1969

regarding construction and operation

of electrical installations
0
§ 1

Installations for generation, transmission and distribution of

electrical power at high voltage are not to be constructed or
Q
operated by others than the State without permission of the
Crown. The same applies to alterations or extensions to older
installations.

For this permission, conditions will be laid down which are

in conformity with the basic rules o f § 3.

The voltage levels at which the act apply, shall on each occa-
sion be determined by the Crown.

§ 2

Application for permission in accordance with this Act shall be

accompanied by descriptions, which on demand may be supplemented
by drawings, maps or similar.

Prior to an application being settled, the opinion of the relevant

m u c i p a l council and the Lord Lieutenant in the county shall be
sought.

§ 3
0
When permission is granted and the conditions are stated, the
following basic rules are to be observed:

1. The permission is granted to a definite person, company,

municipal body or county.

2. Consideration shall be given to the need for electric power

in the district and if the installation will lead to a ra-
tional apply of electricity, then the necssary onditions
regarding this will be given.

3. Provisions may be stated regarding the construction of the

suoply installation which may also include a date for con-
struction to start; details of the design, maintenance and
operation of the installation may also be included in the
provisions.
 3

4. An annual charge payable to the State of up to 3 kroner/kW

and an annual charge payable to the municipal bodies or
counties of up to 4 kroner/kW of the rated power or trans-
mission capacity of the sunolv installation, mav be levied
Where a charge is placed on the power in accordance to
concession for the renting of such power, then this charge

0 is to be subtracted from the above.

Where a charge in accordance to concession for acquisition

of, or regulation of, waterways is placed on the waterfall
which is under construction or from which the power is
transmitted, then this is to be taken into consideration
when the charge according to the present Act is determined.

0 If the charge is not paid when due, annual interest shall

be charged at the rate of 6%. The charge may be enforced
by distraint.

More detailed provisions regarding the payment of the charge

will be established by the Ministry concerned.

5. In addition, such conditions may be applied which are deemed

to be necessary out of u b l i c consideration or to protect
p r i a t e interests which may be affected.

§ 4

This Act also applies to Spitzbergen, with the exception of the

provisions i n § 3, item 4.

0
 4

n
ACT OF 24 MAY 1929 RELATING TO SUPERVISION OF ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS

WITH SUPPLEMENTARY ACTS OF 7 APRIL 1933, 7 MAY 1936, 25 JUNr

1954 NO. 3, 22 APRIL 1966, 16 JUNE 1972, AND 26 JANUARY 1973
NO. 2

§ 1.
The present Act covers all electrical installations, but
not installations for radio telegraphy and radio-telephony.

§ 2.
The Crownl shall prepare technical regulations governing
the design, maintenance and operation of electrical installa-
tions. These regulations may contain, inter alia, provisions
having the object of preventing electrical installations from
exercising an unnecessarily deleterious influence unon their
surroundings.

§ 3. 2
The Crown shall, to any extent found necessary, order
the public inspection of electrical installations. The
persons who are to exercise such inspection are, under the
present Act, designated the Electricity Inspectorate. In2
structions for this body shall be prepared by the Crown.

l)The Norwegian Water Resources and Electricity Board

a c c o r d i n g to l e t t e r of 6 O c t o b e r 1 9 7 1 f r o m t h e
M i n i s t r y of I n d u s t r y a n d H a n d i c r a f t .

2lThe Norweeian Water Kesources and Electricity Board

in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e D e c r e e of 4 J u l y l 9 2 9 .
 5

§ 4.

1. A charge shall be paid to the Exchequer for the inspection

exercised by the Electricity Inspectorate, such charge be-
ing determined in accordance with a scale laid down by the
Crown with the approval of the Norwegian Parliament. This
scale shall contain provisions as to when and by whom the
charge shall be paid. No charge is payable for light-
current installations.

n 2. If the charge is not paid when due, annual interest shall

be charged at the rate of 6%. The charge carries the same
right of distraint in regard to the installation as do
taxes in regard to real estate and can be enforced in the
same manner.

3. Special expenses incrurred by the Electricity Inspectorate

or a local inspector in issuing, on behalf of the Broad-
0 casting Organisation, the orders mentioned i n § 7.2 sub-
para.l of the present Act shall be refunded by the Broad-
casting Organisation in accordance with a provision made
by the Norwegian Water Resources and Electricity Board.

§ 5.
The Electricity Inspectorate shall at all times have unres-
tricted access to the installations under its inspection. On
instructions from the Electricity Inspectorate the owner of the
installation or his representative shall be present during the
inspection, and is obliged to provide the Electricity Inspecto-
rate with all information considered necessary to enable it to
carry out its inspection and to ensure that its orders have
been fulfilled, or to calculate the charge mentioned i n § 4.

§ 6.
If the Electricity Inspectorate finds that an electrical
installation subject to inspection, or any part of such instal-
lation, is not being constructed in a safe manner or is not
constructed in accordance with current regulations or in accor-
dance with any plan specified in the official permission for
the installation to be put into service or the conditions regard-
ing technical design contained in that permission, the Electricity

0 Inspectorate has the right to prohibit the continuance of work

and to require that such work be altered, renewed and improved.

§ 7.
1. When an electrical installation which is subject to inspec-

n
tion is in any part badly or defectively maintained or other-
wise in such condition that in the opinion of the Electricity
Inspectorate it constitutes a danger to human life or to pro-
perty, the Electricity Inspectorate may give orders that its
operation shall at once be stopped and that it shall be put
·into a proper condition or removed.
 6

2. In addition, when an electrical installation under item 1

above causes inconvenient electrical interference, the
Electricity Inspectorate may give orders that it shall be
at once put into such condition that this interference is
as far as possible stopped.

The Norwegian Water Resources and Electricity Board may,

to the extent considered necessary for the protection of
legitimate public interests, issue regulations to the
effect that electrical installations, components or appa-
ratus which, in the opinion of the Electricity Inspecto- 0
rate, constitute a serious hindrance to radio reception,
shall not be operated at certain periods of the day or
night, unless such hindrance can be prevented by measures
ordered by the Electricity Inspectorate pursuant to current
regulations.

3. Where an order as item 1 or 2 above is not carried out with-

out delay, the Electricity Inspectorate may cause it to be
G
carried out at the owner's expense. Public expenditure
in this connection can be recovered under the same right of
distraint upon the installation as exists upon real estate
in regard to taxes and recovery can be obtained in the same
manner.

§ 8.
The orders issued by tye Electricity Inspectorate shall, in
order to be valid, be made in writing or by telegram.

§ 10.
The Crown1 may determine that owners of certain electrical
installations themselves have the duty of inspecting the instal-
lations connected thereto. This local inspection is subject to
the control of the Electricity Inspectorate. In other respects
the same provisions apply to Local Inspection as are laid down
i n § 5 to 9 of the present Act in regard to the Electricity
Inspectorate and authorization for local inspection shall be
issued by the owner (contractor) of the installation concerned;
the orders for the stopping or removal of an installation§ 7.1,
must, however, be issued by the Electricity Inspectorate.
Q
§ 11.
1. The Crown2 may order that certain types or kinds of equip-
ment and apparatus for electrical installation shall be
subject to inspection. Equipment and apparatus for which
such inspection is ordered may not be sold or used in
Norway until the type or kind concerned has been inspected
0
and approved.

l) The Norwegian Water Resources and Electricity Board in

accordance with Decree of 4 July 1929.

2)
The Norwegian Water Resources and Electricity Board
according to Royal Decree of 19 September 1975.
 7

2. The vendor must pay a fee for the inspection in

accordance with a scale laid down by the appropriate
Ministry.

3. DetailP.d rules for the putting into effect of these

provisions shall be prepared by the Crown.

§ 12.

0
1. The Crown2 may order that the operation of certain
electrical installations shall only be undertaken by a
competent electrical manager, and that the construction
or maintenance of certain electrical installations
shall only be undertaken by an electrical contractor.

The Crown2 may state that competent electrical manaqer5

C
and electrical contractors shall have qualifications
as stated by the Crown. The Crown2 may also state that
electricians that work independently on the construction
and maintenance of certain electrical installations and
that electrical repairers who undertake or independently
carry out maintenance of certain electrical apparatus,
shall have qualifications as stated by the Crown. The
Crown2 may likewise state that inspectors who inGependently
carry out inspection of certain electrical installations,
shall have qualifications as stated by the Crown.
2. The Crown2 may issue Regulations for authorization of
electrical contractors and electricians working as
electrical contractors,and for the duties and rights of
these.

§ 13.
All persons referred to as auchorized under this Act,
have the duty to keep secret the operating and trade informa-
tion which may come to their knowledge by reason of their
work under the present Act, and also to refrain from imitat-
ing the methods and procedures adopted and kept secret by
any business owner which-may thereby come to their knowledge.

§ 14. The breaking of the present c t or of the regulations

or rules laid down in accordance with it or any failure to
comply with an order or prohibition issued by the Norwegian
Water Resources and Electricity Board, the Electricity
Inspectorate or the Local Inspection ( s e e § 10) under warrant
of the present Act or Regulations, or any refusal to afford
access to the Electricity Inspectorate, or anv failure to
provide the information discussed i n § 5 shall be punish-
able by fines, unless a more stringent penalty falls to be
imposed in accordance with the civil penal code.

21
The Norwegian Water Resources and Electricity Board
according to Royal Decree of 19 September 1975.
 8

§ 15.

The present Act shall come into force immediately.

In the Act of 16 May 1896, § 1 a n d § 4 are cancelled
simultaneously, see the Act of 19 July 1912. However, the
Regulations for Electrical Installations so stated, pursuant to
the Act of 16 May 1896, § 1, and the supervision system
established according t o § 4 of that Act, and the Regulations ,/\
concerning fees for the approval and inspection of heavy- V
current installations, are to remain in force until the Crown
has otherwise determined.

The Act applies also for Spitzbergen.

Q
 9

Regulations Relating to Technical Training

and Education for Electrical Professions
and Trades.
Pursuant t o § 12 of the Act of 24 May 1929 relating
to the supervision of electrical installations, and in
accordance with the Recommendation of 19 September 1975
proposed by the Ministry of Industry and Handicraft, the
Royal Decree of 19 September 1975 stated the following

0 Regulations relating to professional training for:

Competent electrical mangers

Electrical contractors Group L a n d H
Lift contractors
Electricians Group L a n d H
Power-station electricians Group A
Power station electricians Group B (line electricians)
Lift electricians
Electrical repairers and
installation inspectors
working on electrical installations etc.:
1. The operation of electrical installations of a type
and size to be determined by the Norwegian Water
Resources and Electricity Board (abbr. NVE) are to
be undertaken by a competent electrical manager, cfr.
Appendix I.

2. The construction and maintenance of heavy-current

installations having voltage above 42 V are to be
undertaken by an e Lec tr Lcel cortractor (Group L for lcw
and medium voltage installations, Group H for low,
medium and high voltage installations), cfr.
Aopendix II. However, see item 3. The exemptions
specified in the items 2.1 - 2.5 apply.

0 2.1 The competent electrical manager in charge of an

Electricity Supply Undertaking may direct and super-
vise the construction and maintenance of the electrical
installations belongino to the company of which he is
in charge.

2.2 The manager of the electrical section in an industrial

0 company may direct and supervise the construction and

maintenance of the electrical installations belonging
to the company if his education and practical
training meet the requirements specified in
Appendix I (competent electrical manager), see also
note 3. The manager concerned must be employed in
the company and cannot at the same time undertake
other electrical installation activities.
 10

2.3 The construction and maintenance of overhead electrical

lines may be directed and supervised by a competent
electrical manager, cfr. Appendix I, or another
professional approved by the NVE. He has to be
employed by the contracting firm concerned.

2.4 In industrial companies and similar, the Electricity

Inspectorate or the Local Inspection may, where
operational circumstances make it necessary, grant

n
an electrician, cfr. Appendix IV, who is employed
as an electrician on the staff of the company
concerned, the authority to carry out;main-
tenance and small-scale installation work involved
in the moving and replacing of machines and apparatus
and other equipment connected to existinq
electrical installations within the premises of

n
that company. Installation work in connection with
other refitting operations, new constructions or
extension works has to be undertaken by an electrical
contractor.

The activity is to be carried out by no more than one

other electrician in addition to the electrician under-
taking the activity. The Electricity Inspectorate
may deviate from this provision when the company
needs shift-working electricians.

2.5 Outside towns and built-up areas, e.g. in smaller

distribution areas in country districts, the Elec-
tricity Inspectorate mav, when findinq that the
circumstances so require, grant to an electrician,
cfr. Appendix IV, a temporary authority to undertake
the construction and maintenance of heavv-current
installations having voltage above 42 V,-in the area
concerned. He shall undertake the work without other
electricians and with no-more than one assistant,

Should there, in view of local conditions, or for

any reason, be doubt about such authority being
granted or whether authority already granted should
be withdrawn, the matter snail be laia hefore the NVE.

3. The construction and maintenance of electrical c/

installations for lifts shall be undertaken by a
lift contactor, cfr. Appendix III.

The lift contractor shall carry out the activity as

an independent business-man or may be employed by a
lift installation company. He cannot at the same
time work on behalf of another company. However, he
may direct and supervise the activity in branches of
0
the same company in different parts of the country.

The activity shall be notified to the Local Inspection.

For maintenance activity the exemptions stated in 3.1

and 3. 2 apply.
 11

3.1 In industrial companies and s i m i l a , the Electricity

Inspectorate or the Local Inspection may, where
operational circumstances make it necessary, grant
a lift electrician, cfr. Appendix IV, who is
employed as a lift electrician on the staff of the
company concerned, the authority to carry out main-
tenance on existin electrical lift installations.

3.2 In places where a lift contractor or a professional

0 from a lift contracting company are not available,
the Electricity Inspectorate or the Local Inspection
may r a n t to an electrician temporary authority to
undertake maintenance of electrical lift installa-
tions.

n
The work shall be carried out by a lift electrician
or an electrician, cfr. Appendix IV.

Should there, in view of the local conditions or for

any reason, be doubt about whether such authority can
be granted or whether authority already granted should
be withdrawn, the matter shall be laid before the NVE.

4. A person who works independently on the construction

or maintenance of heavy-current installations which
have a voltage above 42 V, must be an electrician
and must be employed by the electrical contractor
company concerned (Group L for low and medium voltage
installations, Group H for low, medium and high
voltage installations), cfr. Apnendix IV. However,
the exemptions stated in 4.1 and 4.2 apply.

4.1 A power-station electrician Group A may work indepen-

dently on the construction and maintenance of each
and all the electrical installations which belong to
the Electricity Supply Undertaking which has a
competent electrical manaqer.

The power station electrician must be employed by

the Electricity Supply Undertaking concerned.

0 4.2 Power station electricians Group A and B, cfr.

Appendix IV, may work independently on construction
and maintenance of overhead electrical lines with
appurtenant electrical installations outdoors. The
power station electrician must be employed by the
contracting firm concerned, or by an Electricity

0
Rupnly Undertaking which has a competent electrical
manager.

5. A person who works independently on the construction

and maintenance of electrical lift installations,
and on the installations and maintenance of equipment
which is connected to the electrical installation,
or is of importance for safety reasons during the
operation of electrical lift installations, must be a
lift electrician, cfr. p p e n d i x IV.
 12
However, the exemptions stated in 3.2 apply.

A lift electrican must be employed by the lift con-

tracting company concerned.
6. A person undertaking and/or independently carrying
out maintenance of domestic electrical apparatus
and equipment which are subject to compulsory
control must either be an electrician, cfr. Appendix
IV, or an electrical repairer, cfr. Appendix V.

The activity shall be notified to the Local Inspection. 0

However, the exceptions stated in 6.1 and 6.2 apply.

6.1 Maintenance of electrical apparatus subject to

compulsory control and of equipment for which the

0
NVE has approved a branch service agency, may be
carried out only by such a·service agency.

6.2 Companies producing domestic electrical apparatus and

equipment which are subject to compulsory control may,
after an application to the NVE, be granted the
authority to carry out maintenance of the apparatus
and equipment being produced by the company concerned.

aintenance is to be carried out only by employees that

can verify having sufficient qualifications.
7. A person who independently is to carry out inspection
of heavy-current installations with voltage above
42 V, must be, according to the instructions laid down
for Local Inspection, either a competent electrical
manager, cfr. Appendix I, or an installation inspector,
cfr. Appendix VI.
The Electric.1.i::y ·Inspeci::orate may give a o Lspensa t Lon ,
limited to a certain territory and based upon a nomi-
nation from the responsible manager of the Local In-
spection.
The provisions do not apply to the person who is to
carry out inspection of the distribution network for
low and medium voltage belonging to an Electricity
Supply undertaking. 0
8. A person undertaking activity pursuant to these
Regulations, cannot take part in other activity which
prevents him from undertaking the activity in a
satisfactory way. In case of doubt the decision is

9.
to be taken by the NVE.

When a person undertaking activities pursuant to

0
these Regulations, leaves his job, the Electricity In-
spectorate, or the Local Inspection may, as far as
the Local Inspection is concerned, if necessary, grant
to an employed professional of the company concerned
temporary authority to undertake the activity. Such
authority may only Le granted for 6 months duration.
 13

10. The enforcement of these regulations is carried out

by the NVE via the Electricity Inspectorate, the Local
Inspection and the Special Supervision in accordance
with decisions from NVE. All those who take part in
such activities which are covered by these regulations
have the duty of providing any information considered
necessary for ensuring that the regulations are met.

11. The NVE decides which schools and courses are covered
by the various provisions contained in the Appendices.

12. Training programmes and regulations (rules) for setting

the examinations which are specified in the Appendices
are to be established by the Ministry of Industry and
Handicrafts.

n 13. A person who does not possess the qualifications

specified in the Appendices I to VI may continue his
activity if he is in lawful employment when these
regulations come into force.

14. The right to carry out activity pursuant to these

regulations may be withdrawn by the NVE if the
executant is guilty of grave or continued negligence
in the practice of his activity.

15. The NVE m3y, in particular cases, permit exemntions

from these regulations.

16. These regulations shall come into force immediately.

The provisions concerning requirements relating to

technical training for foremen electricians,
electrical fitters Group L a n d H, lift fitters,
electrical contractors Group L a n d H, power station
electricians Group A and B, lift electricians,
electrical repairers and installation inspectors
working on electrical installations etc. stated by
the Royal Decree of 5 February 1965 and 4 July 1972
are cancelled simultaneously.

0
 14

/IPPENDIX I

Requirements in respect of Education and Training

for Competent Electrical Manager.

Theoretical education Practical training

Graduate from a 2 Years practical experience as an 0,

Technical University engineer {B.Sc.) either in electrical \___
See Notes 1 and 2 contractor companies covering both high
and low voltage installations, or in
Electricity Supply Undertakinas which
have a competent electrical manager.

Graduate from a Alternative 1. Must satisfy the require- /\

2-year Technical ments for electrician Groun H o r power \ ;
School or 2-year station electrician Group A. In addition,
Technical Trade 3 years experience as technician, either
School with additio- in electrical contractor companies,
nal course or from covering both high and low voltage instal-
,.n equi va Lont school lations or in Electricity Supply Under-
See Notes 1 and 2 takings which have a competent electrical
manager.
Alternative 2. 2 years manual experience
in electrical contractor companies or in
Electrical Supply Undertakings. In
addition, 5 years experience as technician,
either in electrical contractor companies
covering both high and low voltage
installations, or in Electricity Supply
Undertakings which have a competent
electrical manager.

Graduate from a Alternative l. Must satisfy the require-

2-year Technical Trade ments for electrician Group H o r power
School or from an station electrician Group A. In addition,
equivalent school 4 years experience as technician, either

n
See Notes l a n d 2 in electrical contractor companies
covering both high and low voltage i n t a l -
lations or in Electricity Supply Under-
takings which have a competent electrical
manager.
Alternative 2. 2 years manual experience
in electrical contractor companies or in
Electricity Supply undertakings. In
addition, 6 years experience as technician,
either in electrical contractor companies
covering both high and low voltage instal-
o
lations, or in Electricity Supply Under-
takings which have a competent electrical
manager.
 15
Note 1.

'rite examination must have been passed in all cases. In addition,

approval from the NVE is reouired.

Note 2.

The theoretical education should have taken place in the h a v y

n current electrical department of the school concerned. The NVE may

permit exemption from this provision for engineers (B.Sc.) who
have passed an examination following an electrical engineering
course (light-current), a constructional course or a machinery
course, when the person concerned has considerable all-round
experience in the operation of Electrical Supply Undertakings which
have a competent electrical manager.

0 Note 3.

A person who is going to undertake the installation activity

according to 2.2 must have had at least 1 year of experience, as
mentioned above, as an engineer (B.Sc.), or 2 years as a technician
in electrical contractor companies.

However, this does not apply when the person concerned has a certi-
ficate as an electrician.

0
 16
APPENDIX II

Requirements in e s p e c t of Education and Training

for Electrical Contractors.

Theoretical education Practical training

Graduate from a For electrical contractors Group L:After

Technical University,
electrical engineering
course (heavy current)
passing examination, 2 years experience
as engineer (B.Sc.) in electrical
contractor companies, low voltage. In
0
See Notes 1 and 2 addition, examination for electrical
contractor Group L must be passed.
For electrical contractors Group H: After
passing examination, 2 years experience
as engineer (B.Sc.) in electrical
contractor companies covering both high
and low voltage installations. In
addition, examination for electrical
contractor Group L must be passed and
approval obtained from the NVE.

Graduate from a 2-year For electrical contractors Group L: Must

Technical School or satisfy requirements for electricians
2-year Technical Trade Group L. In addition, 2 years experience
School, electrical as technician or 4 years experience as
engineering course electrician in electrical contractor
(heavy current) or companies, low voltage, of which at least
from an equivalent 2 years must be after passing examination.
school. In addition, examination for electrical
contractor Group L must be passed.
In addition, candi-
dates must have passed For electrical contractors Group H: Must
a 6-month course in satisfy requirements for electrician Group
book-keeping at an H. In addition, 3 years experience as
approved business technician or 5 years experience as
school or an equiva- electrician in electrical contractor
lent correspondence companies covering both high and low
course. voltage installations, of which at least

0
See Notes 1 and 3. 3 years must be after passing examination.
In addition, examination for electrical
contractor Group L must be passed and
approval obtained from the NVE.

Note 1.

The examination must have been passed in all cases.

Note 2.

The NVE may depart from this provision for engineers (B.Sc.) who
have passed an examinatibn following an electrical engineering
course for liqht current, provided that the person concerned has
a considerable all-round experience of installation activities.
 17

Note 3.

The body who organizes the examinations may grant exemption from
the requirements regarding experience as electrician after passing
the examination when the person concerned has particularly long
experience as an electrician and in cases in which this require-
ment would be unreasonable.

0
 18
APPENDIX III

Requirements in respect of Training for Lift

Contractors

Theoretical education Practical training

Graduate from a After passing examination, 2 years

Technical University, experience as engineer (B.Sc.) in lift
electrical engineer-
ing course (heavy or
light current) or
contractor companies, and approval from
the NVE. 0
machinery course.
See Note 1.

Graduate from a 2- Alternative 1. Must satisfy the require-

year Technical School ments for lift electrician. In addition,
or 2-year Technical 2 years experience as technician or 4
Trade School, electri- years experience as lift electrician in
cal engineering course lift contractor companies, of which at
(heavy or light least 2 years must be after passing
current) or machinery examination, and approval from the NVE.
course, or from an
Alternative 2. 2 Years manual experience
equivalent school.
and 4 years experience as technician in
See Note 1. lift contractor companies and approval
from the NVE.

Note 1.

The examination must have been passed in all cases.

Note 2.

Electrical contractors Group L may work as lift contractors after

2 years all-round experience in lift contractor companies after
having passed the examination, and approval from the NVE.

0
 19
APPENDIX IV

Requirements in respect of Education and Training

for Electricians Group L, Electricians Group Hl),
Power-Station Electricians Group A, power-station
electricians Group B {line electricians), and Lift
Electricians.

0 Enucation and practical Trade examination

training

Alternative 1 The prescribed training in accordance

Districts with Apprentice
School.
4 years apprenticeship on
contract while simultaneously
following normal apprentice
school electrical engineer-
ing course for heavy current.
with an approved training programme
confers the right to apply for a
trade examination for the trade
concerned.
The trade examination must have been
passed.

Alternative 2 l)In order to be permitted to take the

Districts without Apprentice trade examination for electrician Group
School. H, candidates are required to have, in
4 years apprenticeship on addition to training as Electrician
contract while simultaneously Group L, one year's anproved·experience
following a correspondence as assistant in the construction of
course approved for the high voltaqe installations {cfr. rules
theoretical training of for taking the trade examination for
electricians in electrical electricians Group H).
trades. Testimony showing
that the school work has
been carried out is to be
produced. _
Where practical trade
training has been taken
earlier the body which

n
organizes the trade exami-
nation may grant an
appropriate reduction of the
apprenticeship.

o Note 1.

Reduction of apprenticeship on account of school training.

24 months reduction for electrician Group L, power station

electrician Group A and Group B a n d lift electrician will be
given on account of:
2-year factory school attennance (apnrnved basic and
advanced school).
 2')

To obtain full reduction, the factory school attendance must be

complete before the_apprenticeship commerce.

14 months reduction will be given on account of:

2- or 3-year technical school attendance

2-year technical trade school attendance
1-year factory school attenGance. If this school has followed
Plan II, the school traininq must be finished by taking the final
year at the apnrentice school or an equivalent school. To obtain
full reduction, the factory school attendance must be completed
before the apprenticeship commences.
o
In all schoolinq mentioned above. the electrical engineering course
for heavy current is required.

10 months reduction will be given on account of 1-year ship

electrician school. C)
9 months reduction will be given on account of 1-year factory school,
electrical engineering course for light current.

6 months reduction will be given on account of:

Elementary technical school, electrical engineering

course for heavy current.
1-year factory school for mechanics.

The total reduction for school at.tendaDce, except f,r 2-year factory
school (approved basic and advanced factorv school) electrical enqineer-
i g course for ncavy current, cannot exceed 14 months. The examination
must be passed in all cases.

Note 2.

A trade examination may also be taken by persons who, without having

obtained apprenticeship on contract, have at least 25% longer
approved experience in the trade than the aoprenticeship and who
at least satisfy the requirement under lternative 2 in respect of
theoretical training. 0
'-
Experience shall be recorded in a work book or by means of snecified
documents. The total of experience time and school reduction must
be at least 5 years.

Exemption from the provision concerning 25% longer experience for

those who have not obtained apprenticeship on contract may be granted
following application to the body which organizes the trade exami-
nation, provided the applicant can prove, by hi work book or
0
specified documents, that he has obtained practical training as
required by the training orogramme for his trade.
 21

Note 3.

Electricians Group L who also have a certificate as power-station

electricians Group A will also satisfy the requirements for
electricians Group H. Electricians in one Group may take a trade
examination in another Group where they have additional experience
covering the special branches of the trade in which they did not
undergo training previously. This is accepted provided that the
person concerned has obtained the theoretical training which is
required for taking the trade examination in the other Group.

The following rules apply:

Electrician With additional

0
Group May take trade test for experience

Electrician Power-station electrician Group A 1 year

Group L Power-station electrician Group B 1 year
Lift electricians 2 years

Power-station Electrician Group L 1 year

Electrician
Group A

Power-station Electrician Group L 2 years

Electrician Power-station electrician Group A 1 year
Group B

Lift electrician Electrician Group L 2 years

Note 4.

The NVE may, in special cases, grant exemptions from the requirements
for power-station electricians Group B, so that specially trained
personnel at an Electricity Supply Undertaking may be granted a
temporary authority to undertake fault locations and fault
corrections in the installations of the Electricity Supply Under-

0 taking mentioned in 4.2

The NVE may also, in special cases, grant exemptions from the require-
ments for power-station electricians Group B when the Electricity
Supply Undertaking has problems with the training and/or obtaining of
probationary labour.

0
 22

APPENDIX V

Peguirements in respect of Education and Training

for Electrical Repairers.

Theoretical education Practical training

The apprentice school

curriculum in elec-
trical engineering
and electrical engi-
neering drawing, or
equivalent education.
3 years experience in the maintenance of
electrical apparatus and equipment which
are subject to approval, together with
C
approval by a Certificate from the
Certification Committee, c/o the
Association of Norwegian Electricity
Supply Undertakings.

C)
Note 1.
Reduction in apprenticeship on account of school education.

20 months reduction will be given for 2-year factory school attendance

(approved basic and advanced factory school).

12 months reduction will be given for:

2- or 3-year technical school attendance

2-year technical trade school attendance
1-year factory school attendance.

In all schools completion of the electrical engineerin course for

heavy current is required.

10 months reduction will be given on account of 1-year nttendance at

ship's electrician school.

9 months reduction will be given on account of 1-year factory school

attenJance, electrical enqinecrin course for light current.

6 months reduction will be given on account of:

Elementary technical school, electrical engineering

course for heavy current.
0
1-year factory school atten<lnnce for mechanics.

The total reduction for schools, except for 2-year factory school
(approved basic and advanced factory school) electrical engineering
course for heavy current, cannot exceed 12 months. The examination
must be passed in all cases.
 23

APPENDIX VI

Pequirements in respect of Education and Training

for Installation Inspectors.

0 Theoretical education

Graduate from a 2-year

Practical training

Must satisfy the rPqujrements for

Technical School or 2- electrician Group L.
year Technical Trade
School, electrical In addition to this is required:
engineering course for Either 1-year'sexperience as an

0 heavy current, or from

an equivalent school.
assistant in installation inspection
after passing the examination, or 1-
years experience as a technician in
See Note 1. electrical contractor companies, low
voltage, or 2 years experience as an
electrician in electrical contractor
companies, low voltage.

Note 1.

The examination must be passed in all cases.

0
 24
GENERAL NOTES

Concerning item 2.

The nrovision "is to be undertaken by" means that the electrical

contractor for independent installation work can only make use
of electricians that are employees of the electrical contracting
company whose work he is undertaking. Furthermore, this means
that these electricians are under his charge and that he is
responsible for the professional construction of the instal-
lations in accordance with the Pegulations for electrical
installations in force, and that all materials and equipment
which are used and which are subject to compulsory control, are
approved by the Norwegian Electrical Materials Testing Station
(abbr. NEMKO).

Concerning item 2.4. 0

The exoreqsinn "where operational circumstances make it necessary"
means that authority can be granted only on the basis of careful
assessment of the comoany's need, as this authority is contingent
upon the production (operation) upon which the comoany (enterprise)
is dependent being maintained without interruption.

Enterprises w h c h in this connection may be regarded as industrial

companies are, for example:

Larger entrepreneur activities, hospitals, certain civic depart-

ments (fire-offices, road boards, water boards and sewage boards),
certain public institutions, research institutions, laboratories
and theatres. Similar arrangements may, under certain circum-
stances, also be preferred for larger business and office buildings.

Concerning item 3.

The term "lift" sionifies lifting equipment fitted inside or

outside b u i l d i n s which:
l. Is equipped with a chair or platform running in fixed guides;

2. Carries a load suspended directly on a rope (cahle, chain) 0

running over a block or pulley and is intended for use between
two or more floors, galleries, platforms, etc. The term
"lifts" is not, however, considered to cover cranes of any
kind, travelling winches or overhead trolleys, where these
are intended for the transport of goods or workpieces within
one and the same storey or are installed in the ooen air, nor
does it cover conveyor belts, lifts for letters and other
documents having a lifting capacity of 12ss than 10 kg and a
0
shaft cross-section not exceeding 0.05 m , or temporary
installations such as lifting tackle, scaffolding lifts, etc.
Thesame applies to lifts of special desiqn or for special
purposes (e.g. escalators, lowering equipment in theatres
(scenery lifts etc.)
 25
Concerning item 4.
n e term "electrical contracting conr-any" s Lon t.f t.es , in
this connection, also Electricity Supply Undertakings as
mentioned in 2.1, industrial companies as mentioned in 2.2,
contracting firms as mentioned in 2.3, and industrial
companies and similar as mentioned in 2.4.

Concerning item 5.

0 As far as the understanding of the statement "equipment having

connection with the electrical installation or of inportance
for safety during operation of electrical lift installation" is
concerned, attention is drawn to the problems which are stated
in the training plan for the lift electrician in section B,
item 2.

Concerning item 6.1

At the moment, such an approved branch service a e n c y exists

only for radio and television sets.

General.

'l'he term "employed" s Lonifies in these K-equlations that t.he

person concerned has a proner employee relationshin to the company.
This means that there exists a labour agreement between the
nerson concerned and the company, and that the comnanv is paying
the employer-share of the national insurance premium, and deducts
income-tax before payment of salary.

n
 26

PROVISIONS REGARDING THE RELATIONSHIP

BETWEEN PUBLIC ROADS AND ELECTRICAL
SUPPLY LINE INSTALLATIONS

Promulgated in Ministry of Labour and 0

Municipal Affairs Circular to County
Council Chairman dated 5 December 1935
with Amendments of November 1940 and
November 1964

A. Installations and maintenance of

0
electrical 3uryryly lines in rela-
tion to existing-or planned roads

1. GenePaZ pPovisions

§ 1. Installations of the type herein discussed may not, without

permission, be laid over, under or along a public road, or
closer than 3 m to its border, or within such greater dis-
tance as may be determined pursuant t o § 32 of the Road Law
of 21 June 1963.

In the case of the Telegraph Office it is sufficient that

the work be notified unless a cable installation is involved.
Attention is drawn to the Law of 9 June 1903 (Telegraph Law).

Permission will in the first instance be given by the High-

ways Manager in the case of national or county roads, and
by the Town Council for municipal roads. In the case of
national or county roads which are maintained by a munici-
pality, the Highways Manager may depute the granting of per-
mission to a Town Council. Such Town Council may depute
the decision to a specially selected or municipal official,
o
s e e § 9 of the Road Law.

§ 2. An application for permission shall be accompanied by a plan

n
and description, where necessary related to poles or marks
on the site.

Before the installation or large-scale repairing of supply

line installations of any kind is embarked upon, the High-
ways Manager of the County concerned shall beinfotmed at
least four weeks in advance.
 27

Likewise, in the case of supply lines to be installed in

areas containing no public roads, the Highways Authority
shall be informed. so that it may, where appropriate, pro-
vide details regarding the routes of planned roads or

0 roads under construction so that due account may be taken

of them.

Electricity supply line installation shall as far as pos-

sible be adapted to existing overall planning.

Should the Highways Manager find it necessary, the installa-

0
tion shall be inspected in the company of a representative
of the owner or builder of the installation for the purpose
of discussing the plan and execution of the work.

§ 3. The Highways authority will make available without payment

the ground required for poles and masts together with their
foundations and for·the laying of cables, etc. provided that
traffic and other considerations do not make this impossible.

§ 4. The electrical installation's owner or builder shall inform

the Highways Authority of the name of his responsible manger
on the work site. The Highways Authority shall for its part
notify the name of its representative on the site.

§ 5. The owner of the installation has the duty of carrying out

at his own expense such measures as the Highways Authority
may consider necessary with regard to the road or to traffic
in view of the work on the lines, and these measures may in-
clude the use of special supervision.

(Regarding protection of the electricity supply lines

0
during work carried out by the Highways Authority, see
§ 28.)
§ 6. Nork on electricity supply lines in the vicinity of the
road shall be completed as rapidly as possible. Provisio-
nal rehabilitation of the road by means of ditches, ramps,
etc. shall be undertaken by the owner of the line instal-
lation, but the Highways Authority reserves the right to
carry out any necessary finishing work at the latter's
expense.

An agreement may also be made in advance between the owner

and the Highways Authority, in particular where a cable
installation is involved, as to a "once for all" price or
alternatively, a unit price per metre for the rehabilita-
tion of the road.
 28

Fallen Electrical supply lines and poles or lines and poles

which are likely to fall may, where they may be expected to
cause an accident on a public road, be removed or temporari-
ly repaired by the Highways Authority at the owner's expense.
The owner or his representative on site must be informed as
rapidly as possible.

§ 7. Installations and supply lines utilizing ground adjoining a 0

public road are as a rule permitted on only one side of the
road. The other side may, however, also be used insofar as
considerations relating to the road and to traffic do not
forbid this. One and the same line installation should not
occupy more than one side of the road.

The installation shall as far as possible to be constructed

and laid out that it does not detrementally affect the ap-
0
pearance of the road.

§ 8. Crossing of the road shall be avoided wherrver possible

(see § 16).

§ 9. Where a new line of poles is installed or where an old line

is rebuilt or extensively repaired, and a considerable num-
ber of poles replaced, the poles and pole-supporters, mast
foundations, struts, stays, etc. shall be sited at such
minimum distance from the edge of the carriageway as con-
sideration of the nature of the road, its traffic and main-
tenance (including snow clearance) shall dictate, such
distance being as a rule at least 3 m o r such greater dis-
tance as may be determined pursuant t o § 32 of the Road Law.
Where poles are sited on ground adjoining a road, the per-
mission of the Highways Manager or Town council must in all
cases have been obtained.

A lesser distance than specified above may be permitted upon

request where this is of particular importance with regard
to the line installation, and the maintenance of the road
and its appropriate use will not thereby be impeded. Normal
local snow-clearance requirements must be taken into con-
sideration, particularly where experience shows that large
amounts of snow are occasionally encontered.

Where difficulties of terrain require poles to be fastened

to rock, they shall be so sited that they do not restrict
overhead clearance within 3 m above the carriageway.

Poles and their accessories shall, in addition, be so sited

Q
that they do not cause the collapse of slopes, obstruct
ditches, drainage and maintenance and in no case impede free
vision on corners.
 29

Poles must be so stayed that they do not lean towards the

road, except for the amount of inclination which is required
in angles. Poles shall, in addition, be robust and present
a good appearance not detrimental to their surroundings.

§ 10. The siting of lines on bridges shall be governed by provi-

n
sions to be made in each individual case by the Highways
Authority on the basis of proposals put forward by the owner
of the line.

Cables shall as a rule be sited under the roadway of the

bridge.

§ 11. Should it be subsequently found that a sunnly linA installation

G impedes the proper use of the road or the execution of n e c e s a -

ry -mrks upon it, or alterations to it, the owner of the line
shall at the request of the Highways Authority cause the line
installation to be temporarily or permanently modified or re-
moved. At least 4 week's notice shall be given of such re-
quest for the moving or modification of sur,ply lines.
lvhere a supoly line installation is sited on ground belonging
to the Highways Authority, the costs invnlved in the modifica-
tion or moving of that installation shall be borne by its owner
unless otherwise specified in the Conditions ot Sanction or of
the Telegraph Law. Where the lines are situated outside the
road area, the costs shall be borne by the Highways Authority
unless other arrangements have been made beforehand {e.g. in
the sanction provisions) or the moving is a direct consequence
of essential modifications to the line in the road area.

§ 12. Any claim for compensation which may be raised by a third

party in connection with the position of the road area in
relation to a line installation shall not concern the
Highways Authority.

The Highways Authority shall on request indicate the limits

of the road area in cases of doubt.
0 § 13. When the owner of an electrical installation wishes to carry
out maintenance or repair work on his supply lines and the
work is such that it may be of interest to the Highways
Authority, as in the case of digging or the moving of poles,
such work shall be notified to the Highways Manager so that

0 the latter may safequard the Highways Authority's interests.

The setting to rights of sudden breakdowns may be started

where such breakdown is of vital importance. Should the
work involve any operations affecting the use of the road,
its maintenance or repair, this shall be reported as soon
as possible to the local road inspector.
 30

§ 14. When the Telegraph Office undertakes capital repairs to older

line installations, every effort shall be made to observe the
above provisions. The Highways Authority cannot, however,
require poles, etc. to be moved further away from the road
than outside the road area unless it agrees to bear the cost
differential involved by the increased distance, including
the increased basic compensation.

§ 15. The Highways Authority reserves the right to vary the above
rules to the extent permitted b y § 32 of the Road Law.
0

11. Special Provi.Jions for Overhead Lines

Telegraph, Telephone and other Ligt-Current Lines 0
§ 16. The length of crossing spans shall, wherever possible, not
exceed 40 m.

Lines running along a road should not hang over the carriage-
way. Where this is unavoidable, the distance between poles
should be reduced.

The height of the lowest conductor shall not be less than 5 m

above roads subject to snowfall.

Heavy-Current Lines at Low-Voltage

§ 17. The crossing of public roads and the siting of lines adjacent
to public roads must be carried out in accordance with the Regu-
lations for Electrical Istallations from t i e to time in
force.

The height of the lowest conductor above roads subject to snow-

fall shall not be less than 5 m.

Heavy-Current Lines at.High-Voltage

§ 18. The crossing of public roads and the siting of lines adjacent
to public roads must be carrien "ou t, d n accorc!ance with the Regu-
lations for Electrical Installations from time to time in
force (which, inter alia, at present forbid a height of less ()
than 7 m for general power lines).
 31

111. Special Provisions for Underground Cables

§ 19. Underground supply cables shall be laid in the ditches, slop-

ing edges or pavement of a road on the proposal of the owner
of the cable installation and in accordance with further pro-
visions laid o w n by the Highways Authority. Where conditions
necessitate the laying of cables in the carriageway proper,
they must not, without special permission from the Highways

0 Authority, lie at a total distance of more than 0.50 m from

the edge of the road.

Crossings of the carriageway, which shall be avoided where-

ever possible, should be effected at right-angles to the dir-
ection gf the road or at all events at an angle of not less
than 45 to that direction.

0 § 20. The earth, etc. extracted from cable trenches, shall be stacked
in such a manner that an unobstructed and safe carriageway not
less than 4 m wide is always available. Where this carriage-
way must in exceptional cases be narrower, passing-places at
least 12 m i n length shall be temporarily constructed with
the aid of timbering or by some other means, being located
iri places which offer a good view and are not more than 50 m
apart.

Such passing-places should be arranged in advance and not

after digging has started in the places concerned.

During the hours of darkness the work-site shall be marked

with lights.

§ 21. The Highways Authority, and whP.re approprinte the owner of the
supply line, shall have the right h i l e the wor i in oroaress
to lay drainage in the bottom of the cable-trench, which will
in such case have its depth increased.

Additional costs will be borne by the party requiring such

n
drainage to be laid, unless an agreement for sharing such
costs is reached.

The cable-trench must not impede or hinder the escape of

water.

§ 22. Cables shall be covered with robust slabs, tiles or other

suitable material, wherever possible of such kind that they

0 can be readily separated from the filling of the trench

during subsequent excavations.

The covering of armoured light-current cables may be omitted

at the line owner's own risk.
 32

§ 23. The position of cables should be marked by means of buried

bricks, posts consisting of double material or similar makers
of suitable height bearing an inscription indicating the loca-
tion of the cable and the horizontal distance to the centre
of the cable-trench. Such· markers shall be not more than 100 m
apart, and closer where the direction alters considerably in
relation to the line of the road. If posts or pillars are
used as markers these shall be placed at a distance from the
carriageway determined in accordance w i t h § 9.
0
The positioning and maintenance of markers is the responsibility
of the owner of the line. The marking of light-current sub-
scribers' cables, except where roads are crossed, may be omit-
ted at the owner's own risk.

In addition, immediately after the completion of the work,

the owner of the electrical installation shall ensure that
0
a map or clear sketch-map is supplied to the Highways Authori-
ty showing the location of cables together with other impor-
tant information.

B. Construction, alteration, widening and

maintenance of roads in relation to
existing electrical installations

§ 24. Where the construction, alteration or widening of a road

affects a lawfully existing electrical supply line installa-
tion, such that the moving or modification of the latter
become necessary, the Highways Authority shall bear all the
costs involved unless the supply line occupies the original
road area ( s e e § 11) or the sanction granted for the elec-
trical installation concerned contained special provisions
in this regard or the installation had been constructed
without account being taken of the future planned road-line.
§ 25. The degree to which a suppLy line ins talla t i " - need be moved oO
secured should, wherever possible, be agreed between the
Highways Authority and the owner of the line installation
before work is commenced.

An attempt shall also be made to decide upon the sharing of

the costs in advance.
Compensation paid for the moving, securing and repair work
may include only the direct costs, from which shall be de-
0
ducted the value of any old materials and equipment remain-
ing unused.
 33

The work involved in the moving, securing and repair shall

be carried out in a reasonable manner and as cheaply as
possible, use being made of general labour available on
the site insofar as this is possible.

When roads are planned, account shall, wherever possible,

be taken of existing and planned supply line installations.

§ 26. When ground movements or slips occur as a r s u l t of road

construction, the cost of repairs to supply· lines shall be
borne by the Highways Authority.

§ 27. When the owner of an electrical supply line installation

originally possessed the land upon which the poles were
erected, but subsequently gave up such land without com-

0 pensation for the purposes of road construction, all

future re-sitings required in relation to the road, shall
be paid for by the road construction company.

The compensation to be paid shall not be affected by the

manner in which the land was acquired (free or against
payment).

§ 28. When the Highways Authority intends to undertake work in

or near the road area which may be of importance with re-
gard to an electrical supply line installation, but which
does not involve the modification or moving of that instal-
lation ( s e e § 11), this should be notified in good time to
the owner of the installation or to the official in charge
of it so that such person may safeguard his interests.

In this connection, the Highways Authority shall observe all

necessary precautions to ensure that damage to the supply
line installation is as far as oossible avoided. Should
this result in extraordinary co;ts, these shall be borne
by the owner of the line installation if it stands in the
road area.

With regard to the arrangement of the work and the ordinary

0 costs, attention is directed t o § 25 and 11.

Where a line installation sited outside the road area is in-

volved, the owner may, after prior notice, undertake at the
expense of the Highways Authority such work as may appear
necessary as the result of road works affectinq his installa-
tion, includinq the use of soeci31 o e r v i s i o n (see 5 5).

0 In addition, the Highways Authority shall, insofar as it may

give permission to third parties to carry out works on its
land, impose the condition that the person concerned shall
qive timely notice to the owner of an electrical supply.
line installation.
 34

§ 29. When public roads are laid, along which lines of poles are
erected, the Highway Authority should warn the owner of the
electrical supply lines that the land occupied by the poles
in the road must be rearranged to the best advantage, or,
where the State itself owns the line installations, the
Highways Authority should co-operate in this effect.

§ 30. Disputes regarding the interpretation of the foregoing pro-

visions shall, where agreement cannot otherwise be reached,
be finally decided by the Crown or a person authorized by
0
the Crown.

n
 35

INSTRUCTION
FOR
THE LOCAL INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

0
Drawn up 1 November 1973 by the Norwegian Water Resources and
Electricity Board (abbreviated NVE) pursuant to Act relating
to the supervision of electrical installations of 24 May 1929
§ 10 and the Regulations for electrical installations of 5

0 December 1963.

1. The Local Inspection has the duty of ensuring that the

provisions which apply to the electrical installations
concerned are o s e r v e d and of ascertaining, by means of
inspection on the spot, that the Regulations are obeyed.
In the exercise of this duty behaviour in an unbiased
and tactful manner shall be shown.

2. The Local Inspection is subject to control of the Electri-

city Inspectorate. In other respects the same provisions
apply to Local Inspection as those laid down i n § 5 t o § 8
of the above mentioned Act with regard to the Electricity
Inspectorate (see a l s o § 13 of the Act), but a demand that
an installation shall be stopped or removed must be issued
by the Electricity Inspectorate.

3. The person responsible for Local Inspection shall be approved

by the NVE.

4. The person carrying out Local Inspection (the installation

inspector) shall have the technical training and education

0
which at any time is laid down pursuant t o § 12 of the Act.

S. The person carrying out Local Inspection shall unsolicited

exhibit his authorization. The authorization shall be issued
by the owner of the works.

Inspections shall be carried out with the frequency laid down

0
6.
at any time by the NVE ( s e e § 4 of the Regulations).

7. All inspections shall be entered in a card-index approved by

the Electricity Inspectorate.
The card-index shall show when the inspection has been carried
out, the date of the inspection report and whether faults de-
tected during an inspection has been rectified.
 36

8. Instructions concerning faults and defects shall be made

in writing on printed forms approved by the Electricity
Inspectorate. A suitable short period shall be specified
for rectifying of faults and defects. A report is also
to be submitted in cases where nothing has to be rectified.
Information about right to complain, the period of complaint
and the further manner of proceeding when complaining, are

0
to be given pursuant to the appropriate Act.

9. Serious failures to obey the Regulations shall be notified

without delay to the legal authorities ( s e e § 32 of the
Regulations).

10. The following shall, in all cases and without delay, be

reported to the Electricity Inspectorate:
0
a. Matters notified to the legal authorities together
with the outcome of such cases.
b. Accidents caused by electric current which have led
to death or injury.
c. Decisions which are made by the Local Inspection pur-
suant to § 6 of the Regulati_ons.
In addition, special circumstances should be reported
whenever this is found necessary.

11. A report concerning the inspection work carried out durinq

the previous calendar year is to !:Je forward:;!,:!to the Elec-
tricity Inspectorate on ah appropriate form by 1 February
the following year.

12. This Instruction may be obtained on application to the Elec-

tricity Inspectorate. The Local Inspection shall ensure that
each installation inspector is furnished with a copy of this
Instruction.

13. This Instruction enters into force 1 January 1974. The In-
struction of April 1964 is simultaneously cancelled. 0
 37

ACCIDENTS CAUSED BY ELECTRIC CURRENT

Precautionary rules issued by

the Norwegian Water Resources and
Electricity Board l971

0 1. Release the injured from contact with the live parts

as quickly as possible.

Disconnect the part of the installation from the supply.

If this is not possible, you may - provided you are fami-
liar with the method - attempt to release the injured
from the live parts.
0 In the case of high-voltage, this must be effected by
means of suitably insulated objects. If you are dealing
with low-voltages, you may take hold of the injured's
dry clothes, or wrap some dry clothes around yours hands.

Frequently, substantial force is needed to release the

injured. Take precautions, so that you yourself, or the
injured, are not subject to dangerous falls etc.

2. If the injured is not breathing, start artificial

resuscitation immediately.

As soon as the injured is released from the live parts,

start artificial resuscitation by using the mouth to
mouth method. Do not waste any time by loosening tight
clothing, belts etc. Neither should the call for medical
assistance, which ought to take place as soon as possible,
in any way delay the commencement of artificial resuscita-
tion. Any delay may be fatal. Transport to a doctor or
hospital must only take place if the artificial resuscita-
tion can continue unumpeded. It may be necessary for the
artificial resuscitation to continue for a long period of
time. Even if the injured starts breathing, he must be
watched carefully, so that resuscitation may commence again
immediately should a relapse occur. Do not give the injured
anything to drink before he has gained complete conscious-
ness.

n 3. Transport to hospital.

If the pulse does not start beating again after a few minutes
of artificial resuscitation, all efforts should be aimed at
transporting the injured to hospital.

Artificial resuscitation by the mouth to mouth method com-

bined with external compression of the heart must continue
uninterrupted during transportation.
 38

These two methods of artificial resuscitation in combina-

tion may sustain life for a long period of time. One can-
not state for how long the artificial resuscitation ought
to continue. This should, if possible, be decided by a
c :tor.
Unconscious persons who are breathing, must
one side with the head bent backwards, also
sportation, in order to prevent blocking of
ages by the tongue falling back or because
pieces of food etc.
always lie on
during tran-
the air pass-
of blood,
o
A stable position on the side may be achieved by placing
the unconscious person on his side with the lower leg bent
at the hip and at the knee so that he cannot fall forwards.
Place the lower arm so that it points backwards so that he f\
..
cannot roll over on his back. Place the other hand below ,
the cheek.

4. Other types of treatment.

In the case of fractures, normal first aid treatment must

take place.

Burns must be covered by sterile bandages. The injured

person must be kept warm by blankets etc. He must not be
given anything to drink before he has regained full con-
sciousness.

Persons who have been subject to electric shock must always

be checked by a doctor, as they may have received hidden
injuries.

5. ThP mnuth to mnuth method.

It is necessary for artificial respiration to succeed, for
there to be free air access to the lungs. To achieve this,
bend the head as far back as possible.
0
THROAT AIR PIPE

0
 39

Place the injured person on his back. With one hand placed
on the forehead and the other hand below the neck, bend the
head of the injured as far back as possible. This position
of the head must be maintained all the time during the arti-
ficial respiration.

()

0
Breathe deeply, open you mouth, press your cheek against
the nostrils of th injured and place your mouth over the
mouth of the injured. Blow in through the mouth. The
chest will then lift as a sign that air is getting into
.the lungs.

Remove your mouth and place your ear near the mouth of
the injured. You should then be in a position to hear
and feel air being released from the injured at the same
time as the chest falls.

n
n Repeat the blowing action 15 - 20 times a minute. If air
should leak out through the nose of the injured during the
blowing phase, the nostrils may be blocked by pressing
thumb and forefinger over them, but the head must at all
times be pressed backwards.
 40

If you do not succeed in blowing in air, this may be caused

by pieces of food etc. in the mouth or throat. Turn the
head and shoulders of the injured over on the side and clean
out the objects blocking the air passages with your finger
etc. This must also be done should the injured vomit.

6. External heart compression.

If one is certain that air is getting into the lungs during

the blowing phase, and the condition of the injured still
does not improve noticeably 1-2 minutes after the accident,
o
the reason may be that the heart has ceasPd to function.

Try first to feel the pulse on the throat by pressing just

infront of the slanting throat muscle. In the case of un-
consciousness, no respiration, enlarged pupils, and no
pulse being felt on the throat, external heart compression
must take place at the same time as artificial respiration.

If there are two rescuers present, one must perform the

artificial respiration while the other perform the external
heart compression, alternatively. The rescuer must give
15 heart compressions followed by blowing in of air 3 times.
0

n
/
_/
 - - - - - - - - · · - - - -

41

To perform the external heart compression the injured must

lie on his back on a surface which does not yield (e.g. the
floor). Kneel beside the injured. Place the lower part of
the palm over the lower part of the breast-bone, and place
the other hand on top of this again. In order to prevent
breaking of ribs, only the lower part of the palm should be
in contact with the breast-bone. Press quickly downwards,
so forcibly that the breast-bone can be seen to move. After
this, release the pressure, so that the chest can expand

0 completely.

Repeat the compressions 60 - 80 times a minute. The heart

compression should be carried out using straight arms.
Lift the legs of the injured to ease the return of the
blood to the heart.

7. Artifiaiai resusaitation shouid be praatiaed thoroughiy,

and aiso repeated at ieast onae every year.

See also Norwegian Peoples' Relief Association's: "Handbook

in first aid and industrial hygiene" and also the Ministry
of Education's: "Book in life saving".
 COMMUNICATIONS FROM THE NVE, DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

C O N T E N T S

The communications marked·x in the following list were

withdrawn from the assigned date, arid are omitted from
0 this t.r
ans Lat Lon.

No. Page
Lighting equipment for ski-runs, Christmas
0 street decorations, outdoor Christmas trees,
etc . 5

1/64 Instructions for the use of Thawing Trans-

formers . 6

2/64 Testing of insulators . 8

1/65 Earthing Apparatus 9

2/65 Radio interference caused by mercury-vapour

lamps and combined mercury-vapour and incan-
descent lamps ................................... 14

3/65x Use of approved electrical equipment and appara-

tus on board ships.
Withdrawn l J l v 1 0 7 .
4/65 Circular to Manufacturers and Importers of
Caravans 15

1/66 Proviions regarding electrical installations

in caravans 17

0 2/66 Replacement of insulators found to be causing

noise during the inspection of older high-
voltage lines ................................... 20

3/66 Testing and use of permanently-fitted knife

switches for earthing ........................... 21

0 4/66 Earthing apparatus .............................. 23

1/67 Periodic inspections of electrical installations

which are subject to notification 25

2/67 Notification in accordance with Area Concession 27

3/67x Gas-discharge tube installations for voltage
between 750 and 6000 V.
n:::hdcawn 1 J n l · 1 9 7 5
No. Page

4/67 Inspection of Electrical Lift instal-

lations which are subject to notification 28

5/67 Rod-type insulators in stays 29

6/67 Electrical installations in automobile

7/67
washing and lubrication bays

Damage to plastic insulated single conductor

30
0
multi-stranded wire (type PN} in conduit
installations . . .. .. .. . . . ... . .. . .. ... . .. . ... .. . 32

1/68 Faults on suspension insulators 34

2/68 Electrical installations in prefabricated

houses . .. .. ... . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . ... .. . ... . .. .. 35
0
1/69 Temporary low-voltage installations on
building si tes etc. . . .. . .. . .. . ... .. . ... . .. .. . . 38

2/69 Operating regulations for high-voltage

installations "Voltage testing" . 40

3/69x Temporary provisions regarding the design of

outdoor heating cable installations in places
having normal traffic.
Withdrnwn 1 July 1976

1/70 Law of 19 June 1969 regarding construction

and operation of electrical installations ..... 42

2/70x Provisions regarding the use of autotrans-

formers for apparatus connected to the mains.
Withdrawn 1 July 1976

3/70 Temporary provisions regarding the design of

installations using high voltage aerial

l/7lx
cables for voltages up to 24 kV

Prohibition against use of the cable types

. 46
0
PBj, PRj and PRLj having cross-section
exceeding 1.5 mm in medium-voltage instal-
lations with directly-earthed neutral.
Hithdrawn ·l July 1976

2/71 Dangers associated with uninsulated wires

attached to house walls 54 0
3/7lx Electrical installations in bomb shelters
Regulations for Electrical Installations§ 499.
1 t h d r a w n · 1 July 1976
 No. Page
4/71 Installation and loading of high-voltage
cables having cross-linked polyethylene
insulation, type TXSP ("PEX-cable")
§§ 649, 677 and 678 of the Regulations 56

1/72 Plastic conduit installations 58

0 2/72 Electrical installations on board ships.

Design of conduit installations with fittings
etc. of the FIBO-blocking system 61
3/72 Aerial cable of the type EXW and EX .......... 63
4/72x Input from cable mains. Regulations for
Electrical Installations§ 432.
Withdrawn 1 July 1976
5/72x Loading and fusing of insulated leads
2nd
cables2having cross-section of 0.75 mm and
1.0 mm for control-current and signalling
installations etc.
Withdrawn 1 July 1976
l/73x Provisions concerning safety equipment,
notification and inspection of electrical
installations in mobile cranes and lifts.
Withdrawn·l July 1976
2/73x Provisions regarding the design and operation
of: A. Electrical hot-air units
B. Heating elements installed in
air ducts for local heating.
Withdrawn 1 July 1976
3/73 Electric cables in sauna bathrooms 65
4/73 Protection of distribution transformers

n
on poles 67
5/73x Regulations for Electrical Installations§ 477
No-load voltages for welding equipment.
Withdrawn 1 July 1976
l/74x Insulated leads and cables having
conductors of cross-sections 16 mm21umini
and umm m2.
25

n 2/74x
!lithdrawn 1 July 1976
Regulations for heating cable installations
in combustible floors.
Withdrawn 1 July 1976
 - - - - - - - - - - - - -

No. Page

3/74 Regulations for erection of dry-insulated

transformers . 68

1/75 Act of 19 June 1969 relating_to construction and

operation of electrical installations . 71

2/75 Regulations for temporary high-voltage cable

installations . 72 0
1/76 Regulations for plastic conduit installations
on board ships . 74

2/76 Decision concerning Local Inspection of

medium-voltage plants . 77

3/76 Precautions against children climbing high-

voltage masts . 78

4/76 Regulations for electrical installations

on board ships . 79

1/77 Provisional Regulations for Electrical

Installations in Explosive Areas . 81

2/77 Suspension (aerial) cables types EXW and EX . 126

3/77 Location of transformer kiosks . 128

1/78 Regulations for construction, operation, main-

tenance, etc. of transportable electrical in-
stallations for rock-crushing plants, plants for
the production of oiled gravel and similar in-
stallations . 129

2/78 Provisions concerning the replacement of un-

insulated lines leading to house walls . 137

3/78 Operating regulations for high-voltage installa-

tions . . .. .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. ... 138 0
4/78 Common Nordic Provisions for electrical installa-
tions in prefabricated dwellinghouses intended
for exportation between the Nordic countries .. 161
 5

COMMUNICATION
from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

n I Lighting equipment for ski-runs, Christmas street

decorations, outdoor Christmas trees, etc.

0 Ever-increasing use has in recent years been made of lighting

equipment for ski-runs, Christmas street decorations, outdoor
Christmas trees, etc.

It is known that the lighting equipment which has been used

for the purposes mentioned has in some cases not been of
approved design.
It is therefore considered necessary to require that lighting
equipment of this type intended for outdoor use shall be tested
and approved by the Norwegian Board for Testing and Approval of
Electrical Equipment (NEMKO) before it is sold and used in Norway.

Lighting equipment for the purposes mentioned which is not of

approved design but is already in use must be replaced. A
suitable short period within which such replacement must be
made shall be determined by the Electricity Supply Undertaking
concerned, where necessary in consultation with the Electricity
Inspectorate.

Oslo, 9 September 1963

By order

n L. Gaukstad

A. Schønsee
 6

COMMUNICATION NO. 1/64

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

Instructions for the use of Thawing Transformers 0

1. The thawing of pipes by means of the passage of an electric current
may be undertaken only with the aid of an approved thawing trans-
former and by trained electricians or persons specially instructed f\
by a trained electrician in the use of thawing transformers. \ )

2. The acquisition of a thawing transformer must be notified to the

local Electricity Supply Undertakina by the owner.
3. The electrical thawing of pipes containing combustible gases er
liquids is not in general permitted. If such thawing is absolutely
necessary, it may be undertaken only after permission has in each
case been obtained from the Electricity Inspectorate or the Elec-
tricity Supply Undertakihg where this carries out .ocal .nspection.

4. The connection of thawing transformers to the mains shall whenever

possible be made using a plug and socket. Where this is not practi-
cable, a special agreement must be made in advance with the F.lectri-
ci ty Su pp Ly Undertak anc reqarding connection. Fuses .nus t; be so fit-
ted that no part of tr.e thawing equipment or mains can be loaded more
heavily than its design will nermit in accordance with Requlations.

5. The sec9ndary side of the thawing transformer may be connected only

to the pipe to be thawed, use being made of approved clips. The
secondary leads from the transformer must be of the insulated type,
e.g. welding cable, and of a cross-s1ction appropriate to the thaw-
ing current, but not less than 25 m m .

6. Before the current is applied an examination must in all cases be ()

made in order to ascertain whether the length of the pipe installa- /
tion to be connected into the thawing circuit i connected to earth
leads for electrical apparatus, telephone, radio, etc. Such earth
leads must be disconnected durinq the thnwina ooeration, and
reconnected immediately after thawing is complete. Before the earth
connections of heavy-current apparatus are disconnected, the appara-
tus concerned must be disconnected from the mains by means of a
multi-pole switch, plug or, if necessary, fuses. The apparatus may
not be reconected before thawing is complete and the earth lead has
o
been reconnected.

In addition, an inspection must be made to ensure that there are no

chance contacts where the pipe to be thawned crosses bare earth
leads or other pipes, e.g. electric conduits, oil, oipes or the like
All connections-of live leads on both the primary and the secondary
side must in addition be carefully inspected by the person in charge
of the operation.
 7

7. Once the tha•,:ing current ha s been switched on all electrical and

pipe connections within the circuit must be kept unner constant
observation in view of the danger of heating which may con-
stitute a fire-risk or of sparks being i e c t e d . f necessary,
an extra parallel connection must be laid over pipe joints using
copper wire and approved connection clips. An ammeter should be
used to check as far as possible that the current does not follow
0 an unintended path, e.g. through pipe connection on the pipe be-
ing thawed, from the point at which the lead carrying the thawing
current is attached,into other parts of the piping, through con-
ductive building materials etc. If any part of the pipe which
is connected into the circuit is covered with woodwork, laid in a
wooden trough filled with sawdust or other material, or other-
wise insulated by means of combustible material, a special watch
must be kept at such points both while thawing is in progress and
for at least two hours after thawinq is complete.
8. The thawing operation should commence using the lowest current tap-
ping on the transformer. If no results are observed after a reason-
able time, the operation should be continued using a higher current
tapping.
9. The water-pipe should be under pressure while thawing is in pro-
gress and the taps on the frozen length of pipe must remain open.

10. Care must be taken to ensure that adequate fire-fighting equipment

is at hand.

This instruction sheet should be exhibited in the workshops of

pipe-fitters and plumbers and in the stores and workshops be-
longing to Electricity Supply Un<lertakinqs. •

Oslo, 5 March 1964

By order
L. Gaukstad

0 A. Schønsee

()
 8

COMMUNICATION NO. 2/64

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Testinq of insulators
0

Reports have recently reached the Electricity Inspectorate con-

cerning accidents resulting from insulator breakdowns. The in- r')
sulators in question have been found to be not satisfactorily
marked and about which it has proved completely impossible to
obtain reliable information as to their manufacture and testing.

Testing of a number of the insulators by EFI in accordance with

IEC Standards has revealed that they are not reliable in opera-
tion, cf. EFI News-sheet No. 3 of October 1963.

In view of this it is announced that, having regard to considera-

tions of safety, NVE considers it necessary to require that in
future a report shall be forwarded to the Electricity Inspecto-
rate concerning any test carried out at a recognised testing
institute, such report being required to show that the insula-
tors meet the requirements of IEC Standards. Insulators shall
also meet the requirements of IEC Standards with regard to mark-
ing. Permission for use will not be given before a satisfactory
test report has been received.

Oslo, 13 April 1964

By order
L. Gaukstad
0
A. Schønsee

0
 9

COMMUNICATION NO.1/65
from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Earthing Apparatus

0 Earthing apparatus shall pursuant to item 3 of the Operating

Regulations for High-Voltage Installations be of approved de-
sign.

In this connection it is announced that:

0 1. The Directorate of Electricity has now preoared rules for the

type-testing of earthing apparatus. These come into force
on the 1 March 1965.

Earthing apparatus which is sold after the 1 March 1965 must

therefore be approved by the Directorate of Electricity in
accordance with the above-mentioned test rules.

The application for approval shall be accompanied by a test

report from a recognised Norwegian or foreign testing insti-
tute. Such test reports shall be signed by one of the res-
ponsible directors of the testing institute. The applica-
tion shall in addition contain a description of the manner
in which it is proposed to mark the earthing apparatus.

The test report shall be based on tests undertaken in accor-

dance with the Directorate of Electricity rules for the type-
testing of earthing apparatus. The Directorate of Electricity
may, however, grant provisional approval on the basis of an
assessment of tests undertaken previously and otherwise in
accordance with the above-mentioned test rules.

After the 1 January 1966, however, it will be permissible to

0 sell only such earthing apparatus as has been approved on the

basis of tests undertaken in accordance with the test rules
above-mentioned.

2. The following points may be quoted from the Directorate of

Electricity rules for the type-testing of earthing apparatus.

Earthing apparatus is understood to be portable apparatus which

is used to earth and short-circuit a part of a high-voltage in-
stallation which has in advance been rendered dead.
 10

The earthing apparatus referred to normally consists of one

or more earth clips, line terminals and earthing strands and
one or more earthing rods, fitted with a marking disc or simi-
lar which restricts handling to the insulated portion of the
rod.
Short-time current is understood to be the effective value
of an alternating current flowing for a given period.

Peak current is understood to be the greatest peak value

(including the direct-current component) of a short-circuit
Q
current.

Rated values are understood to be, in the case of an earthing

apparatus, the data which characterise that apparatus. These
are: Rated short-time current, rated peak current and rated
voltage for the earthing rod. (The rated values are selected f \ , I
in accordance with Tables 1 and 2.) \ )

Rated short-time current is understood to be the hiqhest

short-time current which clips and strands of the earthing
apparatus can be permitted to carry for one second.

Rated peak current is understood to _be the hj_<Jhest peak cu:!'">:-ent

to which the clips <'nd strands of the earthing apoaratus cab be
permitted to be exposed.

Rated voltage for the earthing rod is understood to be the

highest working voltage in the mains with which the earthing
rod (earthing apparatus) can be used.

Table 1: Rated volues for the clips and strands of earthing

apparatus

Copper cross-section Rating short-time Rated peak-current

of earthing strand current
Ik is
1
(mm2) ( k A eff.) (kA)
25 5 18
35
50
70
7
10
14
25
35
50
0
95 19 67
120 24 85
2 X 95 30 106
2 X 120 38 115

Note: 0
To find the highent' short-time current which the clips and
strands of earthing apparatus can be permitted to carry for
a period which is other than 1 second, use is madP.of the
formula

where t . 0.5 sec.

 11

This latter assumption is necessary since the rated peak

current is based on the highest. permitted short-time
current for 0.5 sec.

The clips and strands of earthing apparatus thus cannot be

loaded with a hinher- short-time current than is permitted
for 0.5 sec. even though the disconnection time is less than
0.5 sec.

The rated values shown in the Table provide the starting point
for the type-testing of the clips and earthing strand compris-
" n g the short-circuit connection. The test rules do not there-
fore specify any special requirements with regard to the t h e r a l
and dynamic strength of earthing clips and strands which do not
form part of the short-circuit path.

It is, nevertheless, a requirement that earthing clips of this

0 latter type shall provide a good earth contact and shall be

secure against being pulled out of position.

With regard to earthing strands which do not form part of the

short-circuit path, but whose principal purpose is to provide
an equipotential connection between earth and a part of the
installation, it is required that their cross-section shall
correspond to the copper cross-section of the short-cir2uiting
connection, although it shall not normally exceed 50 mm Cu.
The earthing strands discussed here may until further notice
be made from aluminium.

The rated values shown in the Table for earthing apparatus

h a v i n g x 95 m m 2 Cu and 2 x 120 m m 2 Cu short-circuiting
connect"ons also apply when two earthing devices are con-
nected in parallel, each of which has a short-circuit con-
nection equal to 1 x 95 mm Cu or 1 x 120 m m 2 Cu. The re-
quirement for connection in parallel is that both apparatus
have short-circuiting connections of the same cross-section
and length and that both are mounted as close together as
possible.

Table 2: Rated values, etc., for earthing rods.

0 Rated voltage for earthing rod

(kV eff.)
Minimum insulated length
(=)
24 600
36 700
52 850
72.5 1 050

n 123
145
170
245
1 500
1 700
1 900
2 600
300 3 100
420 4 200
Nole:

The above lengths of minimum permissible insulation have

bee laid d o n , although it is acknowledged that the insu-
l a t n g m a t e r " a s at present used on earthing rods are of a
very good qual"ty and the normal test requirements can
 12

usually be met using shorter lengths than those which are

normally considered to provide a safe distance between the
operator and the component which it is desired to earth or
eho r t o i rou i t.

The requirements for earthing rods apply only to those rods

which are used in conjunction with the clips and strands of
earthing apparatus.

3. Earthing apparatus shall be marked in accordance with the follow-

ing guide-lines:
0
Line terminals shall be marked in a clear and durable manner with
the type designation and the maker's name or mark, and also with
the maximum strand cross-section for which they are approved.

Earth clips which form part of the short-circuit path shall be

marked in the same manner as line terminals.
0
Earthing strands which form part of the short-circuit path shall
be marked with their copper cross-section together with the rated
short-time current of the earthing apparatus and an indication
of the types of object to which it has been approved that the
line terminals of the earthing apparatus may be attached.

For example:
50 mm2
Max. Ik for 1 sec: 10 kA
Only for use on lines

Earthing strands which do not form part of the short-circuit

path shall be marked with their copper cross-section or, where
appropriate with their equivalent copper cross-section.

Earthing rods shall be marked in a clear and durable manner with

the type of designation and maker's name or trade ma,k, with
the rated v c l a g e for which the rod is approved and with an
indication as to where the rod may be used.
Earthing rods approved for a rated voltage of 24 kV and which
are to be used in an installation having a lower voltage may,
Q
however, where it is particularly desirable, be mark€d with the
highest operating voltage in the installation concerned, pro-
vided that the minimum permitted insulated length for 24 kV
is also maintained for such rods.

The method of marking shall be approved by the Directorate of

Electricity. n
 13

4. It is further announced that:

The clips and strands of earthing apparatus shall only be

sold as a complete and fu Ll.y a=sembl.ed unit.

Earthing strands shall have a plastic covering which should be

transparent. Earthing apparatus shall be so maintained that
it can at all times be. regarded as fit for the use for which
it is approved. Earthing apparatus not in use shall be hung on

0
a support or similar. During transport earthing rods should be
protected by means of a case or cover. Earthing apparatus which
has been exposed to a short-circuit or has been damaged in other
ways shall be replaced.

The Electricity Inspectorate may require the production of

calculations regarding the maximum short-circuit current which
can occur in an installation, also the maximum·time which mc1y
C· elapse before the short-circuit current must be interrupted.

The present Communication replaces NVE Communication of 13 Nov-

ember 1963.

Oslo, 21 January 1965

By order
L. Gaukstad

A. Schønsee

n
 14

COMMUNICATION NO. 2/65

frora the
NORWEGIAN WATER HESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Radio interference caused by mercury-vapour lamps

0
and combined mercury-vapour and incandescent lamps

The Radio Interference Control has in recent years received a

number of complaints concerning radio interference on long and
n
medium wavelengths caused by road-lighting using the above-
mentioned types of lamp. The lamps do not normally themselves
generate radio noise, but they possess the property of allowing
a modulation hum which interferes with radio reception to develop
when a sufficiently strong radio signal reaches them via the mains
wiring.

A method of obviating this interference consists in inserting a

0.1 mfd capacitor into the lamp fitting. This prevents the high
frequency from reaching the lamp. In some cases it has proved
sufficient to insert a capacitor into only some of the fittings,
but it is not known in advance how many are necessary.

Since the insertion of capacitors after the fittings have been

installed is both time-consuming and more expensive than would
be the case if they were inserted during the manufacture of the
fittings, it will be to the advantage of Electricity Supoly Under-
takings intending to fit thP. above-mentioned lamns to request in
their orders· that they be s u n l i e d i h • f i t t i n q s havinq acacitors
already installed. The comparatively small additional cost in-
volved will prove to be a very profitable investment when it is
borne in mind that it may otherwise be necessary to install the
capacitors after the fittings have been placed in position.
0
Oslo, 22 February 1965
By order
L. Gaukstad 0
A, Schønsee
 15

COMMUNICATION NO. 4/65

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

0 DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Circular to Manufacturers and Importers of Caravans

0 It is known that a considerable number of caravans having electri-

cal installations intended for connection to 220 volt mains are
sold and used in Norway. This is a development which must be
assumed to be likely to proceed on an ever-increasing scale in
future years.

The caravans under discussion are of both foreign and home manufac-
ture.

It is clear that a proportion of the imported types of caravan

have electrical installations which are desiqned for connection
to a distribution system different from that which is customary in
Norway.
It is also clear that some caravan installations have been con-
structed in Norway by workmen who are not correctly trained, such
installations being of a design not in accordance with current
provisions.

Installations of this type may lead to both a fire-risk and a risk

of electric shock.
The Directorate of Electricity wishes in this connection to an-

0
nounce that electrical installations in caravans which are intend-
ed for connecting to 220 volt mains in Norway shall in principal be
designed in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations for
Electrical Installations. In addition, the construction of such
installations in Norway shall, pursuant to the provisions of the
Royal Decree of 5 February 1965, be under the control of an elec-
trical contractor. The installations may not, in accordance with
§ 12 of the Regulations, be put into use before the Electricity
0 Inspectorate has given its permission.

Since it will scarcely be possible for the Electricity Inspectorate

to inspect each individual caravan, the Directorate of Electricity
will n d e r t a k e a type of approval of mass-produced caravans which
contains an electrical installation.
 16

With regard to electrical installations in caravans not covered

by the above, these will be dealt with individually by the Djrecto-
rate of Electricity.

With the agreement of the Directorate of Roads it is also announced

that the State Motor Vehicles Control will not grant a certificate
to caravans of the type under discussion before they have been pre-
o I

sented to the D i e c t o a t e of tlectricity for the approval of their

electrical installation.

Application for approval should be forwarded, together with the

necessary information concerning the equipment and fittings which
it is intended to use, to NVE, The Directorate of Electricity, ('
Box 5091, Majorstua, Oslo 3. \__

Oslo, 20 September 1965

By order
Rolf Moe

A. Schønsee

n
 17

COMMUNICATION NO. 1/66

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RE.SOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
:1IRECTORJ\TC OF ELECTRICITY

Provisions regarding Electrical installations in caravans

In connection with the Directorate of Electricity Communication

0 No. 4/65 regarding electrical installations in caravans, it is
hereby announced that the Directorate of Electricity has laid
down the following provisions for these electrical installations:

A. 2?.0 volt Installations

1. General

a) Installations made in Norway shall be constructed under

the control of an approved electrical contractor. See
however (3) below, final section.

b) Equipment and apparatus, etc. shall be of approved design.

c) The installation shall be kept entirely separate from

battery-fed instnllations.
It is thus, for example, forbidden to use sconces or light
fittings in which there are two lamps, one for 220 V and
the other battery-fed.
d) Exposed metallic parts of an installation shall be earthed
and all plugs and socket outlets shall be provided with an
earth contact.
Lighting fittings should be constructed from insulating
0 2.
material.

Connecting leads (caravans to mains)

Flexible leads shall consist of oil-resistant flexible cable

with earth, type NMHVO (CEE (2) 65).

LJ 3. Connection arrangements (caravans to mains).

The flexible loose lead shall be connected to the caravan's

electrical installation by means of a current intake, as it
is known.
 18

This current intake h a l l in principle consist of an inlet

plug and socket connected to two 10 A fuses placed in an
approved box.

The box shall be located in a readily accessible position in

the caravan.
The inlet plug and socket may be mounted on the outside of the
caravan if specially approved for this. The place selected
shall be such that there is little danger of damage due to
0
falling of flying stones, etc.

The current intake may, in addition to the above-mentioned

components, consist of a plug with earth contact placed in
the fuse box.

Such types of current intake are available in an approved desi0n

and may be fitted by unskilled workmen where the caravan is not
fitted with a permanent 220 volt installation.

4. Permanently fitted wiring (permanent.installations)

a) Installation cable type PP (plastic insulated 380 V cable

with plastic insulation and, where appropriate, filling and
external plastic sheath)or an equivalent approved type hav-
ing three conductors may be run directly in the insulation
material of the outer walls of the caravan. One conductor
shall be used as an earth lead.

Where tables oass t h r o u h wall panels thev must be. satisfac-

torily protected by means of separate tubes so that they
cannot be damaqed.

b) Surface wiring should consist of type PRj (plastic-insulat-

ed 380 V cable with aluminium sheath, insulation and outer
sheath of plastic with internal earth conductor) or another
equivalent approved type, but not lead-sheathed cable.

0
5. Heating

Caravans may be heated by means of portable fan-assisted heater,s

or permanently fitted low-temperature heaters (Class L). Heaterf
shall have a built-in temperature cut-out.

B. Battery-fed Installations

1. Wiring shall be fused in accordance with their cross-

section.
0
2. Wiring may be run in outer walls.

3. Plugs and lamps shall be of such design that confusion

with 220 V equipment is obviated.
 19

C. Earthing of Caravans

The exposed metal parts of caravans, e.g. the chassis, shall

be connected to the earthing screw of the current intake via
an insulated 4 mm2 earth lead.
The earth connection shall be made in a particularly reliable
manner and connections must be readily accessible for inspection.
0
Oslo, 24 March 1966
By order
Rolf Moe
0 A. Schønsee

C
 20

COMMUNICATION NO. 2/66

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Replacement of insulators found to be causing noise

during the inspection of older High-Voltage lines
0
A number of the older high-voltage lines which are in operation
in Norway are by no means as satisfactory with regard to radio
noise as is required in a modern line. There are also types of
insulators which are not satisfactory where noise is concerned,
so that in individual cases it is not possible to point to any
direct defect in the line.

On the long and medium-wave band the noise from the offendinq
insulators tends to be additive and to propagate itself along the
line. Even though individual insulators in the set may be noise-
free this has little influence on the noise on the long and medi-
um waves. Experience over recent years shows that several of the
old lines are also the cause of TV interference, particularly in
those areas in which TV Band I is used. Noise on TV (metre bands)
does not tend to propagate itself along the line to any serious
extent, as occurs with the lower frequencies, but can to a con-
siderable extent be spread as direct radiation from an individual
insulator. It may therefore prove very important for certain of
the insulators which cause noise to be replaced by noisefree insu-
lators in, for example, those areas· where their·-radiation is likely
to be pic}ed up by a receiving aerial.

It has been found that the insulators used followinq inspection

and repair of older lines are taken from the Electricity Supply
0
Undertaking's old stock and may be of a no t se=pr-opac at.Lnq tyne, so
that the gradual improvement which would otherwise be obtained in
the lines entirely fails to materialise.

In view of the above observations, the Electricity Inspectorate

considers it necessary to specify that, pursuant t o § § 41 and 714
of the Regulations for Electrical Installations, use shall be made,
0
during any extension, modification and repair of older high-voltage
lines, of insulators so designed that radio noise is as far as pos-
sible avoided.
Oslo, 2 May 1966
By order
Rolf Moe

A. Schønsee
 21

COMMUNICATION ID. 3/66

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY
0
Testing and use of permanently-fitted knife
switches for earthing

0 In accordance with Section 3 of the Safety Reulations for

High-voltage Installations, permanently fitted knife switches,
where available, shall be used for the switching of earth con-
nections during work on high-voltage installations.

It is a requirement under this provision that such knife switch

shall, when in the closed position, be capable beyond reasonable
doubt of withstanding the short-circuit stresses (thermal and
dynamic) to which they may exposed at the point in the installa-
tion where they are fitted.

The Directorate of Electricity desires in this connection to make

known that:

la. Knife switches which are intenued to be used for connectng

earth connections in accordance with Section 3 of the Safe-
ty Regulations shall satisfy the requirements in regard to
thermal and dynamic strength specified for the type-testing
of knife switches for earthing in IEC Publication No. 129,
final edition.

lb. Knife switches for earthing which are solid after the 1 January
1967 shall satisfy all the requirements specified for the type-

0 testing of knife switches for earthing in IEC Publication No.

129, final edition.

le. Type-testing shall be carried out at a recognised Norwegian or

foreign test institution.

n
2. Knife switches for earthing which are sold after the 1 January
1967, shall meet the requirements of the above-mentioned IEC
Publications wj_th req2.:::-d to m?rkinq.

3. The Electricity Inspectorate shall on request be supplied with

any test report and/or written information from the manufacturer
which shows the basis on which the rated values of knife switches
have been determined.
 22

4. In installations not fitted with knife switches for

earthing which satisfy the requirements regarding the neces-
sary thermal and dynamic strength, use shall be made of
approved earthing apparatus.

Such apparatus shall be capable of withstanding the highest

short-circuit stresses to which it may be exposed. In this
connection attention is drawn to the Directorate of Electricity
Communication No. 1/65.
0
Oslo, 24 May 1966
By order
Rolf Moe

A. Schønsee

n
 23

COMMUNICATION NO. 4/66

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

0
Earthing apparatus

It is announced that there is now available a summary of information

regarding approved clips for use in the short-circuit path of earth-
C ing apparatus, and for short-circuitin bars havinq a rated short-
time current of up to 33 k l \ .
This summery was current on the 1 November 1966 and may be obtained
on application on the Electricity Inspectorate.

In this connection it is desired to stress the necessity that earthing

apparatus should be used in accordance with the type approval granted
to the individual components. For example, all line terminals and
short-circuitinq bars must be used only on unpainted objects within th
approved field of use, even though this is not specially mentioned
in the approval.

It is also desired to stress that ready-assembled earthing apparatus

is not normally approved by the Directorate of Electricity. The
Directorate of Electricity will, however, grant ype-approval on the
basis of completed tests on those components intended to form part
of the short-circuit path of earthing apparatus, as also to short-
circuitin bars and earthing rods. In addition, the Directorate of
Electricity will grant approval by type to the marking of the dif-
ferent types of ready-assembled earthing apparatus.

It is thus left to suppliers to assemble the type-approved compo-

0 nents to form complete earthing apparatus if such assembly is order-

ed. They are consequently responsible that the type-approved compo-
nents used in such apparatus shall be identical to the specimens
which were tested and approved as far as possible and also that the
components shall be assembled in a manner which is, and will con-
tinue to be, satisfactory and marked in accordance with the type-
approval.

0 The Electricity Inspectorate conducts inspections in the normal

course of its duties in order to ensure that the earthing apparatus
used in installations satisfies the current provisions.

Since it is possible for the internal connections in earthing appa-

ratus to become loose after a period of use, those in charge of
installations must undertake regular inspections to ensure that
the apparatus is in a serviceable condition.
 24

In cases where unfortunate experiences have occured during the use

of individual types of earthing apparatus it is requested that these
be reported through the Electricity Inspectorate.

Oslo, 21 November 1966

0
By order
Rolf Moe

A Schønsee

·"'\J

0
 25

COMMUNICATION NO. 1/67

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

0
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Periodic inspections of electrical installations

which are subject to notification

0 In accordance w i t h § 4 of the Regulations for Electrical Instal-

lations dated 5 December 1963 it falls to NVE to determine how
often such installations shall be inspected.

It is now announced for information and attention that NVE has

laid down the following frequency of inspection for electrical
installations which are subject to notification and which are
covered by Local Inspection:

I. Low-Voltage Installations

1. At least every 9 years: Installations in dwellinghouse,

business premises and similar.

2. At least every 3 years: Installations in hotels, larger

inns and similar, hospitals, nursing homes and similar,
schools, public halls, agricultural buil0ings, workshops,
factories, offices and similar, tramway and railway in-
stallations and also special high-voltaqe installations
connected to the low-voltage mains.

II. Medium-Voltage Installations

0 A. Medium-voltage installations using voltages up to 440 V and

with directly earthed neutral point

1. At least every 9 years: Installations in dwellinghouses,

business premises and similar.

2. At least every 3 years: Installations in hotels, larger

0 inns and similar, hospitals, nursing homes and similar,

schools, public halls, agricultural buildings, workshops,
factories, offices and similar, tramway and railway in-
stallations and also special high-voltage installations
connected to the medium-voltage mains.
B. Medium-voltage installations using voltage up to 440 V and
with insulated neutral point

/\t 1,,ast every 3 years: All installations.

 26

C. Medium-voltage installations using voltage over 440 V

At least every 3 years: All installations.

II1.Distribution Installations for Low Voltage and Medium Voltage

At least every 3 years: All installations containing distri-

bution lines, street-lighting mains and similar, kiosks and
Q
similar.

Note:

Older installations and those not in first-class condition

must be inspected more frequently depending on their condi-
tion. 0
NVE may lay down a different frequency of inspection from that
shown in I to III above where special installations are con-
cerned.

The provisions contained in the Communication of January 1940

to the Electricity Inspectorate, 1st to 6th districts, con-
cerning the periodic inspection of electrical installations
shall henceforth be considered as lapsed.

Oslo, 4 January 1967

By order
Rolf Moe

A. Schønsee

n
 27

COMMUNICATION No. 2/67

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORArE OF ELECTRICITY

Notification in accordance i t h Area Concession

,;»,,,, 1 , n , , ,.• a io r in a c c o l " d a n c e w i t h t h e Law of 16 May 1 8 9 6 w i t h

l a t e r ' a d d i t i o n s and m o d i f i c a t i o n s

With reference to the council's circulars of 8 February 1937,

16 November 1938 and 2 January 1948 it is nnounced that only
one copy of the "Notification concerning the construction of
electrical heavy-current installations using high voltage"
therein mentioned need in future be forwarded to the Electri-
city Inspectorate.

Oslo, 4 January 1967

By order
Rolf Moe

A. Schønsee

0
 28

COMMUNICATION NO. 4/67

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY
0
Inspection of Electric Lift installations which
are subject to notification

The Royal Decree of 5 February 1965 contains provisions concerning

0
the technical training of persons placed in charge of and working
upon the construction and repair of electric lift installatj_ons
which are subject to notification.

In this connection the Directorate of Electricity has found it

necessary to specify that electric lift installations which are
subject to notification shall be constructed in accordance with
the provisions of the Regulations for Electrical Installations and
shall in addition be notified, both in advance and when completed,
to the Electricity Supply Undertaking by the lift contractor con-
cerned in accordance with the provisions o f § 12 and 14 of the
Regulations.

In accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations of

5 December 1963 electrical installations which are subject to noti-
fication are subject to inspection by the Electricity Inspectorate
or the Local Inspection.

The interest of the Electricity Inspectorate and of the Local In-

spection in lift installations is restricted to notifiable electrical
installations as such in accordance with those provisions of the
Regulations for Electrical Installations which apply. Q
The Electricity Inspectorate and the Local Inspection are therefore
not concerned with any part of the mechanical equipment of the lift
installation nor with the existence and operation of safety equip-
ment such as brake equipment, emergency alarm, interlock contacts

n
for doors and for stopping and starting at the i f f e r e n t floors, etc.

Oslo, 6 February 1967

By order
Rolf Moe

A. Schønsee
 29

COMMUNICATION NO. 5/67

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Rod-type insulators in stays

0 There have in recent years been constructed a number of three-

mast lines carrying a nominal voltage above 60 kV without a
continuous earth conductor. NVE has in some cases·oermitted the
use of rod-type insulators in the stays tor such lines.

Operational experience'with o v e h e a d line installations

of this type which has come to the notice of the Directorate
of Electricity has so far been so good that it is considered
possible, as an experiment and until further notice, to permit
the use of rod-type insulators as stay-insulators in lines
operating at a nominal voltage above 60 kV.

Oslo. 6 February 1967

By order
Rolf Moe

A. Schønsee
 30

COMMUNICATION NO. 6/67

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Electrical installations in automobile washing

and lubrication bays

Since there appears to be a degree of uncertainty regarding the

0
room classification of automobile washing and lubrication bays
where electrical installations are concerned, the Directorate of
Electricity considers it desirable to provide the following guide-
lines:

1. Washing bays should be regarded as wet rooms. For electrical

installations in wet rooms attention is drawn t o § 491 of the
Regulations for Electrical Installation.

2. Lubrication bays should be regarded as dirty rooms. For elec-

trical installation in dirty rooms attention is drawn t o § 489
of the Regulations for Electrical Installations.

Oil-fired hot-air units having electrical equipment of the

closed type may, however, be used in lubrication bays pro-
vided that the air used for combustion is drawn from outside
and the circulated air is taken in at a height of at least 2 m
above the floor.

3. Lubrication pits should be regarqed as explosion-risk rooms.

For electrical installations in explosion-risk rooms attention f\

is drawn t o § 495 of the Regulations for Electrical Installa- \ 1

tions and to Communication No. 1/77.

Lubrication pits may, however, be regarded as fire-risk rooms
when adequate ventilation is provided, with
outside from the floor-level of the pit.

Fan motors may not be fitted inside ventilation ducts. Plug

contacts and lighting must be interlocked with the fan via
time-delay relays in order to ensure that the fan is in opera-
tion before the lighting can be s w i t c h , Jn 0r pnwer drawn
 31

from the plugs. Steps must also be taken to ensure the neces-
sary protection of electrical components against mechanical
damage. For electrical installations in fire-risk rooms atten-
tion is drawn t o § 494 of the Regulations for Electrical Instal-
lations.

Oslo, 24 February 1967

By order
Rolf Moe

A. Schønsee
0

n
 32

COMMUNICATION NO. 7/67

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Damage to plastic insulated single conductor mu]ti-

stranded wire (type PN) in conduit installations

Reports which have been received over the last few years describe
earth and short-circuit faults in conduit installations where
plastic insulated, single conductor, multi-stranded wire of the
type PN are being used.

The type PN wire is an internationally standardized wire which

is produced and tested according to identical regulations in
several European countries. In this country, the testing and
approval of the wire take place at the Norwegian Board of Testing
and Approval of Electrical Equipment (NEMKO) according to regula-
tions approved by the Norwegian Water Resources and Electricity
Board. It is known that Norwegian manufacturers also test the
wire before it leaves the factories.

Despite the strict requirements laid down for the construction

and production of the wire, faults have arisen in several instal-
lations after a shorter or longer period in operation.

The defective wire which has been subject to investigations is

usually damaged to such an extent that it is difficult to discover
the real reason for the faults. Tests carried out adjacent to
the faulty ar ee, show that the i·1ire ha s been auite normal and
satisfies the requirements by NEMKO. •

According to reports received, the faults have only occured in

concrete buildings, and seem according to the available information,
u·
mainly to be caused by wire with damaged insulation coming:ino
permanent contact with a mixture of cement and water in the conduits.

In contrast to other wires and cables which are constructed with

a mechanical protection sheath, one must bear in mind that the
PB type of wire is unprotected, and as such is vulnerable until
it is drawn in the conduits. The wire must be handled therefore
with care during storage, transport, on the working site and also
while b e i g drawn into conduits and boxes.
 33

The Directorate of Electricity regards it necessary, in thi3

connection, to stress the following provisions i n § 455 of the
Regulations for Electrical Installations:

1. The conduit system must.not contain sharp edges or burrs.

0 2. Conduits shall be fastened securely and run ift such a manne

that dampness cannot collect tnside them. Conduits laid in
ex t.er Lo r walls and in the ceilinrr above t.he- topmost storey
shall be provided with thermal insulation, on the wall side
or loft side. U-bonds or "water traps" shall be avoided
where a conductor may be exposed to variations in temperature.

n 3. Wires must not be drawn into concealed condu t ts·'in moulded

or bricked parts of buildings until the structure is sufficient-
ly dry.

Furthermore, there is a need to point out what is stated in the last

section of the note to the above mentioned clause.

"llef0rR the drA4in0 in of i r e s , t e cnftuits should he dried by

passing a twisted rag or similar object through them."

While this Case was under consideration, the authorities and test-
ing stations in the other Scandinavian countries were contacted.
The information received, implied that hardly any faults of a
similar kind were experienced by using wire of the above type in
conduit installations.

The fact that these countries are mainly using plastic conduits in
concealed installations is thought to be of significance in this
connection.

All interested parties are therefore advised to commence a wider

use of plastic conduits in concealed installations.

Oslo, 25 August 1967

By order
Rolf Moe

n A. Schønsee
 34

COMMUNICATION NO. 1/68

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Faults on suspension insulators

The Directorate of Electricity has recently received reports

from h e Electricity Inspectorate concerning faults on sus-
pension insulators in spans across the fjords on the West
Coast.
The faults consist of the bolt in the insulator being pulled out
of its normal position. Reports which have been received describe
cases where the bolt has pulled out from approx. 5 mm to 35 mm.
Cases have also been reported where bolts have been pulled right
out.

The faults have been discovered during inspection of tops of masts

in spans across fiorns. Regular inspection of the masts using
binoculars have not discovered the faults.

According to reports received by the Directorate of Electricity,

the faults are not caused by mechanical overloading. Snow or ice
loads have not been observed on the spans concerned. On the
other hand, long-term stresses due to vibrations cannot be
disregarded as a contributing factor. This effect is at the mo-
ment being investigated at EFI.

The Directorate of Electricity considers this problem to be of

great significance to the operational reliability and also from
a safety point of view, and therefore regards it necessary to
demand that the various electricity supply undertakings as soon
0
as possible devise programmes for inspection of the tops of the
masts in their long spans across fjords, valleys etc., by dis-
connecting the lines and carefully inspecting the insulation,

n
line attachments etc.

Attention is drawn to the provisions i n § 714 of the Regulations

for Electrical Installation, regarding insulators and accessories
which must be complied with when insulators are replaced.

Oslo, 1 March 1968

By order
Rolf Moe

A. Schønscc
 35

COMMUNICATION NO. 2/68

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY
0 Electrical installations in prefabricated houses

Several firms in the building trade have recently developed

0 types of houses which to a lesser or major extent are fabri-

cated in a factory.

The electrical installations in several types of such prefabri-

cated houses are also entirely or partly fitted at the factor.y.

In the years to come, many ready made houses will probably be

erected and the design and control of the electrical installa-
tions ought to be as rational dnd economical as possible with-
out endangering the safety aspects. The Directorate of Electri-
city therefore regards it necessary to lay down temporary guide-
lines regarding approval by type and method (type-approval) of
such installations as mentioned below.

I. Electrical installations which are completed entirely at

the factory

1. The installation must be type-approved in advance by the

Directorate of Electricity. Applications for such appro-
vals, together with necessary plans, descriptions, draw-
ings etc. must be sent directly to the Directorate of
Electricity, Concessions and Supervision Department.

2. The installation, for which type-approval is s o u q t , must

0 be fully completed so that the electricity supply under-

taking in the area, without any hindrance, mav bring for-
ward and connect suppl line or cable to the house.

3. The person responsible for the installation work must be

an electrical contractor, permanently employed by the

n
factory concerned, or the factory must have a written
agreement or a permanent basis with an electrical con-
tractor whose business premises are in the vicinity or
the factory.
 36

4. Type-approval will only be granted, provided the factory

establishes a regular routine for quality control of the
production. The factory must reach an agreement with the
Local Inspection in whose area the factory us located, so
that random inspections can be carried out. This arrange-
ment must be approved, in advance, by the Electricity In-
spectorate, which will also carry out random inspections.

5. The electrical contractor employed by the factory, must

always in good time contact the electricity supply under-
taking in each area where such houses are to be erected,
and at the same time send a notification to the supply
l
undertaking. This notification must be forwarded in
advance and must be accompanied by a copy of the type-
approval from the Directorate of Electricity.

A notification must also be handed in, in the usual way, (\

when the installation is completed, and is not to be )
put into operation until the electricity supply undertak-
ing gives permission.

6. The completed installation shall be subject to inspection

in the usual way by the Local Inspection in the supply area,
as far as this is feasible.

II. Electrical installations which are partly carried out at the

factory and completed according to a fixed plan during the
erection of the house
1. The installation nust be type-approved in advance by the
Directorate of Electricity. Applications for such appro-
vals, together with necessary plans, description, drawings
etc. must be sent directly to the Directorate of Electri-
city, Concession and Supervision Department.

2. An electrical contractor is to be responsible for that part

of the installation work which is carried out at the factory.
He shall either be permanently employed by the factory or
the factory must have a written agreement on a permanent
basis with an electrical contractor whose business premlses
are in the vicinity of the factory.

3. If necessary, the manufacturer must arrange for the comple-

tion of the installation, in a reasonable period of time
and according to a predetermined plan by an electrical con-
tractor.

4. Type-approval will only be granted, provided the factory

establishes a regular routine for quality control of the
production. The factory must also establish an agreement
n
with the Local Inspection in which area the factory is
located, so that random inspections can be carried out.
This arrangement must be approved in advance by the Elec-
tricity Inspectorate, which will also carry out random
inspections.
 37

5. In each place where such houses are erected, the installa-

tion must be notified to the local electricity supply
undertaking. The notification is to be sent by the elec-
trical contractor resoonsible for the compLe t.Lon
of the installation according to the predetermined plan.

n 6.
This notification must be accompanied by a copy of the
type-approval from the Directorate of Electricity.

The completed installation shall be subject to inspection

in the usual way by the Local Inspection in the area, as
far as this is feasible.

C) Oslo, 24 May 1968

By order
Rolf Moe

A. Schønsee

C)

0
 38

COMMUNICATION NO. 1/69

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY
0
Temporary low-voltage installations on building
sites etc.
0
Because of accidents and fire damage due to low-voltage installa-
tions, especially on building sites, which are not in compliance
with the Regulations, the Directorate of Electricity regards it
necessary to enforce the provisions i n § 415 of the Regulations
for Electrical Installations, concerning the design of temporary
low-voltage installations.

The provisions are as follows:

Temporary installations, in general, are considered to be

only such, if they are not to be used for longer than about
four weeks, or if they are to be used in connection with
building works while these are in progress.

Temporary installations, in general, shall be constructed

and maintained in accordance with these Regulations. Minor
variations in the layout, however, can be permitted, but the
orovisi0ns of the Reulations with r e a r d to s f e t v a a i n s t
fire, earthing and protection from accidental contact must be

n
satisfied.

Hand-lamps shall be constructed in all respects in accordance

with the Regulations.

As mentioned above, temporary installations, in general shall be

constructed and maintained in accordance with the Regulations.
The requirements with regard to safety against fire, earthing and
protection from accidental contact must be satisfied completely.
Apparatus and materials to be used, shall be approved by the
Norwegian Board for Testing and Approval of Electrical Equipment
Q
(NEMKO) to the extent that this control is compulsory.
 39

It is especially necessary, from a safety point of view, that

installations on building sites at all times are maintained in
good condition (in accordance with Regulations). Suitable
equipment for large and small installations are today avail.-
able on the market. Apparatus, fittings, hand tools etc.,
which are equipped with extra insulation (double insulation)
should be used wheJ'.'ever possible.

A good additional protection is provided by means of earth leakage

circuit-breakers with low tripping currents (approx. 30 mA). Such
breakers are designed to disconnect an installation if earth faults
occur. They can, however, to a certain extent protect workers
on building sites if other faults occur which may lead to dangerous
contact voltages, such as, for example, a broken earth conductor

0
for a mobile machine.

The Directorate of Electricity suggests that earth leakage circuit-

breakers are used wherever possible in such installations'.

Concerning the construction, use and maintenance of temporary low-

voltage installations, attention is drawn to the provisions i n § 21
of the Regulations, where the following is stated:

1. The construction, modification and repair of temporary

heavy-current installations which are subject to notifi-
cation shall be carried out only by competent persons.

2. Owners and users of temporary electrical installations

have the duty of ensuring that installations are properly
maintained and inspected and are at all times in a condi-
tion which satisfies the Regulations.

3. Care shall be exercised when temporary installations and

equipment are in use, to ensure that no danger is created
to life or property.

The Directorate of Electricity emphasizes that care shall be taken

to ensure that all temporary cables are made dead when not in use,
and that all cupboards for fuses, connection plugs etc. which may
be accessible to unauthorised persons must be locked carefully
when the site is left, so that strangers are not able to switch
on the voltage.

The provisions in the Regulations for Electrical Installations of

0 5 December 1963 are drawn up with support in the Law of 24 May 1929
regarding supervision of electrical installations.

Oslo, 7 January 1969

Rolf Moe
A. Schønsee
 40

COMMUNICATION NO. 2/69

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRIITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Safety regulations for high-voltage installations

"Voltage testing"

1. Voltage testing-voltage checking

0
1.0 The safety regulations for high-voltage installations
include the following provisions:

"Voltage testing:
When disconnection is complete, adequate and reliable
tests shall be carried out to show that the parts of
the installation concerned are no longer live before
they are earthed."

1.1 The above provision means than when disconnection is

complete, it is required that a check is carried out
(voltage checking) to ensure that the parts of the
installation are no longer live before they are earthed.

2. Adequate and reliable voltage checking

2.0 The expression "adequate and reliable voltage checking",

means that the check shall be carried out in such a way
that the two following requirements are met simultaneously:

2.0.l Carrying out the voltage check shall not involve any
danger to the person concerned.

2.0.2 The voltage check must give reliable information that

0
no parts of the installation concerned are still live,
so that earthing may be carried out without any danger.

Note:

An example of a method which is regarded as fulfilling

the two requirements stated above, is the correct use
of an adequately made voltage indicator suitable for
the conditions in question.
 41

.,.
7
Responsibilities of the manager

3.0 The manager must devise methods for voltage checking which,
depending on the condi, tions, are considered to be the most
adequate and reliable (see 2.0).
0 3.1 The manager is responsible for the handing out of written
instructions, containing all necessary information regard-
ing the method to be used for checking the voltage.

3.2 The manager is responsible for ensuring that the above men-
tioned instruction is learned by all trained staff and that
C) necessary training is given in, for example, the use of
voltaqe indicator.

Oslo, 15 April 1969

By order
Rolf Moe

A. Schønsee

0
 42

COMMUNICATION NO. 1/70

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Law of 19 June 1969

regarding construction and operation
of electrical installations

1. The Law governing construction and operation of electrical

installations was passed on 19 June 1969 and came into force
immediately. At the s e i m e , the Law of 16 May 18,6 re-
garding safety measures against accidents and injury from
electrical installations was cancelled. Permissions granted
in accordance with the former Law, however, remain valid.
2. Applications for permission in accordance with the abolished
Law, which were received before 19 June 1969, but which were
not granted before that date, will be dealt with accordinq
to the provisions of the new Law.
Applications which refer to the Law of 1896, but which are
forwarded after the 19 June 1969 will be treated according
to the provisions of the new Law, without the applications
being required to forward new applications.
3. As guidance to the various considerations which are to be
observed when handling applications according to the provi-
sions of the new Law, reference is made t o § 3 in the Law,
items 2 and 5 and also to the comments by the Ministry of
Industry and Handicraft in Ot.prp. No. 69 (1966-67), page 14, r\)
column one, paragraph three, which reads as follows: -

"In addition to the very extensive control arising from the

Law governing the regulation of waterways (in which, accord-
ing t o § 8, consideration shall be given to the economic
efforts on the community resulting from a project) there is
also today a right to exercise control through the Law re-
garding high-voltage installations of 16 May 1896, which
Q
covers all power installations, including those belonging to
the municipal authorities. A revision of this latter law is
already proposed, and its provisions as a general Law, regu-
lating the construction and operation of all classes of elec-
trical high-voltage installations, will be emphsized in the
actual wording of Law more than is the case today. In con-
nection with this, it is necessary to refer to the special
comments on the Law by the Ministry."
 43

Further reference is given in page 94, column two, last paragraph,

from which the following quotation is taken:

"The purpose of the old Law as a safety Law is long outmoded since
the Law of 24 May 1929 regarding the supervision of electrical in-
stallations is now applied.

The Ministry intend to propose a revision of the Law with a view

to giving the authorities better control over future construc-
tion of power plants and installations for transmission and distri-
bution of electricity in a rational and reasonable manner. In
addition, the Law ought to express that it authorizes critical
priority-valuations to be carried out on various projects. These
priority-valuations are today carried out unner financial regula-
0 tions, which is not satisfactory.

The amendments by the Ministry are such that a completely new law
is proposed.

For other considerations, reference should be made to the comments

of the various paragraphs of the Law."

Further comment to Prop. O. XI, 1968-69, page 27, column two, para-
graph four states:

"The committee agrees to the proposition with the following addi-

tion: A more correct solution to the question of preference for
certain projects is to let the Law express clearly the right to
do so. To decide the preference through financing may become some-
what circumstantial."

4. Attention is specially drawn to the fact that the provisions of the

new Law encompass the installations as a whole and not only the
electrical parts of the installations. This means that not even
anv ki nd 0f s tr uc t.ura L work on the installation is permitted before
concession is granted. As the handling of certain applications may
be very time-consuming it must be emphasized that applications must
be handed in as early as possible, so that they may be dealt with

0 and permissions given, before work is planned to start.

Applications and necessary enclosures are to be sent with a suf-

ficient number of copies (minimum 5 copies) through thE Electricity
Inspectorate in the district.

5. In connection with the construction of larger plants such s .

0 power stations, the transmission and transformer plants for 110 kV

and higher voltages, a valuation of the suitability of the plant
in the electricity supply system will lead to technical/economical
valuations which may be quite time-consuming. To be able to handle
the application for such concessions as quickly as possible, it is
desirable that for such plants a notification is sent in advance,
possibly at the planning staqe, so that the main data for the plant
may be valued. It is also desirable that notification is s e t in
advance, when the planned plants may be assumed to involve competi-
tion with other electricity supply undertakings.
 44

6. The existing general conditions for concession are subject to

revision in order to make them correspond to the intentions of
the Law governing construction and operation of electrical in-
stallations. The condition will be in force for all concessions
and in addition special conditions may be included for certain
concessions.

7. New directions and special general conditions are also being

prepared for area concessions. The notification forms for in-
Q
stallations which are constructed in accordance with the area
concessions are also subject to revision.

8. The present communication as well as a copy of the Law will

be sent to all electricity supply undertakings and industrial
undertakings which already have concessions for P.lectrical (\
installations. The communication together with the Law will )
also be published in loose sheets, to be included in the regu-
lation-books and will also be published in the technical press.
In addition, a supplement may be published later, which gives a
more detailed description regarding the valuations of applica-
tions in accordance with the new Law of 19 June 1969.

Oslo, 8 June 1970

Vidkunn Hveding

Rolf Moe

LAW OF 19 June 1969

regarding cons t ruc t Lon and operation of

electrical installations C)
§ 1

Installations for qP.nP.ration, transmission and distribution of

electrical power at high voltage are not to be constructed or
operated by others than the State without permission of the Crown.
The same applies to alterations or extensions to older installa-
tions.
0
For this permission, conditions may be laid down which are in
conformity with the basic rules o f § 3.

The voltage level above, which the law will apply, shall on
each occasion be determined by the Crown.
 45

§ 2
Application for permission in accordance with this Law shall be
accompanied by descriptions, which on demand may be supplemented
by drawings, maps or similar.

Prior to an application being settled, the opinion of the relevant

municipal council and the Lord Lieutenant in the country shall be
sought.
0 § 3

When permission is granted and the conditions are stated, the follow-
ing basic rules are to be observed:

1. The permission is granted to a definite person, company, muni-

0 2.
cipal body or country.
Consideration shall be given to the need for electric power
in the district and if the installation will lead to a ratio-
nal supply of electricity, then the necessary conditions are
to be stated regarding this.

3. Provisios may be applied regarding the construction of the

installation and these may also include a time for construc-
tion to start; also the design, maintenance and operation
of the installation may be included in the provisions.

4. An annual charge payable to the State of up to 3 kroner/kW and

an annual charge payable to the municipal bodies or counties
of up to 4 kroner/kW of the rated power or transmission capacity
of the installation, may be determined. Where a charge is placed
on the power in accordance to concession for the renting of such
power, then this charge is to be subtracted from the above.

Where a charge in accordance to concession for acquisition of,

or regulation of, waterways is placed on the waterfall which is
under construction or from which the power is transmitted, then
this is to be taken into consideration when the charge according
to the present Law is deerrnined.
0 If the carge is not paid when due, annual interest shall be
charged at the rate of 6%. The charge may be enforced by dis-
traint.

More detailed provisions regarding the payment of the charge is

to be determined by the Ministry concerned.

0 5. In addition, such conditions may be stated which are deemed

necessary out of public considerations or to protect private
interests which may be suffering.

This Law l s o applies t0 Spitzbergen, with the exception of tl1e

provisions i n § 3, item 4.
 46

COMMUNICATION NO. 3/70

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

0
Temporary provisions regarding the design of
installations using high voltage aerial
cables for voltages up to 24 kV

During recent years, high-voltage aerial cables for voltages up

to 24 kV have been developed and applied as an alternative to
the usual overhead lines. Permission to carry out installa-
tions with high-voltage aerial cables have so far been given
as a result of applications in each separate case.

In our neighbouring countries, Sweden and Finland, installations

with high-voltage aerial cables have become widespread over the
last few years and experience of these cables in operation are
good. The interest in these installations is steadily growing
in this country also, and the Directorate of Electricity has
received a number of requests to lay down guidelines for the
design of such installations.

The Directorate of Electricity has therefore, in co-operation

with the high-voltage committee of the Permanent Regulations
Committee, worked out the following temporary provisions for
the design of installations usinq hiqh-voltage aerial cables
for voltages up to 24 kV.

1. Types of cables and voltages.

High-voltage aerial cables may"be used for voltages up to

24 kV. In special circumstances, aerial cables may also
be used for higher voltages by written permission from the
NVE. Applications are to be sent throuqh the Electricity
Inspectorate.
0
The aerial cables must be of a standardized type or of a
type approved by the NVE.

0
Aerial cables must have conductors of either copper or
aluminium and the support lines must be of hot-galvanized
steel.

Aerial cables for voltages over 1 kV shall be provided with

a copper shield.
 47

2. Masts and suspension fittings.

The masts with accessories and suspension fittings for aerial

cables, shall be dimensioned according to the provisions in
§ 706 of the Regulations, to the extent these may be a p l i -
cable. An assumed wind pressure of at least 62.5 kp/m shall
be used in the calculation. When calculating the wind-force.
0 the highest figures of cross-sections of cahle and support
line shall be used.

For wooden masts, the attachment of the supports to the mast

leg must always be carried out by means of collars, which are
secured against sliding or by means of through-bolts.

0 In the case of masts situated at an angle to the line where

these angles are larger than 15°, the cables on each side of
the masts must be secured to these masts by means of a sus-
pension which is able to absorb end-tension. The same applies
to cables suspended in the uppermost position for such crossings
which are dealt with in 8-11 and also for crossing of public
roads.

The cable attachment and the carrying of cables on masts,

station walls etc. must not cause a deterioration of the
conductor insulation, the cable sheath or the support wire
and not cause unnecessary deterioration of the support wire
sheath.

3. Jointing and termination.

Jointing and termination of high-voltage aerial cables must

be carried out by means of equipment approved for the pur-
pose. The conductors must be relieved of possible tension
at the joints.

4. Span length and stresses.

0
The span length for high-voltage aerial cables must not normal-
ly exceed 50 m. In special cases, however, longer spans may be
allowed by written consent from the NVE. Applications are to
be addressed to the Electricity Inspectorate. Tensioning and
stresses shall be in accordance with the provisions i n § 707
of the Regulations to the extent that these are relevant. Only
the breaking load of the support wire is to be used as the
breaking load of the cable. When calculating the vertically
0 acting extra load, the diameter of the largest circular part
of the cable and support wire cross-sections shall be used.

When dangerous oscillations may be expected, provisions is to

oe made to dampen these in the best possible manner.
 48

5. Height above ground.

The vertical distance above the grgund for high-voltage aerial

cables shall be at least 4 m a t 40 C. The lateral distance
from the cable to the ground shall be at least 2 m. The dis-
tance to the ground from the horizontal and vertical planes in
which the cable is lying, shall be at least as shown in Figure
below.

Where from experience, large amounts of snow or heavy loads of

ice may be expected, provision is to be made to ensure that the
cable does not approach closer than 3 m to the snow or ground.
0
,(-- 2m

-+-
I
I
I I
I

-- / II
1
FiK. I

0
6. Easthing.

The support wire and copper shield of the high-voltage aerial /\

cable shall be earthed at all termination points. Earthing is \ )
also required of fittings, mountings etc. with the exception
of simple mountings for fastenings. Support wires and copper
shield are permitted to be used as the only earth conductor
for earthing of other parts of the installation, provided the
cross-section of the shield is at least 25 mm2. Branching of
earth conductors from the copper shield or support wire is
·only permitted at the cable terminal points, joint-sleeves etc.

Stays are not required to be earthed or insulated unless there

are bare live parts in the masts.
 49

7. Mechanical protection.

High-voltage aerial cables which are led down the line poles,
must be adequately protected against damage from climbing
devices etc. Corresponding measures are also necessary when
the cables are led down walls, racks etc.

0
8. Crossing and adjacent siting to high-voltage lines.

Where high-voltage aerial cables cross high-voltage lines, the

high-voltage lines shall always occupy the uppermost position.

Crossings are to be carried out according to § 715 of the Regu-

lations.

0 Crossing on a common mast is permitted provided the line does not

have a higher voltage than 170 kV. Where cables and lines do
not form part of the same installation, then a written agree-
ment concerning the use of the mast is to be obtained from the
Electricity Inspectorate. Where high-voltage lines come so
close to the high-voltage cables that breakage of an insulator or
conductor can present the danger of the lines and cables coming
dangerously close to each other, safety precautions are to be
carried out as for crossing ( s e e § 715).

9. Crossing of another high-voltage aerial cable, low-voltage

aerial cable or low-voltage lines.

Where two high-voltage aerial cables cross one another or a

high-voltage aerial cable crosses a low-voltage cable or line
the distance between the high voltage cables and the low vol-
tage cable or line shall be such, that the minimum distance is
l r,1 under the most unfavourable circumstances. The cable carry-
ing the highest voltaqe may be placed above or below the cable
or lines with the lower voltage.
High-voltage cables, low-voltage cables and low-voltage lines
must be kept separate.

Anchoring masts are not required. See 2 above for suspension

fittings.

Crossing on a common mast is permitted. Where the cables and

lines in the crossing on a common mast do not form part of the
same installation, then a written agreement must be obtained

c 10.
concerning the use of the mast. This agreement must be present-
ed to the Electricity Inspectorate on demand.

Crossing of light-current aerial cables or light current lines.

Where high-voltage aerial cables cross light-current aerial

cables or light-current lines, the distance between the cables
or between the high-voltage cable and the light current con-
ductors shall he at least l m under the most unfavourable
circumstances. The high-voltage aerial cable shall always
occupy the uppermost position.
 50

High-voltage cables, low-voltage cables and lines, and light-

current cables and lines must be kept separate.

Anchoring masts are not required. For suspension fittings, see

2 above.

Crossing on a common mast is not permitted.

11. Crossing of public roads.

Where high-voltage aerial cables cross public roads, the verti-

cal distance between cable and road surface shall be at least
C
6 m under the most unfavourable circumstances. The same also
applies for cables taken across public roads in the longitudinal
direction of the roads. For suspension fittings, see 2 above.

12. Crossing of railways and aerial ropeways.

Where high-voltage aerial cables cross railways and aerial rope-

0
ways, the cables must be laid under the ground.

13. Crossing of, and adjacent siting to buildings etc.

The horizontal distance between high-voltage aerial cables and

the nearest parts of buildings shall be at least 2 m. The same
provision also applies for the distance to other objects such
as chimneys, towers. flagstaffs etc.

High-voltage aerial cables may cross less important buildings

( s e e § 726). The vertical distance from the cable to the near-
est part of the building shall be at least 2.5 m under the most
unfavourable circumstances. The same applies for crossing of
scaffolding etc.

14. Support on common masts.

High-voltage cables are permitted to be carried on common masts
with other cables or lines, pro_vided the cables and lines belong
to the same installation and the masts are dimensioned for the
additional stresses which occurs. In addition, the following

0
conditions must be complied with:

a. Common masts with high-voltage lines:

The high voltage conductors shall always occupy the upper-

most position. The vertical distance between the high-
voltage conductors and cable on the mast shall be at least
2 m and also proportioned in such a way that the distance
between the conductors and the cable in the span is not
CJ
less than 0.5 m under the most unfavourable circumstances.
If the high-voltage line is provided with a continuous
earth wire situated below, the distance between the earth
wire and the cable shall be such that they cannot contact
each other even·under the most unfavourable circumstances.
 51

b. Common masts with other high-voltage aerial cables, low-

voltage aerial cables and low-voltage lines:

The distance between the cables shall be such, that they

cannot contact each other.

The vertical distance on the mast between cable and lines

shall be at least 1 m and also dimensioned in such a way
that the cable and line conduct0rs cannot c o n t a t each
L o t n r in the span even 11nder the o s t unfavourale circum-
The vertical distance on the mast between cable and lines
shall be at least 1 m and also dimensioned in such a way
that the cable and line conductors cannot contact each other
in the span even under the most unfavourable circumstances.

0 Where induced over-voltage may occur in low-voltage cable

or lines resulting from the high-voltage cable, suitable
protective measures against over-voltages must be provided.

c. Common masts with light-current lines or light-current aerial

cables:

Light-current lines or light-current aerial cables which are

used solely for the operation of the high-voltage installa-
tion are permitted to be carried on a common line of masts
with high-voltage aerial cables, provided the high-voltage
cables occupy the uppermost position and the rest of the
installation is carried out in compliance with the provi-
sions i n § 712.

Regarding light-current lines or cables carried on a common

line of masts with aerial cables for 1 kV installations,
see 17 below.

Other light-current lines or cables may be carried on a com-

mon line of masts with high-voltage aerial cables over short
distances, provided written permission is granted by the

o
Electricity Inspectorate.

15. Warning plates.

Warning plates shall be fitted on the masts, at the attachment
points for the high-voltage aerial cables.

Warning plRtes shall also be fitted at the entrance to buildings

and where cables are led down walls, rocks etc.

0 16. Other regulations.

Regarding high-voltage aerial cables, the provisions of the

Reg11lations are in force where they are applicable.
 52

Note:
A. The expression "same installation", see 8-9 and 14, refers
to installations belonging to the same lease-holder.

B. Regarding the expression "most unfavourable ei rcums tances ",

see 9-11, 13-14 and the notes u n d e r § § 715 and 718 cf the
Regulations.

C. The need for adequate protection against damage due to clim- (___
bing devices, see 7 above, involves additional protection
to that which is normal for leading armoured cables down
into the ground. The need for adequate protection applies
to the whole length of cable in contact with the pole and
where it may be necessary to use a climbing device.

D. If the aerial cable is laid in the ground, e.g. in c r o ss i.n q s

or where entering stations etc., the provisions i n § § 678
0
and 679 of the Regulations are applicable.

E. Regarding permitted loading and thermal stresses due to

short-circuiting of the aerial cable, t h e § § 649 and 677
of the Regulations are applicable.

F. Where cables are carried on a common line of masts, the

tensioning of the cables shall preferably be such that the
cables attain the same sag at a moderate temperature, say
15°c.

G. For installations in rock, inside mine shafts and for other

special circumstances, cables may be attached to separate
support lines instead of using the normal type of self-
supporting high-voltage aerial cable.

17. Aerial cables for 1 kV installations may be carried on common

masts with light-current aerial cables or lines provided and
following provisions are complied with.

17.1 Cables and lines must form part of the same installation, or the
light-current cables or lines belong to the Telegraph Service.

If the latter is the case, a satisfactory agreement must be drawn

up, which regulates the use of the common masts. The agreement
0
must be presented to the Electricity Inspectorate on demand.

o
17.2 The 1 kV cable must occupy the uppermost position. The distance
between this cable and light-current cable or line shall be not
less than 1 m under the o s t unfavourable circumstances, see,
however, 17.5 below.

Transformer masts are not to be used as common m a t s nor should

masts carrying live and bare 1 kV components be used as common
masts.
 53

If the line of masts also carries low-voltage aerial cables or

lines in accordance with 14 b above, then the relationship be-
tween these and light-current cable or lines belonging to the
Telegraph Service must comply with special regulations which
are approved by NVE in accordance w i t h § 323 a of the Regula-
tions.

Light-current cables or lines and low-voltage cables or lines

must be kept separate along the line of m s t s .
0 17.3 The masts must be of wood or of a material of equally insulat-
ing properties.

To each mast must be attached a 50 mm wide yellow ring at least

0.7 m below the attachment point of the 1 kV cable.

0 The warning rings shall be fitted by the authority which is

responsible for the 1 kV cable and this work must be completed
before the light-current cables or lines are installed.

17.4 The support wire for the lght-current cables must be kept in-
sulated from ground.

The support wire shall also be divided into separate sections

which are insulated from each other. in order to minimize the
length of live conductor in case of faults. The dividinq points
shall always be on the tirst and last mast which is common to
the different voltage systems, and also at the mast immediate-
ly before and after these common masts and on the first mast
after branching off from the common mast. The division and
subsequent insulation shall be done by cutting the supporting
line and securing the ends to separate fittings which are kept
at a distance of at least 25 cm from each other, measured along
the mast surface.

17.5 When the 1 kV cable is led down a mast which also carries light-
current cables or lines, the 1 kV cable must be adequately pro-
tected against damage from climbing devices. This protection
must be provided along the whole length of the mast which is
below the points of attachment for the light current cables or

0 lines.

17.6 Where induced over-voltage may occur in light-current cables

or lines due to the high-voltage cable, suitable protective
measures against over-voltages must be provided, s e e § 337 of
the Regulations.

n When more experience has been gained with these installations, the
Directorate of Electricity intend, after discussions in the Perma-
nent Regulations Committee, to recommend provisions for installa-
tions comprising high-voltage aerial cables, to be included in the
Regulations for electrical installations.

Oslo. 15 October 1970

Rolf Moe

A. Johansen
 54

COMMUNICATION NO. 2/71

from the
NORWEGIA: WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Dangers associated with uninsulated wires attached

0
to house walls

In a court verdict of 12 December 1970, the Supreme Court awarded

kr. 50.000 to a 49 years old forest worker, as compensation for
injuries he received in 1965 while he was painting his house and
o
came into contact with one or more uninsulated (bare) wires lead-
ing to the house and attached to insulators beside a window. He
received an electric shock, fell off the ladder and suffered severe
injuries.

The Supreme Court unanumously cameto the conclusion that responsi-

bility could not be based on the rules of the Regulations of 1939,
§§ 401 and 506, which were in force when the house was built.
The first judge with s y p a t h y from one of the other judges found,
however, that liability in the present case could be based on the
common principles of justice, regarding responsibility without
auil t : .
The first judge ruled that fixing bare wires to the va Ll.s of
houses is a method which is technically undesirale and can be
conidered a dangerous practice. When the method of providing
the supply input is the cause of serious injury to a person, he
found that the electricity supply undertaking could not avoid
liability even though the accident rate from this cause is low.
In the verdict he also placed some signigicance on the fact that
the undertaking could easily insure itself against responsibility
of this kind. In his findings he referred to verdicts in the
Norwegian Law Gazet\e 1°48 pHJe 1111 2nJ !96q p g e lJnB.

He did not regard it necessary to decide whether the practice of

o
the undertaking could be termed subjectively unjustifiable or not.

As for the injured person, he was partly blamed by the undertaking,

because he was painting with his upper body bare and without any
gloves on, and also that during the work he must have shown care-
lessness. The first judge agreed to the fact that the injured
person had committed a mistake and that he therefore had to carry
half the damage himself, s e e § 25 of Law no. 11 of 11 May 1902.

One of the other judges, ·as mentioned above, agreed with the con-
clusion put forward by the first judge.
 55

A third judge also arrived at the same result, but based the
responsibility of the undertaking on our common rules of ade-
quate safety, which in his opinion makes it a duty for the
undertaking as a contractor and inspector to ensure adequate
measures against the danger of bare wires. He found that this
duty was accentuated with reference t o § 401 of the regulations
in force at the time which under "general provisions" stated
that: "Current-carrying parts which are not adequately
insulated shall be protected against accidental contact .... "

He found that the undertaking had to pay compensation, because

the use of uninsulated wires leading to the house was not justi-
fiable.

With regard to the judgement of the actions of the injured person,

0 he agreed with the first judge and with his conclusions.

The minority of the Supreme Court, two judges, found that the res-
ponsibility of the undertaking could not be based on unresponsible
conduct by their employees and that responsibility could not be
objectively transferred to the undertaking. The minority voted
for the undertaking to be acquitted.

Because of the verdict by the Supreme Court, NVE has considered

whether or not, with support i n § 41 of the Regulations, it should
be required that existing bare wires leading to houses must be
insulated, thus bringing these installations in compliance with
§ 511, 3. paragraph, last sentence which states:

"Where bare i r e s are taken along or into buildings, the

shortest horizontal distance between any uninsulated wire
and the nearest part of any building shall be at least
1.5 m."

Because of the statistically very low injury rate fro accidents

of this kind and because of the large costs involved for many
undertakings, NVE does not for the time being regard an order
of the above kind necessary.

0 However, NVE do suggest that the various undertakings inform

their customers about the danger connected with bare wires lead-
ing to the walls of buildings.

Oslo, 10 March 1971

By order
Rolf Moe

Alf Johansen
 56

COMMUNICATION NO. 4/71

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY
0
Installation and loading of high-voltage cables
having cross-linked polyethylene insulation
type TXSP ("PEX-cable") §§ 649, 677 and 678

0
of the Regulations

Tests and practical experiments have shown that high-voltage

cables having cross-linked polyethylene insulation, metal
protective shield and external sheathing of PVC or polyethy-
lene are similar to normal armoured PVC or paper insulated
cables, in ability to withstand mechanical stresses.

On the basis of the information available, the Directorate of

Electricity hereby permits that high-voltage cables having cross-
linked polyethylene insulation, metal protective shields and
external sheathing of PVC or polyethylene, for the time being
may be laid and protected according to the regulations for ar-
moured cables.

In the case of indoor installations and for cable in ducts etc.

one must bear in mind that cross-linked polyethylene is a com-
bustible material. The gases developed when the material is
burning are, however, not harmful as is the case for PVC.

Insulation of cross-linked polyethylene can withstand higher

temperatures during continual loading than PVC and impregnated
paper insulation. If, however, the temperature of the insula-
tion increases further, the heat emission from the cable will
increase as well. In that case it will be necessary to study
carefully the environment in which the cable is laid in order
0
to avoid dangerous heating of the cable itself and of the surround-
ing materials. An increase in the heat emission for underground
cables will lead to a drying out of the surrounding masses and

n
hence decrease the thermal conductivity.

Work is going on in the Scandinavian countries at the moment,

with the aim of arriving at a set of tables for maximum per-
mitted loading of cables with cross-linked polyethylene insula-
tion.
 57

For the time being, however, the maximum permitted loading of

these cables shall be according t o § § 649 and 677 of the Regu-
lations. In special cases the Directorate of Electricity may
permit higher loading. Applications for permission are to be
sent, in duplicate to the Electricity Inspectorate.

Oslo, 26 October 1971

By order
A. Johansen

0 I. Steine

0
 58

COMMUNICATION NO. 1/72

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICIY

Plastic conduit installations

Plastic conduit installations may be carried out and used in much

the same way as metal conduit installations. It must be borne in
mind, that plastic differ in properties from metal.

Various plastic materials possess quite different properties. The)

may, however, roughly be divided into thermoplastics and thermo-
setting plastics. The thermoplastics soften or melt if they are
heated up and become harder and more brittle when subject to low
temperatures. The thermosetting plastics do not become soft or
melt as they are heated but do have a tendency to b e c o e harder and
more brittle when subject to low temperatures.

Most plastics possess poor electric conductivity and may normally

be regarded as insulators. Plastics are also poor thermal conduc-
tors.

The properties of each type of plastic can be varied within certain

limits by the addition of vario11s compounds and heat treatments
during production. In order to obtain i n r u s e d mechanical
strength and rigidity, plastics can be reinforced by, for example,
fibreglass.

Plastic conduits used in electrical installation are mainly made

from the thermoplastics polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene
(PE) and are usually not reinforced.

Conduits, boxes, bends etc. made of plastic must be approved by

NEMKO, and the equipment will be tested in order to ensure that
0
it satisfies the test regulations. Approved equipment will there-
fore comply with certain minimum requirements in respect of safety
and practical use.

Conduits, boxes, bends etc. made of plastic must not in normal

operation attain a temperature higher than 60°c. Bending of the
0
.
conduit by means of a bending sgring may be carried out at tempe-
ratures down to approximately 10 C, without preheating. Sharp
bends, however, ought to be avoided unless the conduit is heated,
as some damage may occur. As it may be difficult to obtain a satis-
factory bending of the conduit when it is heated, the safest way
is to use prefabricated bends or a bending device suitable for the
operation.
 59

The plastics used for conduit must be of a non-combustible or

self-extinguishing type and tested according to standard tests.
For the time being, however, sockets are allowed to be of a
combustible, non-self-extinguishing material.

The most important advantages from a safety point of view, in

using plastic conduit, is that they are insulating and also
0 resistant to corrosion. The main disadvantages are low mechanical
strength and low temperature resistance. The temperature coeffici-
ents of expansion for plastic are high. A plastic conduit, 4 m i n
length will elongate approximately 13 mm when it is heated 40°c,
and shrink accordingly when cooled again.

Plastic conduit for electrical installations have not received

0 much attention in this country so far, and the regulations are not
very satisfactory for these installations. The selection of suit-
able materials has also been very poor. This has led to some un-
certainty regarding the installation procedure and application of
these installations.

On the basis of the information available, the Directorate of Elec-

tricity, with support of the authorization given by the Ministry of
Industry and Handicraft on the 6 October 1971, hereby lays down the
followinq temnorary nrovisions:

Plastic conduit installations are to be carried out and applied

in accordance w i t h § 455 of the Regulations with the following
additional provisions:

1. A bending spring or similar must be used for the bending of

plastic conduit-

2. The plastic conduits must be attached to the supports by means

of clamps, saddles, etc. It is an advantage to use nailclamps
etc. especially designed for use uith these conduits.

Conduit, boxes etc. must be attached in such a way that damage

or deformation does not occur.

Subject to foreseeable stresses or due to relative movements

between the conduit and the supports, the conduit shall not
loosen from the sockets, nipples etc. Normally, it is required
to use shorter distances between the attachment points than for
metal conduit, and special care must be taken in the vicinity
of boxes etc.

0 Inside concrete constructions, plastic conduit ought to be

fastened along the associated steel work in order to avoid
damage before and while the concrete is h!fl e u r e d .
 60

3. Conduit, boxes, bends etc. made of plastic mgst not in normal

operation attain a temperature higher than 60 C. Special care
must be taken in the vicinity of metal fuse cupboards, boxes
appliances etc. and inside rooms with high temperatures such as
drying rooms etc.

4. Heating cables shall not be laid in plastic conduit. Heating

cables with hot tails shall be connected inside metal boxes of
sufficient size to avoid harmful heating. One is permitted to f\
use plastic conduit between connection boxes and fuse cupboards )
provided the boxes are earthed by means of approved earthing /
devices.

5. Heavy equipment §Uch as reflector-type heaters etc. must not be

attached to wall-boxes of plastic which are fitted with thread-

6.
ed covers.

Metal covers must not be used on corresponding plastic boxes

unless the boxes are specially approved for it and are fitted
n
' ,

with insulation between the covers and the connection spaces

inside the boxes.

7. Conduit, boxes, bends etc. of metal are not allowed to be used

in conjunction with corresponding items of plastic. One may,
however, for the time being make the following exceptions from
this rule:

a. Fuse cupboards of metal may be used. Boxes of metal may

be used provided no corresponding approved boxes of insula-
ting materials are available on the market. Cupboards and
boxes of metal must in that case be fitted with approved
earthing devices, and must be earthed in accordance to the
Regulations.

b. When plastic conduit is inserted into compartments, boxes,

appliances etc. sockets or nipples of insulating materials
which are approved for plastic conduits must be used. To
the extent these are not available on the market, one may
for the time being use sockets or nipples of metal which
are fitted with blocking springs.

c. Until flexible conduit of insulating materials are avail-

able and approved for concealed installations, it may be
0
necessary to use short flexible tubes of steel with external
plastic coating, which are approved by NEMKO for apparatus
installations.

d. Conduit installations of metal may be extended by using

plastic conduit· All the metal conduit must then be in
conductive contact with each other and the fuse cupboard.
n
Oslo, 20 March 1972
By order
A. Johansen

I. Steine
 61

COMMUNICATION NO. 2/72

from the

NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

0 Electrical Installations on Board Ships

Design of conduit installations

with fittings etc. of the
FIBO-blocking system.
0
Some years ago permission was granted, as an exemption
from the Regulations, to use fittings etc. with FIBO-
blocking system in conduit installations on board ships.
Permission was granted on special conditions.

Due to the experiences gained in the past, it is now

necessary to lay down more detailed conditions regarding
the design of such installations on board ships.

Pursuant to the Act of 24 May 1929 relating to supervision

of electrical installations §2, the Royal Decree of 4 July
1929 and authorization of 6 October 1971 from the Ministry
of Industry and Handicraft, NVE hereby lays down that the
conditions for such installations from now on and until
further notice shall be as follows:

1. Boxes are to be fastened by means of screws. The

fastening screws must be secured against loosening.
Where nuts or screws which are threaded into steel etc.
are applied, lock washers must be used. Self tapping

0 screws are not permitted.

For fastening to wood, galvanized wood-screws of suitable
dimensions are to be used.

2. Boxes and fittings shall be cast as one unit or the

fittings must be permanently fixed to the boxes. It is
not permitted merely to press the fittings into the
boxes.

3. Heavy gauge galvanized steel conduit of the "thick-

walled" type is to be used, see NEMKO's list of
approved equipment, group 7.112. Light steel conduit,
of the "thin-walled" type is not permitted.
 62

4. The conduit is to be clamped to supports on both sides

of the boxes or sockets and not further away than 10 cm.
The fastening screws are to be secured against loosen-
ing, see 1. above.

For fastening to wood, wood-screws of suitable dimensions

or other satisfactory means of fastening are required.
Solid galvanized clamps must be used for fastening the cl
conduit.

5. Conduit joints and the attachment of conduit to boxes,

distribution switchboards etc. are to be carried out in
such a way that permanent contact is established between
the different metal oarts.

6. No part of the conduit installation must be covered up

before the Electricity Inspection gives its permission.

The Electricity Inspection requires to be informed, well in

advance, when a conduit installation is ready for inspection.

Oslo, 26 April 1972

By Order

A. Johansen

F. LØvmo

n
 63

COMMUNICATION NO. 3/72

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Aerial cable of the type

EXW and EX

0 For several years a plastic insulated cable with support line,

the so called "figure eiqht cable",has been available on the
market.

This type of cable has occasionally been used as input cable,

but not to the extent as was expected. The cable has not been
used much as a distribution cable by the electricity supply
undertakings either, and thii is also the general experience
in the other Scandinavian countries.

In recent ·years, however, a new type of aerial cable has been

developed having twisted low-voltage leads and no common sheath
covering the conductors. The cable is supplied with or without a
support-wire and is designated types of aerial cable EXW and EX.

Because of the good experiences in economy, mounting and relia-

bility in operation, this cable is already widely used in Finland
and Sweden. So far just a few trial installations are in opera-
tion in this country, but it is felt that due to the experience
gained here and abroad this type of cable will be used extensively
in distribution networks, and as sub distribution cables, in
the future.

In antici-cion of standards for this cable, the Directorate of

0 Electricity, with support of the law of 24 May 1929 regarding
supervision of electrical installations§ 2, and authorization
granted by the Ministry of Industry and Handicraft of the 6 October
1971, hereby, until further notice. lavs down the following condi-
tions for carryinn out installations with this type of cable.

Cablr
0 Construction: 1-, 2-, 3-, and 4-conductors having polyethylene
insulation, with or without support wire. The
support wire shall be made of galvanized steel
having polyethylene insulation of 0.8 m, thick-
ness.
Nominal voltage: 1000 V.
 64

Conductors: 16 - 25 50 - 95 - 150 mm2 aluminium of the

stranded type.
Insulation: Low density polyethylene (PEL) of weather-resistant
type.

Thickness of insulation, maximum length of span and permitted current

loading shall be according to the table below:

Cross-section mm 2 16 25 50 95 150 Al
0
Thick.of insul. mm 1. 3 1. 3 1. 4 1.6 1.8

Max. span. m 50 50 60 60 60

Max.permitted curr.A 70 95 140 220 295

Equ i pment: f o r > j o i n i n g , b r-an ch i n q , c o n n e c t i o n and s u s p e n s i o n :

Equipment as mentioned above for 2-, 3- and 4-conductors must be

approved by the NVE.

Additional r>eguZations

Aerial cables having cross-sections as given above are permitted

and may be used, for the time being, as input cables from over-
head lines where the multi-tube input channel is short-circuit
proof and the terminal box is directly behind the inout channel. A
further condition is that the terminal box is sufficiently spaci-
ous to house the aluminium-copper connection terminals or that
the box is fitted with clips especially approved for aluminium
leads.

In all other respects the Regulations are to be enforced t the

'ext.e n t; that tliey may be applicable.

Oslo, 1 September 1972

By order
A. Johansen

I. Steine
0
 65

COMMUNICATION NO. 3/73

from the

n NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Electric cables in sauna bathrooms

0 The Directorate of Electricity has recently received reports

from the Electricity Inspectorate and the Local Inspection
concerning damage to cables being used in sauna bathrooms.
In a number of cases these faults have led to minor fires.

The reason for this, is that the cables have not been able to
withstand the high ambient temperatures. Measurements have
shown that installation materials to be used in sauna bath-
rooms must be able to withstand at least 130°c.

The Regulations for Electrical Installations, § 405, requires,

among other things, that installation materials shall be so
constructed that all stresses arising during operation can be
withstood with adequate safety.

The Directorate of Electricity has discussed the matter with

NEMKO and interested cable manufacturers, in order to arrive
at a suitable type of cable with satisfactory heat resistance,
for use in surface installatins in sauna bathrooms an<l various
other high temperature rooms.

This has resulted in a new heat resistant cable which is now

0 available on the market. The new cable is approved by NEMKO

for open installation in sauna bathrooms and other high tem-
perature rooms.

The cable is termed TG 170, heat resistant synthetic rubber-

insulated cable, max. 170°c. The cable is manufactured with
insulation and outer sheath made of silicon rubber.

0 Referring to the above and with support o f § 2 of the Law of

24 May 1929 regarding supervision of electrical installations
and authorization from the Ministry of Industry and Handicraft
of 6 October 1971, NVE hereby lays down the following:
 66

1. Cables of the type PR, PRL, PP, PFXP, PFSP etc. installed
in sauna bathrooms etc. must by the end of 1974 be replaced
by cables of the type TG 170 or of a similar type.

2. Approved cables of the type TG 170 or of a similar type must

be used in all new cable installations in sauna bathrooms
and other high temperature rooms.

3. These regulations come into force on 1 May 1973.

Oslo, 9 March 1973

0
By order
A. Johansen

I. Steine
 67

COMMUNICATION NO. 4/73

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Protection of distribution transformers

n
on poles

According t o § § 647, 674 and 709 in the Regulations for electrical

installations, open air transformers are to be protected by means
of appropriate fuses or automatic switches.

By this is understood that distribution transformers on poles are

to be fitted with high-voltage melting fuses located on the trans-
former polec
.. Asbestos-tube fuses have usually been used.

Tests have, however, proved that asbestos-tube fuses do not give

satisfactory short-circuit protection.

Furthermore, investigation has shown that about 11 out of 12 fuse

replacements are not due to transformer faults, but to flash-over,
caused by atmospheric interference.

With reference to the above mentioned and according to a committee-

draft, the Directorate of Electricity hereby gives permission for
the increased use of automatic switches, appropriately located, as
protection for transformers.

LJ Fuses against overload may, as previously, be installed on the low-

voltage side, e.g. by measuring of the load-current at peak-periods.

Non-linear resistance arresters or spark-gaps, designed in coopera-

tion with transformer-manufacturer, should used as excess voltage
protection.

The above mentioned does not exclude the continued use of asbestos-

0 tube fuses, provided the back-up switch disconnects in the event of

the transformer short-crcuting. Such fuses, however, ouqht not to
be rated less than 16 A.
Oslo, 14 November 1973
By order
A. Johansen

I. Steine

EK-9
 68

COMMUNICATION NO 3/74
from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Regulations for erection

of dry-insulated transformers

It has been brought to the notice of The Directorate of Electricity

that dry-insulated transformers are gaining popularity, and ques-
(l
tions haye been asked from different areas about which provisions
should be applicable for the erection of such transformers.

Therefore, the Norwegian Water Resources a d Electricity Board,

Directorate of Electricity has, pursuant t o § 2 of the Act of 24 May
1929 relating to supervision of electrical installations and the
authorization of 6 October 1971 from the Ministry of Industry and
Bandicraf stated the following Regulations which apply in addi-
tion to the provisions in the nequlations for electrical instal-
Lar.Lor.s of· 5 December 1963:

1. Location
Dry-insulated transformers of open design (without enclosures)
are to be located either in rooms which s a t i s f y § 614 in the
Regulations, or in a separate, locked room which may be
constructed with walls, ceiling and floor of inflammable mate-
rial, provided the interior of the room is coated with ignition-
protecting material of at least A 10 and a fire-hardened door of
at least B 30-class. The room is not to contain hiahvoltage
equipment other than the transformers and their connection
cables. Switches and fuses for the transformers are thus to be
located in rooms satisfying§ 614 in the Regulations. 0
Warningotices of approved type are to be placed easily visible
on the transformers and entrance doors.

Dry-insulated transformers in earthed steP.1-enclosures and

contact-proof enclosed connections and connection cables may be r'\
located in workshops, commercial buildings, switchboard rooms \ )
etc.

Warningnotices of approved type are to be placed easily visible

on the enclosures. Breakdown fuses are to be located in separate,
approved cubicles whibh are to be kept locked.
 69

2. Protection from contact

Dry-insulated transformers of open design are to have proection

in accordance with the provisions i n § 636 in the Regulations.
The windings of the transformers shall be considered as live
parts.

n 3. VentiLation ducts

ventilation ducts which are run through other rooms, are to have
walls of at least A 30.
Ventilation ducts are not permitted to oe run throuqh fire walls.
Fire-shutters are not required.

4. Protection against externai stresses

a. Mechanical protection
Dry-insulated transformers which are located such that
they may be subject to external mechanical damage e.g.
from vehicles, falling articles and the like, are to be
effectively protected by the provision of frames, covers
and the like.

b. Dust protection
Dry-insulated transformers are, dependent on the surround-
ings, to be protected in an appropriate way against dust
covered. Efficient cleaning of the transformers and pro-
vision of suitable dust filters shall be carried out.

The transformers are to have dust-tight enclosures and

dust-filtered ventilation in conditions exposed to dust.
As protection against excessive heating of the transformers
in case the dust-filters become blocked, the transformers
are to have thermal cutouts which automatically disconnect
the transformers before the windings attain too high a tem-
perature.

If such disconnections leads to operational djfficulties,

the transformers may, instead of thermal cutouts, have a
device fitted which gives a warning before the temperature
reaches too high a value.

c. Corrosive atmospheres
Dry-insulated transformers are not permitted to be located
in or ventilated from surroundings with corrosive atmos-
pheres, e.g. acid vapours and the like which may damage
the insulation or other important parts.
 70

<l. Moisture
Dry-insulated transformers which have been out of opera-
tion for some time and which have been stored in an area
liable to be cold and/or damp, are to have their insula-
tion resistance measured and, if necessary, be dried out
before being put into operation. Additionally, the trans-
formers are to be protected during operation against the
effect of moisture as necessary.

e. Excess voltages
Consideration shall be given to the fact that dry-insulated
transformers are more vulnerable to excess voltages than
oil-insulated transformers.

5. These Regulations enter into force immediately.

0
Oslo, 28 June 1974
By order
A. Johansen

I. Steine
 71

COMMUNICATION NO. 1/75

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

0
Act of 19 June 1969
relating to construction and operation
of electrical plants

0
1. It is hereby stated that new standard provisions, dated
20 August 1975 regarding concessions are approved by the
Ministry of Industry and Handicraft. Special additional
provisions for the individuål concession may also be stated.

2. The new provisions will be applied from 1 November 1975.

Concessions which were granted later than 19 June 1969, on
the condition that the provisions may later be altered,
will be subject to the new provisions. Those concerned
will be duly notified.

3. Revised notification forms will be available from the Elec-

tricity Inspectorate.

4. Applications for concessions are to be written in accordance

with requirements dated 1 November 1975 from the NVE, Directo-
rate of Electricity. These requirements will be sent to Elec-
tricity supply undertakings and industrial companies under-
taking generation and/or distribution of electrical power and
will also be available from the Electricity Inspectorate or

n
the NVE.

5. § 1 in Act of 19 June 1969 states: "The Crown shall determine

the voltage levels at which this Act is applicable". In con-
formity with this authorization the NVE has stated that the
Act is applicable to plants operating at voltages above
1000 V A.C. and 1500 V D.C. This enters into force from
1 Novenber 1975.

0
Oslo, 15 October 1975
By order
Gunnar Vatten

A. Johansen

EK-14
 72

COMMUNICATION NO. 2/75

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY 0
Regulations for temporary high-voltage
cable installations

Some time ago the distribution network committee of the Norwegian

0
Electricity Supply Undertakings prepared a draft for safety require-
ments which, in the opinion of the committee, ought to be fulfilled
by the temporary laying of spare cables directly on the ground, and
by the temporary uncovering of underground cables.

On the basis of this draft, the NVE, Directorate of Electricity

hereby states, pursuant to § 2 in the Act· of 24 .May 1929 rel;-tinq to
supervision of electrical installations and authorization ot 6
October 1971 from the Ministry of Industry and Handicraft, the
following regulations which apply in addition to the Regulations
for electrical installations of 5 December 1963:

J.. General

High-voltage cables must not be handled, moved etc. unless

they are disconnected and earthed in accordance with "Safety
l:{egulations for high-voltaqe installations".

2. Cables temporarily laid directly on the ground

n
2.1 Cables for a voltage up to 24 kV may temporarily be laid
directly on the ground for a period of up to 6 days. For du-
rations· exceeding 6 days and for higher voltage-cable in-
stallations, written permission from the Electricity
Inspectorate must be obtained in each individual case.

2.2 The cvbles are to be screened or armoured. Screen and/or

armouring are to be earthed.

2.3 The cables are to be laid in solid or split plastic conduits.

Half-conduits of plastic or ducts of wooden boards may also
0
be used if these are satisfactorily fixed in place.

The plastic- or wood-protection is to be of a quality corre-

sponding to the protection for underground cables ( s e e § 678
in the Regulations for electrical installations).

EK l 5
 73

2.4 The cable protection is to be marked clearly and distinc-

tively by means of marking plates of approved type, with
a maximum distance of 3 metres between the plates.

Where-ever possible, barriers are to be put up above the

cables. A marking rope is to be stretched out between the
barriers.

2.5 In case of damage to the cables by vehicles or the cables

for other reasons are specially exposed to mechanical damage,
suitable protecting devices are to be used.

0 2.6 Where the cables are laid on a road surface,permission has

to be obtained from the road authorities. As regards ·public
roads, attention is drawn to the provisions concerning public
roads and electrical distribution lines.

2.7 When during line work, crossing lines have to be temporarily

cabled, the responsibility as regards installation and opera-
tion of the cables lies with the owner/user of the crossinq
lines, unless otherwise ncrreed upon.
3. Underground aabLes temporariLy unaovered

3.1 Underground cables may be temporarily uncovered for a period

6 daye maximum. For durations exceeding 6 days permission of
from the Electricity Inspectorate has to be obtained in each
individual case.

3.2 The cables have to be marked clearly and distinctively by means

of marking plates of approved type, with a maximum distance of
3 metres between the plates.

4. These reguiations enter into forae 1 January 1976.

n Oslo, 13 November 1975

By order
A. Johansen

n I. Steine
 74

COMMUNICATION NO. 1/76

from the

NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Regulations for plastic conduit installations

on board ships.

In some special cases during the last two or three years,

0
the NVE, Directorate of Electricity has given permission
for exemptions from the Regulations for electrical installa-
tions and has allowed the use of plastic conduit installa-
tions on board ships. This has particularly concerned
installations on board ships of the westamaran type and
similar light ships, and permission has been given under certain
conditions. The NVE, Directorate of Electricity still
frequently receives applications concerning the use of plastic
conduit installations.

In co-operation with the Det norske Veritas, NEMKO and the

NVE, the company Norwesco A/S has ordered the Norges Bygg-
forskningsinstitutt to carry out investigations concerning
expansion conditions, joint equipment etc.

On the basis of these investigations, the experience gained

from the testing of plastic conduits and appurtenant equipment
by NEMKO, and from the installations which are completed, the
NVE, Directorate of Electricity hereby gives permission for

o
the use of plastic conduit installations for cablinq in
dry rooms in accommodation quarters on board ships, provided
that no unusual circumstances occur. This permission is given
pursuant to the Act of 24§May 1929 relating to supervision of ..
electrical installations 2, the Royal Decree of 4 July 1929,
and the authorization of 6 October 1971 from the Ministry of
Industry and Handicraft.

The NVE has stated temporary regulations for such installations

which apply in addition to the requirements in the Regulations
for electrical installations. These also apoly to the new
C)
Regulations for electrical installationR on board ships, coming -
into force during the spring of 197G. If other designs than
those to which these temporary Regulations apply are intended
to b used, this has to be laid before the Electricity Inspec-
torate in advance.
 75

The temporary Regulations are:

1. Conduit, boxes, sockets, bends etc. are to be of at

least flame retardant material, and are to be of a type
which is approved by the NEMKO, or are to have at least
corresponding dimensions and qualities. Conduits are
to be riqid, except for shorter lengths where flexible
conduits may be accepted in special cases.
0 2. Boxes, sockets, bends etc. may be of the click spring
system type.

3. Boxes are to be fastened by means of screws or nails.

Fastening screws are to be secured against loosening.
When fastening to structural parts of aluminium takes

0 place, self tapping screws or plate screws are not

permitted.

4. The conduits are to be laid and fastened in such a way

that the longitudinal variations, which may occur because
of temperature variations, cannot cause damage to the
conduit installations and/or its cables.

To obtain such longitudinal variations the conduits may

be laid with bends, or expansion sockets may be put into
the conduit installation. Such bends may have an angle
between 45° and 90°. When the conduit length between two
boxes or between switchboard and box exceeds a standard
conduit length (4 m), an expansion socket is to be inserted.

Expansion sockets are to have a length of not less than

120 mm. The socket has to be mounted on the conduits in
such a way that the part of the socket which covers each
conduit has a length of approx. 40 mm. The socket is to
be fixed to the support. When using expansion sockets
care must be taken that the cables are laid with sufficient
slack.

0
5. The conduits are to be satisfactorily clamped to the support
by means of corrosion proof metal clamps fastened by
screws or nails. When fastening to structural parts of
aluminium takes place, self tapping screws or plate screws
are not permitted. The maximum distance between fastening
clamps is 750 mm. When conduit is inserted into boxes, the
box and the conduit are to be fixed to the same structural
part. The conduits are to be fastened on both sides of the
0 box or socket at a maximum distance of 100 mm from this. At
boxes the conduits are to be fastened in such a way that
they cannot slip in the clamps, except due to longitudinal
variations. However, a conduit between two expansion sockets
is to be fastened half-way between the sockets in such a way
that the conduit cannot slip in this clamp.
 76

6. Where conduits are r'un through beams, frames or similar,

the penetrations are to be suitably lined if there is
any danger of damage to the conduits.
7. The conduits are to be installed in such a way that they
are satisfactorily protected against damage during ] t e r
installation and fittinq work. Special efforts are to be
taken to·prevent Conduits from being damaged during welding
work etc.

Additionally, precautions must be taken to prevent the con-

0
duit installation from being smeared by, or in any other way
exposed to, rust-preventing compositions or similar which

o
could destroy the properties of the plastic conduit.

8. Generally, it is to be taken into consideration that

plastic conduit installations do not have the same mechani-
cal properties as an installation s i n g galvanized
steel conduits, e.g. plastic parts of ceiling and wall
boxes are not to be the only support for equipment with
weight above 1 kg. Plastic conduit installations in
normal use are not to attain a temperature exceeding 60°c.

9. Special consideration is to be given when making holes for

boxes in wall and ceiling panels which, according to the
fire regulatiorns in force, are to be of incombustible
material.

10. During installation work efforts are to be made to maintain

the temperature of the conduit aRd fittings as near to that
which is most likely to be present during normal service
and in no case below ooc.
11. No part of the conduit installation ii to be covered up
before the Electricity Inspectorate gives its permission.
The Electricity Inspectorate must be informed of the
estimated time of the completion of the conduit installa-
tion well in advance, so that a survey can take place.
12. These temporary Regulations enter into force immediately.

0
Oslo, 17 February 1976.

By order

A. Johansen

F. LØvmo
 77

COMMUNICATION NO. 2/76

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Decision concerning Local Inspection of

medium-voltage plants

C Until 1 July 1976 medium-voltage generating plants could only

be put into operation with the written permission from NVE.

In most of these,it was stated that the plants should be con-

sidered as low-voltage plants, and as such be subject to con-
trol by the Local Inspection.

According to the alterations of 1 July 1976 in the Regulations

for electrical installations, it is no longer necessary to ob-
tain permission from the NVE in order to install and put into
operation medium-voltage plants. Furthermore, the need to
consider the medium-voltage installations as a low-voltage
installation is deleted. The voltage limits are now altered
such that medium-voltage is denoted as being from 250 V and up
to 1000 V A.C. and above 500 V up to 1500 D.C.

In order that medium-voltage plants are still to be subject to

control by the Local Inspection in the same way as low-voltage
installations, the NVE, Directorate of Electricity therefore has,
persuant t o § 10 in the Act of 24 May 1929 relating to super-
vision of electrical installations and Regulations for electri-
cal installations, § 8, determined as follows:

All duties concerning Local Inspection are to apply both to

low-voltage and medium-voltage installations.

This decision enters into force immediately.

Oslo, 19 July 1976

By order
A. Johansen

I. Steine

EK-17
 78

COMMUNICATION NO. 3/76

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Pz ec au t.Lons against ch i Ldreo climbinq

high-voltaae masts

Almost every year accidents occur where children are seriously

injured due to climbing hioh-voltge masts. Therefore, the
NVE, Directorate of Electricity, pursuant to 9 2 in the Act of
24 May 1929 relating to supervision of electrical installations
and the authorization of 6 October 1971 from the Ministry of
Industry and Handicraft, has laid down the following Regulations,
C
which pursuant t o § 41 in Regulations for electrical installa-
tions, are also applicable to existing plants:

1.1 Masts carrying lines up to 72.5 kV, which are easily

accessible for climbing, are to have a satisfactory
protection to prevent children from climbing up to
live parts.

1.2 The protection is to be constructed in such a way than

no risk of danger can occur when inspection and main-
tenance work are being carried out.

Note:

Masts which ape most easily accessible foP climbing

aPe the lattice masts in which the latticewoPk foPms
easily accessible steps and which aPe located neap
to built-up aPeas, play gpounds, spoPts fields, cam-
ping aPeas and public Poads.

It is Pecommended to ask the advice of local school- and

0
Poad-authoPities in such mattePs.

In case of doubt, the ElectPicity InspectoPate will decide

as to necessaPy pPecautions.

2. These Regulations enter into force 1 October 1976. For exist-

ing plants satisfactory precautions shall, as far as possible
be carried out within 1 year from the above mentioned date.

Oslo, 15 September 1976

0
By order
A. Johansen

. Steine

EK-18
 79

COMMUNICATION NO. 4/76

from the

NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY
( )

Regulations for electrical installations

on board ships.

n
Changes i n § 1665.1 and .2. Navigation light switchboards.

In the Regulations of 1 February 1975 concerning navigational

aids and equipment to be used in connection with navigation
etc., the Maritime Directorate has stated provisions which are
also of importance to the electrotechnical construction of
navigation light switchboards, s e e § 25 in these Regulations.

According to this, and pursuant t o § 2 in the Act of 24 May 1929

relating to the supervision of electrical installations, and
the authorization of 6 October 1971 from the Ministry of
Industry and Handicraft, the Norwegian Water Resources and
Electricity Board hereby states that the provisions i n § 1665.1
and .2 in the Regulations for electrical installations on board
ships are to be as follows:

§ 1665. Navigation light switchboaPds.

. 1 Electrical masthead lanterns, port and starboard

lanterns, stern lanterns, anchor lanterns and
lanterns for ships not under command (N.U.C.) as
required in the Rules of the Norwegian Ship Control,
are to be connected to a special switchboard - i.e. a
navigation light switchboard - by a separate circuit
for each lantern. This switchboard is not to be used
for other purposes. rlowever, other lanterns which
are required, according to the Rules of the Norwegian
Ship Control, may be connected to the navigation light

0 switchboard.
.2 Emergency electrical masthead lanterns, port and
starboard lanterns, stern lanterns, anchor lanterns
and lanterns for ships not under command (N.U.C.)
as required, according to the Rules of the Norwegian
Ship Control, are to be connected to a special switch-
board - emergency navigation light switchboard - by a
separate circuit for each lantern. The switchboard is
not to be used for other purposes.
 80

The navigation light switchboards, according to .1

and .2, are·to have marking "hovedlanterner" and
"reservelanterner", or other equivalent marking
(e.g. "main lanterns" and "emergency lanterns".

These changed Regulations enter into force 15 November 1976.

Oslo, 15 October 1976

By order

A.Johansen

F. LØvmo

n
n
 81

COMMUNICATION NO. 1/77

from the
0 NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD.
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Provisional Regulations for Electrical Installations

in Explosive Areas

0
 82

CONTENTS
Page
0 Introduction .. : . 83
1. Definitions . 87
1.1 Definitions of an explosive area . 87
1. 2 Division of explosive areas . 87
1. 3 Type of protection for electrical
apparatus for use in explosive areas,
area of category a . 88
1.4
1. 5
Grouping
Maximum surface temperature -
temperature classes
.

.
91

91
0
1. 6 Ignition temperature . 92
2. Approval of the division of explosive
areas . 93
3. Requirements for electrical installations

3.1
3.2
in area of category a
Electrical apparatus - zonal division
Electrical apparatus - grouping
.
.
.
95
95
96
0
3. 3 Electrical apparatus - temperature
classes - ignition temperature . 97
3. 4 Approval of electrical apparatus-
test certificate . 97
3.5 Cable entry into Ex d apparatus . 99
3.6 Cables, flexible cables, overhead lines,
conduit systems . 99
3.7 Limitations on use of Ex o apparatus . 100
3.8 Distribution systems . 100
3.9 Protection . 101
3.10 Emergency disconnection . l "l
3.11 Intrinsically safe installations . l0l
3.12 Supplementary requirement for enclosures .. 102
3.13 Protzction of machines of increased safety
construction . 102
3.14 Work on live parts . 1J4
3.15 Opening of enclosures . 104
3.16 Marking . 105
3.17 Possible limitations of use on the
test certificate . 106
3. 18 Requirements when using forced ventila-
tion . 106
4. Requirements for electrical installations
in area of category b . 109
5. Requirements for electrical installations
in area of category c a n d d . 110
6. Appendix I (Note) . 112
7. Appendix II (Note) . 123
8. Appendix III (Note) . 125
0
 83
c. 11: t r>oduc t i on
In paragraph 495 of "Regulations for electrical installtions"
rules are given for the division of explosion-risk rooms into
subgroups, together with the requirements which electrical
installations must fulfill in order to be used in such rooms.

In recent years the International Electrotechnical Commission

{IEC) and the European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardiza-
tion {CENELEC) have produced standards concerning electrical appa-
ratus for use in potentially explosive atmospheres. Up to now,
the following are the IEC and CENELEC standards for electrical
apparatus for use in potentially explosive atmospheres:

IEC Publication 79-0 (1971) Electrical apparatus for explosive

gas atmospheres. General introduction.

IEC Publication 79-1 (1971) Construction and test of flameproof

() enclosures of electrical apparatus.

IEC Publication 79-lA (1975) First supplement of Publication 79-1

(1971)

IEC Publication 79-2 (1975) Pressurized enclosures.

IEC Publication 79-3 (1972) Spark test apparatus for intrinsi-
cally safe circuits.
IEC Publication 79-4 (1975) Method of test for ignition tempera-
ture.
IEC Publication 79-4A (1970) First supplement to Publication 79-4.
 84

IEC Publication 79-5 (1967) Sand-filled apparatus.

IEC Publication 79-5A .(1969) Supplement to Publication 79-5.
IEC Publication 79-6 (1968) Oil-immersed apparatus.

IEC Publication 79-7 (1969) Construction and test of electrical

apparatus, type of protection "e".

IEC Publication 79-8 (1969) Classification of maximum surface

temperatures. Amendment No. 1 (1972). 0
IEC Pub Lica tion 79-9 (1970) Marking.

o
IEC Publication 79-10 ( 1972) Classification of hazardous areas.

CENELEC EN 50 014 (1976) Electrical apparatus for potentially

explosive atmospheres - General
Requirements.

CENELEC_EN 50 015 (1976) Apparatus with type of protection "o"

- Oil immersion.
CENELEC EN 50 016 (1976) Apparatus with type of protection "p"
- Pressurized enclosures.

()

0
 85

CENELEC EN 50 017 (1976) Apparatus with type of protection "q"

- Sandfilling.

CENELEC EN 50 018 (1976) Apparatus with type of protection "d"

- Flameproof enclosures.

CENELEC EN 50 019 (1976) Apparatus with type of protection "e"

- Increased safety.

n CENELEC EN 50 020 (1976) Intrinsically safe apparatus "i"

- Specific requirements for construc-
tion and testing.

The work of the production of standards for electrical apparatus and

their installation and _use in potentially explosive atmospheres by
IEC and CENELEC is far from completed and other standards will be
0 issued as they become available in the future.

As the aGove mentioned standards are rather comprehensive the more

important factors arc pointed out to be:
Atmospheres where an explosive risk exists because of the flamm-
able nature of the gases or vapours is divided into three zones,
called Zone 0, Zone 1 and Zone 2, depending on the likely presence
of the explosive gases or vapours. In Zone 0 an explosive mixture
will be present continuously or for long periods, in Zone 1 an
explosive mixture is likely to occur in normal operation, whilst
in Zone 2 an explosive mixture is not likely to occur, and if it
occurs it will only exist for a short time.

Electrical apparatus for use in explosive atmospheres are divided

into different types of protection (e.g. flameproof, increased
safety, intrinsically safe etc.). A different principle of con-
struction is employed for each type of protection. Below are
given the definitions of the different forms of protection.

Electrical apparatus is divided into 6 temperature classes, Tl to

T6, dependent on the maximum surface temperature which it will
attain during normal use, (inclusive of overloading where there
exists the possibility of this occuring). Apparatus of tempera-
ture class Tl may have a surface temperature up to 450°c, whilst
apparatus of temperature class T6 may not have a surface tempera-
ture in excess of 85°c.
r

86

Closely related to the temperature class is the term ignition

temperature for the gases and vapours. The ignition tempera-
ture means the lowest temperature at which a gas or vapour may
be ignited using a standard method of test. For electrical
apparatus, a general requirement will be that the maximum sur-
face temperature (cfr. temperature class} will be lower than the
ignition temperature of the gas or vapour which may surround the
apparatus.

Flammable gases and vapours are divided into groups called: Group I , f \ .
Group IIA, Group IIB and Group IIC. Electrical apparatus is divid- )
ed into corresponding groups. Apparatus in Group I is designed for
use in coal mines, whilst Group IIA, IIB and IIC are designed for
use in other explosive atmospheres. Representative gases for the
differing groups are:
Group
Group
Group
I
IIA
IIB
Methane
Propane
Ethylene
0
Group IIC Hydrogen
There are two particular properties of gases or vapours which
determine the group in which they are placed:

a. The gas or vapour's explosive property.

This property is determined by establishing the maximum
gap which may be permitted in the flameproof enclosure of
electrical apparatus but which still prevents an internal
flash or explosion igniting the gas surrounding the appa-
ratus under prescribed test conditions.
(Often referred to as the Maximum Experimental Safe Gap -
MESG}.

b. The gas or vapour's ignition energy.

This property is determined by establishing the minimum
ignition current (dependent upon the voltage} which will
cause the gas to ignite under prescribed test conditions.
(Often referred to as the Minimum Ignition Current - MIC)

A number of countries have introduced regulations with respect to

electrical apparatus for use in explosive atmospheres based upon f\
·the above mentioned standards. NVE, the Directorate of Electricity, )
therefore finds it necessary provisionally to amend the present
regulations, paragraph 495, in "Regulations for electrical instal-
lations".

0
 87

With respect to the aforementioned and with support in paragraph 2

of the Law of 24th May 1929 regarding supervision of electrical
installations, and delegation from the Ministry of Industry and
Handicraft of 6th October 1971, NVE, the Directorate of Electricity,
lays down the following provisional regulations, which enter into
force from the 1st May 1977, substituting the regulations embodied
in paragraphs 495,128, 129,· 130, 131 and 132 of the "Regulations
for electrical installations" of 5th December 1963:

0 ]. Definitions

1.1 Definition of an explosive area.

An explosive area is a space, or part of a space or other

area where there exists or may exist an explosion risk,

0 either because the air is mixed with flammable gas,

vapour or suspended liquid droplets (area of category a)

or the air is mixed with flammable dust (area of category bl

or because of a substance which itself is of an explosive

nature (area of category c)

or because of a mixture of the flammable gas, vapour,

suspended liquid droplets, or dust, together with an
atmosphere containing greater amounts of oxygen than
present in normal air or with other gases which more
readily support combustion than normal air (area of
category d).

Note:

Areas where storage or work with l i q u d s is carried on at a

temperature at least 100c below the flashpoint of the liquid
(determined in a closed apparatus) will not normally be re-
garded as an explosive area unless the liquid is vapourized
(e.g. by spray painting or varnishing). See paragraph 494
of the RJgulations.

0 1.2. Division of explosive areas.

Explosive areas are divided into the following categories:

1.2.l Area of category a is an area where the risk of explosion is

due to air mixed with flammable gas, vapour or suspended
liquid droplets.
n Area of category a is sub-divided into the following zones:

.1 Zone O is an area where an explosive mixture of flammable gas,

vapour or suspended liguid droplets with air is continously
present or present for long periods.
 88

.2 Zone 1 is an area where an explosive mixture of flammable

gas, vapour or suspended liquid droplets with air is likely
to occur in normal operation.
.3 Zone 2 is an area where an explosive mixture of flammable
gas, vapour of suspended liquid droplets with air is not
likely to occur, and if it occurs it will only exist for
a short time.

l. 2. 2 Area of category b i s an area where the risk of explosion

is due to air mixed with a flammable dust. 0
Areas of category b i s sub-divided into the following zones:

.1 Zone O is an area where a considerable quantity of flammable

dust, formed as explosive dust clouds in the air is continu-
ously present or present for long periods.
.2 Zone 1 is an area where a considerable quantity of flammable
dust, formed as explosive dust clouds in the air, is likely
0
to occur in normal operation.

1.2.3 A r a of category c is an area where the risk of explosion is

due to substance which itself is of an explosive nature.

1.2.4 Area of category d i s an area where the risk of explosion is

due to a mixture of flammable gas, vapour or suspended liquid
droplets or dust together with an atmosphere containing greater
amounts of oxygen than present in normal air, or with other
gases which more readily support combustion than normal air.
l. 3 Type of protection for electrical apparatus for use in explo-
sive areas, area of category a.

1. 3 .1 Flameproof enclosure. An enclosure for electrical apparatus

that will withstand an internal explosion of the flammable
gas or vapour which may enter it, without suffering damage
and without communicating the internal flammation to the
external flammable gas or vapour for which it is designed,
thr0ugh any joints or structural openings in the enclosure.

A flameproof enclosure is desic;natea Ex d.

0
Note:
The English expression is "Flameproof enclosure".
(The corresponding American expression is "Explosion-proof
ap para t;us".)
The German e=pression is "D't-uckf eet:e Kapselung". ()
The French expression is "EnveZoppe antidlfZagrnee".

1. 3. 2 Increased safety apparatus, type of protection "e".

A method of protection in which additional measures are
applied, so as to give increased security against the possi-
bility of excessive temperatures and the occurance of arcs or
sparks in and at apparatus which does not produce arcs or
sparks in normal service.
 89
Incrtased safety apparatus is designated E x e .

Note:

The English designation is "Increased safety".

The German designation is "Erh8hte Siaherheit".
The French designation is 1 1 s • a u r i t • augment•e".

1. 3. 3 Intrinsic safety.

.1 Intrinsically safe circuit:

A circuit in which any spark or thermal effect produced

normally (that is, by breaking or closing the circuit)
or accidentally (for example, by short-circuit or earth
fault) is incapable, under prescribed test conditions,
of causing ignition of a prescribed gas or vapour.

.2 Intrinsically safe apparatus:

Apparatus in which all the circuits are intrinsically safe.

Intrinsically safe apparatus is designated Ex i.

Note:

The English designation is "Intrinsically safe apparatus".

The German designation is "Eigensiahere Betriebsmittel".
The French designation is 1 1 s • a u r i t l intrins•que" .

.3 Associated apparatus:

Apparatus in which the circuits are not all intrinsically

safe, but which contains circuits that can affect the safety
of intrinsically safe circuit connected to it.

Note:

The English designation is "Associated apparatus".

The German designation is "Zugeh8riges Betriebsmittel".
The French designation is "Mat•riel assoai•"·

0 Associated apparatus may be placed within or outside the

explosive atmosphere (see clause 3.11). Example of associ-
ated apparatus: Power supply units, control units, record-
ing instruments eta., which are connected to intrinaially
safe apparatus.

.4 Intrinsically safe apparatus and intrinsically safe parts of

0 associated apparatus are sub-divied into two categories:

Category ia. Apparatus of category ia shall be incapable

of causing ignition in normal operation, or with a single
fault, or with any combination of two faults applied.
Intrinsically safe apparatus and associated apparatus in
category ia is designated Ex ia.
 90

Category ib. Apparatus of category ib shall be incapable

of causing ignition in normal operation, or with any single
fault applied.
Intrinsically safe apparatus and associated apparatus in
category i b i s designated Ex ib.
1. 3. 4 Pressurized enclosure:

An enclosure for electrical apparatus in which the entry of

flammable gas or vapour is prevented by maintaining the air,
Q
an inert gas or other suitable gas which is non-flammable
and which does not support combustion more readily than air,
within the enclosure at a pressure above that of the external
atmosphere.

.A pressurized enclosure is de$iqnated E x p .

Note:
n
The EngZish designation is "Pressurized encZosure".
The German designation is "UberdruckkapseZung".
The French designation is "EnveZoppe a
surpression interne".

The _term pressurized encZosure does not incZuåe apparatus with

an n t e r n a Z source of fZammabZe gases or vapours. Requirements/
standards for such apparatus are under consideration.
1. 3. 5 Oil-immersed apparatus

Electrical apparatus of which all parts on which arcs may

occur in normal service are immersed in oil to a sufficient
depth to prevent ignition of an explosive gas mixture that
may be present above the surface of the oil, and all live
parts on which arcs do not occur in normal service are either
immersed in oil or protected by some other recognized technique.

Oil-immersed apparatus is designated Ex o.

Note:

0
The EngZish designation is "OiZ-immersed apparatus".
The German designation is "OZkapseZung".
The French designation is "MatlrieZ IZectrique immergl
dans Z 'huiZI".

n
1. 3. 6 Sand-filled apparatus

Electrical apparatus which has all its live parts entirely

embedded in a mass of quartz or other powdery material, in
such a way that if, under the conditions of use for which
the apparatus has been designed, an arc occurs within the
enclosure, this arc will not be liable to ignite the outer
explosive atmosphere, either by the transmission of flame or
by the overheating of the walls of the enclosure.
Sand-filled apparatus is designated Ex q.
 91

rlote:
The English designation is "Sand-filled apparatus".
Th• German designation is "Sandkapselung".
T h i rench designation is "Protection par remplissage
pulv ru le n t:":

1. 3. 7 Special construction

An enclosure which does-not meet any of the prescribed

methods of protection, but in which special methods of
() construction have been applied to give the apparatus a
level of protection equal to the above types of protec-
tion and where the test institution has examined and
evaluated the apparatus for use under the same conditions
as the above types of protection.

Special construction is designated Ex s.

0 Note:
Re sub-clause 1.J.7:
The English designation is "Special construction".
The German designation is "Sonderschutz".
At the present there is no French designation.
Re clause 1. J . :
For apparatus for use in Zone 2 there are at present only
proposed standards. Such apparatus is designated Ex N o r
Ex n.

1.4 Grouping

Electrical apparatus with the types of protection described

in clause 1.3 is divided into the following g r o p s :

Group I for use in coal mines

Group II for use in other explosive atmospheres
Intrinsically safe apparatus (Ex i) and flameproof enclosures
(Ex d) for Group II is further sub-divided into three groups:
IIA, IIB and IIC depending on the gas or vapour for which it
is designed.
Note:
In appendix II a number of flammable gases and vapours are
divided into groups.

1.5 Maximum surface temperature - temperature classes

1.5.1 Maximum surface temperature of electrical apparatus means the

highest temperature attained during normal operation under
the most adverse conditions by any part or any surface, which
when coming into contact with an explosive atmosphere, could
produce an ignition of the surrounding atmosphere.
 92

Note:
For E= d enclosures it is sufficient to take into consideration
the e=ternal. surfaces. For other types of protection the in-
ternal surfaces w i l l be equally important i[ the flammable
gases or vapours have acaess to the interna surfaces.

l. 5. 2 Maximum surface temperature for electrical apparatus in Group I

shall not exceed 2000c.

Note:
The maximum surface temperature is set at 200dC due to the
0
ignition temperature of coal dust,
l. 5. 3 Electrical apparatus in Group II is sub-divided into tempera-
ture classes Tl to T6. Maximum surface temperature for
electrical apparatus in Group II shall not exceed the follow-
ing values.

Maximum Surface Temperature

0
Class

Tl 4S0°c
T2 3oo0c
T3 200°c
T4 i s s=c
TS 1000c
T6 as0c
1. 5. 4 The values in sub-clauses 1.5.2 and 1.5.3 are based upon an
ambient temperature of 40°c. (See sub-clause 3.3.2) -

1.6 Ignition te.mperature

The ignition temperature of a gas or vapour is, the lowest

temperature at which a mixture of the gas or vapour, when
mixed with air, can be ignited under prescribed test condi-
tions.

The ignition temperature of explosive dust clouds in contact

with a hot surface is the lowest temperature which, when using
a prescribed test method, will ignite the dust cloud. 0
The ignition temperature of flammable dust deposits on hot
surfaces is the lowest surface temperature which, when using
a prescribed test method, will cause ignition of a 5 mm thick
dust layer.

0
Note:
Appendix II gives the ignition temperature of a number of
gases and vapours.

Appendi= III gives the ignition temperature of a number of

types of dust.
 93

2. Approval of the division of explosive areas

Division of an explosive area into categories and zones as

given in clause 1, together with the extent of these areas
and zones, shall be performed in each case by the owner of
the installations.

Plans with the areas and zones drawn in are to be examined

and approved by the National Inspectorate of Explosives and
Flammables, the Electricity Inspectorate or the Local Inspec-
tion before the installation is started.
In the case of military explosive plants (area of category c),
however, the Minitary Building Service in collaboration with
the military technical branch authorities shall examine and
approve the plans.

Note:
At vresent the fo LLowing tnso arrannements are one r a t i ve
for examination and approval of the division of areas into
categories and zones:

Arrangement 1:

The National Inspectorate of Explosives and Flammables (SSI)

undertakes examination and approval. SSI may, before approval,
request NVA oninion. The owner must despatch the approved
plans to the Electricity Inspectorate (ET) or the Local
Inspection (ST).

Owner

SSI
Examination and NVE
approval Opinion

n
Owner

n ET or ST

Scheme f o r arrangement 1.
 94

A!"!"angement 2:

The EZect!"icity Inspectorate (ET) or the Local Inspection (ST)

unde!"take the examination and approval. ET and ST (through
the ET in the usual manner) may request NVE opinion. NVE
may also !"equest an opinion from SSI.

Owner

T
u
ET or ST NVE SSI
Examination and Decision Opinion
approval

I
l o_w_n_e_r _

Scheme of arrangement 2.

Installations covered by arrangement 1:

Arrangement covers installations where there exists flam-
mable jtems in quantities above a certain amount and of a certain
type.
Examples of installations covered by arrangement 1:

- Petrochemical plants
- Refineries
Large tank installations
- Large Chemical processing industries
- Explosive factories

Installations covered by arrangement 2:

Arrangement 2 applies to all installations not covered by
arrangement ..

n
 95

Examples of installations covered by arrangement 2:

- Paint or varnish factories (except large industries)

- InstaZlations for spraying, vapourizing, cleaning,
extracting etc.
- Machinery for photogravure/rotogravure
- Rooms for gas containers etc.
- Petrol Stations
- Sewerage treatment plant
- Hydrogen cooled electrical machines
- Installations where danger of dust explosion exists
(area of category b)
- Explosive stores
- Installation with oxygen enriched atmosphere
(area of category d)

As guidance on zonal division the following should be refer-

0
red to:

Foreign standards, listed in IEC Publication 79-10

- "Protection Rules No. 25, Industrial Dust Explosions"
issued by the Directorate of Labour Inspection
- Appendix I to this communication.

3. Requirements for eiectrical installations in area of

category a
3.1 Electrical apparatus - o n a l division
3. l. l Within Zone O only intrinsically safe apparatus of category ie
(Ex ia), or apparatus specially approved for Zone O is per-
mitted.

3. l. 2 In Zone l electrical apparatus as stated for Zone 0, to-

gether with the following apparatus is permitted:

Intrinsically safe apparatus of category ib (Ex ib)

Flameproof enclosures (Ex d)
Increased safety apparatus ( E x e )
Pressurized enclosures ( E x p )
Oil-immersed apparatus (Ex o)
Sand-filled apparatus (Ex q)
0 Specially constructed enclosures (Ex s)

3. 1. 3 In Zone 2 electrical apparatus as stated for Zone 1, to-

gether with the following is permitted:

.1 Apparatus specially designed for use in Zone 2.

. 2 Apparatus in which, under normal operation, arcs or sparks

do not occur, and which has at least an enclosed design
(IP 44), and where unacceptable surface temperatures do
not occur. By surface temperature is meant the tempera-
ture of any part or any surface (including internal surfaces)
which may come into contact with explosive mixture of gas
or vapour and carries the risk of igniting the surrounding
atmosphere.
 96

Note:
Re ciause 3.1:
As far as possible electrical apparatus should be placed
ou.side explosive·acmospheres. On approval of apparatus,
see clause 3.4.

.
"le sub-c!ause 3.1. 3:
"Eksplosjonsvernet" (directly t r a n s l a t e d = "explosion protected",
is a special Norwegian design) enclosure is a designation
which is ob s o le t e and e c t i lapse. "Eksplosjonsvernet" enclo-
sures may not be permitted in Zone O or Zone 1. Until further
notice "Eksplosjonsvernet" enclosures may be used in Zone 2
and w i l l be regarded as "apparatus specially designed for use
0
in Zone 2 ".
".4pparatus speciaZZy designed for use in Zone 2" includes
apparatus marked Ex N o r Ex n (see note to clause 1.3) when
the apparacus is constructed in accordance with recognized
standards.

Examples of non sparking apparatus are squirrel cage motors,

transformers, connection boxes etc.

3.2 Electrical apparatus - grouping.

3.2.l In explosive atmospheres in coal mines only Group I apparatus
may be used.
3. 2. 2 In other explosive atmospheres only apparatus in Group II may
be used. Apparatus in Group I may be used where the explosive
risk is from coal dust and/or methane.

3. 2. 3 Intrinsically safe apparatus (Ex i) and flameproof apparatus

(Ex d) in Group II may only be used as prescribed in the table
below:

Ex i apparatus and Ex d Group of explosive gases and vapours

a9paratus in Group in which the apparatus may be used
IIA
IIB
IIA
IIA and IIB
0
IIC IIA, IIB and IIC

0
Note:
For the grouping of explosive gases and vapours see Appendix II.
 97

3.3 Electrical apparatus - temperature classes - ignition

temperature.

3.3.1 Electrical apparatus in Group II is only permitted in explosive

atmospheres provided the maximum surface temperature of the
apparatus is lower than the ignition temperature of the gas
or vapour in which it is to be used.

0 Electrical apparatus
in temperature class
Maximum
surface temperature
Apparatus permitted to
be used in gases and
vapours with an ignition
temperature higher than

Tl 4So0c 4So0c
T2 300°c 300°c
T3 200°c 200°c
T4 i as>c i as=c
TS 100°c 100°c
T6 ss0c as0c
Note:
For ignition temperatures of gases or vapours see Appendix II.

3.3.2 Electrical apparatus can generally by used in places with

ambient temperatures up to 40°c.

Apparatus for use in places with an ambient temperature higher

than 400c, shall be specially marked.

Apparatus which is specially marked for use in ambient tempera-

tures lower than 40°c can only be used in places where this
ambient temperature cannot be exceeded.

3.4 Approval of electrical apparatus - test certificate.

3. 4 .1 Electrical apparatus for use in Zone O or Zone 1 (see sub-

clauses 3.1.1 and 3.1.2) shall have a test certificate from
a recognized Norwegian or foreign test institution. The
test institution shall be recognized by NVE. Testing shall
be carried out in accordance with IEC, CENELEC or equivalent
standards.

Note:
Electrical apparatus subject to inspection should, in com-
pliance with paragraph 400 in the Regulations, be approved
by Norges Elektriske Materiellkontroll (NEMKO) (the Norwegian
Board for Testing and Approval of Electrical Equipment), ir-
respective of any test e r t i f i c a t e from a foreign test insti-
turion.
 98

3. 4. 2 Electrical apparatus for use in Zone 2 (see sub-clause 3.1.3)

should be in the usual approved design, see paragraphs 121
and 400 in the Regulations. Such apparatus, when no test
certificate exists, (see sub-clause 3.4.1) shall be provided
with a manufactures' declaration which as a minimum shall
state:

o
- For apparatus subject to sub-clause 3.1.3.1: the standard
to which the apparatus is constructed.
- For apparatus subject to sub-clause 3.1.3.2: the surface
temperature and type of enclosure.
Note:
The requirement implies that a test certificate is not re-
quired f o r apparatus f o r use in Zone 2.

3. 4. 3 Electrical apparatus such as thermocouples etc. do not require f\

test certificates providing the following values are not ex- ,
ceeded: •
- Voltage 1 volt
- Current 0.1 amp
- Energy 20µJ
- Power 25mW
Note:
Re clause 3.4:
At present the following test institutions in Europe are con-
sidered as recognized:
- Norges Elektriske Materiellkontroll (NEMKO)
Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (PTB), West Germany
Berggewerkschaftliche Versuchsstrecke (BVS), West Germany
British Approvals Service for Electrical Equipment in
Flammable Atmospheres (BASEEFA), Great Britain
Laboratoire de Centre d'Etudes et Recherches des Charbonnages
de France (CERCHAR), France
Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques(LCIE), France
Prufstelle fur Explosions- und Schlagwetterschutz der Bundes-
uersuchs- und Forschungsanstalt, Elektrotechnische Versuchs-
anstalt (ETVA), Austria r
Staatlich Autorisierte Versuchsanstalt des Technischen \ }
Uberwachungsvereines Wien (TUV), Austria
Institut National des Industries Extractives (INIEX), Belgium
Centro Ele tt r-ot e cn i co Spe rimen ta le Italiano ( CESI), Italy
Materialprufanstalt des Schweizerischen Elektrotechnischen
Vereins (SEV) Switzerland
Versuchstrecke Freiburg (V.Fr.), East Germany (
Statens Provningsanstalt, Sweden. •

As example of "equivalent standards", there are VDE-standards

(Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker) and standards from 3r.itish
Standards Institution. '
 99

3.5 Cable entry into Ex d apparatus is permissible by two methods:

3. 5 .1 Type X: Indirect entry, where the cable is to be connected

within a connection box external to the flameproof enclosure.

3.5.2 Type Y: Direct entry, where the cable is to be connected

within the flameproof enclosure. The cable gland is to be
made flameproof as stated in the test certificate and/or
fitting instructions.

G 3 . 6 Cables, flexible cables, overhead lines, conduit systems.

3.6.1 Cables and flexible cables are to have an outer sheath of

insulating material. Any metal sheath, screen or armouring
is to be earthed.

03.6.2 Cables and flexible cables for intrinsically safe circuits

are to have screens or similar of a conducting material and
an outer sheath of insulating material. The screen is to
be earthed.

Where there is no danger of interference from external electri-

cal or magnetic fields,· short flexible cables may be without
screens.

3.6.3 If the surface temperature of the cables exceeds ao0c, the

outer insulating sheath and any screen may be omitted, and
substituted by a metal sheath. The metal sheath has to be
earthed.

3.6.4 The outer sheath of cables which are not laid in earth or
in sand-filled ducts or protected in some other manner against
fire, shall be of a self-extinguishing material.

Note:
For testing cables to determine if the outer sheath is self-
extinguishing, IEC/CEE-tests or other equivalent tests may be
used.

3. 6. 5 For portable apparatus with rated current up to 6 amps and a

0
maximum of 250 volt£ to earth, the flexible cable shall be
ordinary tough oil resistant rubber insulated flexible cable
or better (flexible cable of type NMHO (CEE (2) 57) or better).

For other portable apparatus tough oil resistant rubber

insulated flexible cable (flexible cable of type NMHVO
(CEE (2) 65) or better) s ha Ll !:le nsed ,

0 Flexible cables for intrinsically safe circuits shall additio-

nally be screened to the extent required in sub-clause 3.6.2.
 100

3. 6. 6 Connections and jointing of mineral insulated cable shall be

carried out in such a manner that there is no risk of moisture
entering the cable.
3.6.7 Cables and flexible cables shall be protected against mechani-
cal damage to the extent deemed necessary.

3. 6. 8 Branching and jointing of cables in Zone O is not permitted,

except for intinsically safe circuits in category ia.
3. 6. 9 In Zone O and Zone 1 conduit systems are not permitted. C
Note:
The requirement implies among others that "American conduit
system" is not permitted in Zone O and Zone 1. On the con-
trary the use of conduits as mechanical protection for cables
w i l l be permitted. 0
3.6.10 Overhead lines with bare conductors are not permitted.
Overhead lines with insulated conductors are not permitted in
Zone 0 and Zone 1.
Overhead lines with aerial cables are not permitted in Zone 0.

Note:
Re clause 3. 6:
For heating cable installations, see paragraph 476 of the
Regulations.

3. 7 Limitations on use of Ex o apparatus.

3.7.1 Use of oil-immersed apparatus is not permitted where the appa-

ratus may be moved whilst in use.

3.7.2 Oil-immersed apparatus shall be permanently fixed in the posi-

tion in which it is intended to be used.
3.8
0
Distribution systems.

3.8.1 In distribution systems where the neutral point is directly

earthed, the earth conductor (PE) and the neutral conductor
(N) shall be kept separate within the explosive area (combined
earth and neutral conductors (PEN) are not permitted).
Note:
Combined earth and neutral conductors (PEll) m a y be used on
those parts of the distribution systems outside the explosive
0
area.
 101

3.8.2 In distribution systems with isolated neutral point, the instal-

lations should have earth leakage circuit breakers with a
maximum trip current of 500 mA or have a device which will
give audible and visible alarm in the event of an earth fault
on the installation.

When an earth fault alarm is given, the earth fault shall be

rectified immediately.

3.8.3 Earthing of exposed conductive parts shall be carried out

with an earth conductor contained in the same sheath or in
the same conduit as the supply cables (separate earthing
is not permitted).
Note:

G The requirement does not exclude the use of a separate earth

as a potential equalizer in addition to the normal protective
earthing. Such a potential equalization connection should be
carried out on exposed conductive parts, construc"ion sections
of conducting material, pipework and conduit runs etc., in
order to avoid a difference of potential and the danger of an
electrostatic charge.

3. 9 Protection

3.9.1 Protection against overloading and against overheating (motor

protection device, thermal overload trip etc.) shall not be
provided with automatic reset.

3.9.2 Protection may be substituted by an alarm system, only if

disconnection increases the danger.

3. 9. 3 Where the installation may be subject to atmospheric over-

voltage, a reliable over-voltage protective device is to be
installed, see paragraph 437 of the Regulations.
3.10 Emergency disconnection
It must be possible for electrical apparatus to be switched

n off from a safe area if continued operation could lead to

increased risk (e.g. spreading of fire) during a fault con-
dition. For such emergency disconnection, switches which
are installed for normal operation may be used.

Electrical apparatus which must be kept in operation during

a fault condition to avoid increased risks shall not be con-

n nected to such an emergency disconnection circuit. Such

apparatus shall be connected to a separate circuit which
may be disconnected independently of other circuits.
3 .11 Intrinsically safe installations.

3 .11.1 Asociated apparatus (e.g. power supply units) shall be situ-

ated in a safe area or have protection in accordance with
clause 3.1.
 102

3.11.2 Within the limitations laid down in sub-clause 3.11.3, ordinary

non-explosion protected apparatus may be connected to intrinsi-
cally safe circuits, provided that it is designed to meet the
Regulations in other respects.
3.11.3 With intrinsically safe circuits it must be specially observed
that the circuits (inclding connected apparatus, cables, con-
ductors etc.) satisfy the limitations given in the test certi-
ficate.

Note: 0
Suah limitations may be maximum values for aapaaitanae and
induatanae eta.
It is pointed out that there is danger of damage to intrinsi-
cally safe apparatus when testing with a normal "megger".

3.11.4 Conductors for intrinsically safe circuits and conductors for C)

non-intrinsically safe circuits shall not be run together
in the same cable, flexible cable, conduit, cable bunch etc.,
within and outside explosive areas.
Furthermore, concerning cables and flexible cables, see clause
3. 6.

3.11.5 Connection terminals for intrinsically safe circuits shall be

safely separated from those for non-intrinsically safe cir-
cuits, either by a separating panel or by a distance of at
least 5 cm.
Connection terminals for intrinsically safe circuits shall be
specially marked.
3.11.6 Test certificates, drawings, circuit diagrams etc., for in-
trinsically safe installations, together with all relevant
data, shall be sent to the Electricity Inspectorate or the
Local Inspection before installation comrr.ences.
3.12 Electrical apparatus for use in explosive atmospheres should,
in addition to the explosion protection, have an enclosure as
stated otherwise in the Regulations (protection against con- (\
tact, ingress of water, dust, corrosion etc.). \_)
3 .13 Protection of machines of increased safety construction.
3.13.1 Machines of increased safety construction shall be protected
by motor protection device equipped with thermal relays in
all phases, or protected by temperature sensors built into
the windings. C
3.13.2 Time/current characteristics for the thermal relays shall be
available on site.

The characteristics shall apply for an ambient temperature of

20°c and should include ratio values for starting current/
rated current (IA/IN) at least between 3 and 8. The the:'11al
relays shall maintain the given time/current values within
a limit o f 20%.
 103

3.13.3 Thermal relays for cage rotor machines (e.g. squirrel cage
motors) and synchronous machines with cage rotor for start-
ing shall be selected so that the time from the time/current
characteristic for the relay by using the machines'IA/I
ratio is not larger than the t i m e t stated on the marking
plate of the machine. E

Note:
The time tE is the time taken for the windings, when carrying the
starting current IA, to be heated up from the temperature
reached in rated service and at a maximum ambient tempera-
ture, to the limiting temperature.

Example of the use of sub-clause 3.13.3:

Given machine data:
Starting current
6.0
Rated current

tE 16 seconds.

Given time/current characteristic for the thermal relay:

>j..
fl0
""
Ul
Cl)
.µ J,.J
••'
f,O

.•
::,
C:
Cl) .... 10
E :>:
....
E-<
\
0,
C:
.... .,I

'\
0. l0
0.
....
...
10
••-
Ul

n
'tl
E-< C: - - -
0
u
Cl)
l - ·- -
(/) Ul , . s , , w u

X the set current value (IA/IN)

0 Tripping time is read as approximately 8 seconds which is

less than the tE-time for the machine. Thus the require-
ment of sub-clause 3.13.3 is met.
 104

3.13.4 The thermal relays should preferably be connected in series

with the machines phase windings. If the thermal relay is
connected in the.main (line) circuit for a delta connected
machine, special precautions must be taken to obtain accept-
able protection in the event of phase failure.
Note:
When the thermal relay is connected in aeries with the phase
winding in a delta connected machine, the relay must be ad-
justed to a value of 0.58 times the machine's full load line

3.13.5
current.

Where use is made of temperature sensors built into the wind-

C
ings, only sensors which have a test certificate for each duty
may be used.

Note:
Machines which are protected by thermal relays are generally
only suitable for continuous service involving easy and in-
n
' •
frequent starts. Machines designed for arduous starting
conditions or to be started frequently are only suitable when
specially adapted temperature sensors are used which ensure
that the permitted temperature Zimit is not exceeded.

Arduous starting conditions are considered to exist if a

thermal relay, selected in accordance with sub-clause 3.23.3,
disconnects the machine before it reaches its rated speed
(tripping ;ime is less than the starting time). As a rule
of thumb, tripping will occur if the starting time exceeds
1.7 times tE.

3.14 Work on live parts is not permitted.

E x p t i o n s from the above may be made when special instructions
approved by the Electricity Inspectorate or the Local Inspec-
t o n are followed. These instructions shall among others in-
clude gas measurement.

3.15 Opening of enclosures.

Opening of enclosuresof electrical apparatus is not permitted
unless the apparatus is disconnected and sufficient time has
elapsed after disconnection to permit all internal surfaces
LJ •
to have cooled to a temperature below the temperatures given
in sub-clauses 3.3.1 or 3.3.2 and also sufficient time has
elapsed after disconnection to allow all capacitors involved
to discharge to an energy level less than:

0.2 mJ for apparatus in Group I and IIA

0.06 mJ for apparatus in Group IIB
Q
0.02 mJ for apparatus in Group IIC
 105

Apparatus which can be opened more quickly than the necessary

delay time for cooling of internal surfaces and discharging
of all capacitors involved, shall be specially marked with
the necessary delay time.

Exceptions from the above may be made when special instruc-

tions approved by the Electricity Inspectorate or Local
Inspection are followed. These instructions shall among
others include gas measurements.
0 3.16 Marking.
In addition to marking as stated in paragraph 401 of the
Regulations, electrical apparatus shall be satisfactory
marked as to the type of explosion protection.

0 l\'ote:
Marking as to type of explosion protection will normally
include:

a. the symbol Ex.

b. the sign indicating the type of protection, ia, ib, d,
e, p, o, q o r s .
c. the symbols:
I for apparatus for use in coal mines.
IIA, JIB or IIC for use in other explosive atmospheres.
The letters A, B a n d C shall be used when this is neces-
sary for the type of protection concerned.
When the apparatus has test certificates for use only in
a particular gas, it shall be marked with the symbol II
followed by the chemical formula of the gas.
d. for apparatus in Group II, the symbol indicating tempera-
ture class or maximum surface temperature or both. When
the marking includes both, the temperature class shall be
given last in brackets, e.g. s soo c (Tl).
Electrical apparatus for Group II designed for a maximum
surface temperature in excess of 450°c shall be marked
only with the temperature e.g. 6oo0c.

e. name or symbol of the test institution and number of the

test certificate. The sign X shall be added after the
number if there are special limitations on the use of
the apparatus.

f. additional marking if this is specially required for the

C lbPC of protection or the type of apparatus concerned.

g. maximum permitted ambient temperature if this differs
from 40°c.
 106

Marking of apparatus as prescribed in a to d shall be in the

sequence indicated above.
Where more than one type of protection is used the marking
shall be carried out so that the main type of protection
appears first, followed by the symbols for the other type
of protection.

Example:
1. Flameproof exclosure for Group I:
Ex d I.

2. Flameproof enclosure f o r Group I and for Group JIB

temperature class T3:
Ex d I/JIB T3.

3. Increased safety apparatus and a pressuri2ed enclo

0
sur• for Group II with maximum surface temperature
of 125°C:
E x e p II 125°c (T4) or
E x e p II 125°c.
(e.g. increased safety motor with slip rings in a
pressurized enclosure.)

4. Flameproof enclosure for ammonia:

Ex d II (NH3J.

On small apparatus where space is limited the marking can

be restricted to:

1. The symbol Ex.

2. The name or symbol of the test institution and the number

of the test certificate followed by the letter X if
necessary.

3. The manufacturers name.

Marking may, instead of the foregoing, conform to the standards

used by the recogniced test institutions.

Example of marking according to IEC:

IEC 79-1 IIA T3
Example of marking according to CENELEC:
EEx d I/JIB T3.
Example of marking according to VDE 0171/2.61:
Ex d 2 G3.
(flameproof enclosure, explosion class 2, ignition group G3.J

3.17 If the test certificate gives special limitations on the use

of the apparatus, these limitations must be followed.
C
3.18 Requirements when using forced ventilation.

Areas described as forced ventilated are those areas where air

is supplied in sufficient quantities or sufficient pressure to
 107

such an extent that the atmosphere is classified as a less

hazardous zone, or in some cases as a non explosive atmos-
phere.
Atmospheres with forced ventilation may only be classified
as non-explosive in the following two cases:

- when the source of release is outside the ventilated area.

0
- when the source of release is within the ventilated area
supposed that there is only a possibility of release of
small quantities (e.g. analysis chamber in the process
industry, greasing pits, automobile repair shops etc.).

If forced ventilation is used to re-classify an area the

following requirements shall be met:

0 3.18.1 There shall be installed at least two pressure or flow meters

which independent of each other automatically disconnect all
electrical apparatus which is not in itself explosion pro-
tected when the air pressure or flow falls below a permitted
minimum.

Disconnection shall preferably be carried out in a non-explo-

sive atmosphere. Disconnection may take place in a ventilated
atmosphere or in an explosive atmosphere provided that the
disconnection occurs within an enclosure which is in itself
explosion protected.

The above mentioned disconnection may be substituted by an

alarm which gives audible and visable signals in the follow-
ing cases:

- In atmospheres which, without forced ventilation, are

classified as Zone 2.

- When the disconnection of the electrical apparatus would

give rise to increased danger.

When such alarm is given, the fault must be rectified immedi-

ately or all electrical apparatus which in itself is not
explosion protected, disconnected.

Note:
The two pressure or flow meters may be connected in series
in the same safety circuit.

3.18.2 There shall be installed devices (e.g. time delay relays,

quantity measuring devices etc.) which will ensure auto-
matically that all electrical apparatus which in itself is
not explosion protected, cannot be energised before the
area has been completely purged as to be free of explosive
atmospheres. As a minimum the quantity of air flow is to
be 5 times the volume of the space or building to be venti-
lated (including the ventilation ducts).
 108

3.18.3 In areas which without forced ventilation are classified

as Zone 0 or Zone 1, it shall be possible to disconnect
manually all electrical apparatus which in itself is not
explosion protected.

It shall be possible to carry out such disconnection by

one or more main circuit breakers placed in an accessible
position. The main circuit breakers should preferably be
placed in a safe r e a . The main circuit breakers may be
placed in the ventilated area or in an explosive area ()
provided they are in themselves of an explosion protected \__
type.

Instructions for the operation of these main circuit breakers

must be stated.

When such main circuit breakers are placed outside the explo-
sive atmosphere, emergency breakers as mentioned in clause
0
3.10 are not required.
3.18.4 Measuring apparatus and devices etc., which must operate
when the ventilation has stopped, must in itself be explosion
protected and be installed in the correct manner or else be
placed outside the ventilated area and outside the explosive
atmosphere.
3.18.5 The safety systems in sub-clauses 3.18.1 and 3.18.2 should,
as far as is possible, be so designed that a fault on the
system (e.g. power failure) will automatically cause the
disconnection of all electrical apparatus which in itself
is not explosion protected. However, the automatic devices
of the alarm systems may, as far as possible, be such that
a fault on the system will give audible and visible alarm.

3.18.6 Air which is supplied from outside must be taken from a safe
area.
Where a pressurised system is used, the pressure shall be at
least 0.5 mbars. This includes not only the building or
space but also the supply and exhaust ventilation ducts.
The ventilation ducts shall be air-tight, and shall be so
constructed as to withstand all stresses which may arise
0
due to heat, moisture, chemical and mechanical influence,
with adequate safety.
The exhaust ducts shall normally discharge into a safe area.
The exhaust ducts may discharge into a Zone 2 area in the two
following cases: 0
.1 When the ventilated area does not contain electrical
apparatus which produces sparks or arcs during normal
operation.
 109

.2 When the ventilated area contains electrical apparatus

which produces sparks and arcs during normal operation
provided that devices are fitted to prevent sparks, arcs
or incandescent particles being emitted.

The exhaust duct may discharge into Zone 1 areas, on the two
following conditions:

.3 The precautions mentioned in sub-clause .2 above apply.

0 .4 If the ventilated area contains electrical apparatus

which, during normal operation produces sparks, arcs
or gives rise to unacceptable surface temperature (e.g.
temperatures above the ignition temperature of the gas
or vapour), precautions shall be taken to prevent rapid
suction of gas or vapour from the Zone 1 area into the

0 Note:
ventilated area.

The expressions"in itself explosion protected" and "installed

in the correct manner" refer to the protection and the instal-
lation with respect to clause 3.1 to 3.17 for the zone which
the area would have been classified without the forced
ventilation.

It is in addition referred to Appendix I.

Attention is drawn to the fact that the ventilation fan itself

may be a possible source of ignition. In construction of the
fan both the mechanical dimensions (e.g. adequatP- clearance
between fan impeller n d fan housing) and the choice of material
for fan impeller and housing should be borne in mind. For
example a combination of steel and aluminium alloy should not
be used.

Furthermore, periodic cleaning of the fan should be carried

out.

4. Requirements for electrical installations in area of category b

0 4.1 In Zone O only electrical apparatus which is specially approved

for use in Zone O may be used.

The maximum surface temperature of the apparatus shall be lower

than the lowest of the two ignition temperatures for the dust,
and such that the requirement in sub-clause 4.2.2 are met.

0 4.2 In Zone 1 electrical apparatus which has no test certificate

may be used, provided the following requirements are met:
4.2.1 The apparatus shall have a dustproof enclosure (IP 54) or better.

4.2.2 The surface temperature of the electrical apparatus shall not be

high enough to ignite whirled dust or a layer of dust on the
surface of the apparatus. In continuous operation ane without
any dust layer on the surface, the surface temperature should
not exceed the following values:
 110

a. for horizontal surfaces and surfaces at an inclination

up to 60° to the horizontal:
- ignition temperature of the dust layer minus 75°c, or
for dust which does not smoulder:
1.
- 3 of the ignition temperature of the dust clouds.

b. for surfaces with a inclination greater than 60° to the

horizontal, Or for surfaces where the accumulation of
dust is effectively prevented (e.g. some fan cooled sur- ' -
faces): " )
2
3 of the ignition temperature of the dust clouds.
Where there is a danger of a dust layer in excess of 5 mm on
electrical apparatus, the permitted surface temperature shall
be further reduced.
4. 2. 3 If the surface temperature of electrical apparatus exceeds
0
ao0c, the apparatus must be marked with the highest surface
temperature attainable under continuous operation.
4.3 The requirements in clause 3 shall be complied with as far as
they are applicable.
4.4 Thermal apparatus shall have smooth surfaces.
4.5 Light sources shall be protected by a translucent cover. Where
a danger of mechanical stresses exists the lighting fitting
shall be equipped with a shock-proof cover or with a protec-
tion grille.
4.6 Sockets may be constructed in enclosed design (IP 44) providing
that immediately before the socket, a switch housed in at least
a dustproof enclosure (IP 54) is installed and a label is fit-
ted stating that insertion or withdrawal of the plug shall take
place only under no-voltage condition.

Such sockets shall not be installed with the opening upwards.

Coupling plugs and sockets are not permitted.

4. 7 Outer enclosures and coverings of apparatus, including the

covers of lighting fittings shall be of a self extinguishing
()
material.

5. Requirements for eiectricai instaiiations in area of

category c a n d d

The requirements for electrical installations in area of

category c a n d d will be laid down in each case by NVE.
0
Application for permission to install and operate such
installations is to be sent through the Electricit¼·Inspec-
torate.
 lll

In the case of military explosive plants (area of category

c} the Military Building Service in collaboration with the
Military technical branch authorities shall prescribe the
requirements for the electrical installations.

.Oslo, 15 February 1977

By order

A. Johansen

I. Steine
 112

Note:

6. Appendix I.
a c t o r s which mus be taken into consideration when dividing
creas of category a into zones.

6. 1n dividing explosive areas into zones various factors must

e taken into consideration.

The main factors dre:

a.
b.
Source of release.
Ventilation.
0
c. Characteristics of the flammable gas, vapour or liquid.
d. Quantity of release of gas or vapour.
e. Release under high pressure (e.g. safety valve of a
pressure vessel).
f. Additional factors such as climatic conditions, local
conditions, wind speed, wind direction etc.
g. The consequences of a possible explosion.

,.2 Sources of release

Sources of release are divided into three grades depending
on the frequency and duration of release.

6. 2. 1 Con,inuous source of release

Release occurs continuously or for long periods. This is
usually considered to be &he case where release occurs more
than 10% of the total process time or more than 1000 hours
per year.

Continuous source of release gives rise to Zone 0, Zone 1 and

Zone 2.

The following are among others usually considered &o be con-

tinuous sources of release:

- Areas directly above or near the surface of liquids, e.g.

open tanks, containers etc.
()
Air vents from tanks which do not contain inert gases in
sufficient quantities to prevent combustion in the mixture.

6.2.2 Primary source of release

Release is likely to occur in normal operation. Primary source
of reZease gives rise to Zone 1 and Zone 2 areas. Where the
air movement is limited (limited ventilation) the primary
source of release gives rise t.o a Zone O area.
 113

The following are among others usually considered to be

primary sources of release:

a. Machinery and plant which can release a flammable gas/

vapour/liquid into the surrounding atmosphere during
normal operation, e.g.:
- Safety valves.
- Sample or valve outlets.
- Emptying and filling positions.
- Flexible pipes and hoses.
- Positions where spraying, vapourising etc. take place.
- Ventilation outlets from Zone 1 areas.

b. Equipment which contains flammable gas/vapour/liquid and

which is constructed of a material liable to easy breakage.

6.2.3 Secondary sources of release

Release is not likely to occur, but if it does occur it will be
of limited duration. This is usually considered to be the
case where the release occurs a few times per year and less
than 2 hours on each occasion. Secondary source of release
gives rise to Zone 2 area. Where the air movement is limited
(limited ventilation), a secondary source of release gives
rise to Zone 1 area. The following are among others usually
considered to be secondary sources of release: Machinery and
plant which can release flammable gas/vapour/liquid into the
surrounding atmosphere during abnormal operation (leakage or
bursting)or infrequent operation, e.g.
- Flanges, connections and pipefitting.
- Glass peepholes or gauges.
- Glands of pumps, compressors, valves etc.
- Ventilation outlets from Zone 2 area.

6. 2. 4 Primary or secondary sources of release occur usually among

others with the following:
- Drilling for and production of oil or gas.
0 - Seweage-works.
- Maintenance, repair and periodic cleaning.
6.3 The inside of tanks, containers, pipes etc., are classified
as Zone O. The same applies to an area within meter radius
from the release opening of safety valves.

0 6.4 Pipes without flanges, connections etc. is not considered as

a source of release.
 114

6.5 Ventilation
Gas or vapour released to the atmosphere will dilute or
diffuse in the air until the concentration is below the
lower explosive Zimit, and therefore the atmosphere eventu-
ally will become non-hazardous.

Air movement, i.e. ventilation, will accelerate these pro-

cesses. The degree of ventilation is thus an important
factor with respect to the duration and extent of the

0
hazardous area.

Ventilation is divided into natural and limited ventilation.

Furthermore forced ventilation m a y be used to reduce the
extent of the zones, and may in some cases completely era-
dicat the zones.

6. 5. 1 Natural ventilation (unlimited air movement)

Areas with natural ventilation are those areas where there
is no substantial obstacles to the free and natural dilution
n
of gas or vapour into the atmosphere. Such areas are:
.1 Open air.
The wind speed is normally considered· to be·greater than
2 metres per second and only exceptionally less than
0.5 metre per second.
.2 Open buildings.
Open buildings are those buildings or spaces which are
large and where no obstruction exists for natural venti-
lation.
It is usually sypposed:
Openings with an area in m2 at least 1.25 times the circum-
ference of the building or space in metres.
With gases or vapours which are heavier than air h e open-
ings shall reach to the floor.
With gases or vapours lighter than air the openings shall
be placed at the highest points.
Openings in walls shall as far as possible, be equally
divided between a l l w a l l surfaces.
The wind speed shall as a rule be greater than 2 metres
per second and only exceptionally less than 0.5 metre
0
per second.

6. 5. 2 Limited ventilation (limited air movement)

Areas with limited ventilation are all areas which do not meet
the requirements of sub-clause 6.5.1.
o
For buildings or enclosed spaces the volume is taken to be much
greater than the volume of the gas or vapour which m a y be re-
leased. By "much greater" is meant:
With gas or vapour heavier than air the release of at Leas"
three times the maximum quantity which could be expected to
be released into the building or enclosed space within one
hour shall not cause the atmosphere up o 1 metre above the
floor to become explisive.
 115

With gas or vapour lighter than air the release of at

least three times the maximum quantity which could be
expected to be released into the building or space within
one hour shall not cause the atmosphere below 1 metre
under a flat roof or the atmosphere below 2 metres
under the lowest line o a sloping roof or a curved
roof to become explosive.
In both cases at ler.st one natural air change per hour
is to be considered.

0 Examples of areas with limited ventilation are unventilated

pits/ducts in the floor or ground.

6.6 The characteristics of the flammable gases, vapours or liquids

which must be taken into account when carrying out zonal divi-
sion are:
Relative density compared to air. Gases and vapours with
a relative density greater than 0.75 and less than 1.25
of the density of air must be regarded as both heavier
and lighter than air.
Flash point of liquids in relation to the temperature at
which the liquids are stored or processed (see clause 1).
Lower and upper explosive limits.
Coefficient of diffusion.

n
 116

6.7 Schematic method of procedure

It is to be determined if there exist or may exist an explosive

atmosphere

Sources of release is determined and classified as continuous -

primary - secondary

T
'
Ventilation is evaluated, natural - limited - forced ventilation

T
Additional factors are evaluated, density - flash point - quantity
and pressure of release - lower and upper explosive limics
0

Continuous source Primary source Secondary source

of relP.ase of release
I of release

t __J __ r
I I!
Natural Limited Nacural LimiteJ
ventila- ventila- ventila- ventila-
tion tion tion
I[ tion
' - - - r -

I
I Zone 0 I
r T

EJ
-,- '
t

E:J T
Zone 1

n
r-1-7
I Zone 2 Zone 2 Zone 2 Zone 2

Forced ventiiation have to be evaiuated in each individuai

case.

Zone 2 may in cer.ain cases be omitted.

 « - - - · - - - - - - - - - - - -

117

6.8 Examples of zonal division

Nationally, among others by the National Inspeatorate of

Explosives and Flammables, and internationally, work is
aarried out to establish standards for zonal division, with
examples for different types of installation and with the
extents of the different zones indiaated.

The results of this work are at present only at the draft

stage.
NVt: is of the opinion that the need for new regulations for
eleatriaal installations in explosive areas is so pressing
that it would be unwise to await the final results of the
aforementioned work on zonal divisions.
Nevertheless, NVE finds it aonvenient to give some examples
of zonal division.

0 It is emphasised that the examples are only for guidanae and

that an independant evaluation has to be aarried out in eaah
individual aase.

0
 118

6. 8. 1 Example 1.
Petrol station in the open åir.

Pump

Im Zone 0

.
Zone 1

zone 2
n
H Height of pump enclosure, minimum 1 metre.

Example 1.
 119

Example l.
 120

6.8.2 ExampLe 2.
Room with varnish·spray chamber.

0
·.·i:-·:.-:·.:;::J:.;·· Exhaust
duct
. ; " : : ..,,;'#·A':.,
.. :, "-..· :·! ·.'..· ,...-
Spray
chamber 0
·, , I- :
.
."'",'""....·,.;.• ,, .,.,
; ".,, '
....
·.
-, ..) . ·: ,
• • , • # :

Zone l

Zone 2

H = Height from floor to hood rim. Condition: The ventilation is

n
to be such that the air speed in the spray chamber opening is at
least 0.5 metres per second. Furthermore, it is assumed that the
requirements in clause 3.18 concerning safety systems etc. are met.

ExampLe 2
 121

6.8.J Example J.

Installation in the open air.

Gas/vapour which is heavier than air.
- Small, secondary sourc ,f release (e.g. pump gland).

n Source of release

,... '...
.·· , .
.. ,·,··,
__ ,,_ ·i?:j
·:-,:...-:·:,:.,:): :
:,.; ,.

2 D\ t m Il m 2m

Zone 2

Example J
 122

6.8.4 Example 4
- Small enclosed building with limited ventilation.
- Gas/vapour which is heavier than air.
- Small, secondary source of release (e.g. pump gland).

Source of
release

= Zone 1

Example 4
 123
Note:
7. Appendix II.

Group Gas/Vapour/Liquid Ignition Temp- Flash Density Explosive

Temp. 0 c ' eratun geint compared Limits
Class C to air a/m3

n
Lower Upper
Max.
I Methane 595 gas 0.5 33 100
200°c

Acetaldehyde 140 T4 <-20 1.5 73 1040

Aceton 535 Tl -19 2.0 60 310
Ammonia 630 Tl below 0 0.6 105 200
Amyl Acetate 375 T2 37 4.5 60 -
0 Isoamyl Acetate
Amyl Alcohol
380
300
T2
T3
25
49
4.5
3.0
60
47
550
380

Benzene 560 Tl -11 2.7 39 270

Petroleum Spirit 200-300 T3 approx. approx. approx. approx.
-20 4.0 29 380
Butane 365 T2 gas 2.1 37 210
Butanol 340 T2 29 2.6 43 350
Butyl Acetate 370 T2 22 4.0 58 360
Ise-butyl Alcohol 408 T2 27 2.5 50 -
Cyclohexane 259 T3 -18 2.9 40 290
Cycloheaxnon 419 T2 43 3.4 53 380

DaC-dllC 205 T3 46 4.9 41 320

Acetic Acid 485 Tl 40 2.0 100 430

Acetic Acid Anhy-
dr ide 330 T2 49 3.5 85 430
Ethane 515 Tl gas 1.0 37 195
Ethanol 425 T2 12 1.6 67 290
Ethyl Acetate 460 Tl - 4 3.0 75 420
Ethyl Benzene 431 T2 15 3.7 44 -
Ethylene Chloride 440 T2 13 3.4 250 660

0 Ethyl Chloride
Ethyl Nitrite
510
-
Tl
-
gas
-
2.2
2.6
95
90
400
1200
IIA
Heptane 215 T3 - 4 3.5 46 280
Hexane 233 T3 <- 20 2.8 42 265
Hydrogen Sulphide 270 T3 gas l. 2 60 650

n Carbon Monoxide
Chlorobenzene
Chloroethylene
605
637
-
Tl
Tl
-
gas
28
gas
1.0
3.9
2.2
145
60
95
870
520
770
(vinyl chloride)

Methane 595 Tl gas 0.5 33 100

Methanol 455 Tl 11 1.1 73 350
Methyl Acetate 475 Tl -10 2.6 95 500
Methyl Ethyl Ketone 505 Tl - l 2.5 50 350
Methyl Chloride 625 Tl gas 1.8 150 400
 124

Group Gas/Vapour/Liquid Ignition Temp- Flash Density Explosive

Temp. 0c erature point compared Limits
Class cc to air a/m3
Lower Upper

Naphthaline 528 Tl BO 4.4 45 320

Nonane 205 T3 31 4.4 37 300

Ise Octane 411 T2 -12 3.9 45 290

0
Pentane 285 T3 <-20 2.5 41 240
Propane 470 Tl gas 1.6 39 180
II A
Propanol 405 T2 15 2.1 50 340
Propyl Acetate 430 T2 10 3.5 70 340
n
Toluene 535 Tl 6 3.2 46 270

Vinyl Acetate 385 T2 - B 3 .o 90 480

p-Xylene 528 Tl 25 3.7 48 310

Buta -1, 3-diene 430 T2 gas 1.9 25 290

1, 4 Oioxan 379 T2 12 3.0 70 820
Ethylene 425 T2 gas 1.0 31 390
II B
Ethylene Oxide 440 T2 gas 1.5 55 1820
Ethyl ether 170 T4 <-20 2.6 50 1100
Town gas 560 Tl gas 0.5 34 163
'fetrahydrofurane 224 T3 -17 2.5 46 360

Acetylene os T2 gas 0.9 16 1080

II C
Ethyl Nitrate - - 10 3.1 140 -
Hydrogen 560 Tl gas 0.1 3 64
Carbon Disulphide 102 TS <-20 2.6 30 1900

0
 125

Note:

8. Appendix III.

Flammable dust Ignition temp. OC Ignition temp. 0c Density of dust,

for 5 mm layer on for dust cloud including gaps
hot surface in contact with between particles
hot surface kg/1

Sulphur Melts at 119°c 235 0.67

Phosphorus (red) 305 360 0.99
Graphite Does not ignite >750 0.24
Rust 535 >690 -
Magnesium 340 470 0.62
Aluminium 320 590 0.42
Aluminium mixed
I
with grease 230 400 0.31
Zinc
Naphthaline !
! 430
Melt at 80°C
530
575
4.9
0.53
Polyurethane Melts 425 0.11
Poly Vinyl
Chloride Carbonises 595 0.55
Hard Rubber Softens 360 0.30
Soft Rubber Softens 425 0.37
Rye Flour I 325 415-470 0.31
Wheat Flour
Cotton Dust
I
I'
Carbonises
385
410-430
Difficult to
0.47
-
! whirl
Sulphite Pulp
I 305 Difficult to -
whirl
Wood (Fir) 325 440-450 0.23
Turf 260 450 0.09
Coke 430 >750 0.74
Coal 225 580 0.41
Brown Coal 260 320-460 0.39

n
 126

COMMUNICATION NO. 2/77

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Suspension (aerial) cables

types EXW and EX

In Communication no.3/72 the NVE, Directorate of Electricity, in

anticipation of standards for suspension (aerial) cables, types
EX and EXW, gives requirements for the construction of such cable
installations. Requirements concerning the construction of the
cables, the cross-section of the conductors, the maximum span-
lengths and current rating were stated. Furthermore, it was re-
quired that equipment for jointing, branching, connection and sus-
pension was to be approved by the NVE.

The standards which especially were in mind when the communication

mentioned above was issued, entered into force 1 March 1977.

The NVE, Directorate of Electricity has in this connection, pursuant

t o § 2 in the Act of 24 May 1929 relating to supervision of electri-
cal installations and the authorization of 6 October 1971 from the
Ministry of Industry and Handicraft, made the following decision:

1. From 1 March 1977 EX/EXW suspension cable installations for

low-voltage and for medium-voltage with directly earthed
neutral point may be constructed either in accordance with
Communication No. 3/72 issued by the NVE 1 September 1972
or in accordance with the current Norwegian standards and

n
the Regulations for electrical installations, as far as
these may be applicable.

Note:

Attention is drawn to NEN 73.76 as regards qualitative require-

ments, marking and testing of the cables EX/EXW to NEN 87.76
as regards requirements for materials, construction and test-
ing of suspension equipment, and to NEN 62.75 for a.o. the
current loading of EX/EXW.

Furthermore, attention is drawn to "Teknisk-økonomisk µtredning

for bruk av hengeledning i lav- og mellomspenningsfordelings-
nett", issued by Norske Elektrisitetsverkers Forening (Associa-
tion of Norwegian Electricity Supply Undertakings).

EK-21
 127

In cases where Norwegian standards do not exist, other equivalent

standards are applicable, see Regulations for electrical instal-
! t i o n s § 22, point 1.

2. From 1 March 1977, EX/EXW suspension cable installations may

be used for medium voltage with insulated neutral point, pro-
vided the installatims arecarried out in accordance with stand-
ards as referred to under item 1 and with the Regulations for

0 3.
electrical installations as far as these may be applicable.

From 1 March 1978, only EX/EXW cables and suspension equipment

for these types, fulfilling the current Norwegian requirements,
are to be sold.

0 Oslo, 3 March 1977

By order
A. Johansen

I. Steine

0
 128

COMMUNICATION NO. 3/77

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

0
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Location of transformer kiosks

According t o § 614 in the Regulations for electrical installations

transformer kiosks which are located in open areas and which are
not constructed of brick-work or concrete, of fire protection class
0
at least A 120, are to be located at a distance of at least 5 metrPs
from other buildings.

For built-up areas it has become ver.y difficult to find a loca-

tion for such kiosks meeting the requirements.

Due to this and in cooperation with the State Fire Inspection, the
NVE, Directorate of Electricity has, therefore, pursuant t o § 2 in
the Act of 24 May 1929 relating to supervision of electrical installa-
tions and the authorization of 6 October 1971 from the Ministry of
Industry and Handicraft, laid down the following Regulations in addi-
tion to the above mentioned provisions i n § 614 in the Regulations
for electrical installations:

Transformer kiosks with a total output not above 1 000 kVA and con-
structed of steel or of other materials approved for the purpose by
the NVE, are accepted when located at a m i n i u m djstance of 1 meter
from:
1. another building, when the wall facing the kiosk is constructed
as a firewall.

2. a less important building, when the wall facin the kiosk has a /\
non-flammable covering. \___
)

Note:

Certain small buildings located in open areas and garages in

rows in open areas are regarded as less important buildings,
see Note t o § 726 in the Regulations for electrical installa-
tions.

These Regulations enter into force 1 September 1977.

Oslo, 10 August 1977

By order
A. Johansen
EK-22
I. Steine
 129

COMMUNICATION NO. 1/78

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
0 DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

0
Regulations for construction, operation, maintenance,
etc. of transportable electrical installations for
rock-crushing plants, plants for the production of
oiled gravel and similar installations.

The experience during the recent years has proved it necessary

to work out special regulations for construction, operation, mainten-
ance, etc. of transportable electrical installations for rock-crush-
ing plants, plants for production of oiled gravel, etc.

In order to provide a better understanding, certain provisions from

the general Regulations for electrical installations are included in
these special regulations. The particular clauses in question will
then be given in parenthesis ( F E A § ).
Pursuant t o § 2 in the Act of 24 May 1929 relating to the super-
vision of electrical installations and Authorization of 6 October
1971 from the Ministry of Industry and Handicrafts, the NVE, Direc-
torate of Electricity, has laid down the following regulations:

DEFINITION

0 .l Transportable electrical installations are electrical installa-

tions with or without separate power supply unit, and appliances
with appurtenant components such as designed for transportation
from one place to another.

GENERAL PROVISIONS

0 2 Scope
For the construction and operation of the installations the qen-
eral Requlations for electrical installations including the addi-
tions and alterations which are apparent in this Communication
are in force.

3 Supervision and inspection

The construction, maintenance and operation of the installations
are subject to official supervision and inspection.
 130

The official inspection is undertaken by the Norwegian Water

Resources and Electricity Board with the Electricity Inspecto-
rate as the executive body. If the transportable installation
is supplied from the distribution network belonging to an elec-
tricity supply undertaking, the inspection is carried out by
the Local Inspection of the electricity supply undertaking in
question (see F E A § 2).

0
4 Notification of generators and e7ectricai instaiiation
4.1 All new generators with appurtenant fuse-gears and instrument
panels are to be notified by the owner and the electrical con-
tractor to the Electricity Inspectorate in that district in
which the installations will normally be used. The notification
is to be forwarded to the Electricity Inspectorate in ample time
before the installation is intended to be put into operation. A
single-line circuit diagram showing the relevant data shall be
attached to the notification. The installation must not be put
into operation before permission is given by the Electricity In-
0
spectorate (see F E A § 12).

Notification forms are obtainable from the Electricity Inspecto-

rate.

4.2 If a generator is to be condemned or sold, the owner mustimmedia-

tely inform the Electricity Inspectorate.

4.3 Installations which will be supplied from the network of an

electricity supply undertaking must be notified to the Local
Inspection of that body. A single-line circuit diagram showing
relevant data is to be attached to the notification. The in-
stallation must not be put into operation before permission is
qiven by the Local Inspection of the electricity supply under-
taking in auestion (see F E A § 12).

Notification forms are obtainable from the Local Inspection.

4.4 In the case of several installations of identical design, the

specifications mentioned in item 4.1 and 4.3 may be sent to
the NVE, Directorate of Electricity, for type-approval.

5 Inspection 0
- 1 In the case of installations of identical design (see item 4.4)
the NVE, Directorate of Electricity, will carry out inspection
of the prototypes.

,.2 Inspections of complete installations are carried out by the

Electricity Inspectorate or the Local Inspection of the elec-
0
tricity supply undertaking in question (see F E A § 4 and NVE
Communication no. 1/67).

5 General requirements concerning competent constructton, use and

maintenance
6.1 Every installation must be constructed in a competent way and
be so arranged that it does not have an unnecessarily detrimen-
tal effect upon its surroundings (see F E A § 21).
 131

6.2 The construction modification and repair must only be carried

out by competent persons satisfying officially prescribed re-
quirements as laid down in regulations issued pursuant to law.

The installations must be carried out by electrical contractors.

n Re-fitting of installations after transportation etc. may be

carried out by electricians group L, employed by the firm in
question (see Regulations relating to technical training and
education for electrical professions and trades)

Repairs, maintenance and small-scale installation work may be

carried out by electricians group L.

0 6.3 Owners and users have the duty to ensure that the installations
are properly maintained and examined and at all times according
to Regulations (see F E A § 21).

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

7 General requirements concerning the technical construction of

installations
7.1 Materials, apparatus and motors must have at least a dust-proof
enclosure (IP 54). Generators must have at least a drip-proof
enclosure (IP 22). Generators must, however, be located and
have an outer enclosure of a design so that protection against
harmful penetration of dust and rain is achieved.

Note:

IP 54 and IP 22 are signifying enclosures as defined by IEC

(see IEC Publication 529). Generators ought to be located
at least 50 metres from dust sources unless these sources
are provided in some way with arrangements limiting the dis-
persion of dust.

0
7.2 All exposed metals must be connected to the earth system by means
of copper conductors. Earth conductors must in general be locat-
ed under the same cable sheaths as the current carrying conduc-
tors. Earth conductors must have the colour-combination yellow/
green (see F E A § 409, item f).

Separately laid earth conductors must have cross-sections at least

n 50% of that of the phase-conductors however, normally not larger

than 50 mm2 and not less than 16 m m . Earth conductors must have
the colour-combination yellow/green. Colour-coding by means of
pulled-on sleeves is acceptable.

7.3 Generator, motors, apparatus and materials must be located where

they are in a least possible way exposed to mechanical stresses,
spurt of gravel and rocks, rain, dirt, etc. Where necessary,
extra protection must be arranged. Covers used as protection
must be so constructed that they easily can be removed to pro-
vide access. Motors, apparatus, etc. must be designed so that
access for checking of contact-clamps and wires is not hampered.
 132

7.4 Motors must be protected against overloading by means of

circuit-breakers having thermal relays in all phases, set
to a tripping-current corresponding to the full-load current
of the motors, or they shall have a similar overload protec-
tion, e.g. temperature-sensing devices in the motor windings
(see F E A § 447).

Slip-ring motors must have an arrangement making it impossible

to start the motors with the rotor short-circuited.

Oil-filled starting apparatus must have thermal tripping de-

vices protecting against over-heating in case of incorrect
operation.

7.5 Posters with safety instructions as laid down in the Supplement f\ 1

to these regulations must be exibited readily visible in distri- \
bution centrals and on generators. The posters must be made of
a durable material.

8 Generator
8.1 Generators must be provided with automatic governing devices
for prevention of dangerous current and voltage variations (see
F E A § 528).

8.2 Generators must be provided with a permanent device for directing

of the insulation level of each phase (see F E A § 403). In addi-
tion, generators must have equipment giving a warning in case of
insulation failure. The equipment must give warning in case of
earth currents above 0.3 A.

Note:
Blinking lights may be used as warning.

8.3 For installations using star-connected generators, the neutral

points of the generators must be connected to the earth system.
Generators of voltages above 250 V must be star-connected.

9
9.1
Distribution centrals, control desks, P.tc.
Distribution centrals, control desks, etc. must be sufficiently
0
spacious and so constructed that erectin and dismantling may take
place without damage to compartments, panels, cables, etc.

Compartments and panels must be made of corrosion resistant and

at least flame-retardant materials. The construction must be
sufficiently robust to withstand the mechanical stresses occur-
0
ring.

Fuses, switch-gears and other equipment must be easily accessible

and situated behind locked doors. Inside such compartments, un-
insulated live parts must be properly protected against acciden-
tal touch. Covers must be made of insulated, at least flame-
retardant materials and must have necessary openings for "re-set"
buttons etc. to be used during operation.
 133

Socket-outlets and contact-clamps for connection of flexible

cables must be easily accessible in separate compartments in
the distribution central and placed behind locked doors. Un-
insulated parts of the contact-clamps must have covers for
protection against accidental touch. The covers must be made
of insulating, at least flame-retardant materials.

Fused circuit-breakers and other circuit-breakers, as well as

voltmeters, may be installed in the same compartment as the
(J socket-outlets when particular reasons make this necessary.

For fuses having higher rated currents than 63 A, multi-pole

fuse circuit-breakers of a contact-proof design must be used.

Circuits for motors of rated currents 80 A and lower, must be

terminated in socket-outlets.
0 Circuits for motors of rated currents above 80 A and also supply
cables for the distribution controls may be connected to copper
bus-bars by means of screws of a type giving permanent contact.
Other similar types of connections may also be permitted.

For the cables, robust insulated clamps to relieve tension must

be provided for in order that cable-connections are not subject-
ed to harmful twisting and tension.

Distribution contacts, control desks, etc. must have device

giving warning in case of insulation failure. The equipment
must give warning at earth leakage currents above 0.3 A.

Note:
Blinking lights may be used as waPning.

9.2 EnalosuPe
Compartments and desks must at least be of an enclosed design
(IP 44).

If the outer enclosure also represents the real protection

against dust and moisture, a warning, e.g. blinking light, must
be activated when this enclosure is opened during operation.

Distribution centrals must have openings at the bottom for

entering of the flexible cables. The openings must be covered
by rubber tape or similar to prevent dust entering the centrals.

Note:

0 A aommon waPning light aovePing both insulation failuPe and

open dooPs will be pePmitted.
 134

10 Cables and cable installation

10.1 Cables, except internal connections protected by covers and
inside compartments, must be of a wear-resisting and oil-proof
design, type NMHVO or better, having and earth conductor. The
Electricity Inspectorate may in certain cases give permission
to deviate from this provision. Between generator and distri-
bution central, cable type CGF may be used for cross-sections
above 95 mm2.

Cables must be properly protected against mechanical damage and

harmful shaking. Contacts must be secured against loosening.
0
When necessary, cables amd machines and other equipment must
be installed in fixed spacious corrosion-resistant conduits.
Armoured hoses may, however, be used in the cases where a
flexible mechanical protection is required. The armoured hoses
must have an outer plastic sheath and must be of a mechanically
robust type. Conduits and armoured hoses must be located so
that water cannot collect inside them.
0
Note:
"Plica"-conduits are not accepted as armoured hoses. Cables
installed in ducts between switch-gear and motor for conveyor-
belts etc. must be of the type NMHVO. This same type of cable
or cable-types PFSP or PFXP must be used between the various
apparatus, construction boxes etc., even if these are pro-
vided with a common outer cover or compartment.

10.2 Cables must have approved clamps for relief of tension at entries
to motors, starting apparatus, etc.

Cable connections between distribution centrals and motors etc.

must be installed so that the cables are not exposed to mechani-
cal stresses.

Note:
Common type of packing-glands are not accepted as relief of
tension for cables.
Reference is made to the list of approved clamps for relief
of tension, issued by NEMKO. f\
\ _ )
10.3 Cables must be arranged so that they may easily be taken down
or refitted in connection with the moving of the installation.

Cables are not to be laid on the ground. Cables between the

various parts of the installation must be run in cable-trays
or similarly suitable arrangements, at least 50 cm above the
ground. The arrangement must be robust and stable. 0
Support-line may be used, the lines being fastened-to separate
poles sufficiently dimensioned and placed on robust foundations.
The cable must in this case have a height above ground of at
least 2.5 metres.
 135

When particular reasons are present, e.g. due to transports,

the cables may be laid in the ground. The cable must be run
in robust conduits.

Note:
Alongside conveyer-belts, etc., insulated S-hooks are recom-
mended for cables.

() 11. Transportable plants for production of oiled gravel and asphalt

The following zone classifications are in force for the above
mentioned types of plants (see NVE Communication no. 1/77):

Inside tanks:
The air-space is classified as Zone 0. The heating elements must
at all times be covered by oil, i.e. the oil-tap must be situated
above the heating elements.

Ventilation-pipe (opening):
Zone 1 - The area within a radius of 1 metre (radius of a sphere).
At a distance less than 2 metres around Zone 1, unnecessary elec-
trical equipment is not permitted.

Mixing apparatus:
Zone 1 - The area within 1 metre above and to the side, measured
from.the top of the mixing tank, as well as down to the ground.

Pump:
Zone 2 - The area within a radius of 1 metre (radius of a sphere).

Note:
Electrical equipment which has to be installed on the tank or
at a distance less than 2 metres from the Zone 1 of the venti-
lation-pipe, should as far as possible be of a design required
for Zone 2 (see NVE Communication no. 1/77).

12. Maintenance and periodical checking of installations

r 12.1

12.2
Faults must be corrected at once.

The installation must at least once every year be checked by an

electrical contractor or by an electrician group L, employed by
the firm in question. In the case of installations subject to
inspection by the Electricity Inspectorate, notification concer-
ning this and the name of the contractor/electrician responsible
u s t be sent to the Electricity Inspectorate. In the case of
installations subject to inspection by the Local Inspection, the
notification should be sent to the electricity supply undertak-
ing in question.

The Electricity Inspectorate may require that owners of transport-

able installations hire electricians group L o r arrange contact
with electrical contractor.
 136

12.3 A logbook/file must be kept relating to the checking carried

out. The logbook/file must be shown to the Electricity In-
spectorate or the Local Inspection on demand.

13. Transportable installation used as fixed installation

The electrical installation may either be maintained and en-
larged according to these regulations, or superseded by a fixed
installation.

14. Entry
These regulations are coming into force on 1 June 1978.

Already existing installations must be made in compliance with

these provisions within 1 year from this date.
n
SUPPLEMENT
SAFETY INSTRUCTION FOR TRANSPORTABLE
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

l. Compartments for apparatus

1.1 During operation, doors to compartments containing apparatus
must be locked.

1.2 When the installation is not in operation, the voltage must

be switched off, for instance by means of a main switch, and
doors must be locked to prevent unauthorized operating the
installation.

1.3 Only approved fuses may be used. It is forbidden to use falsi-

fied fuses or fuses having a higher rated current than permit-
ted for the circuit in question.

2. Maintenance and periodical checking

2.1 Faults must be corrected at once. A signal indicating insula-
tion failure is regarded as a fault. Q
2.2 The installation must at least once a year be checked by an
electrical contractor or by an electrician group L employed
by the firm in question. In the case of installations subject
to inspection by the Electricity Inspectorate, notification con-
cerning this and the name of the contractor/electrician respon-
sible must be sent. In the case of installations subject to (
inspection by the Local Inspection the notification must be sent , )
to the electricity supply undertakinq in question.

Oslo, 6 December 1977

By proxy

A. Johansen

I. Steine
 137

COMMUNICATION NO. 2/78

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD

n DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Provisions concerning the replacement of

uninsulated lines leading to house walls

In communication no. 2/71 from the NVE, Directorate of Electri-

city, a decision in the Supreme Court is referred to concerning
a person who was injured while he was painting his house and
touched uninsulated lines leading to the wall of the house.

necause of the statistically speaking unsignificant frequency

of accidents at the time relating to injuries of this kind and
the large expenses involved for several electricity supply under-
takings, the NVE did not at that time require insulation of un-
insulated lines leading to house walls.

Since the above Communication was issued, however, a series of

accidents have occured, out of these five with fatal result.
The causes have been bodily contact with uninsulated lines or
lines having insufficient insulation, leading to house walls.

Owing to these accidents, the NVE, Directorate of Electricity,

regards it necessary to demand, pursuant to 0 41 in the Regula-
tions for electrical installations, that existing uninsulated
lines leading to house walls must be replaced by insulated lines.
so that the installation is brought in compliance with the pro-

n
visions i n § 526, 1st paragraph, which says:

"The shortest distance separating uninsulated lines from any

building or part of building shall be at least 1.5 m."

The replacement must be commenced as soon as possible and must

be completed within 1 July 1987.

Attention must be paid to the fact that the above provision also
0 implies that lines having insufficient insulation must be replaced.
Furthermore, the provision implies that connection clamps closer
than 1.5 m from house walls shall be insulated and the clamps and
lines must have insulation of weatherproof and corrosion resistant
type.
Oslo, 6 February 1978
By proxy
A. Johansen
I. Steine
 138

COMMUNICATION NO. 3/78

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Safety Regulations for

High Voltage Installations

Pursuant t o § 2 in the Act of 24 May 1929 relating to

the supervision of electrical installations and authori-
zation of 6 October 1971 from the Department of Industry
and Handicrafts, the NVE, Directorate of Electricity,
has laid down the following safety regulations for high
voltage installations, to be in force as from 1 January
1979, and replacing the provisions i n § 611 and Item j
in Section II E in the Regulations for electrical instal-
lations as well as Communication No. 2/69 from the NVE,
Directorate of Electricity.

n
 139

CONTENTS
Page
§ 901 Scope 141

§ 902 Definitions
.1 Shielding 141
!) .2
.3
Barrier
Voltage distance
141
141
. 4 Minimum approach distance 142
.5 Work on high voltage installations 142
.6 Work close to high voltage installations 142
.7 Work on live components {Norw. abbr. AUS) 142
.8 Earthing at the working point 142

0 .9
.10
.11
Terminal earthing
Safety supervisor
Switching supervisor
143
143
143

§ 903 Owner/user
.1 Responsibilities placed upon owner/user 143
.2 Appointments and approval of electrical
safety manager 143
§ 904 Electrical safety manager
.1 Responsibilities placed upon the electrical
safety manager 144
. 2 Delegation of authority (authorization) 144
§ 905 Access
.1 Permit for access 145
.2 Locking 145
§ 906 Switching operation in high voltage installa-
tions
.1 Planning and performance 145
.2 Administrative measures 146
.3 Switching supervisor 146

0
§ 907 Work on or close to high voltage installations
(work on live components not included)
.1 Planning and performance 146
.2 Administrative measures 146
.3 Safety supervisor 147
.4 Switching supervisor 148
.5 Working party 148

0 § 908

.1
Safety measures related to work on or close to
earthed and short-circuited installations
Instruction 149
.2 Disconnection 149
.3 Marking. Precautions against reconnection 1 9
.4 Voltage checking 150
.5 Earthing and short-circuiting 151
.6 Points of earthing and short-circuiting 152
.7 Appliances for earthing and short-circuiting 153
.8 Disruption of work due to lightning 153
.9 Preparing the point of work before reconnec-
tion 153
.10 Reconnection 153
 140

Page
§ 909 Safety measures related to work close to live
installations
.1 Instruction 154
.2 Voltage distance 154
.3 Minimum approach distance. Working position. 154
.4 Barrier 155
.5 Shielding 155
.6 Work of short duration 156
'§ 910 Safety measures related to work on live
components (Norw. abbr. AUS) 156
§ 911 Safety measures related to replacing and
removal of fuses 157
§ 912
.1
.2
.3
Checking and maintenance
Apparatus, tools and equipment
Inspection of overhead lines
Checking of earthing installation
157
157
157
n
. 4 Checking of insulation level 157
.5 Log books 158
.6 Tidiness and cleanliness 158
.7 Correction of fault and deficiencies 158
.8 Single-line circuit diagram 159
.9 Communication system 159
§ 913 Commissioning installations
.1 Publication 159
. 2 New installations 159
§ 914 Accidents and fires
.1 Preparedness 159
. 2 First-aid 159
.3 Poster 159
. 4 Notification to the Electricity Inspectorate 160
§ 915 Tuition, training and instruction 160

()
 141

§ 901 Scope

.1 These safety regulations apply to existing as well as

new high voltage installations which may become live
by operating switches, inserting fuses or similar, if
not anything else is decided by the NVE.

Note:
These safety regulations should also be used when
necessary for installations during erection or dis-
mantling which cannot be made live by operating
switches, inserting fuses or similar, but which may
become live due to atmospheric influence, by direct
contact with or by induction due to neighbouring
live installations.

0 These safety regulations do not apply to high

voltage installations which are regarded as part of
the low or medium voltage network (see the note to
§ 12).

.2 Installations which are subject to these safety regula-

tions and which are not earthed and short-circuited,
must be considered as being live.

§ 902 Definitions

.1 Shielding
Shielding is a protective arrangement which, in connec-
tion to work being done, is put up as a protection
against accidental contact with live installation parts.

.2 Barrier
Barrier is an arrangement which, in connection to work
being done, is put up as a warning against entering a
particular area.

. 3 Voltage distance
Voltage distance is the shortest distance from un-shielded,
uninsulated live installation parts, intended to give an

0
adequate electric insulation level through air. Voltage
distance is dependent on the voltage level as laid down
i n § 909.2.2.

Note:
In the definitions and also i n § § 902.4 and 909.2.1
the expression uninsulated installation part does
also imply insulated parts if these are not insulated
in such a way that they are especially approved by the
NVE, Directorate of Electricity, to be safe to touch.
 142

.4 Minimum approach distance

Minimum approach distance is the distance giving the
nearest permitted working position for the working party,
from un-shielded, uninsulated live installation part.

This distance has to be laid down for each working opera-

tion depending on the working method, tools, materials,
the skill of the workers and also to which extent the
work is supervised. The distance must be so great that
no part of the body, or part of tool or material which (\
does not have an adequate insulation level will be kept )
inside the minimum approach distance. Included herein
are unintended movements and other unintentional nccur-
ances.

.5 Work on high voltage installations

Work on high voltage installations is work on parts of
installations which are not made safe to touch by means
of earthed sheath, earthed enclosure or approved insula-
tion.

Work on high voltage installation is carried out either

as work on earthed and short-circuited installation part
or as work on live components.

Note:
"Approved" means approved by the NVE, Directorate [Jf
Electricity.

.6 Work close to high voltage installations

Work close to high voltage installations is work where
the working position is so situated that personnel with-
out any safety measures may risk directly or by means
of tools or materials, to come inside the voltage dis-
tance.

Work close to high voltage installations does also in-

clude transportation of tools and materials when the
path of transportation is located so that personnel

n
without safety measures being taken, may risk directly,
or by reason of tools or materials to come inside the
voltage distance.

.7 Work on live components (Norwegian abbr. AUS)

Work on live components is work on objects situated in-
side the voltage distance as well as work directly on
live installation parts.

.8 Earthing at the working point

This is defined as earthing and short-circuiting of
installation parts at the working point or immediately
to it.

Note:
Concerning dimensioning, s e e § 908.6.1.
 143

.9 Terminal earthing
Earthing at terminal points is earthing and short-
circuiting at all points of disconnection, from which
an installation may be made live. The earthing at
terminal points must be dimensioned to withstand the
highest short-circuit currents to be expected.
Note:
In this connection and also i n § 908, the meaning of
highest short-circuit currents does not include cur-
rents which only exist during switching situations
of very short duration.

. 10 Safety supervisor
Safety supervisor is a person appointed to take care
of safety in compliance with the provisions laid down

n .11
in these safety regulations in connection with work on
or close to a high voltage installation.

Switching supervisor
Switching supervisor is a person appointed to lead switch-
ing operations in high voltage installations in compli-
ance with the provisions laid down in these safety regu-
lations.

§ 903 Owner/user
.1 Responsibilities placed upon owner/user
Owner/user of a high voltage installation is responsible
for the installation at all times to be in compliance
with regulations and run according to these safety regu-
lations.

Note:
The user is the one who is taking the owner's place
in running the installation, based upon a necessary
agreement with the owner as to where responsibility
should be placed.

.2 A p p o i n t m n t s and approval of electrical safety manager

.2.1 Owner/user of a high voltage installation must appoint
an electrical safety manager for the operation and run-
ning of the installation. The manager must be approved
by the Electricity Inspectorate.

Note:
According to Regulations of 19 September 1975 relating
to technical training and education for electrical
professionals and trades, the electrical safety
manger of certain installations of a particular
kind and size laid down by NVE, must satisfy the
requirements laid down for competent electrical
manager.
 144

.2.2 Owner/user must give the electrical safety manager

necessary authority and economic means in order to
enable him to maintain his responsibilities in a
proper manner in accordance with these safety regu-
lations.

§ 904 Eleatriaal safety manager

.1 Responsibilities plaaed upon the eleatriaal safety
magager
.1.1 The electrical safety manager is responsible for a
proper operation of the high voltage installation,
in compliance with these safety regulations.

n
. 1.2 The electrical safety manager must appoint a deputy
to take care of the manager's functions in running t e
installations in his absence.

The appointment must be made in writing.

If the absence is expected to exceed 3 months, the

management must be discussed with the Electricity
Inspectorate.

.2 Delegation of authority (authorization)

The electrical safety manager may, as far as it is
reasonable and responsible, delegate his authority
according to these safety regulations. The delega-
tion must be made in writing.

The electrical safety manager is responsible for the

delegation and has the duty to make sure that the ar-
rangement is functioning in a proper manner and accord-
ing to these safety regulations.

Note:
Aaaording to these safety regulations, the eleatriaal
safety manager or "a person authorized by him", is
responsible for giving aaaess to the areas aon-
aerned, for approving safety supervisors as well as
iwitahing supervisors, and also for giving permis-
sions to work alone or aarry out work of short dura-
tion. The reason for this is that the duties men-
tioned above are so vital for the safety that they
are only to be taken aare of by the eleatriaal safety
manager himself or by a person authorized by him per-
sonally.

Delegations may furthermore be given to the various

positions in the organization.
 145

§ 905 Access
.1 Permit for access
.1.1 Independent access to high voltage installations has
only the electrical safety manager and those who are
given permit for access by him or a person authorized
by him.

Note:
The Electricity Inspectorate is allowed independent
access at any time to those installations subject to
inspection. Reference is made t o § 5 in the Act of
24 May 1929 relating to the supervision of electri-
cal installations.

. 1.2 Permit must only be given on the basis of close evalua-

tion of necessity and only be given to persons having
such qualifications that it is responsible to give
them independent access.

Permit must be given in writing and must lay down the

type of work for which the permit is valid, state the
period of duration and whether the person concerned is
allowed to accompany other persons who do not have
• permit.

The electrical safety manager or one authorized by him,

may give persons who are not given permit access to
high voltage installations provided they are being
accompanied by a person having permission to accompany
others.

.2 Locking
.2.1 Rooms and fenced in areas containing high voltage instal-
lations or where unlocked operating mechanisms for such
installations are placed, must be kept securely locked
when the staff or guards are not present, and in the cases
where access is not under surveillance by the staff or
guards.

0 . 2. 2 Operating mechanisms for high voltage apparatus which are

not fenced in and therefore are accessible for people not
concerned must be kept locked in the "on" as well as the
"off" position.

. 2. 3 Keys are only to be handed out against receipt and are to

be handed back together with the permit for access.

0 § 906 Switching operation in high voltage installations

.1 Planning and pPrformance

Switching operation is to be planned and carried out
in such a way that hazards to life and property do not
occur.
 146

.2 Administrative measures
Administrative measures are to be taken to be sure that
questions related to responsibility for switching proce-
dure are unambigous.

.3 Switching supervisor
.3.1 Switching operations in high voltage installations must
be conducted by an appointed switching supervisor.

. 3.2 The switching supervisor must be approved by written

directive from the electrical safety manager or by a
person authorized by him. The approval must be based
on a close scrutiny of the qualifications of each per-
son. The directive must lay down the authority and the
responsibility attached to the function as switching
supervisor, as well as the type of switching operations
depending on voltage level, geographical area, type of
0
circuit-breakers, etc., which the leader may conduct.

Note:
Inciuded in the process of evaiuating the quaiifica-
tions of each person, personai as weii as professionai
quaiifications must be inciuded.

. 3.3 The switching supervisor in charge must have been appoint-

ed among those approved by written directive. The
appointment may be verbal.

. 3.4 The switching supervisor must make sure that the switch-
ing is performed in a reasonable manner and according to
these safety regulation.

Note:
Commands reiated to switching operations shouid be
given in writing. Equai to written commands are
message dictated by -teiephone when the message is
written down by the receiver and word by word re-
peated back.

An operation iist ought to be issued for aii switching

procedure.

§ 907 Work on or ciose to high voitage instaiiations (work

on iive comronents not inciuded)
.1 Pianning and performance
Work must be planned and performed in such a way that
hazards to life and property do not occur.

.2 Administrative measures
Administrative measures are to be taken to ensure that
the responsibilities related to the work are unambigous.
 147

. 3 Safety supervisor
.3.1 The safety during work on or close to high voltage
installations is to be taken care of by an appointed
safety supervisor.

. 3. 2 The safety supervisor must be approved by written direc-

tive from the electrical safety manager or a person

n
authorized by him. This approval must be based on a
close scrutiny of the qualifications of the person.
The directive must lay down the authority and respon-
sibility attached to the function as safety supervisor.

Note:
Concerning qualifications, see the note t o § 906.3.2.

0 . 3. 3 The safety supervisor in charge must have been appointed

among those approved by written directive. The appoint-
ment may be verbal.

. 3.4 The safety supervisor must make sure that the work is
carried out in a responsible way and according to these
safety regulations, herein:

.3.4.1 inform the working party of his function as safety super-

visor,

.3.4.2 9ive the working party necessary instructions related to

the work in question,

.3.4.3 ensure necessary voltage checking at the point of work

after message is received from the switching supervisor
that necessary switching has taken place, as well as
precautions against closing and that possible terminal
earthing are carried out,

.3.4.4 ensure necessary earthing and short-circuiting at the

point of work,

.3.4.5 lay down the minimum approach distance and ensure neces-
0 sary shielding and barriers at the point of work,

.3.4.6 supervise personally or appoint and instruct another

person to supervise the work,

.3.4.7 take part in the work only as far as this is compatible

with his task as safety supervisor,

0 .3.4.8 ensure that safety measures are dismantled in a respon-

sible way at the point of work after work is completed,
and give message to switching supervisor when the point
of work is made ready for connection.
 148

. 3. 5 Safety supervisor may also at the same time be appointed

switching supervisor.

.4 Switching supervisor
As far as work is concerned, the duties placed upon the
switching supervisor (see a l s o § 906) are as follows:

. 4 .1 Provide for necessary disconnections, marking, safety

precautions against reconnections, possible voltage
checking and terminal earthing at the points of dis-
connection and give message to the safety supervisor
when these duties are performed.
0
. 4. 2 Provide for responsible switching after message is re-
ceived from the safety supervisor that the installation
is ready for such connection.

Note:
A preceding message or agreement that connection wiZZ
0
take pZace at a certain time without further notice
is not sufficient.

.5 Working party
At least two persons must be present when work is carried
out on or close to high voltage installations. The same
goes for voltage checking by using a voltage indicator
and when earthing and short-circuiting is carried out
using portable earthing equipment. The electrical safety
manager or a person authorized by him may, however, permit
the functions mentioned above to be performed by a single
person, provided that this is regarded absolutely neces-
sary and that the person concerned agrees to this and is
approved as safety supervisor.

. 5.2 Each member of the working party must contribute to carry

through those measures which are put into operation to
ensure that the work is performed in a responsible way
and in accordance with these safety regulations, herein:

.5.2.1 to observe and follow the instructions given by the

safety supervisor,
0
.5.2.2 not to commence work before the safety supervisor has
given his permission,

.5.2.3 to inform the safety supervisor and to wait for permission

to continue work in case of an unforeseen situation which ()
may imply danger.

. 5. 3 A person who according t o § 907.3.4.6 has been given the

task to supervise work, must perform this surveillance
in accordance with instructions given by the safety
supervisor.
 149

§ 908 Safety measures related to work on or close to earthed

and short-circuited installations

.1 Instruction
Before work is commenced, the safety supervisor must
give necessary instructions to the personnel under his
safety command about
- the extent of the work,
(\ I
- the boundaries of the point of work,
- safety measures in force.

.2 Disconnection
.2.1 The part of the installation on which work is to be

n carried out or which is located inside the minimum

approach distance must be disconnected on all vol-
tage feeding sides.
Note:
As example of points where disconnection must be con-
sideres are:
- points where there are possibilities of return trans-
formation of voltage
- points where permanent earth connections are not
directly earthed, e.g. connection between neutral
points of transformers and earthing reactance coil.
- points being connected to overhead lines.
. 2.2 Disconnections must take place either by means of a
disconnector (isolator) having visible isolating
distance or gap, or reliable position indicating
device for each movable contact system or by means
of other visible means.

The isolating distance must be sufficiently large.

The disconnection must be checked .

.3 Marking. Precautions against reconnection.

. 3.1 The reconnection devices must be marked by means of

appropriate marking plates or similar, while work is
in progress. The marking must not be removed before
everything is made ready for reconnection.

0 Note:
Appropriate marking platcp are plates indicating
that the installation part in question is discon-
nected, that work is in progress on this part and
that reconnection must not take place. The marking
ought to be signed and dated.
 150

.3.2 While work is in progress appropriate safety measures

must be used to prevent reconnection.

Note:
Depending on circumstances it is a matter of judge-
ment what is to be considered as appropriate safe-
guards against reconnection. Alternatives m a y be

0
blocking or Locking of the reconnection device, dis-
connection of motor, closing of air pressure valve
or similar.

Marking may be assumed to be an appropriate safety

measure as Long as its proper function is supervised.

In the rase of remnte control, b L o c i n g of this remote

control at the site of Local control is regarded as
appropriate safety measures against remote reconnec- 0
tion.

.4 Voltage checking
.4.1 Before earthing and short-circuiting is c a r r e d out,
checking must be carried out in an appropriate manner
to make certain that disconnection has been effected
on all poles on that part of the installation on which
work is to be carried out or on that part within the
voltage distance of which the working party may come.

Note:
That the voltage checking must take place in an appro-
priate manner means in this connection that the check-
ing must be carried out in such a way that the follow-
ing requirements are fulfilled:
- The voltage checking must provide correct informa-
tion whether the installation parts in question are
disconnected or not.
- The voltage checking itself must not imply any danger
for the performer.

In the case of totally enclosed installations, checking

n
by means of fixed voltmeters is assumed to be adequate
voltage checking provided earthing takes place by
means of earthing switch being dimensioned to with-
stand the total short-circuit currents that may occur

. 4.2
during operation at full voltage.

Voltage indicators must satisfy the provisions in force

0
at any time, and the indicator itself must be tested
immediately before and after the verification.
 151

.5 Earthing and short-circuiting

.5.1 Before work commences and as long as it is in progress,
the installation must be earthed and short-circuited.

Note:
This provision applies for all conductors, also those
between neutral points and earthing reactance coils.

n . 5.2 During proceedings related to location of faults and

when tests are carried out, the installation part must
be earthed and short-circuited during connection as well
as reconnection of the measuring equipment. While mea-
surements are being taken, earth and short-circuit con-
nections may be removed if absolutely necessary.

. 5.3 Inside stations, earth connections are to be established

0 by connection to the main earthing system of the station.

In the case of overhead lines, the earth connection must

either be established by connection to the existing
earthing system, or to parts of the construction, pro-
vided these are of sufficient mechanical strength and
conductance, or to temporary secure earthing system put
up for the particular purpose.

. 5.4 When using portable earthing equipment, this is to be

connected to the earth system before being secured to
the phases. The installation part must not be touched
before earthing is accomplished. When the earthing
apparatus is being removed, it shall be disconnected
from the phases first and the earth system last.

Note:
Even though an installation part is disconnected and
voltage checked, dangerous voltages may occur due to
induction or capacitive charges (cables, capacitors).

. 5. 5 If earthing at terminal points is applied, this must

be accomplished before earthing at the point of work
is established.

Checking of established earthing at terminal points

shall be done visually, provided no other means is
applied to make certain that all phases are earthed.
Checking of earthing at terminal points in the case
of outdoor earthing switches must, however, always be
done visually.
0 In the case of cable installations where earthing at
the point of work is not practically possible, earthing
and short-circuiting at the cable terminals must always
be checked visually.
 152

.5.6 In gas-insulated installations where earthing at the

point of work is not practically possible and where
earthing at the terminal points is a part of the in-
stallation itself, the earthing switch shall be locked
in the connected position.

.6 Points of earthing and short-circuiting

.6.1 Earthing and short-circuiting shall take place at the
point of work.

In exceptional cases and due to practical reasons where

earthing at the point of work is not dimensioned to
0
withstand the largest short-circuit currents of the
installation, earthing at the terminal points is required
as well.
.6.2 Earthing at the point of work must be visible. It must
be located so as to be seen from the point where the
work is carried out, provided it is not placed in the
immediate vicinity, for instance in a neighbouring com-
partment.
In the case of overhead lines where satisfactory earth
connections cannot be established at the point of work,
fully dimensioned earth and short-circuit connections
are to be fitted as close to the point of work as pos-
sible, and the conductors must in addition be short-
circuited at the point of work.

. 6.3 In the case of cable installations where earthing at the

point of work is not practically possible, fully dimen-
sioned earthing and short-circuiting is required at
those cable terminals from which voltage feeding is
possible.

The cable must be "shot" before it is r::ut over (a bolt

is shot through the cable, short-circuiting and earth-
ing it).

. 6.4 Earthing at the point of work must be accomplished in

such a way that fuses or automatic switches are not
situated between the earthing and the point of ·work.
If disconnectors are situated between the earthing and
the point of work, they shall be safely secured against 0
disconnection.

. 6.5 If the part of the installation on which work is to be

carried out can be made live from only one direction,
this side of the point of work shall be earthed.

If the part of the installation on which work is to be

carried out can be made live from several directions,
n
these sides of the point of work shall be earthed.
 153

In the case of work on a single line-pole where the

line conductors are not disconnected, earthing on both
sides of the line-pole is not necessary, even though
voltage may be fed from both (all sides).
If the conductor system is to be disconnected at the
point of work earthing shall always be applied on
those sides of 'the point of work which are connected
(J to overhead lines.

.7 Appliances for earthing and short-circuiting

. 7 .1 Earthing and short-circuiting shall take place by means
of fixed earthing switches, portable earthing device or
other suitable earthing equipment. The earthing equip-
ment must be of adequate capacity for the entry at the
0 point of application and must satisfy the provisions in
force at any time.

. 7. 2 If earthing equipment has been subject to short-circuits,

proper checking and repair of the equipment must take
place before it is put back into service.

.8 Disruption of work due to lightning.

Work on an overhead line or and installation part con-
nected to such line must be disrupted if lightning is
observed in the area of the line.

.9 Preparing the point of work before reconnection

. 9 .1 None of the safety measures which are in force due to the
work shall cease before the safety supervisor has point-
ed out to each one being under his safety command that
the safety measures will cease, and that the installa-
tion from now on is to be considered live.

. 9. 2 The safety measures which are in force must be wound up

in such a way that danger does not arise.

. 9. 3 The point of work must not be reported ready for recon-

nection before the safety supervisor has made certain
that such connection may take place without danger.

.10 Reconnection
Reconnection must not take place before the switching

n
supervisor has received message from the safety super-
visor that the installation may be made live. The
switching supervisor must also ensure that all safety
measures put into force at the points of disconnection
are wound up, and that reconnection may take place with-
out danger.
 154

§ 909 Safety measures related to work close to live

ins tal la t i ons
.1 Instruction
Before work is commenced, the safety supervisor must
give necessary instructions to the working party about:
- the extent of the work,
- the boundaries of the point of work,
- safety measures in force,
- permitted working position.

o
.2 Voltage distance
.2.1 No part of the body or part of tools or materials must
come nearer unshielded, uninsulated live parts of the
installation than the voltage distance. Exempted from
this, however, are special tools having adequate insula-
tion level.

Note:
Concerning uninsulated installation part, see the note
t o § 902.J.

. 2.2 The voltage distance in relation with the voltage level

is given by the following table:

In the case of networks having earth reactance coils or

uninsulated neutral points:
Max. operating voltage
(r.m.s. value) up to - kV 12 24 36 52 72.5 100 123 145
Voltage distance - cm 40 50 60 70 80 100 110 130

In the case of networks having directly earthed neutral

points:
Max. operating voltage - kV 145 170 245 300 420

n
Voltage distance - cm 110 130 210 250 350

Note:
Definition and magnitudes of the voltage distance is in
compliance with recommendations from the "Nordic committe
for u"lification of electrical safety matters" concerning
common Nordic provisions regarding work on live compo-
nents.

.3 Minirum approach distance. Working position. 0

For each single working operation, a minimum approach
distance shall be determined.

The minimum approach distance is determined by adding a

sufficient•distance to the voltage distance depending
on the working methods, tools, materials, the skill of
the working party and to which degree the work is super-
vised.
 155

The minimum approach distance shall be given to the

working party as the shortest permitted working posi-
tion to live parts.

The working position must be such that all the members

of the working party during the execution of the work
(unintentional movements included) with no part of the
body may come within the voltage distance as well as
tools and materials which do not have a proper insula-
tion level.

.4 Barrier
. 4. 1 Barriers must be erected near the point of work or
paths of transportation as a warning against live
installation parts.

0
Note:
The requirement also applies to neighbouring compart-
ments containing live installation parts, even though
doors or similar are locked.

. 4. 2 The barrier shall be carried out by using rope or simi-

lar, equipped with easily noticeable warning plates or
flags, or in certain cases only by means of noticeable
warning plates or flags.

. 4. 3 The barrier must be put up as far away from live instal-

lation parts as is judged practicable, but there must be
no blocking of installation parts which must be acces-
sible during the work. The barrier must not be put up
so close to live parts that it may come within the vol-
tage distance .

.5 Shielding
.5.1 Shielding shall be put up as a protection against the
installation parts, when work has to be carried out in
such a position that the voltage distance cannot be
expected to be complied with without such shieldinq.

. 5.2 Shielding shall be made so stable and be of such make

and extent that it is not possible from the working
position, unintentionally,to come within the voltage
distance when using assigned working methods and tools.

. 5.3 Shielding must, as far as possible, be put up outside

the voltage distance and should as far as practical be
made of insulating materials.

Shielding which has to be put up closer to live installa-

tion parts than laid down i n § 652 (indoor), o r § 671
(outdoor), must have such insulation level and mechani-
cal properties that safety is maintained. Such shield-
ing must satisfy the current provisions.
 156

.5.4 When it is not obvious that the protective arrangement

is in fact shielding off live installation components,
easily noticeable warning plates must be put up.

. 5.5 Shielding made of conductive materials must be earthed.

.6 Work of short duration

.6.1 If absolutely necessary and in exeptional cases, and
only after permission given by the electrical safety
manager or a person authorized by him, work of short dura- f)
tion (not exceeding 15 minutes) may be carried out with-
out shielding or barriers. To prevent the person who
carries out the work to come within the voltage distance,
the work must be directly and continuously supervised by
the safety supervisor.

. 6.2 Before work is commenced, the safety supervisor must {j

give detailed instructions to the person(s) carrying
out the work as to:
- the extent of the work,
- the boundaries of the point of work,
- permitted working position.

The safety supervisor shall ascertain how live installa-

tion parts may rapidly be disconnected.

. 6.3 The safety supervisor himself shall all the time super-
vise the person carrying out the work and must not him-
self take any part in the work.

. 6.4 The safety supervisor must not normally supervise more

than one person.

He may, however, supervise two persons if these persons

are working in immediate vicinity of each other and are
carrying out the work together.

§ 910 Safety measures related to work on live components

0
(Norwegian abbr. AUS)
Work on live components must be carried out according to
the AUS-provisions in force.

AUS class 2 and 3 require special permission from the

NVE, Directorate of Electricity.

Note:
AUS-work is classified according to extent of work,
degree of difficulty and duration:
- AUS - class 1
Simple operational and service type or work, e.g.
testing of insulators, lubrication and checking of
various kind.
 157

- AU[' - class 2
Connection and disconnection of connection wires and
work which normally does not require that tools must
absorb the mechanical forces exerted by the installa-
tion.
- AUS - class 3
Work which normally implies that the mechanical forces
exerted by the installation must be absorbed by the
tools.

§ 911 Safety measures related to replacing and removal of

fuses
Replacing and removal of fuses must be carried out:
- either by means of the technical safety measures as
laid down i n § 908,
- or by applying insulated tools where this as a whole
can be achieved without danger. Insulated tools must
be specially designed and suited for the purpose and
satisfy the provisions laid down.

§ 912 Checking and maintenance

.1 Apparatus, tools and equipment
Necessary maintanance and checking of apparatus, tools
and equipment must be carried out.

.2 Inspection of overhead Lines

Overhead lines must be inspected as often as necessary
to ensure that they are in accordance with regulations
and must throughout their length be inspected at least
once every year or more often if the NVE, Directorate
of Electricity, should so require.

.3 Checking of earthing installation

Earth electrodes and their connections must be checked
as often as is necessary, and at least once every ten
0 years.

As a part of the checking, measurements of the earth

electrode resistances must be carried out as far as it
is practically possible. In the case of high voltage
installations having directly earthed neutral points,
such measurements are not required.

0 .4 Checking of insulation Level

.4.1 In the case of installations being provided with equip-
ment for automatic disconnection or automatic warning
in case of single-pole short-circuit to earth, this
equipment must be checked to ensure its function as
often as necessary, however, at least once every 3
months.
 158

Note:
The checking in·order to ensure that the equipment
functions may be limited to the signal circuit only,
while relays are checked as often as the producer lay
down for such relays.

. 4.2 In the case of older installations which are not equipped

as mentioned i n § 912.4.1, the insulation level must be
checked at least once every day. (J
.4.3 The insulation level must be checked after new installa-
tions are completed, as well as after enlargements or
after repair has been done.

.5 Log books
The following log books must be kept:
.5.1 Log book concerning all operational disturbances, faults
and accidents occuring with details of their nature and
cause.

. 5.2 Log book related to inspections according t o § 912.2.

. 5.3 Log book concerning the checkin.gof the earthing instal-

lation in accordance w i t h § 912.3, stating result of
measurements and the measuring method applied, and re-
pairs and changes carried out.

. 5.4 Log book concerning the checking of the insulation level

according t o § 912.4.
. 5.5 Log book, concerning all messages and switching opera-
tions according t o § 907.4, being conducted from opera-
tion centers.
.6 Tidiness and cleanliness
.6.1 Rooms housing high voltage installations must be kept
clean and be well maintained. In such rooms, storing
of equipment, tools, oildrums or similar is not permit-
ted .

. 6.2 Service passages and passages behind compartments, rocks

or similar as well as stairways, passages and access
through doors must be kept tidy so that passtng t h r o u h
is not made difficult.

.7 Correction of fault and deficiencies

Faults and deficiencies must be rectified as soon as
possible and precautionary measures laid down to prevent
(J
any danger to life or property.
 159

.8 Single-line circuit diagram

In power stations and other larger stations single-line
circuit diagrams must be exhibited in readily visible
positions showing the high voltage installation of the
particular station.

This also applies for smaller stations and kiosks where

voltage may be fed from two or more directions. However,
for these smaller stations and kiosks the Electricity

0
Inspectorate may, based on application, approve systems
giving information of equal value.

.9 Communication system
.9.1 Between power stations and other important stations, and
between such stations and the operation management, a
communication system must exist, which is available at

0 all times.

Note:
Examples of communication systems are installations be-
longing to the Telegraph Service, mobile telephone,
internal radio communication, high-frequency communica-
tion over power lines etc.

§ 913 Commissioning installations

.1 Publication
To be decided in each case, necessary publication througr.
verbal information, notice-boards, advertising, etc.,
must be carried out before an installation is commissio-
ned .

.2 New installations
Before new installations are commissioned, examinations
must be carried out to ensure that they are in compliance
with regulations and that no danger to life and property·
may arise when the voltage is switched on.

§ 914 Accidents and fires

.1 Preparedness
In the case of power stations and other larger stations,
necessary preparedness must be arranged for in case of
fires and other catastrophies.

.2 First-aid
Necessary first-aid preparedness must be arranged for.

.3 Poster
In power stations and other large stations posters must
be exhibited in readily visible positions regarding
rules for assistance in the case of accidents caused
by electric current.

The rules must be approved by the NVE, Directorate of

Electricity.
 160

.4 Notification to the Electricity Inspectorate

Accidents caused by electric current must in each sepa-
rate case be notified to the Electricity Inspectorate
as soon as possible.

The same applies to larger damages to installations or

property caused by electricity.

§ 915 Tuition, training and instruction

The personnel must receive copies of these safety regu-
lations and instructions issued persuant thereto, as
well as necessary tuition, training and instruction
related to the safety regulations.

In power stations and other large stations, the safety ()

regulations as well as instructions issued in accordance
with these, must be readily accessible.

Oslo, 3 March 1978

By proxy
A. Johansen

I. Steine

n
 161

COMMUNICATION NO. 4/78

from the
NORWEGIAN WATER RESOURCES AND ELECTRICITY BOARD
DIRECTORATE OF ELECTRICITY

Common Nordic Regulations for Electrical

Installations in Prefabricated dwelling-
houses intended for exportation between
the Nordic Countries

During the last years, prefabricated dwelling-houses have to

some extent been exported from one Nordic country to another.
The electrical installations in these houses are often carried
out according to the regulations in force in the producing coun-
try. These regulations are not in all parts in compliance with
the regulations in force in the country receiving these houses.
This has created some problems, as the installations partly have
to undergo alterations according to the regulations in the vari-
ous countries after the houses have been erected.

Because of this fact, the Nordic committee for electrical safety

matters (NSS) has worked out common Nordic regulations in this
area.

In accordance with the above, the NVE, Directorate of Electricity,

has pursuant t o § 2 in the Act of 24 May 1929 relating to the
supervision of electrical installations and authorization of
6 October 1971 from the Ministry of Industry and Handicrafts,
laid down the following regulation:

NSS-recommandation No. 1/1976 regarding common Nordic

regulations for electrical installations in prefabri-
cated dwelling-houses may be used as regulations for
electrical installations in such houses.

0 The regulations enter into force on 1 April 1978.

The regulations will also enter into force in the other Nordic
countries from the date mentioned above.

The regulations are translated into Norwegian and may be obtained

from the NVE, Directorate of Electricity, P.O.Box 5091, Majorstua,
Oslo 3.

Oslo, 30 March 1978

By proxy
A. Johansen

I. Steine